Installation &
Maintenance
Manual
I&M
?
Introduction
I&M
?
I&M
?
Perfect Voice
Introduction
CONTENTS
WHAT IS PERFECT VOICE?.............................................................................................................................1
TERMS ...............................................................................................................................................................1
MODES OF OPERATION ..................................................................................................................................2
WHAT PERFECT VOICE CAN DO FOR CALLERS .........................................................................................2
WHAT PERFECT VOICE CAN DO FOR USERS ..............................................................................................3
OTHER FUNCTIONS .........................................................................................................................................3
I&M
?
I&M
?
Perfect Voice
Introduction
INTRODUCTION TO PERFECT VOICE
What is Perfect Voice?
Perfect Voice is a voice processing system which functions with the telephone system to enhance the
organization's overall telecommunications environment. Depending on the capabilities of the telephone
system, and how it and the Perfect Voice are configured, many productivity-enhancing functions are
available for Callers and Users. Perfect Voice can decrease the amount of time people in the
organization spend on the telephone. Just as important, Callers also spend less time on the telephone.
Perfect Voice is available 24 hours a day, seven days a week and 365 days a year to answer the
telephone. It can be programmed to do different things at different times, like at night or on weekends. It
can be programmed to answer different telephone lines with different messages. While most people are
limited to handling only one call at a time, Perfect Voice can process multiple calls simultaneously. It can
record messages from Callers for Users who are unavailable to take a call. It can allow Callers to select
pre-recorded messages which contain information about the organization. Perfect Voice also allows
Users to send the same message to a list of Users and it informs the User when a Caller has left a
message.
Terms
Understanding the meaning of the following terms is the first step to understanding Perfect Voice.
Caller . .... ..... .... .... An individual calling the company from an outside line.
User .. .... ..... .... .... An individual who is defined on Perfect Voice system.
User ID .... ..... .... .... A one- to eight-digit number assigned to each User. This is the number or
"extension" that a Caller enters to select a User. The User ID is often the
same number as the User's telephone system extension number.
personal greeting. .... The message heard by a Caller when the User he is trying to reach is not
available. This message is normally recorded by the User in his own voice. A
personal greeting might sound something like, "You've reached the voice
message box of Jack Phatt. Please leave a message after the tone...".
I&M
greeting ... ..... .... .... .....The recorded message heard by Callers after the system answers their
call (i.e. "Thank you for calling ABC Company...")
whattodo . ..... .... .... The recorded message heard by Callers immediately after the system plays
the greeting (i.e. "
?
Using your touch-tone phone, please enter the extension
of the person you wish to reach...").
audiotext.. ..... .... .... A message heard by a Caller after selecting certain options (i.e. "Our mailing
address is 543 Morton Avenue...").
automated attendant . .....A function of Perfect Voice in which Callers are transferred to a User's
extension after entering his User ID.
voice messaging.. .... .....A function of Perfect Voice in which messages are recorded for a User
or group of Users.
DTMF . .... ..... .... .... The tone generated by a push-button telephone when one of its keypad
digits is pressed.
default User.... .... .... .....The User to which a Caller is transferred if he does not enter any DTMF
digits.
distribution list .... .... .....A group of Users to whom a message can be easily sent or forwarded
by selecting a single number.
Directory assistance... ......Offers callers who do not know your User ID the option of "spelling out"
your name by pressing the telephone keys that correspond to your last
name.
1
Perfect Voice
Introduction
Modes of Operation
Primary Attendant
When Perfect Voice is configured as the primary attendant, a Caller who dials the company's main
telephone number is answered by Perfect Voice. A selection by the Caller results in their being
transferred to a User's extension. This is an automated attendant function of the Perfect Voice.
Secondary Attendant
When Perfect Voice is configured as the secondary attendant, a Caller who dials the company's main
telephone number is answered by a person. However, if the Caller dials a secondary or "back door"
telephone number, or if there is more call activity than the human attendant can handle, Perfect Voice
answers the call. A selection by the Caller results in a transfer to the User's extension. This is also an
automated attendant function of Perfect Voice.
Voice Messaging
In this mode, a call is directed to Perfect Voice, because the User is not available to take the call. Perfect
Voice then records a message for the User. This is the voice messaging function of Perfect Voice.
Audiotext
In this mode, a Caller's selection to Perfect Voice results in the playback of a pre-recorded message. The
Caller is not given the opportunity to leave a message. In other words, the Caller only hears a pre-
recorded message and does not leave a message. This is also referred to as an audio bulletin board.
Combination
For most sites, a combination of modes is used. For example, Perfect Voice can function as a secondary
attendant during normal business hours. After hours, the system might function as primary attendant,
since there is no human attendant. The same system might also have audiotext messages providing
information about the latest product offerings.
What Perfect Voice Can Do For Callers
Depending on the capabilities of the telephone system and how the voice system is configured, Perfect
I&M
Voice can perform a number of tasks to enhance a company's telecommunications environment for
Callers.
Answer an outside call and transfer the Caller to an extension within the company.
Answer an outside call and provide information by playing Caller-selected pre-recorded
?
messages.
Allow a Caller to leave a message for a User if the User is not available.
After a message is recorded, a Caller may be presented with options to send the message,
review the message, re-record the message, add to the message, or discard the message. The
Caller can also mark the message private, preventing the User from forwarding it to another
User, or urgent, placing this message ahead of others in playback.
Allow a Caller to select another User, in the event that the originally selected User is not
available.
Allow a Caller to hold and retry later if the User's extension is busy.
If a Caller is dialing from a rotary dial telephone or is not familiar with the system, Perfect Voice
can transfer the Caller to an operator.
If a Caller does not know the extension (User ID) of the person he wishes to reach, he can select
the directory assistance option (usually 411) and spell the name of the person, instead.
2
Perfect Voice
Introduction
What Perfect Voice Can Do For Users
Perfect Voice offers a large number of features for Users. The availability of some of these features
depends on the capabilities of the telephone system and how the voice system is configured.
Allow a User to record a personal greeting which Callers hear in the event the user is not
available to answer their call.
Inform a User that a new message has been recorded by lighting a message lamp, calling the
User, activating a digital pager, etc. Urgent messages may be notified separately of normal
delivery options.
Allow a User to listen to messages left by Callers or other Users.
If a message was not marked private, allow a User to forward it to another User (or group of
Users). The message can be forwarded with or without a prefix recording. The prefix might say
something like, "Joann, would you please take care of the problem that Mark is describing in the
following message."
Allow a User to set up a list of other Users to whom the same message can be easily sent or
forwarded.
If a User does not know the User ID of another User, the User can select the directory assistance
option (usually 411) and spell the name of the person, instead.
Other Functions
Perfect Voice can change the system greeting and whattodo based on the time of day and day of
week. For example, outside regular business hours, Perfect Voice might be configured to say
something like, "Thank you for calling ABC Company. Our regular business hours are Monday
through Friday from 8:00 AM till 5:00 PM..."
Perfect Voice provides reporting capabilities.
Perfect Voice may be configured, through the use of the Audioforms option, to question Callers
and record the Callers' responses.
Perfect Voice can function in multiple languages.
I&M
?
3
Installation
I&M
?
I&M
?
CONTENTS
BEFORE YOU BEGIN .................................................................................................................................................... 1
MANAGE THE CUSTOMER'S EXPECTATIONS ................................................................................................................. 1
USE ALL AVAILABLE EXPERTISE ................................................................................................................................. 1
GET ALL THE PARTIES INVOLVED ................................................................................................................................ 2
Perfect Voice FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS ................................................................................................................... 2
THE CUSTOMER'S TELEPHONE SYSTEM'S CAPABILITIES ............................................................................................. 2
DETERMINE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION......................................................................................................................... 2
PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS................................................................................................................... 3
INSTALLER REQUIREMENTS.......................................................................................................................................... 3
REQUIRED EQUIPMENT................................................................................................................................................. 3
EQUIPMENT FOR REMOTE ACCESS............................................................................................................................... 3
COMPLETE THE PRE-INSTALLATION WORKSHEETS...................................................................................... 4
SITE PREPARATION ..................................................................................................................................................... 4
SYSTEM PLACEMENT.................................................................................................................................................... 4
ELECTRICAL POWER REQUIREMENTS........................................................................................................................... 4
TELEPHONE SYSTEM CONNECTIONS............................................................................................................................. 4
INSTALLATION OF A NEW SYSTEM........................................................................................................................ 5
UNPACK AND INSPECT THE SYSTEM ............................................................................................................................. 5
ASSEMBLE THE SYSTEM ............................................................................................................................................... 6
VP4E II AUDIOBOARD CONNECTIONS ......................................................................................................................... 6
RHETOREX BOARD CONNECTIONS ............................................................................................................................... 6
PERFORM QUICK SETUP............................................................................................................................................ 7
TO ENTER QUICK SETUP:.............................................................................................................................................. 7
SOFTWARE UPGRADES/INSTALLATION ON EXISTING PLATFORM ............................................................ 8
INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................................................................. 8
* VERIFY CURRENT RELEASE FOR UPGRADE ............................................................................................................... 8
PLATFORM ASSUMPTIONS ............................................................................................................................................ 8
I&M
BEFORE YOU BEGIN ...................................................................................................................................................... 8
PRE-UPGRADE NOTES .................................................................................................................................................. 9
INFORM THE CUSTOMER OF THE SCHEDULE .................................................................................................................. 9
DIRECT CALLS AWAY FROM THE SYSTEM. .................................................................................................................... 9
?
BACK UP OF THE CURRENT SYSTEM ............................................................................................................................ 9
LOAD THE SOFTWARE FROM THE PRODUCT DISKETTES............................................................................................. 10
LOAD PRODUCT UPDATES .......................................................................................................................................... 10
POST UPGRADE CHANGES ...................................................................................................................................... 11
*POST UPGRADE CHANGES: IN RECEPTIONIST PARAMETERS................................................................................. 11
*POST UPGRADE CHANGES: IN RECEPTIONIST INSTANCE SETUP ........................................................................... 11
*POST UPGRADE CHANGES: IN RECEPTIONIST USER DIRECTORY.......................................................................... 13
*POST UPGRADE CHANGES: IN SYSTEM TELEPHONE SYSTEM ................................................................................ 14
*POST UPGRADE CHANGES: IN SYSTEM FAX SERVICES......................................................................................... 15
*POST UPGRADE CHANGES: PER-CHANNEL GREETINGS AND WHATTODOS ............................................................. 17
*POST UPGRADE CHANGES: BATCH FILES AND SET UTILITIES ................................................................................. 17
*POST UPGRADE CHANGES: OLD FILE VERSIONS ..................................................................................................... 17
PROGRAM THE TELEPHONE SYSTEM................................................................................................................. 18
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................................................................................... 18
SOFTWARE/PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS.............................................................................................................. 18
AUTOMATED ATTENDANT EXTENSIONS..................................................................................................................... 19
OUTDIAL NOTIFICATION EXTENSION ......................................................................................................................... 19
INTEGRATION PARAMETERS....................................................................................................................................... 19
BYPASS MODE............................................................................................................................................................ 20
OTHER MODIFICATIONS ............................................................................................................................................. 20
TRAINING.......................................................................................................................................................................21
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR TRAINING ..........................................................................................................................21
USER TRAINING ..........................................................................................................................................................21
CONSOLE OPERATOR TRAINING..................................................................................................................................21
FINAL CUTOVER..........................................................................................................................................................22
TELECO TECHNICAL SUPPORT..............................................................................................................................22
BEFORE CALLING TECHNICAL SUPPORT .....................................................................................................................22
I&M
?
Perfect Voice
Installation
BEFORE YOU BEGIN
This section of the Installation and Maintenance manual outlines a generalized procedure for installing a typical
Perfect Voice system. Only tasks that are commonly performed for most installations are covered in this section.
The purpose of this section is to provide an overview of the hardware installation process as a preliminary step to
configuration of the database, testing the system and end user training. A complete Perfect Voice installation will
include all of the following steps.
System assembly
Telephone system programming
Connection to the telephone system
Perfect Voice configuration
System Administrator training
End User training
Final cutover
Follow up
The following paragraphs contain a few suggestions for a successful installation.
MANAGE THE CUSTOMER'S EXPECTATIONS
The management of the customer's expectations begins with the salesperson's first contact with the customer and
continues through the entire installation and acceptance process. The best tools for managing the customers'
expectations are product knowledge and communication with the customer. A pre-installation meeting with the
customer that includes a detailed discussion of how the system will be configured should be held to help effect a
smooth transition.
Although the customer may be intimately familiar with the communications problems at his site, he may not know
much about how Perfect Voice can solve those problems. Armed with a thorough understanding of Perfect Voice's
capabilities and the customer's problems, the installer is the one in a position to engineer the best possible
I&M
telecommunications solution. If the installer allows the customer to engineer the solution, it may result in a partial
solution and possibly a solution that cannot be supported. If you are unfamiliar with the current release of Perfect
Voice, you should review the release notes that accompany this manual and, if necessary, review the other sections
as well to obtain more detailed information about the capabilities of the system.
?
USE ALL AVAILABLE EXPERTISE
If a customer brings up issues that are beyond the scope of your immediate expertise, confirm your speculations
about a solution before making a commitment. Refer to other expertise within your company, your Regional Sales
Manager or Teleco Technical Support for answers to any questions you may have about the product.
If you are not directly responsible for the telephone system to which the Perfect Voice will be interfacing, try to
coordinate directly with the interconnect in charge. The installation of Perfect Voice requires a great deal of
coordination between the programming of the telephone system and the configuration of Perfect Voice. The
interconnect in charge should have access to the telephone system manufacturer's technical support resources. No
matter who is responsible for the telephone system programming, make certain the customer's telephone system
can be configured properly to match the features desired by the customer on the Perfect Voice. Even the most basic
features of any voice processing system depend on the ability of the telephone system to be configured
appropriately.
1
Perfect Voice
Installation
GET ALL THE PARTIES INVOLVED
Although the person who makes the decision to implement Perfect Voice into his operation may take it seriously,
the individual responsible for actually implementing the solution may not. This individual may work as an
employee or may work as a contractor. It is important for everyone to recognize the significance of the changes to
their organization as a result of the efforts of all parties.
For many sites, especially those sites that have never had voice processing before, Perfect Voice will change the
way their business works, often in more ways than expected. A similar situation is evident when a business
purchases a computer system to do their accounting, replacing adding machines and hand-written ledgers with
spreadsheet software. Although many of the old problems will, by definition, disappear, new problems may arise,
especially if the technology is not handled properly or taken seriously.
Much of the success of any installation rests on the training and understanding of the key people in the
organization.
Perfect Voice FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS
In preparation for the pre-installation meeting with the customer, review the features of the current release of
Perfect Voice found in the Release Notes at the beginning of this manual. Each release of software has additional
features and functions from previous versions. Carefully review each section of this manual to obtain more detailed
information about the capabilities of the system. This review should relate to the features and the functions of the
customer's telephone system and the customer's expectations.
THE CUSTOMER'S TELEPHONE SYSTEM'S CAPABILITIES
Even though the Perfect Voice system has been shipped configured for the telephone system identified on the sales
order, the telephone system must be configured for proper interfacing with the Perfect Voice. For example, if the
telephone system is to be programmed to forward busy calls, some features of Perfect Voice cannot be used such as
Call Screening. Make sure your customer's telephone system can be configured properly to match the features
desired by the customer.
DETERMINE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
I&M
Based upon the discussions with the customer during the pre-installation meeting, determine the system
configuration. The worksheets in the Appendix are included to assist in the design of the system and are helpful in
gathering information during the pre-installation meeting with the customer.
?
2
Perfect Voice
Installation
PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
INSTALLER REQUIREMENTS
The installer plays a key role in the successful installation of the voice processing hardware and software. In
addition to performing the actual work of installing the product, the installer acts as a liaison between the customer,
telecommunications companies, and Teleco Technical Support. An installer is required to have skills and
experience in at least the basics of telephony and computer technology, including the following:
Perfect Voice Technical training certification.
Training and experience in at least the general concepts of telecommunications.
Expertise on the customer's telephone system or ready access to such expertise, including telephone
system documentation.
The ability to properly use analog telephone line monitoring equipment (see required equipment below)
and generate test calls to the system.
The ability to properly configure, install and remove circuit boards in a personal computer.
The ability to identify the basic components of a personal computer system, including the motherboard,
audioboard, video controller, etc.
A basic understanding of how to identify or specify a file in a DOS file system, specifically an
understanding of the meaning of a drive, directory, filename and extension.
REQUIRED EQUIPMENT
The installer must be equipped with the following tools to competently install Perfect Voice:
Analog telephone line monitoring device (butt set with digit grabber is preferred)
Analog telephone line splitter
Industry standard single line 2500 set (or butt set)
Basic tools (screwdriver, pliers, cutters, etc.)
Spare cables (modem, AC power, line cords, etc.)
I&M
Punch-down tool
Cable toner and amplifier
Formatted floppy disks
?
EQUIPMENT FOR REMOTE ACCESS
Much of the ongoing maintenance and changes to the system can be performed remotely. Using industry-standard
remote communications software, a technician can make changes to the system without being on site. To perform
these tasks remotely, the installer needs the following equipment:
A personal computer capable of running industry-standard remote communications software and
supporting a serial port or internal modem.
A modem capable of communicating at a speed of up to 14400 baud. The remote communications
software supplied with the Perfect Voice supports modems capable of transmission rates between 300 and
28800 baud. The default transmission rate is 19200 (which is the Hayes standard for 14400).
A modem is provided with all systems and sites without modem access are subject to denial of support services
from Teleco Technical Support.
3
Perfect Voice
Installation
COMPLETE THE PRE-INSTALLATION WORKSHEETS
Before beginning the installation of Perfect Voice, insure that the pre-installation worksheets provided in the
Appendix are completed. Filling out these worksheets will be helpful in setting up the system. They will also
assist you in answering the questions if you decide to perform Quick Setup.
SITE PREPARATION
SYSTEM PLACEMENT
The Perfect Voice system requires a stable horizontal surface, like any other computer system. A sturdy table is
ideal. Do not "temporarily" place the system somewhere it should not be. For example, Perfect Voice should never
be placed on top of an air conditioning unit, filing cabinet, or cardboard box.
As with any electronic equipment, the system's environment should be near room temperature, with no strong
fluctuations in temperature or humidity and well ventilated. Dust can also be a problem, especially on sites where
there is construction activity in the same area. If this is the case, remove Perfect Voice and clean the area before
reinstalling.
Radio frequency interference (RFI) is rarely a problem, but has been known to damage electronic equipment. Be
sure the system is not placed near any strong sources of RFI, especially power transformers or radio transmitting
equipment.
ELECTRICAL POWER REQUIREMENTS
The use of an uninterruptable power source (UPS) is strongly recommended. It significantly increases the life
expectancy of electronic equipment. The UPS should be supplied by a properly grounded, isolated circuit.
Be sure that no other equipment is using the same circuit, especially vending machines, microwave ovens, laser
printers, fax machines, copiers, or other devices that can cause or generate excessive current. This applies even if a
I&M
UPS will be used. An exception applies to the telephone system. If possible, make sure the telephone system uses
the same properly grounded, isolated power circuit.
TELEPHONE SYSTEM CONNECTIONS
?
Analog extension modular jacks (RJ-11 type for systems with VP4E II audioboards and RJ-14 type for Rhetorex
boards), capable of supporting single line telephone sets should be installed within 2 feet of Perfect Voice. One
single line extension is required for each Perfect Voice port. An additional single line extension or a dedicated CO
line is required for the modem connection. Label each extension jack clearly with its physical extension number
for future reference.
4
Perfect Voice
Installation
INSTALLATION OF A NEW SYSTEM
UNPACK AND INSPECT THE SYSTEM
Before unpacking, make certain that none of the shipping containers were damaged during shipment. Do not open
any damaged shipping containers. Contact your shipping agent for appropriate claims.
With your Perfect Voice system, you should receive the following:
Main system unit (PC) with Perfect Voice software already installed on the hard disk.
VP4E II or Rhetorex audioboard(s) installed in the main system (quantity based on order)
Installation and Maintenance manual
Quick Reference cards
User Guides
DOS software diskettes (preloaded on the hard drive)
Software key on hard disk or optional hardware key
Monitor and keyboard
Internal modem (installed in the main system)
AC power cable for main system unit
If you are using the SMDI integration option for certain telephone systems, you may also receive the following
items with your shipment:
Voice BridgeTM integration unit
Serial cable for connection between alternate COM port and Voice BridgeTM
RJ type cable for connection between telephone system and the Voice BridgeTM
AC power cable for Voice BridgeTM
Voice BridgeTM documentation
I&M
NOTE: International orders may receive a hardware key for certain features.
?
5
Perfect Voice
Installation
ASSEMBLE THE SYSTEM
Assemble the system and secure all connections. The appropriate cable connection points will be clearly labeled at
the back of the system. Do not power up the system until it is on a stable flat surface and all cables are securely and
properly connected. Please note that the line cords do not have to be connected before powering up the system;
they can be connected or disconnected at any time. Never attempt to move the system while it is powered up.
NOTE: If the audio board(s) installed do not match the programming of the software/hardware key, the
software will not function and an error will be displayed.
The following connections are identified by labels on the CPU:
Device
Connection Point(s)
3-conductor AC power cable
corresponding connection on the back of the system
at the power supply
surge-protected AC power source (UPS
recommended)
male 15-pin male display monitor cable female 15-pin video controller card
(card may also have female 25-pin connector)
3-conductor display monitor power
surge-protected AC power source or directly off
cable
back of system power supply
Keyboard cable
round connector at the back of the system off the
(if applicable)
motherboard
VP4E II AUDIOBOARD CONNECTIONS
Complete telephone system connections by plugging the line cords
into their corresponding RJ-11 jacks on the VP4E II audioboard.
The jacks are arranged in sequence with lowest line (channel)
Line 3
I&M
number starting at the bottom. Note that you must supply your own
2-conductor RJ-11 line cords.
Line 2
Line 1
?
Line 0
DIALOGIC & RHETOREX BOARD CONNECTIONS
Complete telephone system connections by plugging the line cords
into their corresponding RJ-14 jacks on the Rhetorex board. The
jacks are arranged in sequence with lowest port (channel) number
starting at the top. Note that you must supply your own 4-conductor
Line 0
RJ-14 line cords.
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
6
Perfect Voice
Installation
PERFORM QUICK SETUP
Quick Setup allows you to set up a basic Perfect Voice system. Quick Setup presents the steps for getting a
system "up and running". Filling out the pre-installation worksheets located in the Appendix may assist you in
responding to the questions presented in Quick Setup.
TO ENTER QUICK SETUP:
1. Type Screens at the DOS (C:\>) prompt:
To Enter Advanced Menus type: SCREENS
C:\>
2. At the Which Level? prompt, Press 0 and [Enter]
3. This places you into Quick Setup. Respond to the prompts to set up the system. You will not be allowed
access other SCREENS menu options at this level.
For more details on Quick Setup, refer to the System Configuration section of
this manual.
NOTE: If you exit Quick Setup after completing the System setup (telephone system setup, COM port
I&M
allocation,and Instance parameters), but before creating the User database, you will not be allowed to enter
Quick Setup at level 0 as shown above. To create the User database, enter at level 5 or above with a valid
password and select Quick!-Dialplan from the SCREENS menu.
?
STEPS OF QUICK SETUP
1. Enter number of audio channels and extension.numbers.
2. Set up the telephone system. All
telephone systems are pre-loaded;
however the "pop-up" menu displays
only 20 telephone systems.
You may scroll through and select one of these telephone systems from the pop-up
Home
menu by using the Home and End keys or the "arrow" keys on the keyboard.
If the correct telephone system is not listed in the pop-up menu, refer to the
Appendix for a complete listing of available telephone systems that work with
End
Perfect Voice. From the list, enter the corresponding "Quick Setup Code".
3. Allocate COM ports to SMDR, SMDI, and/or L.A.P.
4. Change Instance parameters (global system parameters).
5. Create the User database. The User database may be edited from Quick Setup or from logging into
SCREENS with a valid password.
7
Perfect Voice
Installation
SOFTWARE UPGRADES/INSTALLATION ON EXISTING PLATFORM
INTRODUCTION
This section should be reviewed only if you are upgrading an existing system or installing software on a pre-
existing platform. If you received a turnkey system, the software is already loaded on the hard disk and this section
may be ignored. If you are installing the software "from scratch" on a new platform, skip those sections with an
asterisk (*).
* VERIFY CURRENT RELEASE FOR UPGRADE
A software upgrade can be performed on any system running Perfect Voice release version 3.0 or later. The current
release version of a system may be determined in any one of three ways:
1. The version is displayed on the login window of SCREENS.
2. Type RCPTVER at any DOS prompt (for releases 3.1 and later).
3. Type DIR C:\RCPT\RCPT.EXE to check the file date and time of the file C:\RCPT\RCPT.EXE. After
executing this command, you will see a listing of the file and its associated date and time. The hour portion of
the file's time stamp represents the major release number and the minute represents the minor release number.
Perfect Voice can be upgraded for the following releases:
3:00 (Perfect Voice release 3.0)
4:00 (Perfect Voice release 4.0)
3:01 (Perfect Voice release 3.01 and 3.02)
4:10 (Perfect Voice release 4.1)
3:10 (Perfect Voice release 3.1)
4:20 (Perfect Voice release 4.2)
PLATFORM ASSUMPTIONS
Following is a list of platform requirements and recommendations for any system running Perfect Voice release
4.x:
I&M
80386 or higher processor required
At least 4 MB total system RAM required
MS DOS version 6.22 required
Hard drive partitioned with 40 MB on C: and the remainder on D:
?
Note that these are guidelines only. If the platform is not supplied by Teleco, matching these assumptions does not
guarantee that the system will function properly. There may be an incompatibility between any of the system
components and the Perfect Voice audioboard. Please refer to the Appendix for computer platform requirements. It
is always best to purchase a turnkey system and avoid any questions about platform compatibility.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN
Make absolutely sure you have reviewed and feel completely comfortable with the Release Notes at the front of this
manual before embarking on the upgrade. The upgrade process automatically upgrades and updates a number of
the system files; however, some changes may need to be performed manually. The amount of manual work depends
on the nature of customization previously done on the system.
8
Perfect Voice
Installation
PRE-UPGRADE NOTES
Before beginning the upgrade process, you need to make notes concerning the existing databases in the current
version for reference after the upgrade is completed.
Make note of any customized changes that have been made to the default batch files.
Make note of any customized changes that have been made to the Task Manager.
During the upgrade process, the software will prompt you for retention of current Notification Classes of
Service. If any customization has been done to the original default action strings, choose NOT to replace
the Classes of Service with the new versions.
INFORM THE CUSTOMER OF THE SCHEDULE
Supply the customer with a list of steps involved in the upgrade.
Inform Users well in advance of when the system will be down and back up.
Urge Users to clean out their mailboxes, which will:
Speed up backup and upgrade process
Free up disk space for backups
Limit the amount of lost information in the event of a hardware failure before backups are completed
Schedule training sessions for the Users to cover new features
DIRECT CALLS AWAY FROM THE SYSTEM.
An upgrade cannot be run on a system while it is processing calls. Direct calls to an alternate answering point and
shut down the system. Access the Task Manager in the Utilities menu to execute a graceful shut down of the
system.
BACK UP OF THE CURRENT SYSTEM
Although the upgrade process does a backup of the current software on the C drive to the D drive before beginning
the upgrade, a full backup of C and D drives may also be performed. The best way to back up a system is to tape. A
I&M
tape backup is usually more reliable than one written to floppy disks. If you use a tape backup that accesses the
system through the parallel port, be sure to remove the key from the system first. Some parallel port tape backup
units can permanently damage the hardware key. (If you are upgrading from a Release 4.2 system, you may
have a software key instead of a hardware key.)
?
In addition to a tape backup, a backup to floppy diskettes may be done by using MSBACKUP. The system will
alert you of the number of preformatted 3 1.44 diskettes that will be required. If problems are encountered with
the upgrade and you wish to return the system to the exact state it was in at shutdown, restoring from the backup
tape or floppy disks will restore the system to its original state.
Refer to "Backing Up the System" in the Advanced Administration section of this manual for more detailed
information on how to back up the system's files.
IMPORTANT: Any changes made to the system after the upgrade will not be reflected in the backup. This is true
for any backup regardless of whether an upgrade has been performed. Message counts are usually the first database
to become outdated. When a backup of C drive is restored:
Any new messages that have come in (since the backup) will not be accessible.
If messages had been deleted (since the backup), the time stamps for the deleted messages will be in the
restored database and the User will hear "unable to locate message contents".
For this reason the system should be thoroughly tested before bringing it on line. If for any reason you wish to
abandon the upgrade, the restore command will have you up and running on the old software in a very short amount
of time. Refer to "Backing Up the System: Restoring Backups" in the Advanced Administration section. A
complete backup of D drive will eliminate the inaccuracies with the message counts; however, it is not always
practical to backup messages.
9
Perfect Voice
Installation
LOAD THE SOFTWARE FROM THE PRODUCT DISKETTES
IMPORTANT
If you are upgrading the system and the system has a hardware key, leave
the hardware key in place during the upgrade. The upgrade process will
convert the hardware key to a software (disk) key.
After the upgrade is complete, you must remove the hardware key and
verify that the software key is working. If you do not remove the
hardware key, the system will shutdown in approximately 3 hours.
Insert the first Perfect Voice product diskette into the floppy drive and boot the system by pressing the RESET
button. When processing of the first diskette is complete, you will see a message on the display prompting you to
enter diskette number two.
Please insert disk number 2 and then press a key . . .
This prompt is accompanied by short repeating beeps from the PC speaker. The number of beeps corresponds to the
next diskette number to insert. For example, two beeps indicate that the system is ready for you to insert diskette
number two. You will be prompted for each successive diskette in this manner.
If you insert the wrong diskette, an error tone sounds and you are again prompted for the correct diskette with a
series of short beeps. For example, if you inserted diskette number three instead of diskette number two, the system
would sound an error tone followed by two beeps indicating that diskette number two is required.
You may be asked to answer some questions while the first and last diskettes are loading. For example, while the
last diskette is loading, you are asked to enter the correct time zone, identify your audioboard, and specify the type
I&M
of fax you are implementing. During processing of all other diskettes, you will not be prompted to answer any
questions.
It is possible to pause the upgrade/installation process by not inserting the next diskette in the sequence. When you
are ready to continue, insert the next diskette in the sequence and restart the system as you did for the first diskette.
?
Note that this can only be done after the system has prompted you to insert a diskette and before you actually insert
the diskette. Restarting or powering down the system while it is processing a product diskette can create major
problems.
LOAD PRODUCT UPDATES
The software contains seven system diskettes, nine speech file diskettes, and 1 phone system/configuration diskette
for new installs and upgrades. There may be one or more "Update" diskettes in addition to these standard software
product diskettes. The update disk provides you with an updated version of various Perfect Voice product files.
Follow the instructions on the update diskette to update the system with these files.
10
Perfect Voice
Installation
POST UPGRADE CHANGES
The following is a list of changes that must be performed manually after upgrading a Perfect Voice system from
previous versions.
You should check:
Receptionist: Instance Setup, User Directory, Parameters
System: Telephone System, Fax Services
Utilities: Remote Access
Per-channel greetings and Whattodos
Batch Files and Set Utilities
Old File Versions.
*POST UPGRADE CHANGES: IN RECEPTIONIST PARAMETERS
Screen 1 of 2
Virtual Channel Trace
IMPORTANT: Verify that Virtual Channel Trace is set to No. If not, trace messages
will output to the screen every few seconds.
*POST UPGRADE CHANGES: IN RECEPTIONIST INSTANCE SETUP
Normal Instance Records
Edit any existing Instances, paying special attention to the following fields:
Screen 2 of 4
Force Modem Answer
I&M
This field specifies the digits to be pressed to force modem answer.
Direct Fax Message
This field specifies the DTMF sequence that callers can press to leave (send) a Fax Document message for a
?
user. The Direct Fax Message code must be a numeric code; star [*] or pound [#] may not be used. You may
make this code a single digit provided no other dialplan codes or User IDs begin with the same digit. To
disable this feature, leave this field blank.
Direct LAP UserID
This field specifies the DTMF digits that callers can press to perform a L.A.P. page. To disable this feature,
leave this field blank.
Network Site Number
Be certain that the Network Site Number is entered for each Instance on the system.
11
Perfect Voice
Installation
Screen 3 of 4
Auto Play First Mesg?
If this field is set to "Y" (yes), when entering the Message Menu, the first message automatically plays.
Power Play New Messgs
If this field is set to "Y" (yes), power play of new messages begins when entering the Message Menu.
Play UserId If No Name?
This field specifies whether or not to play the User ID number if no name is recorded.
Direct Assist if No Name?
This field specifies whether or not to list this User ID in Directory Assistance if no name is recorded.
Direct Assist Prompt
This field selects which Directory Assistance prompt will be played when a caller or User selects Directory
Assistance. Valid values are 0-9. Selecting 0 will prompt for the last name, 1 will prompt for the first name, 2
will prompt for a directory entry and 3-9 are custom prompts.
Screen 4 of 4
DEFAULT MSG EXPIRATION
New Message Expiration
This field specifies the length of time a new (unheard or urgent) message will remain the User's mailbox
before it is automatically deleted. A pop-up menu lists the available options. This field may be specified in
business days (1b, 2b, etc.) which do not include Saturday and Sunday, days (1d, 2d, etc.), weeks (1w, 2w,
etc.) or months (1m, 2m, etc.) If the field in the User Directory record is set to 0, then this value will be used.
The value of blank means never delete. No warning or notice is provided to the owner, and deleted message
cannot be retrieved. Messages are deleted after midnight (00:00) of the day following expiration.
Sav Message Expiration
This field specifies the length of time after a saved (heard or old) message was last listened to before it will
automatically be deleted. The same values as described in New Message Expiration apply.
I&M
Lst Message Expiration
This field specifies the length of time after a distribution list message (urgent, new or saved) was placed in the
User's mailbox that it will automatically be deleted. The same values as described in New Message Expiration
apply.
?
Fax Message Expiration
This field specifies the length of time after a fax message (urgent, new or saved) was placed in the User's
mailbox that it will automatically be deleted. The same values as described in New Message Expiration apply.
Language Instance Records
This section applies to systems using multiple languages. Language is no longer just associated with a separate
speech path. Other Instance parameters can also be unique to a language. When a caller selects a Type L User, the
alternate Instance associated with the Type L User becomes the current Instance. All parameters associated with
this "Language Instance" go into effect except for those related to the dial plan. These include everything on
Screen 2 of the Receptionist Instance Setup. For example, the Direct Message code from the original Instance
still applies and the Direct Message code associated with the Language Instance is ignored. However, other
Instance parameters such as Default User, Speech Path and timing parameters are taken from the Language
Instance. If the Perfect Voice system is to support an additional language, an Instance record needs to be created
for it. Review the System Configuration section of this manual.
12
Perfect Voice
Installation
*POST UPGRADE CHANGES: IN RECEPTIONIST USER DIRECTORY
Review all User records, paying special attention to the following parameters:
Screen 1 of 4
Transfer Type
This field may now be set to "D" which causes Receptionist to get the appropriate value from the Telephone
System information database. See the note concerning DEFAULT TRANSFER TYPE in the Telephone
System section below.
Intelligent Queue?
This field allows Call Queuing to be set on a per User basis. The default action while queuing or holding
during busy can be either to take a message or to continue holding.
CAUTION: Setting the default to continue holding is NOT recommended unless the site has adequate trunk
supervision and hang up detection for Perfect Voice. Without these capabilities, there is a high likelihood that
channels may become stuck in the queuing state.
Beeper Pager ID
This field specifies the LAP pager ID code from 1 to 9999999 as marked on the pager. May also include code
for pager type and baud rate code. Leave blank to disable.
Voice Paging ID
This field specifies the extension number that is announced on the overhead paging system. Leave blank to
disable.
Screen 2 of 4
CarbonCopy ID
An additional copy of all caller messages left for the User will also be left for the User ID designated as the
Carbon Copy ID. Leave this field blank to disable Carbon Copy.
Mesg Pool ID
This field specifies where ALL messages left for this User will be placed. To disable Message Pooling, leave
this field blank.
I&M
Perform AGC Chk?
If this field is set to "Y", then AGC (Automatic Gain Control) volume adjustment will be performed on all new
messages for this User ID. Typically, this is set to "Y" for Users who retrieve messages via long distance calls
or Users who send network messages to other sites. Setting this field to "Y" requires that the AGC_TDD batch
file be entered into the Scheduler queue. The default for this field is "N". This value is checked when a
?
message is recorded, and changing this value will not affect existing messages. Refer to the System
Configuration and Advanced Administration sections of this manual for additional information on AGC and
scheduling.
Screen 3 of 4
Caller Mode Dial?
If this field is set to "Y" (yes), callers may direct dial this User ID from the greeting or whattodo. If set to "N"
(no), this User ID may only be accessed from User Mode (the User is not available from the greeting or
whattodo). The default is "Y".
COPY Prototype
If this field is set to "Y" (yes), this User ID will be included in the prototype list in the copy function. If set to
"N", this User ID will not show in the list but it may still be used.
DirNm Changeable?
This field specifies whether or not the User has the ability to change their directory assistance listing from
Quick Setup or User Setup.
AMIS SelNet ID [8]?
This field specifies whether or not the User has the ability to send and/or forward a message to a Network ID
and to add a Network ID to personal distribution lists. If Global AMIS is off, this field is not applicable.
13
Perfect Voice
Installation
*POST UPGRADE CHANGES: IN SYSTEM TELEPHONE SYSTEM
Edit the Telephone System parameters ensuring that values are supplied for the following fields:
Screen 1 of 3
TIMERS
Park Exten Wait
This field specifies the number of seconds to wait for an answer when supervising a call to a User whose Park
RNA seconds field is set to 0. If the User's Park RNA seconds field is set to a non-zero value, this field
is not used.
NOTE: It is extremely important to check the values for Screen 3 of the
Telephone System Parameters.
Screen 3 of 3
Intercom Dialtone
This field must have an "X" in it for Notify to function. Otherwise, Notify will not go off-hook before trying
to dial and this will cause Notify to "OFF" then "ON" hook without dialing.
Local Access prefix
This is the access code to be dialed to obtain Central Office dialtone. The default setting for new systems is
"9Z".
LDist Access prefix
This is the access code to be dialed to obtain Central Office dialtone for a long distance call. The default
setting for new systems is "9Z1".
LDist Access suffix
I&M
This is any code that must be dialed after a telephone number when making a long distance call. Normally this
would be an account code or a credit card number.
Intnl Access prefix
This is the access code to be dialed to obtain Central Office dialtone to place an international call. The default
?
setting is "9Z011".
Intnl Access suffix
This is any code that must be dialed after dialing an international telephone number. Usually this is an account
number or a credit card number which typically would contain one or two Z's used as pauses.
Message Waiting ON
This field specifies the dialstring used to activate a message waiting lamp on an extension of the telephone
system.
Message Waiting OFF
This field specifies the dialstring used to cancel a message waiting lamp on an extension of the telephone
system.
Call At Desk
This field defines the dialstring used to notify a User by calling their extension number. This must include the
`@' character which will be replaced with the extension number for any COS using $(L:DESK).
Overhead/PBX Paging
This field defines the dialstring to use overhead paging on the telephone system for Notification. This field is
used by any CPS using $(L:PAGE).
14
Perfect Voice
Installation
Park1 Call on Exten
This field specifies the code to park call at extension (used for local area paging LAP).
Park2 + Page on Exten
This field specifies the code to park and page call at extension (used for overhead paging). This is limited to
low volume applications since only one station at a time may access paging.
Park Busy Return
This field specifies the dialstring to return to caller if park is busy (recall).
Park Pickup/Answer
This field specifies the dialstring to pickup the parked call (answer).
Primary Serial Link
This specifies the primary SMDI type. Some telephone systems have two different SMDI types. For
example, Toshiba has a standard SMDI and a proprietary SMDI. During Quick Setup, if there is a primary
and/or alternate SMDI type, you will be given the option to set-up SMDI. If there is no primary or altenrate,
you do not get that option.
Alternate Serial Link
This specifies the secondary SMDI type. See above.
*POST UPGRADE CHANGES: IN SYSTEM FAX SERVICES
If the system has never used fax, the system will prompt for the following fields. It is recommended that these
fields be set to the default setting.
Description
This field should be used to describe the type of Fax boards in the Perfect Voice system.
Journaling?
The default setting is "Y". If this field is set to "Y", then Fax driver activity will be logged to a disk file. The
disk file is named D:\FAX_Cn.LOG where "n" is the fax channel number of 0 to 7. To VIEW this file, use the
function [F10] VIEW. NOTE: Since this file is not automatically deleted, do not leave journaling on
indefinitely.
I&M
Use Park/Pickup?
The default setting is "N". If this field is set to 'Y' (YES), then "SAME CALL" fax delivery will use the
telephone system PARK/PICKUP to transfer the call. Set to 'N' (NO) for call transfers (the default).
?
Note: the Class 1/Class 2 fax driver (using the remote access modem) requires this field to be 'Y' (YES).
FOD Max Retries
The default setting is 3. This field specifies the maximum number of retry attempts for Fax-on-Demand
callback delivery. Normally this is set to 3 (3tries). (A setting of 0 is the same as a setting of 1.)
To: prefix
The default value is "[". This field specifies the prefix used in the header information on a fax document. For
example, the left bracket ([) will appear before the extension number or User Name.
To: suffix
The default value is "]". This field specifies the suffix used in the header information on a fax document. For
example, the right bracket (]) will appear after the extension number or User Name.
To: TDD
The default value is "\TDD". This field specifies information that appears in the header of TDD fax
documents.
To: URGENT
The default value is "\URGENT". This field specifies information that appears in the header of fax documents
marked as Urgent.
To: PRIVATE
15
Perfect Voice
Installation
The default value is "\PRIVATE". This field specifies information that appears in the header of fax documents
marked as Private.
Fax Channels -- Extension
This field specifies the extension number, or numbers, on the telephone system the Fax board ports are
connected to. This data is used for same call send and upload.
CAS MPX TSR
This specifies the HEX MPX number for access to the CAS compatible Fax driver. Do not change this field
from the recommended values below except under the strict supervision of Teleco Technical Support.
CAS MPX TSR
Set to CB.
CAS MPX C#0
Set to CD.
CAS MPX C#1
Set to CE.
CAS MPX C#2
Set to CF.
CAS MPX C#3
Set to D0.
CAS MPX C#4
Set to D1.
CAS MPX C#5
Set to D2.
CAS MPX C#6
Set to D3.
CAS MPX C#7
Set to D4.
If the system is already using Fax, the FOD Max Retries field needs to be verified:
I&M
Screen 1 of 1
FOD Max Retries
?
This field is now user-configurable. It specifies the number of retry attempt for Fax-on-Demand callback
delivery. The recommended setting for this field is 3.
POST UPGRADE CHANGES: IN UTILITIES REMOTE ACCESS
When upgrading the system, the installation process sets the modem to COM 3, IRQ 5. Verify the following fields
for the system's modem.
COM Port Number
This field is used to select the PC COM port to be used for remote access. Pressing F10 in View Mode will
display the COM ports equipped on the PC. Systems shipped by Teleco are set for COM3.
IRQ Number
This field defines the IRQ number (2-5) assigned to the COM port. A value of 0 will select the default IRQ
(IRQ3 for COM2 and COM4, IRQ4 for COM1 and COM3). Normally, the IRQ is determined by the jumper
settings on the COM board in the PC. Systems shipped by Teleco are set for IRQ5.
16
Perfect Voice
Installation
*POST UPGRADE CHANGES: PER-CHANNEL GREETINGS AND WHATTODOS
The Channel database no longer has fields for a Greeting and Whattodo file. If the system was configured for
channel specific Greeting and/or Whattodo playback, the following changes have to be made:
Create a new Instance record by making an exact copy of the original Instance. Use the copy function
(F6) in Screens to do this.
Modify the new Instance record, setting the Greeting and Whattodo files names to that specified in the old
channel records.
For the channels that require a different Greeting and/or Whattodo, set the value of the Language Instance
field to the newly created Instance number.
*POST UPGRADE CHANGES: BATCH FILES AND SET UTILITIES
If changes have been made to the default batch files supplied in the previous version of Perfect Voice, the batch
files should be reviewed to ensure that the changes are still there and that they are compatible with Release 4.3 SET
Utilities. For example, SETCHAN.EXE no longer supports the \GREETING and \WHATTODO qualifiers. It
does, however, support the \TRACE qualifier along with many other new ones. Review the Advanced
Administration section of this manual.
*POST UPGRADE CHANGES: OLD FILE VERSIONS
The upgrade procedure copies most, if not all, important files from the original system to a directory on the hard
drive named D:\PRE43. If necessary, the old version of the files may be accessed here. Note that old database files
or executables should NOT be copied since they are not compatible with Release 4.3. Old and customized versions
of batch files can be referenced, but make sure the commands and their qualifiers are still valid. Contact Teleco
Technical Support about any questions regarding this process.
I&M
?
17
Perfect Voice
Installation
PROGRAM THE TELEPHONE SYSTEM
Perfect Voice interfaces and integrates with many telephone systems. Although the information in this section
applies to most installations, it should only be used as a general guideline. For specific information on any
telephone system, consult your Regional Sales Manager or Teleco Technical Support.
Telephone system programming should be performed in two stages.
1. In the first stage, the extensions for the automated attendant are programmed along with any other changes that
have a minimal impact on the operation of your customer's telecommunications (without automated attendant).
2. The second stage of changes is not performed until the Perfect Voice system has been fully configured and all
training is complete. This stage, often referred to as the cutover, is where you actually route and forward calls
to the automated attendant.
This section covers those tasks that should be performed in the first stage of telephone system programming. But
first, a brief list of telephone system requirements is noted.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Following is a list of the hardware capabilities required by a telephone system to work with Perfect Voice:
The telephone system must have the capacity of providing an analog port/extension for each port of the
Perfect Voice system.
The telephone system must have sufficient DTMF receiver channels to handle high traffic simultaneous
call transfers.
RJ-11 or RJ-14 telephone jacks must be installed within 2 feet of the Perfect Voice system. Perfect Voice
will interface to the telephone system by plugging a 2 conductor modular line cord into the RJ-11 or a 4
conductor modular line cord into the RJ-14.
A dedicated station or trunk port must be available for remote maintenance purposes.
SOFTWARE/PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS
Following is a list of the software capabilities required by a telephone system to work with Perfect Voice:
I&M
The telephone system must have the capability of programming the analog station ports/extensions for the
Perfect Voice system into a station hunt group.
Trunks must be able to be routed directly to the hunt group containing the Perfect Voice analog stations,
bypassing the console or main answering position.
?
Calls must be able to be transferred from an analog station by means of a switch hook and/or DTMF
access code and retrieved in a busy or unanswered state by means of a switch hook and/or DTMF access
code.
The telephone system must have the ability to bypass Perfect Voice during times when the Perfect Voice
system is brought down for maintenance. Typical bypass capabilities may be a selectable day/night mode
that sends incoming traffic to the Perfect Voice hunt group during the night mode. Traffic is sent directly
to the console or other in-house answering position when the day mode is selected.
Perfect Voice communicates through tone digits entered from the telephone keypad. It is necessary that
both analog and digital phones, including the console, on the telephone system provide or have access to
station-to-station signaling (DTMF generation).
18
Perfect Voice
Installation
AUTOMATED ATTENDANT EXTENSIONS
The automated attendant/voice messaging extensions are usually programmed into a hunt group or UCD group. If
Perfect Voice is configured as the primary attendant, incoming trunk calls are routed to this hunt group. If possible,
either include the console station as the last member of the hunt group or program calls to overflow to the console
station. This ensures the proper handling of calls during peak and service periods.
Automated attendant extensions should be programmed not to receive any call-waiting or camp-on tones. Often, a
Data Class of Service (for modems) is suitable for this purpose. Notify extensions also require this if "call at desk"
type of notification is used.
Automated attendant extensions require access to many DTMF receivers. A non-blocking situation is ideal. If
receivers are not already available, Perfect Voice cannot transfer the call. By default, the system is programmed to
check for dialtone before attempting to perform a call transfer. If no DTMF receivers are available at that time,
Perfect Voice informs the caller that all "circuits are busy" and to try their call again later.
In some configurations, Perfect Voice may perform supervised transfers. Make sure the transfer recall time and the
hold recall time (also referred to as call forward time, call coverage time, etc.) is programmed to be greater than
that configured for Perfect Voice to pull the call back (Xfer Exten Wait and Scrn Exten Wait in the
Telephone System Parameters and on an individual basis in the User Directory in the RNA seconds and Scrn
RNA seconds fields.)
OUTDIAL NOTIFICATION EXTENSION
All of the Perfect Voice extensions are usually responsible for answering calls, transferring calls, and recording
messages. The last channel of the Perfect Voice ports is also configured to perform outdialing for new message
notification. This channel is pre-configured as Notify + Rcpt which enables Notify to share the outdial functions
with the automated attendant functions.
Ensure that the Notify extension is configured with the appropriate outdial capabilities. Consider whether or not
notifications will be made via a long distance call. The trunk access codes required by the telephone system for
both local and long distance dialing must be entered in the Telephone System Parameters of the Perfect Voice
system. This port may also perform message lamp Notification and should be considered when configuring the
class of service for this port.
I&M
INTEGRATION PARAMETERS
If the telephone system supports integration, configure its parameters appropriately. If you aren't familiar with the
telephone system's integration capabilities, consult the manufacturer's documentation. If the Perfect Voice was
?
ordered with the proper information on the telephone system, it will be pre-configured for the appropriate type of
integration. The specific IBS integration digits that the Perfect Voice is expecting to receive from the telephone
system can be found in the Integration Setup submenu of the System menu.
The Perfect Voice audio driver configuration file may also have some useful information. The file is named
C:\RCPT\RCPT.CFG and is an ASCII text file. Use the Task Manager to edit it or type it to the screen.
19
Perfect Voice
Installation
BYPASS MODE
Every system should have a reliable method of bypassing the automated attendant. A common method for
bypassing Perfect Voice is to program (1) a night mode on the telephone system that routes calls to the Perfect
Voice hunt group, and (2) a day mode which routes calls to the human attendant. This method provides your
customer with a convenient method of bypassing Perfect Voice during periods of system maintenance. Night mode
is preferred for Perfect Voice operation, since many telephone systems automatically come back up in night mode
after an extended power outage.
Another method of bypassing Perfect Voice is to program each Perfect Voice extension to forward all calls to the
operator console. This may have to be done by plugging in a 2500 set into each extension and executing the call
forwarding code. Since call forwarding may interfere with the function of the hunt group, this and any other method
of bypassing Perfect Voice should be verified.
OTHER MODIFICATIONS
Some telephone system programming tasks should be delayed until other tasks are completed. Anything
considered as part of the "final cutover" should not be performed until the training of the System Administrator and
the End Users and any necessary modifications to the Perfect Voice configuration are completed. This includes at
least the following:
Forwarding stations to Perfect Voice.
Routing trunk calls to Perfect Voice.
Changing call coverage paths to Perfect Voice.
I&M
?
20
Perfect Voice
Installation
TRAINING
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR TRAINING
The System Administrator is the primary on-site contact. It is very important to ensure that this person feels
comfortable with both the administration of the system and its usage. Users will look to the System Administrator
as the person who knows the system's features and capabilities. Lack of a well trained, confident System
Administrator will result in overdependence upon the technical personnel of the installing dealer to perform system
administrative tasks. The best method for training the Administrator is to involve the person during the
configuration of the system. This will help with familiarization of the SCREENS interface as well as lending
assistance in determining certain system parameters. Every menu and submenu of the SCREENS interface should
be explained and the Administrator should feel comfortable with at least the following tasks:
Record main system greeting and whattodo
Add a new User to the system
Record audiotext announcements
Add special events to the scheduler (i.e., holidays, etc.)
Generate reports
USER TRAINING
The User is the most important person on every site. An untrained User community results in dissatisfaction and
frustration with the system. This, in turn, can lead to serious problems in getting the system accepted politically.
Since acceptance of the system, especially in the early stages of usage, is critical to its success, proper training is, in
many ways, just as important as the technical aspects of the installation.
During User training, the system should be fully functional, but not "on line" to outside callers. User training
sessions should be scheduled to include a step by step instruction on the features of the system using the Quick
Reference Cards as a guideline. Users should be encouraged to make copies of the card for their home and desk
area and to carry the card with them at all times. Ideally, the Users should be given a day or two after their training
sessions to familiarize themselves with the features before final cut over. This time may be used to send messages
to each other, record personal greetings, etc. Although Quick Setup takes most Users through the process of
I&M
activating their message box, all Users should be able to perform at least the following tasks in order to benefit
from the system:
Select a personal greeting
?
Record a personal greeting
Listen to messages
Delete messages
Send a message to another User
Forward a message to another User
CONSOLE OPERATOR TRAINING
The console operator plays a crucial role in many telecommunications environments. The console operator should
be comfortable with at least the following tasks:
Transfer a caller to Perfect Voice (main greeting)
Transfer a caller to a User's message box
Quickly leave a message for a User if a caller does not want to use the system
Explain the basic operation of the system to a caller (i.e., "....enter the person's extension...")
21
Perfect Voice
Installation
FINAL CUTOVER
After Perfect Voice and the telephone system are configured, any necessary modifications to the configuration have
been completed and the System Administrator and Users have been fully trained, the final cutover can be
performed.
Whether the system will be used as a primary, secondary or overflow attendant, CO lines may now be routed to
Perfect Voice. Users' extensions may now be forwarded to the Perfect Voice.
Close contact needs to be kept with the site during this crucial period so that anything that was overlooked during
the installation can be quickly taken care of. The console operator and the System Administrator are especially
good sources of information during this period about how the system is functioning and how well it is being
accepted the Users and the caller community.
TELECO TECHNICAL SUPPORT
Teleco is committed to providing you with the best support in the industry. Every authorized dealer is entitled to
free technical support. For assistance, call between 8:30 A.M. and 8:30 P.M. Eastern Time, Monday through
Friday (Technical Support will be unavailable from 12:30-1:30 PM Eastern Time on these days.). Extended pager
service is available for emergencies only from 8:30 A.M. until 8:30 PM Eastern Time on Saturday and Sunday. In
either case, a Technical Support Engineer is available during these time periods to assist with any problems.
The assistance provided by Teleco Technical Support is significantly enhanced when you participate in the
troubleshooting process. In some cases, Teleco Technical Support will not be able to provide any help without on-
site assistance. Unless you are specifically told otherwise, do not expect Teleco Technical Support to take care of
the problem without your participation.
BEFORE CALLING TECHNICAL SUPPORT
Before calling Teleco Technical Support, ensure the following:
Make sure the problem which is being reported can be reproduced.
If the problem is intermittent, try to determine if the problem is traffic or port related.
Make sure all cable connections are secure.
I&M
To expedite a solution to the problem, gather the following information about the site:
Perfect Voice version number as indicated on the SCREENS login screen.
The number of ports.
?
Telephone system manufacturer, model and software version.
Original installation date of system.
Any recent changes to the telephone system or the Perfect Voice system.
Procedure for accessing the modem (i.e. telephone system extension number, User ID, etc.)
Extension numbers of the Perfect Voice ports (this should already be in Channel Configuration database)
If you are an authorized dealer, technical support on Perfect Voice and other voice processing products may be
obtained by calling 1-800-755-1552. As a certified technician, you will have been furnished with a dealer code and
a personal PIN to access the tech support department queue. Support for other Teleco products can be obtained by
calling 864-297-4401 (fax: 864-297-9983). Please note that systems with no modem access are subject to a denial
of support services.
If you are not an authorized dealer, or if you do not meet the minimum requirements for free technical support, you
may purchase a block of support time. Call 864-297-4401, and select extension 280 for pricing and terms.
22
System
Configuration
I&M
?
I&M
?
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
CONTENTS
SCREENS INTERFACE..................................................................................... 1
ACCESSING SCREENS.................................................................................................... 1
SCREENS MENU BASICS ................................................................................................... 3
BROWSE SCREEN BASICS................................................................................................. 6
VIEW MODE BASICS.......................................................................................................... 8
EDIT MODE BASICS ........................................................................................................ 10
POP-UP MENUS ............................................................................................................. 11
ADD MODE BASICS......................................................................................................... 12
COPY MODE BASICS....................................................................................................... 14
RECEPTIONIST................................................................................................ 15
USER DIRECTORY........................................................................................................... 16
INSTANCE SETUP............................................................................................................ 33
MESSAGE INFORMATION.................................................................................................. 41
NETWORK SITES ............................................................................................................ 44
LIST MANAGEMENT......................................................................................................... 52
PARAMETERS................................................................................................................. 53
ACTIVITY INFORMATION................................................................................................... 58
NOTIFY .......................................................................................................... 60
NOTIFICATION................................................................................................................. 61
CLASS OF SERVICE ........................................................................................................ 63
SCHEDULES ................................................................................................................... 71
PARAMETERS................................................................................................................. 73
AUDIO ........................................................................................................... 75
I&M
MONITOR ....................................................................................................................... 76
AUDIOBOARD ................................................................................................................. 86
SPEECH EDIT ................................................................................................................. 88
?
BOARD TEST.................................................................................................................. 97
SYSTEM ...................................................................................................... 98
CHANNELS ..................................................................................................................... 99
TELEPHONE SYSTEM .................................................................................................... 102
IMPORTING AND EXPORTING TELEPHONE SYSTEMS......................................................... 109
INTEGRATION ............................................................................................................... 112
SERIAL SERVICES......................................................................................................... 123
FAX SERVICES ............................................................................................................. 128
OUTBOUND CALLING .................................................................................................... 130
HARDWARE KEY........................................................................................................... 133
UTILITIES .................................................................................................. 134
TASK MANAGER ........................................................................................................... 135
SCHEDULER ................................................................................................................. 143
REMOTE ACCESS ......................................................................................................... 146
TERMINAL ACCESS ....................................................................................................... 150
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
SET PASSWORD ...........................................................................................................153
DATE TIME ...................................................................................................................155
TEXT FILE EDIT.............................................................................................................156
TEXT FILE BROWSE ......................................................................................................156
QUICK!........................................................................................................ 157
SYSTEM .......................................................................................................................158
DIALPLAN.....................................................................................................................167
I&M
?
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
SCREENS INTERFACE
SCREENS is a program which provides an easy to use, menu-driven utility that controls the voice processing
system and how it will function. Each main menu option offers submenu options from the pull-down menus. The
six main menu options are:
RECEPTIONIST
NOTIFY
AUDIO
SYSTEM
UTILITIES
QUICK
This section of the Installation and Maintenance manual describes the programs and fields that may be accessed
through the SCREENS interface. Within the explanation and description of each menu item is information on how
each application links to the other applications, how each application functions, a description of each field of each
menu option and suggestions on how to configure the system. While configuring the system, keep in mind those
items that will customize the Perfect Voice system for the customer's needs.
ACCESSING SCREENS
To access the SCREENS program, from any DOS prompt, simply type the word SCREENS as shown in the
example below. It is not necessary to be in the root directory of the C: drive as shown in the example. The
SCREENS command can be executed from any DOS prompt as long as the system has started normally.
To enter Advanced Menus type: SCREENS
C:\> SCREENS
After executing the command, the system display monitor will appear as below. The "Sessions" count indicates
I&M
the total number of times anyone has accessed SCREENS. This total applies to all levels of access.
?
1
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
At the "WHICH LEVEL?:" prompt, enter the desired access level as explained below and press Enter.
The "WHICH LEVEL?:" prompt is replaced with one prompting for the "PASSWORD:". Enter the password
associated with the access level as explained below and press Enter.
SCREENS offers multiple levels of control and access. Each access level has its own password. Anyone with access
at a given level can change the password for that level. In general, lower numbered access levels offer less control
and higher numbered access levels offer more control. Access levels other than 3, 4, and 5 are reserved and are
generally not used by anyone other than Technical Support. The access levels applicable to this manual are
summarized below. Note that, for security reasons, no level of access allows you to view a User's password.
Access
Default
Typically
Level Password Accessed By...
Access Examples
0
Installer
allows Quick Setup of Perfect Voice
I&M
2
VIEWONLY
Assistant
allows only view mode of screens
3
OPERATOR
Supervisor
allows addition of User records to the system
does not allow viewing of message file names
?
or deletion of messages
does not allow changes in System screens
4
MANAGER
System
allows addition of User records to the system
Administrator
allows viewing of message file names and
deletion of messages
allows changes to the dialplan
does not allow changes in System screens
5
PLEASE
Installer
allows addition of User records to the system
allows viewing of message file names or
deletion of messages
allows changes in System screens
6
TASKS
Installer
allows Task Manager functions to be
modified
allows changes to file and message paths
2
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
SCREENS MENU BASICS
After successfully logging into the SCREENS program (at any level other than level 0), the Main Menu is
displayed. (If you log in at level 0, you only have access to the Quick! menu.) This is the first of many available
menus. In reference to the menus, the following points are worth noting.
All submenus have four modes: BROWSE, VIEW,ADD or EDIT.
The Esc key will return to the previous menu. Since the Main Menu is the first menu encountered when
logging into SCREENS, it naturally follows that it is the last screen before logging out.
NOTE: If not enough memory is available when logging into SCREENS, Notify will automatically be
removed from memory. When logging out of SCREENS, Notify will be loaded back into memory. If a
message does not appear that Notify has reloaded automatically, type the command NTFYSSTRT from
any DOS prompt.
A function key summary appears in the lower portion of the display. The most important function key to
remember is the one for Help, F1. The definitions of many function keys are consistent throughout all parts
of SCREENS. For example, F1 always means Help for the currently selected option.
An option can be selected by moving to the option with the arrow keys until it is highlighted and pressing
Enter, or by pressing the letter indicated with the option.
A short description of the currently selected option appears in the highlight line just above the function key
summary. Often, the meaning of the currently selected option can be determined by reading this short
description.
I&M
?
3
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
MAIN MENU OPTIONS
Key Name
Meaning
R
RECEPTIONIST
This selection accesses the Receptionist Menu, from which
automated attendant/voice messaging system functions are
managed.
N
NOTIFY
This selection accesses the Notify Menu, from which new
message notification functions are managed.
A
AUDIO
This selection accesses the Audio Menu, from which board
functions are managed and monitored and speech files are
edited.
S
SYSTEM
This selection accesses the System Menu, from which system-
wide parameters such as the channel configuration, telephone
system setup, integration and fax delivery parameters are
managed.
U
UTILITIES
This selection accesses the Utilities Menu, from which
miscellaneous system functions, such as the scheduler and
remote access are managed.
Q
QUICK!
This selection accesses Quick Setup, from which the basic
setup of the system may be performed.
I&M
?
4
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
RECEPTIONIST MENU OPTIONS
Key
Name Meaning
D
USER DIRECTORY
Browse the User ID records. Select this option to add a
User to the system or change an existing User's settings.
I
INSTANCE SETUP
Browse Perfect Voice's Instance Setup (Global)
I&M
parameters.
M
MESSAGE
Browse Users' Message Information.
INFORMATION
?
N
NETWORK SITES
Browse the Network Sites identified on the system.
L
LIST MANAGEMENT
Browse a summary of all distribution lists on the system.
P
PARAMETERS
Enable, Disable, or View trace and journal files.
A
ACTIVITY
View current call count and statistical activity on the
INFORMATION
Perfect Voice system.
5
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
BROWSE SCREEN BASICS
After selecting the submenu User Directory from the Receptionist Menu, a Browse screen is displayed containing a
listing of the User records with only limited, summary, information displayed for each record. This is just one of
many types of Browse screens throughout the SCREENS program. Following is what the Browse screen for the
User Directory might look like.
I&M
The following points are worth noting about Browse screens.
The word, "BROWSE" appears in the upper right portion of the display, indicating that this is a Browse
list as opposed to a VIEW, EDIT or ADD screen.
?
The title of the menu appears in the upper middle portion of the display. For this case, it is "USER
DIRECTORY."
The previous Menu level is shown in the upper left portion of the display.
A function key summary appears in the lower portion of the display. Refer to the following table for a
complete function key summary.
6
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
BROWSE SCREEN FUNCTION KEYS
Key
Name
Description
F1
Help
Display help text about what information is displayed
for each record as well as functions in Browse mode.
F2
Add
Add a new record (i.e. a new User) to the database.
F3
Delete
Delete the currently highlighted record (i.e. a User who
is no longer with your company).
F4
Edit
Edit (change the parameters of) the currently
highlighted record.
F5
Find
Locate a specific record.
F6
Copy
Create a new record or block of records. Use the
currently highlighted record as the default template.
F7
Cut
Delete a record or block of records.
F8
Undo
Replace the previously Deleted record from this session
and go into Add mode for a new record.
F9
Zoom
Remove function key icons from the bottom of the
display, which allows the display of more records at a
time. Pressing F9 again will return icon options.
F10
F10 toggles between screens. It is dependent upon the
currently-displayed screen.
F11
F11 toggles between screens. It is dependent upon the
currently-displayed screen.
I&M
F12
F12 toggles between screens. It is dependent upon the
currently-displayed screen.
Esc
Quit
Exit Browse mode and return to the previous menu
?
screen.
Page Down
Next
Browse the next set of records and highlight the first
one of that set.
Page Up
Previous
Browse the previous set of records and highlight the
first one of the set.
Ctrl-Page
Last
Browse the last set of records, highlighting the very last
Down
record in that set.
Ctrl-Page Up
First
Browse the first set of records, highlighting the very
first record in that set.
Home
Top
Highlight the first record in the current display.
End
Bottom
Highlight the last record in the current display.
Enter
Select
View the currently highlighted record.
7
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
VIEW MODE BASICS
If Enter is pressed while highlighting a User ID record, the screen changes to the View mode of that specific
record. From View mode, more details about the record are displayed. Multiple screens may be required to display
all the information. For example, a User ID record has four screens of information available from View mode.
Following is an example of the View mode for the record associated with User ID 950:
I&M
The following points are worth noting about View mode.
The word, "VIEW" appears in the upper right portion of the display, indicating that this is View mode as
opposed to a BROWSE,EDIT or ADD screen.
If more than one screen is required for View mode, the current screen number in relation to the total number
?
of screens for this record is indicated in the upper left part of the display.
The title of the menu is displayed in the upper middle portion of the screen. For this case, it is "USER
DIRECTORY."
A function key summary appears in the lower portion of the display. Refer to the following table for a
complete function key summary.
8
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
VIEW MODE FUNCTION KEYS
Key
Name
Description
F1
Help
Display help text about the meanings of each of the record
parameters as well as the functions available in View mode.
F2
Add
Add a new record (i.e. a new User) to the database.
F3
Delete
Delete the currently displayed record (i.e. a User who is no longer
with your company).
F4
Edit
Edit (change the parameters of) the currently displayed record.
F5
Find
Locate a specific record.
F6
Copy
Create a new record or block of records. Use the currently displayed
record as the default template.
F7
Cut
Delete a record or block of records.
F8
Undo
Replace the previously Deleted record from this session and go into
Add mode for a new record.
F10
F10 toggles between screens. It is dependent upon the currently-
displayed screen.
F11
F11 toggles between screens. It is dependent upon the currently-
displayed screen.
F12
F12 toggles between screens. It is dependent upon the currently-
displayed screen.
Esc
Quit
Exit View mode and return to the previous Browse screen.
I&M
Page Down
Next
View the next record. If this is the last record, view the first record.
Page Up Previous
View the previous record. If this is the first record, view the last
?
record.
Ctrl-Page Down
Last
View the last record.
Ctrl-Page Up
First
View the first record.
Home
Top
Highlight the first record in the current display.
End
Bottom
Highlight the last record in the current display.
Enter
More
View the next screen for the currently displayed record, or, if the
current screen is the last screen, view the first screen of the next
record.
9
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
EDIT MODE BASICS
At times, it is necessary to change the parameters associated with a particular record. This process is known as
editing the record. To edit a record, press F4 while in View mode on the desired record. Or, press F4 after
highlighting the desired record from a Browse screen.
Edit mode has a similar appearance to View mode, especially if using a monochrome monitor. The most notable
difference is that specific fields are accessible inside the screen to change displayed parameter fields. Depending
upon the access level, certain fields may or may not be changeable. Field specific help for the most of the fields that
can be edited may be accessed by highlighting the field and pressing F1.
Multiple screens may be required to access all the information in a record. For example, a User ID record has three
screens of information that can be changed from Edit mode. The following display is what appears when entering
Edit mode for the record associated with User ID 950. Note that the User Name field is highlighted, indicating the
record is in Edit mode and will allow modification.
I&M
?
The following points are worth noting about Edit mode.
The word, "EDIT" appears in the upper right portion of the display, indicating that this is Edit mode (as
opposed to BROWSE,ADD or VIEW screen.
If more than one screen is required for Edit mode, the current screen number in relation to the total number
of screens for this record is indicated in the upper left part of the display.
The title of the menu appears in the upper middle portion of the display. For this case, it is "USER
DIRECTORY."
A function key summary appears in the lower portion of the display. Refer to the following table for a
complete function key summary.
10
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
EDIT MODE FUNCTION KEYS
Key
Name
Description
F1
Help
Display help text about the currently highlighted field.
This is an important function when editing.
F4
Keys
Provide help on functions which are available while in
Edit mode.
F10
Save
Save current changes and return to VIEW mode.
Esc
Quit
Exit Edit mode and return to the previous screen without
saving any changes. A confirmation of this action is
required.
Page Down
Next
Save current changes and Edit the next record. If this is
the last record, Edit the first record.
Page Up
Previous
Save current changes and Edit the previous record. If
this is the first record, Edit the last record.
Ctrl-Page
SameNext
Works just like Page Up, except that the position on
Down
the next record is the currently highlighted field.
Ctrl-Page Up
SamePrev
Works just like Page Down, except that the position on
the previous record is the currently highlighted field.
Enter
Accept
Accept the current field settings and move to the next
field. If this is the last editable field, save the changes to
the current record and Edit the next record.
I&M
POP-UP MENUS
While editing some fields, a pop-up menu is displayed indicating the possible choices for the field. For example,
?
when editing the Transfer Type field for a User ID record, a pop-up menu of the possible options is displayed. The
following is an example of such a pop-up menu.
To select an item from the pop-up menu, press Home or End until the appropriate item is highlighted. Then press
Enter or an arrow key to move to the next field in the record. In the example above, to change the Transfer Type
from "Supervise" to "Blind Xfer", the End key would be pressed twice to highlight the blind transfer choice. When
the proper choice is displayed, press Enter. Some selections may be entered directly if the appropriate value is
known. In the above example above, the "H" key could be pressed to enable blind transfers on this record.
11
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
ADD MODE BASICS
There are three methods for adding a record to a database: the Add mode, Copy command, and Quick Setup copy
mode. The preferred method is to use the Copy command (F6) and then to customize the new record as required.
The advantage of this method is based upon the assumption that the pre-existing record has already been set up and
functioning properly. To learn more about using the Copy function, see the Copy Mode Basics section.
The Add function is available from both Browse and View modes. When the Add function (F2) is selected, Perfect
Voice prompts you to select the User Type for the new record.
After select the User Type, Perfect Voice immediately enters into Edit mode on the new record. Default field values
for the new record are based on the User's Instance Setup Parameters.
Multiple screens may be required to access all the information in a record. For example, a User ID record has up to
three screens of information that needs to be completed in Add mode. The following is a display of what appears
when Add mode is first accessed.
I&M
?
Note that the Instance, User ID, and User Type fields can only be edited while in Add mode. These fields are not
accessible while in Edit mode. Add mode functions very much like Edit mode. The following table is a summary of
the Add mode function keys.
12
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
ADD MODE FUNCTION KEYS
Key
Name
Description
F1
Help
Display help text about the currently highlighted field.
This is an important when defining a field.
F4
Keys
Provide help on functions which are available while in
Add mode.
F10
Save
Save current changes. The notification pop-up is
displayed.
Esc
Quit
Exit Add mode and return to the previous screen
without saving any changes. A confirmation this choice
is required.
Page Down
Next
Save the newly configured record and Add another new
record.
Page Up
Previous
Save the newly configured record and Add another new
record.
Ctrl-Page
SameNext
Not applicable
Down
Ctrl-Page Up
SamePrev
Not applicable
Enter
Accept
Accept the current field settings and move to the next
field. If this is the last field that can be edited, save the
changes to the newly configured record and Add
another new record.
I&M
?
13
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
COPY MODE BASICS
As mentioned earlier, there are three methods for adding a new record to a database. Use of the Add function (F2)
was discussed in the previous paragraphs. The following paragraphs discuss the use of the Copy function (F6).
The Copy function is simpler to use than the Add function because a "Full Feature Extn User", a "Limited Feature
Extn User", a "Mailbox Only User (Full)", a "Limited Mailbox Only User" and "Audiotext User" have already
been configured in the Perfect Voice database. These User records are simply template records in the database and
exist solely to aid in the creation of new Users. Every new system has, by default, a Full Feature Extn User record
associated with User ID 950. If this does not conflict with the system's dialing plan, it may be used as a template
for adding new User ID records to the User Directory database. If User ID 950 conflicts with the dialing plan of the
system, use the Copy function to create a Full Feature Extn User record that does not conflict.
Example: Create a User ID record for extension 200 using the Copy command:
First, highlight the Full Feature Etxn User's record while in Browse mode in the User Directory as shown below.
Press F6 to activate the Copy function. A window will appear in the middle of the display screen similar to the
following:
I&M
?
Note the Full Feature Extn User ID in the COPY FROM - User ID field. Ranges of Users may be created by
entering the first User ID to create in the COPY TO - First User ID field and entering the last User ID to create
in the Last User ID field. In this example only a single User ID is being added. Therefore, these fields are
identical as noted below:
After completing the Copy operation, edit the new User ID record. Define those fields that are unique to the new
User (i.e. User name, directory name, etc.). For more information on creating new User ID records and defining the
fields in the User record, refer to the Receptionist / User Directory which follows this section.
14
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
RECEPTIONIST
This section of the Installation and Maintenance manual details all aspects of the software in reference to the
Receptionist application. The Receptionist application of the Perfect Voice Release 4.3 software is comprised of
the Receptionist Instances, the User database, current message information for each of the Users, definitions of the
AMIS sites on the system, information on the list owners and the members of each list on the system, and
information on system call activity.
I&M
?
15
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
USER DIRECTORY
The Perfect Voice is a User ID-based call processing system. The User Directory of Receptionist identifies each
User on the system and the parameters that govern how the User ID will function. Prior to adding Users to the
database, the Instance Setup parameters must be defined so that each User added to the system will assume the
defaults selected in the Instance Setup Parameters.
To assist in the creation of the User database, six User templates exist in the default database. These templates
should be used with the copy command (F6) to create the database. These Users should be edited prior to using
the copy command to ensure that all the Users are created with the appropriate parameters. The six Users
are:
950 (Full Feature Extn User)
This User exists only to provide a template for adding standard Users. When
adding a large group of mailboxes, use this User as a starting point for the copy.
951 (Limited Feature Extn User) This is a limited version of the Full Feature Extension User in that only one
personal greeting is allowed and the User has no access to lists, delivery options
or advanced messaging. This type of User is one that has only the basic voice
messaging needs of receiving and sending messages.
952 (Mailbox Only User (Full) This User exists only to provide a template for adding mailbox only Users. This
User ID will not perform any transfers.
953 (Limited Mailbox Only User) This is a limited version of the Mailbox Only User (Full) in that only one
personal greeting is allowed and the User has no access to lists, delivery options
or advanced messaging. This type of User is one that has only the basic voice
messaging needs of receiving and sending messages.
I&M
954 (Audiotext User)
This User exists only to provide a template for adding audiotext Users. This
User ID will not perform any transfers or take any messages.
?
955 (Transfer Only User)
This User exists only to provide a template for adding transfer-only mailboxes.
These mailboxes cannot receive messages.
956 (T Box Template)
This User exists only to provide a template for adding Single Digit Menus.
957 (Hospitality User)
This User exists only to provide a template for adding Hospitality Users. This
User is designed for the resort, hotel or motel environment.
958 (CoProcessor Fax Test User) This User exists only to provide a template for testing Fax-on-Demand
documents.
959 (Class 2 Fax Test User)
This User exists only to provide a template for testing Fax-on-Demand
documents.
16
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
Refer to the field descriptions that follow to define the parameters for each of these pre-defined Users on the
system, then use the Copy command (F6) to create the User database.
USE THE USER DIRECTORY SCREEN TO:
Add a new User to the system.
Remove a User from the system.
Change a User's automated attendant and voice messaging settings.
View a User's message summary information and notification status.
TO ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS
Select RECEPTIONIST
Select USER DIRECTORY
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
I&M
?
Instance
This field specifies the Instance to which this User belongs. This must be an existing Instance number. This
field can only be specified when adding a new record. It cannot be edited after the record has been created.
User ID
This field specifies the one to eight digit number used by callers and other Users to access this User. For
example, this is the "extension" that callers enter to reach this User. Valid ranges for this field range from 0 to
99,999,999. This field can only be specified when adding a new record. It cannot be edited after the record has
been created.
17
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
User Type
This field describes the basic configuration of this User record. Note that for some User Types, certain fields
are meaningless and are therefore, not accessible. The valid User Types are described below:
U Normal User or Audiotext (fixed language) This is your normal, or standard, type User. This User
type is normally associated with a person in an organization, including those who only use the
automated attendant (transfer only) or voice messaging (i.e., guest mailboxes) functions.
D Audiotext (current language) This User type is used to define an audiotext User ID. Note that the
audiotext speech file resides in the current Instance speech path. This means that the audiotext can
automatically track any caller-selected language changes. Changing the audiotext speech can be as
simple as recording the personal greeting for the type D User.
F Fax on Demand Document (current language) This is a Fax-On-Demand User. Selecting a type F
User delivers a specific FAX document to a caller. For additional information, refer to the System
Administration section of this manual.
A Alias ID This specifies an "Alias" type User. Callers or Users who enter an Alias User ID are
processed exactly as if they entered the Alternate ID field associated with the Alias User ID record.
I
IVR Gateway to Application (Channel Sharing) Selecting a type I User causes control of the
channel to be taken over by another application. This is used when setting up an Audioforms
application.
T Single Digit Menu Items Single Digit Menu Options are allowed to be defined from this User. The
second screen of this User type defines which specific DTMF digits are linked to which specific User
ID. For additional information on how to create single digit menu options, refer to the System
Administration section of this manual.
B Broadcast ID (Public List) or Custom Recording This User type is used to define a public
broadcast distribution list. When a User sends or forwards a message to this User (Message
Management options 5 and 6), the message is actually sent to all Users on the type B User's private
distribution list 0. A type B User exists solely to provide a mechanism for Users on the system to
broadcast messages to a group of other Users without having to maintain their own private distribution
list. Examples of public distribution lists include "everyone in Sales." The System Administrator is
I&M
responsible for maintaining the list when necessary (i.e., staffing changes in the Sales department).
Note that callers can never select a type B User as the destination for a message.
N Branch to another Instance (Menu Trees) Selection of a type N User changes the call's Instance
parameters to those specified in the Alternate Instance field of the type N User record. This results
?
in a replacement of all Instance parameters, including the dialing plan and language parameters. Refer
to the Alternate ID field description for more information.
L Change Language Selection of a type L User changes only the language parameters (system prompts
and audiotext) without changing the dialing plan parameters. The new language parameters are loaded
from the Instance specified in the Alternate Instance field of the type L User record.
GENERAL SETUP
User Name
As the name implies, this field normally specifies the name of the User. It is not a required field, except for
reporting purposes.
Department
As the name implies, this field normally specifies the department associated with the User. It is not a required
field, except for reporting purposes and departmental distribution list creation.
18
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
Directory Name
This field is used to compose the directory assistance "number", used in name searches. This can be letters A-Z
(case insensitive) or numbers 0-9. If letters are used, they are converted to numbers in the Directory Num
field. The name should match system configuration of first or last name preferences directory.
Directory Num
This field indicates the numeric sequence associated with the Directory Name field spelling or the directory
assistance listing specified by the User during Quick Setup or User Setup. This field cannot be modified
directly from SCREENS, but can be modified indirectly by entering information into the Directory Name
field. Likewise, this field can be specified directly from Quick Setup or User Setup. The letters are translated
into numeric digits as follows.
These
...translate to
These
...translate to These
...translate to
letters...
letters...
letters...
Q,Z
1
G,H,I
4
P,R,S
7
A,B,C
2
J,K,L
5
T,U,V
8
D,E,F
3
M,N,O
6
W,X,Y
9
NOTE: If multiple matches are found, a list of user choices will be presented.
Coverage Type
This field specifies the type of call coverage for this User. A User can be configured for one of three basic
types of call coverage: none, personal assistant, or automatic call coverage. Personal Assistance (manual call
coverage) allows callers to select a personal assistant. From the personal greeting the caller can enter a
programmable access code (typically "1") to obtain additional assistance. Typically this is a secretary or co-
worker set up as a Type U User ID, but it can be set to any type of User ID. If the personal assistant is not
available, a system message is played instead of re-playing the personal greeting. Only one personal assistant
can be configured per User ID. Up to three coverage points can be configured. The primary coverage point is
specified in the Alternate ID field. The secondary and tertiary coverage points are defined in the More
Coverage fields. In the event that the end of the chain is reached with no answer, the original User ID's
personal greeting will play and the message is placed in the original User ID's mailbox. Automatic Call
Coverage can be configured to take action if Call Blocking is Enabled, if a call to it returns Busy, or if a call to
it is Ring No Answer. Personal assistant and automatic call coverage require supervised transfers.
I&M
Alternate ID
The meaning of this field depends on the User type, although when used, it almost always indicates a User ID.
The meaning of the field for each User type is summarized below. For User types D,L,B, and I, this field has
?
no meaning.
U This field specifies the primary coverage point if any sort of call coverage is enabled. If personal
assistant coverage is enabled for this User, this field specifies the User ID of the personal assistant. If
automatic call coverage is enabled, this field specifies the first coverage point. If no coverage is
enabled, this field is ignored for type U Users.
A This field specifies the User ID to assume when the original User ID is entered. For example, consider
the case where User 123 is a type A User with the Alternate ID set to 456. If a caller enters 123, the
call is processed exactly as if the caller entered 456. This is a required field for type A Users.
N This field specifies how the call is processed just after a caller selects the type N User. All new
Instance parameters, including language and dialing plan parameters, go into effect when this User is
selected. Based on the information in this field, the call is then placed into one of three possible
settings.
Field is blank:
The new Instance greeting.
Field contains an asterisk (*):
The new Instance whattodo.
Field contains a User ID:
The new Instance and the User ID are assumed.
19
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
More Coverage
This is actually a pair of fields that only applies to type U Users with automatic call coverage enabled. The first
field specifies the User ID associated with the second coverage point and the second field specifies the User ID
associated with the third coverage point.
Alternate Instance
The meaning of this field depends on the User type and, when it is used, always indicates an Instance number.
For User types D,A,B, and I, this field has no meaning.
U This field indicates the Instance from which language parameters will be loaded when a caller selects
the User ID. This enables the User to be associated with a language that is different from that of the
current Instance. The alternate language goes into effect for any cases where the User ID is entered
from caller mode, including automated attendant, integration, logging in, etc.
N This field specifies the Instance from which all parameters will be loaded when a caller selects the
User ID. This results in a complete change in Instance parameters, including dialing plan and language
parameters.
L This field specifies the Instance from which only language parameters will be loaded. After the type L
User is selected, the new language parameters go into effect and the call is placed into the whattodo.
End Call After?
This field specifies whether or not to override the Instance default value of Endcall?. If this field is set to 'D'
(DEFAULT), the instance default is used. If it is set to 'A' (ASK), then the caller will be asked if they wish to
continue this call. If set to 'Y' (YES) then the call will be terminated. If set to 'N' (NO) then the call will return
to the WHATTODO prompt.
I&M
?
20
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
AUTO ATTENDANT
Extension
This field specifies the physical extension or dialstring for this User ID. This is usually identical to the user's
physical extension number (the actual telephone system extension number). This is what gets substituted for
the "@" in the Line Parameter database dialstrings. It is also used by NOTIFY to perform "Notify Desk" or
"Message Waiting lamp", with the variable $(UDT:EXTENSION). For some applications, more complex
dialstrings may be used. In particular, dialstrings that perform switch-hook flash ("S") or hang-up ("H").
To perform a blind transfer, DO NOT use the old style of appending a YH to the extension. Instead, set the
TRANSFER TYPE to H.
The following are the dialstring characters used by Perfect Voice:
Character
Meaning
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, *, 0, #, A,
These specify the corresponding DTMF.
B, C, D
X
This specifies a 55 ms pause
Y
This specifies a 500 ms (1/2 second) pause
Z
This specifies a 1 second pause
P
This causes a switch to pulse dialing. No actual dialing is performed
until the next dialing character is received. For example, to pulse dial
456, specify P456 as the dialstring.
T
This causes a switch to DTMF tone dialing. No actual dialing is
performed until the next dialing character is received. For example, to
tone dial 456, specify T456 as the dialstring. Note that by default,
Perfect Voice dials DTMF tones. This dialstring character should only
be used if pulse dialing was previously done.
S
This specifies a switch-hook. The time of the switch-hook is specified in
the driver configuration file with the FLASHTIME command in terms of I&M
55 ms clock ticks. The resulting switch-hook time is precise to within +0
and -55 ms.
E
This specifies a high precision switch-hook whose timing is 110 ms and
is precise to within +4 ms.
?
F
This specifies a high precision switch-hook whose timing is 500 ms and
is precise to within +4 ms.
G
This specifies a high precision switch-hook whose timing is 750 ms and
is precise to within +4 ms.
Q
This causes Perfect Voice to immediately go on-hook.
H
This specifies a hang up.
21
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
Transfer Type
This field specifies the type of transfer used by the automated attendant when directing calls to this User. The
available transfer types include the following:
D Use the default transfer type specified in the Telephone System Setup database.
A Supervise all calls.
B Supervise only calls where a busy signal is detected. All other calls are treated as a blind transfer.
H Blind transfer all calls.
T Partially supervise calls using call progress tones. Only a DTMF tone will release call.
P Use the setting specified in the Telephone System Setup database. (Used for L.A.P.)
V Used for overhead paging and for optional call park location (phone system dependent).
Note that the transfer type setting is not used under certain circumstances. For example, if Call-Screening is
enabled, transfer type A is assumed. Also, if the letters H or Q appears anywhere in the extension field, a blind
transfer will result, even if Call-Screening is enabled.
Extension Owner?
This field specifies whether or not the ITF packet matches by extension [P/Q] or User ID [M/N]. If set to 'Y'
(YES), then an Integration ITF pattern that uses the "p" or "q" feature (search by extension first), will check
this User ID record during the extension search. If a match is not found, then a User ID search will be
performed. Set this is 'N' (NO) to exclude this extension number from the search.
In other words, set this to 'Y' (YES) if this User ID has exclusive ownership of the specified extension and
should be included in User ID searches by extension, otherwise set this to 'N' (NO).
Blocking Enabled?
This field specifies the current state of the Call Blocking feature for this User ID. If 'Y' (YES) then Call
Blocking is ON (Enabled), no calls will be placed to the extension, and all attempted transfers will be
immediately treated as Ring-No-Answer. This field must be 'Y' (YES) if the extension field is blank. The
value 'N' (NO) means that Call Blocking is OFF (Disabled) and call transfers will be attempted to the extension.
An asterisk indicates that this setting may be changed from User Mode. Some Notification Classes of Service
I&M
also check this field.
ScreeningEnabled?
This field specifies the current state of the Call Screening feature for this User ID. If 'Y' (YES) the Call
Screening feature is ON (Enabled), Callers will be asked to leave their name, and the called extension will be
?
presented with the Call Screening Menu when they answer. The value 'N' (NO) means that Call Screening is
OFF (Disabled), and normal call transfers will be used. An asterisk indicates that this setting may be changed
from User Mode. Note: Call Screening will ONLY be performed if Call Blocking is OFF (Disabled), and the
Transfer Type is "A" (Supervise for Answer) or "T" (Supervise for DTMF Tone).
XFER RNA seconds
This field specifies the number of seconds Perfect Voice will ring a telephone on a supervised transfer before
returning to the calling party. If left blank, the default value from Telephone System Parameters menu will be
used. This field only applies to non-screened calls and transfer types A and T.
SCRN RNA seconds
This field specifies the number of seconds Perfect Voice will ring a telephone on a screened transfer before
returning to the calling party. If left blank, the default value from Telephone System Parameters menu will be
used. This field only applies to calls using call screening and transfer types A and T.
22
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
RNA goes to Busy
This field specifies how to handle a call in the event that this User's extension is Ring-No-Answer (the Answer
Time-out expires). This field only applies to TRANSFER TYPE "A" and TYPE "T" Users. If this field is set
to 'N' (NO), then the caller will hear the current personal greeting. This is the Default setting. If this field is set
to 'Y' (YES), then the caller is placed into the BUSY state and the caller will hear a message identical to that
which would result from the detection of a busy signal. This is useful for call queuing applications. Note, the
caller will never hear a personal greeting unless Call Blocking is activated.
Intelligent Que?
This field determines the action to be taken if an extension is determined to be BUSY. The available settings
are:
N (No Queue)
No Intelligent Queuing is used for this User. Take message on Timeout.
M (Que/GMesg)
Intelligent Queuing for multiple telephones is enabled. If queued callers do not
select an option from the Queuing menu, the default action is to take a message.
H (Que/GHold!)
Intelligent Queuing for multiple telephones is enabled. If queued callers do not
select an option from the Queuing menu, the default action is to continue
holding.
X (Que/SMesg)
Intelligent Queuing for a single telephone is enabled. If queued callers do not
select an option from the Queuing menu, the default action is to take a message.
S (Que/SHold!)
Intelligent Queuing for a single telephone is enabled. If queued callers do not
select an option from the Queuing menu, the default action is to continue
holding.
CAUTION: Setting the value of this field to H or S can cause channels to remain off-hook after callers
"give up" and disconnect. Do not use this setting without CO supervised disconnect and a telephone
system that reliably sends disconnect to Perfect Voice.
NOTE: The Intelligent queuing OPTIONS M, H, X, and S require a call TRANSFER type of "A"=Full
Supervision, "B"=Busy Supervision, or "T"=DTMF Tone Supervision.
I&M
Announce Call?
This field specifies whether or not calls are announced to the person answering a supervised call from Perfect
Voice. The person answering the call hears, "Call for..." followed by the name of the User selected by the
?
caller. Enabling this feature slows the call transfer process, but may be useful if more than one User shares the
same telephone extension.
Beeper Pager ID
This field specifies the Local Area Paging (L.A.P.) pager ID code from 1 to 9999999 as marked on the pager.
May also include code for pager type and baud rate code. Leave blank to disable. Refer to the Optional
Applications section for more information on L.A.P.
Voice Paging ID
This field specifies the extension number that is announced on the overhead paging system. Leave blank to
disable.
23
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED)
PERSONAL GREETING
Number Allowed
This field specifies the maximum number of personal greetings that the User may select or record from Call
Management Option 4. The default is 2, the maximum is 9. If set to 2, the User can select (rotate through)
0=System default, 1=personal #1 (.UV1), or 2=personal #2 (.UV2).
Current Selection
This field indicates the currently selected personal greeting number. 0 indicates system default greeting, 1-9
indicate a custom greeting. This field is NOT limited by Number Allowed. An Asterisk indicates that the
User may change this value from User Mode.
Maximum Length
This field specifies the maximum number of seconds a User is allowed to record for each personal greeting.
Block DTMF?
I&M
If this field is set to "Y", receptionist will ignore ALL DTMF entered by a caller while the personal greeting of
this User is playing. If set to "N", normal DTMF detection is enabled during the personal greeting. The
default is "N".
?
MISC SETUP
Statistics Level
This field controls the level of statistics (call count) maintained for this User.
0= use the Instance default
1= no statistics
2= basic statistics
3= all statistics
Note: Generating more statistics means more disk I/O and a slower functioning and responding system.
Name Recorded?
This field specifies whether the name file has been recorded for this User ID. If set to 'Y' (YES), the system will
try to play the recorded name for this User ID in "You Have Selected" prompts. If set to 'N' (NO), the system
plays the User ID number. This field automatically changes to YES when the User records his/her name. (The
username recording is kept in the Dialplan Instance message path; the file name is the User ID padded with
leading zeros to 8 digits, and the extension is .NAM)
Fax Callback Num:
This field specifies the default number to be used for Fax Mail callback options [2] and [3].
24
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
Fax Callback Mode:
This field indicates whether the Fax Mail callback number is domestic or international.
Application or ID:
This field specifies the default Fax Mail identification number for options [2] and [3].
IVR Data or EMAIL:
For type "U" User IDs this is used for special notification applications. For EMAIL notification this is the
EMAIL address for this User ID.
MESSAGE RECORDING
Caller VoiceMsgs?
This field specifies whether callers are allowed to leave messages for this User. If set to N, this User may still
receive messages from other Users on the system (see Message Limit, below).
Maximum Seconds
This field specifies the maximum number or seconds that an outside caller is allowed to record when leaving a
message for this User. If this field is blank, then the value specified in Receptionist: Instance Setup for the
current Instance is used.
Caller FAX Msgs?
This field specifies whether or not callers will be allowed to leave a fax message for this user. This only applies
to outside callers (those NOT in usermode). To completely DISABLE messaging for this user, you must set
MESSAGE COUNT to 0.
CarbonCopy ID
This field specifies the User ID that automatically receives a copy of each caller message for this User. Only
caller messages that are not marked private are copied to the Carbon Copy User ID; no internal messages that
are sent or forwarded to this User from another User are copied. A prefix alerting destination User ID of
intended User ID is attached. If this field is blank, the feature is disabled. To enable, set this to the ID of the
message box to receive a copy. This can either be a local User ID (User Type U or I) or a remote Network ID
(nnnnnn#sss). Local User IDs are in the range 0 to 99999999, and must be User Type U or I, with pooling
I&M
disabled. Remote Network IDs are of the form "nnnnnn#sss", where "nnnnnn" is the remote mailbox number in
the range 0 to 999999, and "sss" is the remote Site number in the range 1 to 999. Messages can only be
delivered to a remote Network ID if Networking is enabled, the site is defined, and calls to this site are enabled.
Carbon Copy is useful for situations where a message needs to be copied to a supervisor, archive message box,
?
or multiple sites.
Mesg Pool ID
This field specifies the User ID that is to receive all messages recorded for this User ID, including all internal
messages that are sent or forwarded from another User. To enable message pooling, set this to the ID of the
message box to receive all messages. This can either be a local User ID or a remote Network ID. Local User
IDs are in the range 0 to 99999999, and must be User Type U or I, with pooling disabled. Remote Network IDs
are of the form "nnnnnn#sss", where "nnnnnn" is the remote mailbox number in the range 0 to 999999, and
"sss" is the remote Site number in the range 1 to 999. Messages can only be delivered to a remote Network ID
if Networking is enabled, the site is defined, and calls to this site are enabled. If Message Pooling is enabled,
then this User will NEVER have messages, and will not be able to access MESSAGE MENU from User Mode.
Also, message pooling can ONLY be enabled if this User has no messages (message box is empty). Message
Pooling is useful for situations where a User owns more than one User ID. In these situations, the User can
have messages from all but one of the User IDs pooled to a single User ID (at a single site). This simplifies the
retrieval of messages from multiple User IDs.
Messages if New User?
This field defines whether a User who is still in New User state may receive messages.
25
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
Message Limit
This field specifies the maximum number of messages this User is allowed to have at one time. The maximum
allowable is 2000 messages. If this field is blank, the value is that defined in the Instance Setup parameters. Set
this field to 0 to disable ALL messaging for this User ID. Note: If Message Pooling is enabled, then this field
is ignored. If the Pooling ID is a local User ID, then the Message Limit for the Pooling ID is used.
Notify Enabled
This field specifies whether notification is enabled for this User. Note that this User must also have a
Notification Event Record in order for the notification feature to function. Note: If Message Pooling is enabled,
then this field is ignored. If the Pooling ID is a local User ID, then the Notify Enabled value for the
Pooling ID is used.
Perform AGC Chk?
If this field is set to "Y", then AGC (Automatic Gain Control) volume adjustment will be performed on all new
messages for this User ID. Typically, this is set to "Y" for Users who retrieve messages via long distance calls
or Users who send network messages to other sites. Setting this field to "Y" requires that the AGC_TDD batch
file be entered into the Scheduler queue. The default for this field is "N". This value is checked when a
message is recorded, and changing this value will not affect existing messages. Refer to the System
Configuration and Advanced Administration sections of this manual for additional information on AGC and
scheduling.
Perform TDD Chk?
If this field is set to "Y", then the system performs a TDD check and enhancement on all new message for this
User ID. This is typically used for all Users who send or receive TDD messages. The default for this field is
"N". This value is checked when a new message is recorded. Changing this parameter will not affect any
existing messages. Setting this field to "Y" requires that the AGC_TDD batch file be entered into the
Scheduler queue.
New Msg Expiration
This field specifies the length of time a new (unheard or urgent) message will remain the User's mailbox before
it is automatically deleted. A pop-up menu lists the available options. This field may be specified in business
I&M
days (1b, 2b, etc.) which do not include Saturday and Sunday, days (1d, 2d, etc.), weeks (1w, 2w, etc.) or
months (1m, 2m, etc.) If this field is set to 0, then the value entered in Instance Setup is used. The value of
blank means never delete. No warning or notice is provided to the owner, and deleted message cannot be
retrieved. Messages are deleted after midnight (00:00) of the day following expiration.
?
Sav Msg Expiration
This field specifies the length of time after a saved (heard or old) message was last listened to before it will
automatically be deleted. The same values as described in New Message Expiration apply.
Lst Msg Expiration
This field specifies the length of time after a distribution list message (urgent, new or saved) was placed in the
User's mailbox that it will automatically be deleted. The same values as described in New Message Expiration
apply.
FAX Msg Expiration
This field specifies the length of time after a fax message was placed in the User's mailbox that it will
automatically be deleted from the system. The same values as described in New Message Expiration apply.
26
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED)
Login Password
This field specifies the password for this User. By default, the password for a new User matches the User ID.
The password can be any numeric value from 1 to 99,999,999. Although SCREENS will not display the
password, the System Administrator can change it when necessary. Passwords are only valid with type U, T, I,
F, B, and D User IDs.
LGI Action Type
Specifies action to be taken on ITF integration type LGI. Refer to System, Integration Setup for definitions of
the available options when Perfect Voice receives an internal direct call from a User.
Login Start Menu
When the User logs in to the system, this is the first menu heard.
Caller Mode Dial?
I&M
If this field is set to "Y" (yes), callers may direct dial this User ID from the greeting or whattodo. If set to "N"
(no), this User ID may only be accessed from User Mode (the User is not available from the greeting or
whattodo). The default is "Y".
?
COPY Prototype
If this field is set to "Y" (yes), this User ID will be included in the prototype list in the copy function. If set to
"N", this User ID will not show in the list but it may still be used.
USERMODE OPTIONS
New User Menus?
If this field is "Y", then force the User into Quick Setup after login until Quick Setup is complete.
[1] Mesg Menu
If this field is set to "Y", then this User is allowed access to the Message Menu.
[2] Call Menu
If this field is set to "Y", then this User is allowed access to the Call Menu.
[3] List Menu
If this field is set to "Y", then this User is allowed access to the List Menu.
[4] Notify Menu
If this field is set to "Y", then this User is allowed access to the Notify Menu.
[5] Setup Menu
If this field is set to "Y", then this User is allowed access to the Setup Menu.
27
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
[7] Quick Menu
If this field is set to "Y", then this User is allowed access to the Quick Setup Menu.
[8] Admin Menu
If this field is set to "Y", then this User is allowed access to the Administration Menu.
MESSAGE MENU
Playback LIFO?
This field specifies the order in which messages are played back to the User in Message Management. If set to
"Y", the messages are played back in last-in-first-out order. If set to "N", the messages are played back in
chronological order.
Advanced Msg Opt?
This field defines a User's access to advanced messaging options. If set to "Y", then the User is allowed
advanced options from the Message Menu. The default value is "Y".
Send/Fwd/Rev Opt?
If this field is "Y", then the User is allowed to use the forward, send, and review message features in Message
Menu. The default value is "Y".
Send/Fwrd Bcast?
This field specifies whether the User will be allowed to send a message and/or forward a message to a List.
The default value is "Y".
Msg Delivery Opt?
This field defines the User's access to the message delivery options of private, certified, urgent and future
delivery. The default value is "Y".
ADM Reset Enable?
This field specifies whether or not this User ID can have both its password and all default values reset from the
System Administration menu.
I&M
Announce EMAIL?
If the value of this field is set to "Y", an E-Mail address is set and MHS Mail is enabled and the system will
check for new E-Mail when the User accesses Message Management. If new E-Mail messages exist, the system
?
will play E-Mail announcements.
Fax [1]Same Call?
If the value of this field is set to "Y" (YES), Same Call Fax document delivery is enabled. Enter "N" (NO) to
disable menu prompt and option [1].
Fax [2]Call Doms?
If the value of this field is set to "Y"(YES), Domestic (same country only) Call Back Fax document delivery is
enabled. Enter "N" (NO) to disable menu prompt and option [2].
Fax [3]Call Intl?
If the value of this field is set to "Y"(YES), International (same or different country) Call Back Fax document
delivery is enabled. Enter "N" (NO) to disable menu prompt and option [3].
CALL MENU -
[2]Call Block Op?
This field specifies whether or not the User has the ability to change the call blocking (do-not-disturb) setting
from Call Management.
28
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
[3]Call Screen Op?
This field specifies whether or not the User has the ability to change the screening setting from Call
Management.
[4]PerGrt Select?
If this field is set to "Y", then the User may change the personal greeting selection using options [4] or [7].
[6] [7] [8] Options?
If the value of this field is set to "Y", then the User may directly select which personal greeting they wish to use
[7] or record [8].
SETUP OPTIONS
DirNm Change?
This field specifies whether or not the User will be allowed to change the Directory Num field from Quick
Setup or User Setup.
AMIS SelNet ID [8]?
If the value of this field is set to "Y", then the User will be allowed to send or forward a message to a Network
ID and to add a Network ID to personal distribution lists. If System Administration is allowed for this User,
then the User may record Network names also. The default value for the field is "Y".
Change Extn Num?
Setting this field to "Y" allows the extension number to be changed via the telephone.
DURING VIEW MODE ONLY
I&M
?
These fields are only available while viewing a User ID (View Mode).
USER MESSAGE INFORMATION SUMMARY
New User Setup Complete?
This field specifies if the User has made through the Quick Setup program.
Voice Messages in mailbox
This field indicates the current number of messages for this User.
29
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
Notification Status
This field indicates the current status of Notification for this User ID. The possible states are:
Disabled
No notification will be attempted.
New
Notification is enabled for this User ID, but the User has not yet been notified.
Idle
Notification is enabled for this User ID, but there are no new messages.
Active
Notification is enabled for this User ID and notification attempts are in progress.
Start Date
This field indicates the date and time that the User was created or the call count for this User ID was set to 0.
Call Count
This field indicates the number of times this User ID was selected by callers. The value after the / is the number
of full days since the call count was set to 0.
Total Logins (Sessions)
This field indicates the number of times this User successfully logged in to User Mode.
Total Login Time (Seconds)
This field indicates the total number of seconds that this User was in User Mode.
Total Messages from Callers
This field indicates the total number of caller messages received by this User.
Total Messages from Users
This field indicates the total number of internal messages received from other Users.
Last Message Number Used:
This field indicates the last message number used by this User. The number may be from 1 to 9,999.
DISTRIBUTION LISTS
Private List #0-9
I&M
These fields represent each of the 10 personal distribution lists for this User ID. The value displayed designates
the number of members (Users) for each list. If a list does not contain any members, then the value will display
"Empty".
Member of
?
This field indicates how many distribution lists contain this User ID as a member.
30
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
DURING ADD MODE ONLY
These fields are only available while adding a new User ID (Add Mode). After adding a new record, the below
pop-up screen appears.
Notify At Desk?
If this field is set to Y, a Notification Event Record will be created for this User using the "Call at Desk COS"
value entered in the Notification Setup Parameters.
Notify MsgLamp?
If this field is set to Y, a Notification Event Record will be created for this User using the two values entered in
the "Message Waiting Lamp COS" in the Notification Setup Parameters.
Pager?
If this field is set to Y, a Notification Event Record will be created for this User using the "Call Pager COS"
value in the Notification Setup Parameters.
Pager Phone Num
This field specifies the telephone number to be called if Pager? is set to Y. This number will be placed in the
Notification Event Record for this User when it is created.
NOTE: Do not use hyphens or brackets when entering the pager number.
When using the Add function (F2) to create a new User ID record, a Notification Event record (or records) for that
User may also be created. To configure a User for new message notification after using another method to create the
record (i.e., the Copy function), the Notification Event records may be created manually from the Notification Event
Records menu.
I&M
?
31
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
INSTANCE SETUP
An Instance on the Perfect Voice system is an environment that identifies a unique set of Users, unique greeting and
whattodo file names, a unique dialplan, various timers, a unique default message path for all subsequently added
Users, and a unique default User. It is very important that each Instance be added and its parameters set properly
before adding any Users to the Instance. Although most installations of Perfect Voice operate with only a single
Instance, one system can easily accommodate multiple Instances.
One common application for multiple Instance systems is tenant sharing. Just as tenant sharing on telephone
systems, the Perfect Voice system is shared by more than one group of Users at the same site. For example, a single
building housing a dentist's office and a doctor's office could share the same telephone system and Perfect Voice
system. Each office would be associated with its own separate Instance. The doctor's office could be set up as
Instance 0 and the dentist's office could be set up as Instance 1. Calls to one set of channels would be treated as
Instance 0 and would hear a specific greeting and whattodo for the doctor's office. Any message left for Users in
Instance 0, would be recorded in a message directory defined by the message path for that Instance. Calls to
another set of channels would be treated as Instance 1 where callers would hear a specific greeting and whattodo for
the dentist's office. Any message left for a User in Instance 1, would be recorded in a message directory defined by
the message path for Instance 1. In effect, each Instance could function as if it were a separate system; however, a
gateway between instances can be created.
The maximum number of Instances available on the Perfect Voice system is 32,767.
U
I&M
SE THE INSTANCE SETUP SCREEN TO:
Add a new Instance to the system.
Delete an Instance from the system.
Change existing parameters of an Instance on the system.
?
View the parameters of an Instance on the system.
TO ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS
Select RECEPTIONIST
Select INSTANCE SETUP
32
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Instance Number
This field specifies the unique identifier for this Instance. The value of this field can range from 0 to 32767.
Description
This field describes the use for this Instance, such as the company name or application.
LANGUAGE
Default User ID
This field specifies the User ID, usually the "operator", to assume if a caller does not make a selection during
the Whattodo. This is necessary for rotary dial callers who are not able to access Users through the use of
DTMF tones. The default User ID must also exist in the User Directory. For most systems, the default User ID
is one that belongs to someone who will always be available to take a call, such as the operator. If that person is
not available (such as after hours), the default User ID can be placed on Call Block. This allows rotary callers
the ability to leave a message.
[0] Default User ID
I&M
If this field is set to 'Y' (YES), then the digit [0] is treated as a language/instance dependent alias, that selects
the DEFAULT USER ID. If this is set to 'N' (NO), then the digit [0] is treated as a User ID in the current
dialplan instance. The default is 'N' (NO).
?
TDD Detect UserID
This field specifies the User ID to transfer to if TDD tone is detected.
Fax Detect UserID
This field specifies the User ID to transfer to if fax tone is detected.
Fax Document FROM
This is the default test for the FROM field on delivered fax documents. Each type F User ID can override this
default with fax document specific FROM text in the Custom FROM: name field in the User record.
Greeting Filename
This field specifies the fully qualified file name of the Greeting speech file.
WhatToDo Filename
This field specifies the fully qualified file name for the Whattodo speech file.
33
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED)
DIALING PLAN -
System Access
This field specifies the selection made by Users to access User Mode from the greeting/whattodo.
Hang-up/Endcall
This field specifies the selection made by callers and Users to terminate a call to the system. This code can only
be entered from the greeting/whattodo or the personal greeting.
Direct Voice Message
This field specifies the selection made by callers and Users to quickly leave a message for a User without
ringing his extension. This code can only be entered from the greeting/whattodo or the personal greeting.
Direct Pers. Greet
This field specifies the selection made by callers and Users to access the personal greeting for a User without
ringing his extension. This code can only be entered from the greeting/whattodo.
I&M
Force Modem Answer
This field specifies the digits to be pressed to force modem answer.
Direct Fax Message
?
This field specifies the DTMF sequence that callers can press to leave (send) a Fax Document message for a
user. The Direct Fax Message code must be a numeric code; star [*] or pound [#] may not be used. You may
make this code a single digit provided no other dialplan codes or User IDs begin with the same digit. To disable
this feature, leave this field blank.
Direct LAP UserID
This field specifies the DTMF digits that callers can press to perform a L.A.P. page. To disable this feature,
leave this field blank.
Directory Assist
This field specifies the selection made by callers and Users to access directory assistance. This code can be
entered from any point in the system where the system requests a User ID. The default value is 411.
Personal Assistant
This field specifies the selection made by callers to reach a User's personal assistant (assuming the User is
configured for a personal assistant) while listening to the User's personal greeting.
34
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
Network Site Number
This field defines whether Users in this Instance can send network messages. The site number provides the
CallBack telephone number for messages sent to other sites. The number must be set to a pre-configured site
number from 1-999 (see Network Site section that follows) or left blank. If left blank, then Users are not able
to send messages to other network sites.
Statistics Default
This field specifies the level of statistics that are kept for each User.
LGI Action Default
This field specifies the action to be taken for the ITF function of LGI. Refer to System, Integration Setup for
definitions of the available options when Perfect Voice receives an internal direct call from a User.
LAP Xmitter SystemID
This field specifies the system ID of the L.A.P. transmitter. If set to "*", the system uses the first available
transmitter. If this field is left blank, the system uses the transmitter with the lowest system ID number.
Voice Record Path
This is a required field which will be used for all subsequently-added user records to determine the path to the
directory containing caller messages. In other words, at the time a new user record is added, MESSAGE PATH
fields of that user record will reflect this default. This path is also used for all recorded names (*.NAM files),
all personal greetings (*.UVn), all temporary call screening names temp files for message management , FAX
documents (*.FXn), and FAX control files (*.FCn). It is suggested that the files reside on a drive or partition
which does not contain database files. It is also very important that this field be unique for each instance. A
suggested convention is to make the directory name reflect the actual instance number. For example, Instance 1
would be associated with message directory D:\MESG\1\. If you leave this field BLANK, the path will be
computed for you.
MAX ID LENGTHS
Lead Digit 0-9
I&M
Each of these fields displays the lead digit used in this Instance's dial plan, including all User IDs and system
codes (above). Also shown is the maximum number of digits for each set of User IDs and system codes that
begin with the indicated lead-digit.
?
35
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED)
TIMING AND CONTROL
Play TUNE Before GRT?
If this field is set to "Y", then a musical tune will play upon the start of every new call to this Instance. If set to
"N", no tune will be played. Playing a tune at the beginning of every call makes it apparent to callers that they
have reached an automated attendant.
After Whattodo Wait
This required field specifies the maximum number of seconds Perfect Voice waits after playing the whattodo
before starting the STILTHER timer. Normally, this field is set to a value between 1 and 5. This is a "silent"
time for entering a User ID before defaulting to the Operator. Any DTMF entered will cancel this wait and start
User ID input with Additional Digits timer. Only Hangup detection is enabled. To keep pulse phone
callers and other non-dialers from waiting too long, the total time of Whattodo prompt + After Whattodo
Wait + Still There Wait should be only 15 to 25 seconds.
I&M
Play STILTHER.RMS?
This field specifies whether the STILTHER.RMS file is played after the After Whattodo Wait timer
expires. If 'Y' for yes, caller hears: "To speak to the Operator please say yes after the tone". If the caller is
"still there" they hear this prompt followed by a tone, after which they say yes (or anything), triggering a
transfer to the Default User ID (provided GRUNT detection is enabled). If 'N' for no, the file is not played and
?
Still There Wait should be set to 1.
Still There Wait
This field specifies the maximum number of seconds to wait during Grunt Detection. For more information on
Grunt Detection, see Advanced Administration.
Play Name on XFER?
This field specifies whether Perfect Voice plays the User's name just before a call transfer. If set to Y, the caller
hears, "Transferring to..." followed by the User's name. If set to N, the caller only hears the prompt, "Please
hold".
After Busy Options
This field specifies the maximum number of seconds a caller has to make a selection between the end of the
busy options and the default action taken by Perfect Voice.
Busy Hold Retry Time
This field specifies the amount of time in seconds that Perfect Voice waits between attempts to try a busy or
queued extension. If Perfect Voice on-hold messages are used with this system, set this field to 0. For more
information about on-hold messages, see Advanced Administration.
36
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
After Screen Menu
This required field specifies the maximum number of seconds a User has to respond to Perfect Voice screening
prompts (reject the call, accept the call, etc.). If the User has not made a choice when the clock elapses, the call
is rejected.
After Personal Greet
This required field specifies the maximum number of seconds a caller has to make a selection between the end
of a User's personal greeting and the beginning of message recording. If a User is not allowed messaging, the
number of seconds before the caller is returned to the whattodo.
Play LEAVEUNV On Record?
This field specifies whether or not to play the recording "Leave your message after the tone, press # for future
options". If this is set to No, then all you will get is a BEEP after the personal greeting.
Endcall? (Default)
This field specifies the Instance default action to be taken after a message is left by a caller or the personal
greeting has played for a User with no messaging. If set to Y, Perfect Voice ends the call. If set to N, Perfect
Voice returns the caller to the whattodo. A third option is A for "ASK", where the caller is asked to press a digit
in order to continue the call. This field only applies if the User ID's End Call After field is set to D.
Auto Play First Mesg?
If this field is set to "Y" (yes), when entering the Message Menu, the first message automatically plays.
Power Play New Messgs
If this field is set to "Y" (yes), power play of new messages begins when entering the Message Menu.
* Message Pause Time
This field specifies the amount of time the system pauses after a User presses * during playback of a message.
After Usermode Menu
This required field specifies the maximum amount of time in seconds allowed for a User to specify an option
while in User Mode after a prompt plays. If no action is taken, Perfect Voice logs out the User and terminates
the call. A value of 10 seconds is recommended
I&M
Until First Digit
This field specifies the maximum amount of time in seconds to wait after a system prompt for the first DTMF
tone to be entered. This applies in most cases where Perfect Voice prompts for DTMF input. A notable
exception is after the whattodo (see After Whattodo Wait above).
?
Additional Digits
This field specifies the maximum amount of time allowed between DTMF tones for a single selection.
Play UserId If No Name?
This field specifies whether or not to play the User ID number if no name is recorded.
Direct Assist if No Name?
This field specifies whether or not to list this User ID in Directory Assistance if no name is recorded.
Direct Assist Prompt
This field defines which of the 10 directory assistance instruction prompts will be played when directory
assistance is selected.
0 = asks for Last Name
1 = asks for First Name
2 = asks for Directory Entry
3-9 = custom prompts
For additional information on Directory Assistance Prompts, refer to Advanced Administration.
37
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED)
MESSAGE AND RECORDING
Add User - LIFO Flag
This field specifies the default LIFO flag for new Users that are added to the system.
Add User - Max Messages
This field specifies the default maximum number of messages allowed for new Users that are added to the
system.
Message Review?
This field specifies whether message review is allowed for outside callers after recording a message for a User.
If set to Y, callers are allowed to review, re-record or append to the message before sending it. Callers also
have the option of marking the message as private or urgent.
Min Dsk Secs for Record
This field specifies the minimum amount of disk space in seconds that must be available before starting a
I&M
recording.
DEFAULT MSG EXPIRATION
New Message Expiration
?
This field specifies the length of time a new (unheard or urgent) message will remain the User's mailbox before
it is automatically deleted. A pop-up menu lists the available options. This field may be specified in business
days (1b, 2b, etc.) which do not include Saturday and Sunday, days (1d, 2d, etc.), weeks (1w, 2w, etc.) or
months (1m, 2m, etc.) If the field in the User Directory record is set to 0, then this value will be used. The
value of blank means never delete. No warning or notice is provided to the owner, and deleted message cannot
be retrieved. Messages are deleted after midnight (00:00) of the day following expiration.
Sav Message Expiration
This field specifies the length of time after a saved (heard or old) message was last listened to before it will
automatically be deleted. The same values as described in New Message Expiration apply.
Lst Message Expiration
This field specifies the length of time after a distribution list message (urgent, new or saved) was placed in the
User's mailbox that it will automatically be deleted. The same values as described in New Message Expiration
apply.
38
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
Fax Message Expiration
This field specifies the length of time after a fax message (urgent, new or saved) was placed in the User's
mailbox that it will automatically be deleted. The same values as described in New Message Expiration apply.
MAXIMUM RECORDING TIMES -
Who's Calling
This field specifies the maximum number of seconds allowed for a caller to record his name after selecting a
User with Call-Screening enabled.
Personal Name
This field specifies the maximum number of seconds allowed for Users to record their name file.
Personal Greeting
This field specifies the default maximum number of seconds allowed for Users to record each of their personal
greetings. This field represents the default value to use for PERSONAL GREETING - Maximum Length
on newly added User Ids.
VM Messages
This field specifies the maximum number of seconds allowed for Users to record a prefix to a forwarded
message, or a new message while in Message Management. This value applies to all internal messaging for all
Users.
Caller Messages
This field specifies the maximum number of seconds allowed for recording of messages from callers. This field
represents the default value to use for MESSAGE RECORDING - Maximum Length on newly added User
Ids.
END RECORD SILENCE TIMES -
Who's Calling
I&M
This field specifies the number of seconds of silence required to end the recording used during the recording of
a caller's name after selecting a User with Call-Screening enabled.
Personal Name
This field specifies the number of seconds of silence required to end the recording of a User's name in User
?
mode (User Setup or Quick Setup).
Personal Greeting
This field specifies the number of seconds of silence required to end the recording of a User's personal
greeting.
VM Messages
This field specifies the number of seconds of silence required to end the recording of internal messages
(forwarding prefixes or new messages sent from Message Management).
Caller Messages
This field specifies the number of seconds of silence required to end the recording of caller messages.
39
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
MESSAGE INFORMATION
USE THE MESSAGE INFORMATION SCREEN TO:
View message component information for Users on the system, including caller messages, forwarded
messages, forwarding prefixes, and new messages sent to more than one User.
TO ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS
Select RECEPTIONIST
Select MESSAGE INFORMATION
I&M
?
The Browse screen lists all messages. Information on the Browse screen includes the Instance, User ID, User
Name, Number, Status of the Message (Saved, New, Urgent, AMIS Outgoing (AMO), or Deleted), and the
Creation Date and Time of each message.
NOTE: The "..." in the Status column indicates that this message was one of the following:
Original distribution message where all copies have not yet been deleted by the recipient(s)
Sent message that has not been deleted by the recipient(s)
Original message pooled to another mailbox that has not been deleted by the recipient(s)
Original message forwarded to another mailbox(es) that has not been deleted by the recipient(s)
40
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
NOTE: The fields on this screen may change without notice. Below is a general description of the fields that may
be displayed. This screen is used primarily by Teleco Technical Support.
Instance
This field indicates the Instance number of the User associated with this message component.
User ID
This field indicates the User ID of the User associated with this message component.
Message Number/Secs
This field specifies the unique number assigned to this message component and the duration (in seconds) of the
message.
I&M
References
For message components that may require multiple copies (i.e., a message that was forwarded to a list of
Users), this field indicates the number of copies that are not deleted.
Message Type
?
This field specifies the type of message component:
0 A message received from a caller for this User.
1 A forward prefix from this User.
2 A message sent by this User.
3 A message sent or forwarded from another User to this User.
4 A certified message acknowledgment.
Message Status
This field specifies the status of the message component:
0 A message component not accessible by this User.
1 A new, unheard message component.
2 A message component that has been listened to.
5 A new unheard message component, marked for erase.
6 A message component that has been listened to, marked for erase.
41
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
Delivery Options
This field specifies any special delivery options associated with this message component such as Certified,
Private, Urgent, Carbon Copy, sent from a distribution list or external (sent with SENDMSG).
Message Timestamp
This field specifies the date and time the message component was created.
LastHeard Timestamp
This field specifies the date and time that the message component was listened to.
Recording File Name
This field specifies the complete file name of the message component.
Misc Information
This field specifies the duration of the message component in seconds followed by the method of recording
termination (i.e., silence or DTMF).
From User/Network ID
If applicable, this field indicates the User ID of the User who sent or forwarded the message component.
Next Msg in Chain
If applicable, this field indicates the original message number of the message component.
I&M
?
42
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
NETWORK SITES
Audio Messaging Interchange Specification, or AMIS, is a series of standards aimed at addressing the problem of
how voice messaging systems produced by different vendors can network or inter-network. Before AMIS, systems
from different vendors could not exchange voice messages. AMIS deals with the interaction between two systems
for the purpose of exchanging voice messages. AMIS has two specifications. One, called AMIS-Digital, is based
upon digital interaction between two voice messaging systems. All the control information and the voice message
itself, is conveyed between systems in digital form. By contrast, the AMIS-Analog specification calls for the use of
DTMF tones to convey control information and transmission of the message itself in analog form. The Perfect
Voice system is AMIS-Analog compatible. This means that the Perfect Voice system may be networked to other
Perfect Voice systems and/or other vendors' voice messaging systems that are also AMIS-Analog compatible.
For more information on setting up a network site database, refer to the System Administration section of this
manual.
USE THE NETWORK SITES SCREEN TO:
Add a new Network site to the system.
Edit an existing site.
Delete an existing site.
View the parameters of an existing site.
TO ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS
Select RECEPTIONIST
Select NETWORK SITES
I&M
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
?
43
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
Site Number
This field designates a unique number of the site. Every network site is assigned a unique number from 1-999.
This is used from SCREENS and from User Mode to reference site records. *LOCAL* indicates that the site
is local and an Instance number references this site. Normally there will only be one LOCAL site listed on the
system. (REMOTE) indicates that this site is not local.
Description
This field is a description of the site. Typically, it is the company name of the site.
Location
This field designates where the site is located. Typically, it is the City and State for U.S. locations and City and
Country for international locations.
System ID Number
For LOCAL sites, this field specifies the SYSTEM ID that will be used on outbound calls to uniquely identify
this site to all other sites. For REMOTE sites, this is used to match the SYSTEM ID used by the REMOTE site,
and provide the default callback telephone number to reach the REMOTE site.
AMIS has strict guidelines on the format of a system ID. It is composed of three numeric fields using the
characters 0-9 and each field is terminated with a # (pound sign). The maximum length of the System ID
Number is 18 characters and the minimum is 3 characters. There are two types of System ID Numbers, public
and private.
Public System ID Numbers are for all sites that can be direct dialed using the public telephone network. These
ID numbers are always in the format of ccc#nnn#sssssss#, where the value "ccc" is the international country
code (1-4 digits), the value of "nnn" is the national significant number (area or city code of 0-14 digits) and the
value of "sssssss" is a local subscriber number of 0-14 digits. All locations in North America must use the
format of 1#aaa#sssssss# where "aaa" is the area code and "sssssss" is the local telephone number.
Private System ID Numbers are for all sites that are accessible through a private network or behind a PBX.
These always have the format 0##nnnnnnn# where "nnnnnnn" is a site defined number. The site defined
number is typically the extension number of the site. The value "nnnnnnn" can be from 0-14 digits.
I&M
Callback Number
This field defines the dialstring, or number, to be dialed to call this site. The format of this field is dependent
on the ACCESS CODES being used. Incoming calls from NEW, or undefined, sites will automatically be
added to the Network Sites listing and the CALLBACK NUMBER and ACCESS CODES will be computed
?
based upon the SYSTEM ID of the caller as compared to the SYSTEM ID of the local site.
Access Codes
This field defines the optional prefix (PFX) and suffix (SFX) used when dialing the CALLBACK NUMBER.
Typically, the prefix selects the trunk and service provider dialtone. The suffix is typically an account code.
The choices for Access Codes are:
0 - Private Number
(no prefix or suffix is dialed)
1 - Local Number
(dial the local prefix + the CALLBACK NUMBER)
2 - Long Distance Number
(dial the long distance prefix + the CALLBACK NUMBER + the long
distance suffix)
3 - International Number
(dials the international prefix + the CALLBACK NUMBER + the
international suffix)
The prefix and suffix dialstrings are defined on Screen 3 of the Telephone System Setup in the System Menu of
SCREENS.
44
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
Journal Sessions?
If this field is set to "Y", then information about this session will be logged to a disk file. Incoming calls are
kept in the file "D:\SITE_Cnn.LOG", where "nn" is the channel number. Outbound calls are kept in the file
"D:\SITE_x.LOG", where "x" is the site number. If this is a local site, then this applies to all incoming and
outbound calls to or from this site. If this is a remote site, then this applies to all outbound calls to this site. If
set to "N", then journaling is disabled for this site. The default value is "N".
Play CallBack Num?
If this field is set to "Y", the callback number plays if no name is available.
LpBack Request ID
This field designates the AMIS loopback test number for this site. For LOCAL sites, this defines the loopback
test for incoming calls from other sites. This field is only used for LOCAL sites, and is only descriptive
(unused) for REMOTE sites. The default for this field is 987654.
Admin Msg User ID
This field defines the User ID to receive messages that are not able to be delivered or messages that are not able
to be returned. The default value for this field is blank. If the field is left blank, then these types of messages
will be deleted. This field is only used for LOCAL sites, not for REMOTE sites.
AutoAdd NEW Sites?
If the site is a LOCAL site and this field is set to "Y", then incoming calls from remote, undefined sites will
automatically be added to the network database. If this field is set to "N", then calls from remote, undefined
sites will be rejected. This field is used only for LOCAL, not REMOTE, sites and the default value is "Y".
Accept Incoming?
If the value of this field is set to "Y", then incoming network calls from any REMOTE site will be accepted. If
it is set to "N", then calls from any REMOTE site will be rejected causing the REMOTE site to return the
messages to the senders. The default value of this field is "Y".
Accept Bcast ID?
If the value of this field is set to "Y", then incoming network calls may access public broadcast lists (type "B"
I&M
User Ids). If this is set to "N", then incoming messages for public broadcast will be rejected. The default value
for this field is "N".
End Record Any?
If this field is set to "Y", then recording of incoming messages will terminate on any DTMF tone. This is an
?
AMIS compatible value. However, this will cause any messages that contain partial DTMF tones to be
rejected. The default value for this field is "N" that causes any DTMF tones other than a valid "*" tone to be
ignored. This field should be left at the default value of "N".
Place Outbound?
If the value of this field is set to "Y", then calls can be placed to this remote site. If the value is "N", then calls
will not be placed to this remote site. If set to "N", then the Send [6] and Forward [5] options in User Mode
menu option number 8 will not allow the selection of this remote site as a destination for a message.
Protocol Extension
This field specifies the level of AMIS to assume when calling from the local site to this remote site. The valid
Protocol Extension depends on the voice mail software being used at the remote site. "None" provides basic
AMIS capability for any AMIS-compliant voice mail software or versions. "Extn 1" allows Users to mark
messages urgent, private, or certified and also provides the time difference between the local and remote site.
"Extn 1" is only valid for other sites using AMIS with Perfect Voice Releases 4.1 and higher. In addition to the
features provided with "Extn 1", "Extn 2" allows the User 2 additional special delivery options when sending
an AMIS message. The User may record his/her name and personal greetings and send them to the remote site
mailbox. "Extn 2" is only valid for site using AMIS with Perfect Voice Release 4.3.
45
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
New MSGS to Send?
If this field is set to "Y", then network management will automatically check to see if this site has messages
waiting for delivery. Setting this field to "Y" will force a re-check for outbound messages. Setting this field to
"N" will cancel outbound delivery attempts until more messages are queued. The default setting for this field is
"N".
NOTE: If a DTMF is detected prior to the [D] tone, or if the number of consecutive failures exceeds to limit,
then this field will be automatically set to 'N' (NO).
Consec Fails Stop
This field is used to shutdown outbound calling to this site if there are too many consecutive failures. When the
number of consecutive failures reaches this value, then the field New MSGS to Send? will be set to "N".
Every time the field New MSGS to Send? is set to 'Y' (YES), either because of additional new messages,
or by the operator, one more attempt will be made to call the site. The consecutive failures count is only reset to
zero when a network call is acknowledged by the called site, or when the operator clears the count.
Minimum Recall
This field specifies the number of minutes which must elapse before attempting a second, and ensuing,
outbound calls to this site. The time between ensuing recalls is increased by this value with each retry until the
number of recalls the value in the Maximum Recall field. For example, if this field is set to 2, then Perfect
Voice will attempt a second call 2 minutes after the first, four minutes after the second, etc. until the number of
minutes in the Maximum Recall field is reached. Retries will continue within the value of the Maximum Recall
field until the Consecutive Fails Stop value is reached.
Maximum Recall
This field specifies the maximum number of minutes between retries of outbound calls until the value of
Consecutive Fails Stop is reached.
Msg Send Exp Hours
This field defines the expiration time period of messages waiting to be sent via the network. Any undelivered
message that has reached expiration will be marked as expired and non-deliverable and be returned to the
sender (or to the LOCAL site operator). Setting this value too low will cause messages to be returned
I&M
unnecessarily. Setting this value to 0 will disable the expiration option. The default value for this field is 6
hours.
Skip if AGC Wait?
?
This field defines whether or not a message should be transmitted via the network before AGC processing. If
set to "Y", the message will not be delivered sent until it is processed by AGC. Messages can be marked for
AGC processing on Screen 2 of the User ID record. Performing AGC processing prior to network transmission
can improve the sound quality of the message at the remote site. AGC processing does require that the
AGC_TDD batch file be active in the Event Scheduler. The default setting of this field is "Y".
Skip if TDD Wait?
This field defines whether or not a message should be transmitted via the network before TDD processing. If
set to "Y", the message will not be delivered sent until it is processed by TDD. Messages can be marked for
TDD processing on Screen 2 of the User ID record. TDD processing does require that the AGC_TDD batch
file be active in the Event Scheduler. The default setting of this field is "Y".
Send Site Name?
If this field value is set to "Y", then the site name will be transmitted as part of the AMIS message. If set to
"N", then no name will be transmitted.
46
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
Unlisted Site?
This field defines whether this site will be listed in the Network Assistance Menu. Network Assistance is used
to assist in selecting a site number and is available in User Mode in option [8] from the List, Send and Forward
menus. It is invoked by selecting 0 as the site number. Setting this field to "Y" defines this remote site as
unlisted. Setting the field to "N" allows the site to be listed. The default value for this field is "N".
I&M
?
47
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED)
This screen displays information in reference to calls FROM this site. These fields are only available
while in View Mode.
Last Call From Site
This field displays the channel number that received the last call and also the date and time the last call was
received.
Total Connect Time
This field displays the accumulated total off-hook time of calls from this site.
Start Sessions
This field displays the total number of sessions that were started.
End Sessions
This field displays the total number of sessions that ended.
Disconnects
I&M
This field displays the total number of disconnects.
Messages Accepted
This field displays the total number of messages accepted.
?
Messages Rejected
This field displays the total number of messages rejected.
Creation
This field displays the creation date of the last session.
LpBk Request Count
This field displays the number of loopback requests.
Protocol Extension
This field displays the level of AMIS that the last incoming call to this site attempted to use. It also displays
the site number of the last incoming AMIS call.
Hour Adjusted (TZ)
This field displays the adjustment for different time zones.
Site Auto Add?
This field indicates whether or not this site was auto-added to the network site database.
Remote Site Number
This field indicates the site number of this site on its database.
48
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED)
This screen displays information in reference to calls TO this site. These fields are only
available while in View Mode.
LastCall TO Site
This field displays the channel that was used to place the last call to this site as well as the date and time of the
last call.
Total Connect Time
This field displays the accumulated total off-hook time on calls to this site.
Start Sessions
This field displays the total number of sessions that were started.
End Sessions
This field displays the total number of sessions that ended.
I&M
Disconnects
This field displays the total number of disconnects.
Messages Accepted
?
This field displays the total number of messages accepted by this site.
Messages Rejected
This field displays the total number of messages rejected by this site.
Msgs Queued
This field displays how many messages are waiting to be transmitted.
Average Msg Delay
This field displays the average time a message was queued before it was transmitted.
Maximum Msg Delay
This field displays the maximum amount of time a message was queued before it was transmitted.
49
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
Dial Attempts
This field displays the total number of attempts that were made to dial this site.
Failed - No DIALTONE
This field displays the total number of times that dialtone was not received when an attempt was made to
outdial.
Failed - BSY/RNA
This field displays the total number of times that a call was attempted which received a busy signal or a ring no-
answer.
Failed - Got DTMF
This field displays the total number of times that a call was attempted where DTMF was received, but not
followed by anything else.
Failed - Disconnect
This field displays the total number of times that a call was attempted when AMIS DTMF was not received so
the channel in use disconnected.
Heard AMIS Answer
This field displays the total number of times that AMIS answered but did not get a response.
Reject - No Space
This field displays the total number of rejected calls due to the lack of space on this system.
Reject - No Calls
This field displays the total number of rejected calls because the User is not allowed to receive calls.
Reject - Blocked
This field displays the total number of calls that were rejected because the flag was set to block incoming calls.
Consecutive Fails
This field displays the total number of consecutive failure of calls to this site.
I&M
?
50
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
LIST MANAGEMENT
USE THE LIST MANAGEMENT SCREEN TO:
Add a private or public distribution list to the system.
Delete a private or public distribution list on the system.
Review the members of a private or public distribution list on the system.
TO ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS
Select RECEPTIONIST
Select LIST MANAGEMENT
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
I&M
Dialplan Instance
?
This field is the DIALING PLAN Instance that contains the list owner's User ID. Both the number and
description for the Instance are displayed.
Owner User ID
This field designates the User ID that "owns" this distribution list entry. The number, name, and department
for this User ID are displayed.
Owner List Number
This field specifies the owner's list number.
Member ID
This field designates the "member" of the OWNER'S User ID's list. If this is a User ID, and it is in the same
Dialplan Instance then the number, name and department for this member are displayed. If the member is a
Network ID, then the number and site name are displayed.
51
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
PARAMETERS
USE THE PARAMETERS SCREEN TO:
Select which activities to send to a journal
Enable, disable, or view trace and journal files
Enable trace on a per channel basis
TO ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS
Select RECEPTIONIST
Select PARAMETERS
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
I&M
Comments
?
This field is for any descriptions or comments that the installer may wish to make.
TRACE
Path
This is the disk drive and directory where all trace files will be placed.
Enable Trace?
Trace specifies whether or not Receptionist activity trace information will be performed. This value can be
overridden by the per-channel value below. Set this to "Y" (Yes) to Enable. This field should contain "N"
unless directed otherwise by Technical Support personnel. This field may also be changed with the
RCPTDIAG {#,*} program or by typing TRACEON or TRACEOFF.
Trace to Screen?
If this field is set to "Y" (YES) all enabled trace information will be displayed to the monitor screen. If set to
"N" (NO) then trace information will NOT be displayed. The default value is "Y" (YES).
52
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
Trace to File?
If this field is set to "Y" (YES) all enabled trace information will be written to the file TRACE.LOG or
TRACE_nn.LOG in the selected path (See "FILE PER CHANNEL?" fields below). If set to "N" (NO) then
trace information will NOT be written to disk. The default value is "N" (NO).
Required Disk Mins
If the amount of available disk space on the Trace drive drops below this value, measured in disk minutes, then
"TRACE TO FILE" will automatically be set to "N" (NO). The default is 2 minutes (approximately 1 MB).
File Per Channel?
If this field is set to "Y" (YES) then the file names for trace information are TRACE_nn.LOG, where "nn" is
the channel number. If set to "N" (NO), then the file name for all trace information is TRACE.LOG (See
"TRACE TO FILE?" above). The default value is "N".
Disable Date?
If this field is set to "Y" (YES) then the DATE header for will be disabled. The default value is "N" (NO)
which means DATE headers are always included. Typically this is only set to YES to reduce the amount of
trace information.
Fast Trace?
If this field is set to "Y" (YES) then all "low-level" trace information will be disabled. The default value is "N"
(NO) which will always include all trace information. Typically this is only set to YES to reduce the amount
of trace information.
Idle + timer Trace?
If this field is set to "Y" (yes), the channel idle and timer information are output to the trace file.
SPCH Path on RMS?
If this field is set to "Y" (yes), the complete speech path of the system prompt (.rms file) is shown in the trace
file. (This may be necessary if using multiple languages.)
Virtual Chan Trace
If this field is set to "Y" (yes), virtual (non-audioboard) channels are output to the trace file.
I&M
Cnn (C00-C23)
This field allows custom control of trace information on a per-channel basis. Normally this is set to " "
(Default), which indicates that trace on this channel is controlled by the "ENABLE TRACE?" field. If set to
"Y" (YES), then trace is ALWAYS enabled for this channel. If set to "N" (NO), then trace is always
?
DISABLED for this channel.
53
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
JOURNALING
Path
This is the disk drive and directory where all journal files will be placed. Normally this is ALWAYS set to
"D:\". Note: This path is also used for AMIS, FAX, and SMDR/SMDI files.
Journal to File?
If this field is set to "Y" (YES) then usage journaling will be performed. The enabled record type(s) will be
written to the file RCPT_USE.LOG in the specified path.
Channel Records?
If this field is set to "Y" (YES,default), and Journaling is set to "Y" (YES), then write the following record
types to the Journal file.
INI:
Receptionist Initialization
I&M
COF: Channel OFF-Hook/Answer
CIN:
Channel Integration Pattern
CRP: Channel Rotary Detect OK
?
CRF: Channel Rotary Detect FAIL
CON: Channel ON-Hook/Hangup
HIT:
Disconnect IBS+TMO
HIP:
Disconnect IBS+MATCH
HRW: Disconnect REC+WINK
HWW: Disconnect WINK
HCP: Disconnect CPM HANGUP
User ID Records?
If this field is set to "Y" (YES,default), and Journaling is set to "Y" (YES), then write the following record
types to the Journal file.
LGF: Login Failed - Security
LGX: Login Failed - Already In
LGI:
Login Successful
LGO: Logout
54
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
Whattodo Records?
If this field is set to "Y" (YES,default), and Journaling is set to "Y" (YES), then write the following record
types to the Journal file.
LNG: Language User ID (L)
INS:
Instance User ID (N)
IVR : IVR User ID (I)
ATX: AudioText User ID (D)
FOD: FaxDoc User ID (F)
DND: CallBlock User ID (U)
TBX: Menu Play User ID (T)
TBO: Menu Opt User ID (T)
USR: UserBox User ID (U)
Fax Records?
If this is set to "Y" (YES,default), and Journaling is set to "Y" (YES), then write the following record types to
the Journal file.
FRL: Fax Receive Lost!
FRF: Fax Receive Failure!
FRX: Fax Receive OK
FSR: Fax Send Retry!
FSF:
Fax Send Failure!
FSX: Fax Send OK
AMIS Records?
If this is set to "Y" (YES,default), and Journaling is set to "Y" (YES), then write the following record types to
the Journal file.
I&M
AMX: Incoming AMIS Call
AMI: Incoming AMIS Session
AMO: Outbound AMIS Call/Session
?
Attendant Records?
If this is set to "Y" (YES,default), and Journaling is set to "Y" (YES), then write the following record types to
the Journal file.
LAP: Lap Call Page
XFR: Call Transfer
BSY: Busy Menu
55
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
Message Records?
If this is set to "Y" (YES,default), and Journaling is set to "Y" (YES), then write the following record types to
the Journal file. These are written whenever the message counts (Urgent, New, Saved) change for a User ID.
The information tells Instance, User ID, and Counts.
MSX: Re-Computed at Login
MSL: UserMode Logout
MSG: New Message from Caller
MSU: New Message from User ID
MSH: Message Heard
MSD: Message Deleted
MSZ: Admin Reset
Other Records?
If this is set to "Y" (YES,default), and Journaling is set to "Y" (YES), then write the following record types to
the Journal file
TIM: Administrator changed System TIME
DAT: Administrator changed System DATE
KLN: Klinic Modem Share
DFO: Default Operator
DAS: Directory Assistance
REC: Recording End
DSK: Recording Space Change
I&M
?
56
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
ACTIVITY INFORMATION
USE THE ACTIVITY INFORMATION SCREEN TO:
Display channel usage and traffic information since last reboot, using the STATS program.
TO ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS
Select RECEPTIONIST
Select ACTIVITY INFORMATION
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
----- RCPT Information Report ----- 5-20-1996 Mon 3:11:36p ---------
Started on: 5-20-1996 Mon 10:37:55a Uptime: 4:33'41"
Longest Tic delay
=40
DBUDT Updates
=727
DBUMSG Updates
=377
-------------
------------
-----
-----
------------
-----
Concurrent Elapsed Time
%
%
Offhook Time %
-------------
------------
-----
-----
------------
-----
I&M
In use 0:
1:19'54"
29%
29%
. .. ..
...
In use 1:
1:37'44"
36%
36%
1:37'44"
50%
*In use 2:
1:02'58"
23%
23%
2:05'56"
32%
In use 3:
0:23'47"
9%
9%
1:11'19"
12%
?
In use 4:
0:06'35"
2%
2%
0:26'20"
3%
In use 5:
0:02'38"
1%
1%
0:13'09"
1%
In use 6:
0:00'37"
0%
0%
0:03'42"
0%
In use 7:
0:00'04"
0%
0%
0:00'23"
0%
-------------
------------
-----
-----
------------ -----
4:34'15"
5:38'30"
57
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
-------
------
-----------
-------
------
------
----
Channel
Total
Offhook Average
Calls
MxCall
%up
Number
Calls
Seconds
Call
/hour
/hour
Actv
-------
------
-----------
-------
------
------
----
0:
125
1:47'24"
0'52"
27.3
64
43%
* 1:
95
1:15'37"
0'48"
20.8
68
30%
2:
42
0:27'43"
0'40"
9.1
80
11%
3:
51
0:19'38"
0'23"
11.1
129
8%
* 4:
183
1:06'28"
0'22"
40.0
134
29%
5:
69
0:29'03"
0'25"
15.1
120
12%
6:
19
0:08'04"
0'25"
4.1
120
3%
7:
3
0:01'37"
0'32"
0.6
98
.
8:
.
.......
....
....
..
.
9:
.
.......
....
....
..
.
10:
.
.......
....
....
..
.
11:
7
0:03'02"
0'26"
1.5
117
1%
-------
------
-----------
-------
------
------
----
12
594
5:38'36"
0'34"
130
930
11%
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Channel Number -
An audio channel assigned to Receptionist.
Total Calls -
Total incoming call for this channel since the program was last started.
I&M
Offhook Seconds -
Total time off-hook since the program was last started.
Average Call
-
Average call duration (Offhook Seconds / Total Calls).
Calls per Hour -
Average calls per hour (Total Calls / Uptime).
?
Max Calls per Hour -
Maximum calls per hour (One hour / Average call).
% Up Activity -
Percent uptime channel was offhook (Offhook / Uptime).
The Receptionist activity information displayed from this menu option gives call statistics on a per channel basis
since the last reboot of the system. The same information can be displayed from a DOS prompt using the command
STATS 94.
58
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
NOTIFY
The Notify application of Perfect Voice enables Users on the system to be notified of new messages that have been
received. The system has pre-defined methods of Notification that can be assigned to each User. The method of
Notification should be based upon the User's needs and life style. The pre-defined methods of Notification include
calling the User at the desk, calling the User at a telephone number outside the site, calling a pager number and
lighting a message lamp on the User's telephone. The different methods and valid time ranges are defined by a
Class of Service and there are different means of Notification within each method. The Class of Service definitions
should be reviewed during the pre-installation meeting with the customer and a decision made as to how each User
will be notified of new or urgent messages. The following information includes the procedures and steps in creating
Notification Event Records, using an existing Class of Service or creating a new Class of Service, schedules for
Notification and how to create new schedules and defining the parameters for Notification, including defining the
default method of Notification for all newly created Users.
I&M
?
59
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
NOTIFICATION
A Notification Event Record (NER) must be created for each User that is to be notified of new messages received.
The NER is based upon the User ID in the User Directory of the Receptionist. The NER includes the User ID, the
Class of Service for Notification and any specific telephone numbers that Notify must dial when notifying the User
such as a pager telephone number and a PIN number. Multiple Notification Event Records may be created for a
User based upon time of day and the day of the week. A User may also be allowed to change the telephone number
at which the User is notified when Notification is using an outdial method.
USE THE NOTIFICATION SCREEN TO:
Enable notification for a User on the system.
View the status of a User's notification.
Modify methods of notification.
TO ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS
Select NOTIFY
Select NOTIFICATION
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
I&M
?
Receptionist Instance
This field specifies the Instance to which the User belongs.
User ID
This field specifies the User to which notification is being added.
User Name
This field specifies the Name of the User.
Enabled for Use?
If this field is set to "Y" (yes), the event record is enabled. If set to "N" (no), the event record is disabled.
60
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
New Messages Received COS
This field specifies the notification COS to use when performing message notification for this Notification
Event Record (NER). The COS number, in turn, indicates the method, time frame, and frequency of
notification. This field must specify a valid COS from the Class of Service database.
Pager or Outside Number
This field specifies the pager, outside telephone number, or L.A.P. pager capcode. This is a dialstring (specific
to this NER) which is accessible through the COS action string for this NER. If the COS being accessed is for
a LAP pager, you would enter the "cap" code or pager id here. The dialstring is accessible by the COS action
string through the use of the expressions. It is only used if this NER is associated with a COS that performs
outdial notification. If this NER is associated with the Pager with PIN COS, enter the pager service telephone
number in this field.
NOTE: Do not use hyphens or brackets when entering the pager number.
Pager PIN Number
This field is used with the Pager with PIN COS and specifies the User's PIN. The number in this field is
dialed by Perfect Voice after calling the paging service. This field also specifies the baud rate and pager type
of the L.A.P. pager. Refer to "Local Area Paging" in the Optional Applications section of this manual.
Messages Picked up COS
This field specifies the COS to use after the User picks up his messages. This field is normally used only for an
NER associated with message lamp notification. In that case, it specifies the COS that turns off a message lamp.
BROWSE MODE ONLY
I&M
?
These fields are only available while in View Mode.
Notify Status
This field indicates the status of the Notify Enabled? field for the User.
Notified
This field indicates whether the User has new messages that need to be picked up.
Tries Counter
This field indicates the number of times Notify has attempted to notify the User, using this NER.
Last Attempt
This field indicates the last date and time that this NER was used to notify the User of new messages.
Next Attempt
This field indicates the date and time after which a notification, using this NER will be attempted (assuming a
notification is still necessary by then).
61
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
CLASS OF SERVICE
There are twenty-four pre-defined Classes of Service for Notification. Those classes within the 1XX series of
numbers define how Notification will call a User at their extension on the telephone system. Those classes within
the 2XX series of numbers define how Notification will call a User at a telephone number outside the telephone
system. For COS numbers from 250 to 299, the telephone number is changeable via the user mode. The 5XX
series of numbers define how a User with a pager will be notified. The 600 COS number defines TDD Faxback.
The 7XX COS numbers define local area paging (LAP). The 9XX series of numbers define what method Perfect
Voice will use to light a message lamp at a User's extension on the telephone system.
USE THE CLASS OF SERVICE SCREEN TO:
Modify parameters for an existing method of notification.
Create a new method of notification.
TO ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS
Select NOTIFY
Select CLASS OF SERVICE
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
I&M
?
62
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
Class of Service Number
This field specifies a unique identifier that is associated with a notification method.
Description
This field specifies a brief description of the notification method. The description entered should be concise,
describing the method, time frame, and the frequency of notification.
Schedule Number
This field specifies the Notification Schedule number to use. It must specify an existing Notification Schedule
number from the Notification Schedules database. The Notification Schedule, in turn, specifies which days of
the week on which the notification method is used. It also specifies the time range for those days.
Restart COS if New Msg?
If this field is set to "Y" (YES), then each new message will restart the try timers and try counters. If this is set
to N (NO), then additional new messages received (while new message notification active) will NOT restart the
timers and counters.
Delay Until First Try
This field specifies the number of minutes to wait after a new message is received by the User before the first
notification attempt. Note that this timer is reset upon receipt of the last new message (or last login to message
management), before performing the first notification.
Delay Until Retry
This field specifies the minimum number of minutes that must elapse before attempting to notify the User the
second time. This does not indicate the exact amount of time between the previous and next attempt, but rather
the minimum amount of time that must elapse between notifications. Note that the value of this field must be
less than or equal to the Maximum Retry Delay field in order for this feature to work properly.
Maximum Retry Delay
If 0, then Notify will always wait at least "Delay Until Retry Time" minutes before retrying a notification
attempt. If not 0, then each retry delay will be increased by "Delay Until Retry Time" minutes. For example, if
"Delay Until Retry Time" is 5 minutes, then the FIRST retry will be after 5 minutes; the SECOND
I&M
retry will be 10 minutes after the first; the THIRD retry will be 15 minutes after the second; etc.
Maximum Tries
This field specifies the maximum number of notification attempts for this COS after receiving a new message.
After these many attempts, notifications associated with this COS will cease until another new message is
?
received. For Users with multiple NER's, this field has no effect on the notifications from other NER's.
Check Call Blocking?
This field specifies whether or not to honor the User's Call Blocking feature setting when performing a Call-at-
Desk type of notification. If this field is set to Y, the notification is only performed if the User's Call Blocking
feature is disabled. If this field is set to N, the notification is performed regardless of the Users Call Blocking
feature setting.
Check Notify-Enable?
This field specifies whether or not to check the user settable notify flag. If set to No, then even if the user states
that they do not want to be notified, this COS will still notify them of new messages.
Perform for EACH NewMsg?
If this field is set to Y (Yes), this COS will be performed ONCE and ONLY ONCE for each new message.
This setting is typically used for PAGER and some special Message Waiting (MWI) types. If this is set to N
(NO), then this COS will be performed for each "new messages exist" request. The default setting is No.
63
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
Single Notification?
This field specifies whether to stop the notification sequence after a successful notification attempt. If this field
is set to Y and a notification attempt was successful, no additional notifications are attempted, even if new
messages are received. After the User picks up the new messages, new messages will result in new notification
attempts.
If this field is set to N, each additional new message will reinitialize the notification process. This COS is
typically used in situations where the telephone system access code to turn on message lamp is the same as that
to turn it off.
Urgent Only Activation?
This field specifies whether the User will only be notified for messages received as urgent, or will be notified
for all new messages.
TDDFAX Only Activation?
If this field is set to Y (YES), then this COS will only be used for TDD2FAX delivery. All other fields will be
ignored! If this is set to N (NO), then this COS is a normal COS for Notification and De-Notification. The
default setting is No.
Require NER:NUMBER
If this field is set to Y (YES), then this COS will only be performed if the Notification number (OUTSIDE or
PAGER) in the NER is non-blank. If this is set to N (NO), then the Notification number in the NER will not be
checked. The default setting is No.
Require NER:UNUMBER
If this field is set to Y (YES), then this COS will only be performed if the De-Notification number (PIN
NUMBER) in the NER is non-blank. If this is set to N (NO), then the De-Notification number in the NER will
not be checked. The default setting is No.
Require UDT:EXTENSION
If this field is set to Y (YES), then this COS will only be performed if the Extension number in the User ID is
non-blank. If this is set to N (NO), then Extension number in the User ID will not be checked. The default
I&M
setting is Yes.
?
64
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Action>
These fields are line reference numbers for editing purposes. Before saving changes, all actions will be sorted
using this field. To move an action to a different position, just change it's index number to fit at the desired
location. The reference numbers are NOT stored in the database, and are ONLY used for ease of editing and
sorting.
To move action 50 to between patterns 10 and 20, just change action 50's number to 15 (or any value 11-19).
COS OPERATORS
The action string for a Notify Class of Service (COS) offers a powerful tool for defining what actions Notify
takes to notify a User. This section provides a summary of the action string operators and their operands. A
familiarity with these is necessary to produce a specialized notification Class of Service.
I&M
An operator consists of a single character followed immediately by a set of square brackets, "[ ]" which enclose
the operand(s). Following is a summary for each operator along with a description of its associated operands.
NOTE: Operators and operands must be in upper case.
?
Operator:......................D dialstring
Description: .................This operator controls dialing.
Operands: ....................dialstring: This operand specifies the dialstring characters to dial. There is an implied
off-hook at the beginning of each D[ ] command. The dialstring operand can contain any
combination of dialstring characters or database variables as long as the total number or
characters dialed does not exceed 32. See the section entitled Dialstrings for a complete
description of available dialstring characters.
Example:.......................D 5551212 causes Notify to dial the telephone number, 555-1212.
Example:.......................D $(UDT:EXTENSION) causes Notify to dial the User's extension number (for more
on database variables, see below).
65
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
Operator: ..................... P speech file1, speech file2, speech file3, etc.
Description:................. This operator controls the playback of speech files.
Operands: .................... speech file1, etc.: This operand specifies the name of one or more speech files to play.
Separate each file name with a comma. If no path information is supplied, the Speech
Path specified in Notify Setup is assumed. If no file extension is specified, the default
file extension of .NMS is assumed.
Example: ...................... P UHAVMESG causes Notify to play the file, D:\SPCHENG\UHAVMESG.NMS.
Operator: ..................... W event,seconds
Description:................. This operator controls whether Notify proceeds with the action string based on whether
the specified event is received within the specified time. If the event is not received
within the specified time, execution of the action string is terminated; no other operators
past this one are executed and the notification is not flagged as successful.
Operands: .................... event: This operand specifies the event to wait for. The event is specified as a letter. The
following letters constitute valid events.
A................................Answer pattern match
D................................Dialtone pattern match
G................................Grunt pattern match
T ................................DTMF tone
W...............................Wait
seconds: This operand specifies the maximum time in seconds Notify waits for the
event.
NOTE: If no time is specified, the system will use the "Notify Extension Wait" time
specified in Telephone System Parameters.
Example: ...................... W D,5 causes Notify to wait no more than 5 seconds to match dial tone.
I&M
Operator: ..................... L device_index, flag, station
Description:................. This operator controls the output of SMDI-formatted MWI packets for either setting or
clearing MWI.
?
Operands: .................... device_index: This operand specifies the device index for SMDI output. This is almost
always set to 0.
flag: This operand specifies whether the MWI is set or cleared. Use a value of 1 to set
MWI and a value of 0 to clear the MWI.
station: This operand specifies the extension number for which the MWI is set or
cleared. Notify automatically formats the extension number (padding it on the left side
with zeros to 7 characters) to match SMDI format.
Example: ...................... L 0,1,123 causes Notify to send an SMDI-formatted MWI packet which results in
extension 123's MWI being set.
66
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
Operator:......................O device, template_file
Description: .................This operator controls the output of ASCII text to a file or device. Special symbols in a
template file are substituted with notification information to create a unique file for this
notification.
Parameters: .................device: This operand specifies a DOS filename or device for output.
template_file: This operand specifies the name of the template file. An example
template file is found in C:\RCPT\MESGSLIP.FMT.
Example:.......................O CON,C:\RCPT\MESGSLIP.FMT causes Notify to substitute symbolic information
in the file, C:\RCPT\MESGSLIP.FMT and send the output to CON (the display).
Operator:......................X
Description: .................This operator indicates to Notify that the notification was successful and that no further
notifications are necessary until a new message is received. This normally occurs at the
end of an action string that performs notification for which positive receipt of the
notification can be determined. For example, if Notify calls a User at his desk and
detects an answer, the notification can be considered successful.
Operands: ....................none
Operator:......................M
Description: .................The "M" (login) action is used for same-call message retrieval. Notify must be in shared
channel mode (RCPT+NTFY or NTFY+RCPT). This transfers the channel back to
Receptionist and skips to the "Enter Password" voice prompt.
Operands: ....................none
Operator:......................T New Threshold
Description: .................This operator allows you to set a different threshold. It is designed primarily for use by
I&M
Teleco Engineering.
Operands: ....................none
?
67
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
COS DATABASE VARIABLES
In addition to hard-coded values, variables representing database information may be included as operands in an
action string. These variables represent information that is specific to the current User ID, NER or telephone
system. This allows standardization of system-wide Class of Service definitions without sacrificing User-specific
information.
The database variable format is as follows. Note that a dollar sign and an open parenthesis always precede the
variable expression and a closed parenthesis always terminates the variable expression.
NOTE: These must be in upper case.
$(SOURCE:FIELD)
"SOURCE" specifies the database from which the information is obtained. Choices include the following.
NER ................................. Notification Event Record
UDT ................................. User Directory
LIN ................................... Telephone System Setup ("line" information)
NOTE: SOURCE may be abbreviated ("N" for NER, "U" for UDT, and "L" for LIN).
"FIELD" specifies which field within the database to use. Choices include the following.
$(UDT:USER_ID) .......... the User ID associated with the User.
$(UDT:USER80) ........... the User ID associated with the User, padded with leading 0s to 8 digits.
$(UDT:INSTANCE) ...... the Instance number associated with the User.
$(UDT:EXTENSION) ... the Extn of the User (physical extension or dialstring), with any trailing non-numeric
characters removed
$(UDT:DIALSTR) .......... the complete Extn field.
$(UDT:NAME)................ the fully qualified file specification of the User's recorded name file.
$(UDT:UNV) ................... the fully qualified file specification of the User's current personal greeting.
I&M
$(UDT:MPATH) ............. the Messaging Path (message recording path) for the User.
$(UDT:XNAME) ............. the Description for the User.
$(UDT:XDEPT) .............. the Department for the User.
?
$(UDT:XDBN) ................ the DirectoryName directory name for the User.
$(UDT:SHARE).............. the e-mail/shared data for the User
$(UDT:NEWMSGS) ...... the number of unheard messages for the User.
$(UDT:OLDMSGS) ....... the number of heard messages for the User.
$(UDT:ALLMSGS) ........ the total number of messages for the User.
$(UDT:URGMSGS)....... the number of urgent messages for the User.
$(NER:NUMBER).......... the Pager or Outside Number in the NER. (See NER:LOCAL and NER:LONG)
$(NER:LOCAL).............. same as NER:NUMBER, but only dial if the telephone number meets one of the
following requirements. Note that 950, 976 and 555 exchanges are excluded.
seven digit, toll free local call, or
ten digit, 1-800 toll free number.
68
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
$(NER:LONG)................same as NER:NUMBER, but only dial if the telephone number meets one of the
following requirements. Note that 950, 976 and 555 exchanges are excluded, as are
1+x00 (excluding 1-800).
seven digit, toll free local call
ten digit, 1-800 toll free number
eight digit 1+ call (same area code long distance), or
ten digit, 1+ long distance number.
$(NER:UNUMBER) .......the Pager Pin Number in the NER.
$(LIN:LOCAL)................the Trunk Access LOCAL dialstring to access a local trunk or trunk group.
$(LIN:LONG)..................the Trunk Access LONG dialstring to access a long distance trunk or trunk group.
$(LIN:ACNT) ..................the Account Code LDIST dialstring to dial (usually after a long-distance number is
dialed).
$(LIN:MWION) ...............the Message Waiting ON dialstring to set the MWI for an extension.
$(LIN:MWIOFF) .............the Message Waiting OFF dialstring to clear the MWI for an extension.
$(LIN:PAGE1) ................the Overhead Paging dialstring to access the overhead paging in zone 1.
$(LIN:DESK) ..................the dialtstring to call at desk
$(LIN:ICOM)...................the dialstring to access the intercom dialtone
$(LIN:AWAIT).................the number of seconds to wait for an answer after dialing
$(LIN:DWAIT) ................the number of seconds to wait for offhook dialtone
$(MSG:STAMP)
I&M
.............the international date and time
$(MSG:HRMN)...............the international hour and minute of the message
$(MSG:FROM)...............the sender of the message
?
$(MSG:SECS) ................the number of seconds in this message
$(MSG:NUMBER) .........the internal message number
69
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
SCHEDULES
Each Notification Schedule includes a schedule number, the days of the week and the time period on those days that
the schedule is in effect. There are four pre-defined schedules. However, these schedules may be modified to
reflect the work schedule of the customer site or new schedules may be created using the add command in the
schedule screen. No two events may be scheduled for exactly the same time, events must be scheduled a minimum
of one minute apart.
USE THE SCHEDULES SCREEN TO:
Modify time of day or days of week for an existing notification schedule.
Create a notification schedule.
TO ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS
Select NOTIFY
Select SCHEDULES
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
I&M
?
70
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
Schedule Number
This field specifies a unique identifier for this notification schedule.
Description:
This field specifies a brief description of this notification schedule.
Begin Time (HRS:MINS):
This required field specifies the beginning time for the time period during which the notification is valid for the
indicated days.
End Time (HRS:MINS):
This field specifies the ending time for the time period during which the notification is valid for the indicated
days. Time is configured in 24 hour periods. It would require two records to accomplish notification from
10:00 pm to 6:00 am; one configured for 10:00 p.m. to 11:59 p.m. and one configured for 12:00 am to 6:00 am.
Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday
These fields specify the days of the week on which notifications can occur. Y indicates that the notification is
performed on the indicated day during the time period specified by Begin Time and End Time fields.
I&M
?
71
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
PARAMETERS
The Setup Parameter screen defines how Notify will function on the system. This includes how often Notification
will be active (Idle Wait timer), the time between events for all Users to be notified within that cycle of Notification,
the speech path Notification will use if speech files are to be played upon connect, the ability to enable or disable
the trace function for diagnostics and the definition of the default Class of Services for new Users added to the
system.
USE THE PARAMETERS SCREEN TO:
Enable or disable logging of notification events and specify the output log file.
Enable or disable Notify diagnostic trace and output trace device or file.
Change the default path in which to find Notify system prompts.
Change the default COS numbers to assume when adding a new User ID to the User Directory.
TO ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS
Select NOTIFY
Select PARAMETERS
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
I&M
?
Comments
This field allows for a comment to be entered by the installer.
Idle Wait
This field specifies how many seconds that Notify remains idle after all pending notification attempts have been
processed. During this idle period, notifications are not performed. In a shared channel system, the idle wait
will automatically end if a shared channel becomes available. A reasonable value for this field is between 10
and 120 seconds.
72
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
After Action Wait
This field specifies the number of seconds to wait between notification attempts. This wait period allows other
applications to better access system resources (computing and I/O).
Off-Hook Wait
This field specifies the minimum number of seconds that Notify must wait after going on-hook before going
off-hook again. This helps prevent call collisions with incoming automated attendant calls on a busy system.
Enable Trace?
This field specifies whether or not Notify activity trace information will be displayed during the operation of
Notify. This field should contain "N" unless directed otherwise by Technical Support personnel. This field can
also be changed with the SETNTFY program Or by typing NTFYTON.
Trace Output Dev
This field specifies the name of the file or device to which diagnostic trace output is sent. Trace information
may be sent to a file (i.e. D:TRACE.LOG), a printer (i.e. LPT1), a second PC via the serial port (i.e. COM1) or
the screen (*). Do not change the value of this field except under the strict supervision of Technical Support
personnel.
Append to Log?
This field specifies whether notification logging information is generated. Notify logging information is not the
same as Notify trace information. The purpose of logging information is to record the times and dates of Notify
startups and notification attempts. This field should not be changed without consulting a certified Perfect Voice
technician.
Log File Name
This field specifies the name of the file or device to which log information is sent. This field should not be
changed without consulting with Technical Support.
Speech Path
This field specifies the default path to use for Notify speech files. If no path information is supplied in the COS
action string, this path is assumed.
I&M
Default COS
These fields specify the default COS numbers to assume when adding a new NER to the Notification Event
Record database.
?
Call At Desk COS
This field specifies the default Call-at-Desk type COS number to assume when adding a new User ID to the
User Directory.
Note that this only applies to cases where the Add function (F2) is used to create a record in the User Directory
database. Only then is the Call-at-Desk COS field available in the User ID record. This information is then used
to automatically add an NER to the Notification Event Record database.
MesgWait Lamp COS
These fields specify the default Message Lamp type COS numbers to assume when adding a new User ID to the
User Directory.
Note that this only applies to cases where the Add function (F2) is used to create a record in the User Directory
database. Only then is the MesgWait Lamp COS field available in the User ID record. This information is then
used to automatically add an NER to the Notification Event Record database.
Call Pager COS
This field specifies the default Call Pager type COS number to assume when adding a new User ID to the User
Directory.
73
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
AUDIO
This section of the Installation and Maintenance manual deals with the audio boards installed in the system, whether
the boards are VP4E II or Rhetorex boards. Options in this menu include a real-time monitor of the status of each
channel on the system, a utility to display the status of the audioboard, use of the audio editor to edit speech files
and utility to test the audio board.
I&M
?
74
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
MONITOR
The Monitor utility (STATS) provides real-time status information about the audio channels in a system. The
information is obtained by observing the internal data structures of the audio device driver. It is independent of the
actual audio applications that are loaded in the system.
STATS runs in 100K of memory in the foreground of a PC. The PC must be running MSDOS 5.0 or higher and must
have the audio device driver loaded and initialized. To place a minimal impact on the system being monitored, STATS
keeps DOS and BIOS interrupts at a minimum.
USE THE MONITOR SCREEN TO:
Obtain a real-time display of channel activity on the system, using the STATS program.
TO ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS
Select AUDIO
Select MONITOR
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Copyright (c) 1991-1994. All rights reserved.
Elapsed: 0:00'00" 1-18-1996 Thu 1:37:09p Screen 2 of 3
00 a onhk .... 44 ... ...... 891141499v .... .... ..2. ......( 0:01'00")
01 a onhk .... 44 ... ...... RR^v R^v ^v .... .... ..2. ..................
02 a onhk .... 44 ... ...... 4143##vR^v .... .... ..2. .....( 0:06'00")
03 a onhk .... 44 ... ...... 414141419v .... .... ..2. .....( 0:09'00")
I&M
04 a onhk .... 44 ... ...... ^6660SvR^v .... ....
..2. .....( 1:06'00")
05 a onhk .... 44 ... ...... 111490vR^v .... .... ..2. .....( 1:06'00")
06 a onhk .... 44 ... ...... 113#99vR^v .... .... ..2. .....( 22:51'00")
07 a onhk .... 44 ... ...... 0vRRR^vR^v .... ....
..2. .....( 1:53'00")
08 a OFFH .... 44 h16...... 6152199vR^ play 11/eof File? unavail.rms
?
09 a onhk .... 44 ... ...... 0SvR^SvR^v .... .... ..2. .....( 0:01'00")
10 a OFFH .... 44 h16...... ^vR^313911 PLAY 16/23 File: MUMESG2 .RMS
11 a OFFH .... 44 h16...... 1122141112 play 6/eof File? 00006136.nam
12 a onhk .... 44 ... ...... 29411190Sv .... .... ..2. .....( 0:01'00")
13 a onhk .... 44 ... ...... ^vR^vR^68v .... .... ..2. .....( 0:01'00")
14 a onhk .... 44 ... ...... 11410SvR^v .... .... ..2. .....( 0:03'00")
15 b onhk .... 44 ... ...... 445#0SvR^v .... .... .... .....( 0:13'00")
41 c .... ... ... ......v.... .... 0... ..................
42 b .... ... ... ...... .......... .... .... ..2. .................. x
43 a .... ... ... ...... .......... .... .... 0... .................. x
Channels:19 %Missed:0 Playback: 4 0 5 Record: *OK*
irq2:<----------> idle:<->--------> dskR:<----------> dskW:<---------->
75
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
The above STATS screen, when accessed through the Monitor option of the Audio menu, is the same as typing the
command STATS 99 from a DOS prompt. The use of the <PgDn> and <PgUp> keys will move among the three
available display screens.
The following keys may be used at any time while viewing the STATS screens.
<PgDn> to advance to next display screen
<PgUp> to backup to previous display screen
<Esc> to exit program
<Enter> to redraw the screen
<Home> to start with first channel
<End> to end with last channel
<up>
to start one channel up
<down> to start one channel down
<left> to reduce display one channel
<right> to increase display one channel
<?>
to toggle status line display type
<@>
to enable/disable speaker sounds
<$>
to enable/disable slow optimization
<all others> ignored unless fake mode enabled.
If using a color display (CGA/EGA), the color codes are:
White /Blue -
Overall display colors
Black /White - System Statistics
Brown /Blue -
Channel inactive on-hook idle
I&M
White /Blue -
Channel active on-hook idle
Cyan /Blue -
Channel active on-hook NOT-idle
White /Magenta -Channel active, off-hook, playing file or waiting
?
White /Red -
Channel active, off-hook, CPM enabled, not dialing
Black /Cyan -
Channel active, hanging-up (end-of-call)
Black /Red -
Channel active, off-hook, recording
Black /Green - Channel active, is dialing and CPM enabled
Black /Brown - Channel active, is dialing but CPM not enabled
The top line of the screen contains the display title. The second line shows (1) elapsed time since STATS was
started, (2) the current date and time, and (3) the current screen number.
The speaker sounds have two modes: general and per-channel. In general mode, the speaker is "clicked" every time
a disk sector is transferred to the hard disk (except SCSI). Actually, the speaker is "pushed out" when the disk led
goes ON, and is pulled in when the disk led goes OFF.
76
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
In per channel mode the speaker will:
(a) double beep when "fake" mode enabled/disabled.
(b) single beep when a "fake" function is pressed (see below).
(c) be ON while CPM "TONE" or "talk" is detected.
(d) be ON briefly when a RING or WINK is detected.
Time fields have two different display formats, absolute and relative. Absolute time is time-of-day and is typically
displayed in conjunction with the date. Time-of-day has the format hh:mm:ss, "hh" is hour, "mm" is minute, and
"ss" is second.
Relative time formats display elapsed time since some event occurred. The format is xxd,hh:mm'ss". xx is the
number of days, hh is the number of hours, mm is the number of minutes, and ss is the number of seconds.
Examples are 5:10'22' or 2d,10:35'27" or 3'22"
The bottom line of the screen has four status lines.
scanners (default) - This is four activity scanners.
nothing (ANSI mode) - This is useful for remote access.
disk activity counters
special debugging information
The bottom of the screen contains 4 scanners. On a color display, the label is brown, the data is black, and
background blue.
irqh:<--<-------> this arrow moves one step (left or right) every time an interrupt is received on the audio driver
IRQH from the audioboard.
idle:<---->-----> this arrow moves one step (left or right) for every 18 per-channel status tests. On an idle system,
this moves so fast that it flickers.
dskR:<||--------> exponential scale (1,2,4,8,...) of number of disk sectors (512 bytes) that the BIOS actually read
from or written to a hard disk. The bar farthest to the right indicates the maximum value over the
past 2 seconds. This field is not used with SCSI disks, since SCSI disks do not use the standard
I&M
BIOS functions.
dskW:<|||-------> exponential scale (1,2,4,8,...) of number of disk sectors (512 bytes) that the BIOS was requested
to read or write. The bar farthest to the right indicates the maximum value over the past 2
seconds. The difference between "hdsk" and "disk" is the cache hit ratio. If disk cache reads a
?
track at a time, then "hdsk" could exceed "disk". Also, sectors read or written from EMS or RAM
disk are NOT included.
The disk activity counters contain the following information:
BIOS Disk Reads
number of sectors/number of requests = average BIOS
Disk Writes
number of sectors/number of requests = average
Hard Disk Reads
sectors requested+sectors NOT requested/seeks = avg
Hard Disk Writes sectors requested+sectors NOT requested/seeks = avg amount of elapsed time that the
hard disk "lamp" was ON.
The STATS utility may also be invoked from a DOS prompt. The basic command format is STATS n x. Where
"n" is an optional numeric parameter and "x" is an optional numeric parameter with its meaning dependent upon the
option selected. The options for "n" are:
97
system channel summary display
98
RCPT channel detail display
99
system channel detail display
77
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
AUDIOCHANNEL SUMMARY DISPLAY
The "summary" display is a more graphical display of the audioboard status. It has one line per audioboard and
shows the board number of each board. This allows simultaneous display of 40 audio channels. If the board is
installed, it will fill in the channel number of each of the channels on the audio board. It will also display activated
virtual channels (if any). On a per-channel basis, the following is displayed:
Field 1> Channel number
Field 2> on-hook normal video, off-hook reverse video
Field 3> Audio action status
"Play"
=> audio output is active
"Dial"
=> a dialstring is being dialed
"Call"
=> after dialing, waiting for a pattern match
"Ring"
=> after dialing, rang and waiting for answer
"Recd"
=> recording is active
"Time"
=> none of above, but timers are active
"Wait"
=> On-hook and no timers are active (wait RING/DTMF)
"...."
=>channel is idle, or no activity
Field 4> Audio input status
"white happy face" means CPM disabled and TONE detected
"black happy face" means CPM enabled and TONE detected
"diamond" means a DTMF tone was detected
"#"
=> ring voltage in last 500ms (just detected)
"1...9"
=> in ringing cycle (8sec), after nth ring
"="
=> in ringing cycle (8sec), after 10th ring
I&M
"R"
=> not in ring cycle, phone not answered
Field 5> Program name of application owning this channel
(if debug enabled then this is hex PSP number and "H if handler assigned, "S" if stack assigned).
(lowercase if on-hook, UPPERCASE if off-hook)
?
0 00 ....
01 .... #
02 Time
03 .... rcpt
notify
rcpt
RCPT
1 04 .... rcpt 05 Recd
06 Play
07 .... vpfax
RCPT
AFORM
2 08
09
10
11
3 12
14
14
15
irqs:<--<-------> idle:<->--------> dskR:<|---------> dskW:<||---|---->
78
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
AUDIOCHANNEL SINGLE CHANNEL TRACE
To obtain a single channel (non-display mode) trace, type STATS c. Where "c" is the channel number to trace.
Valid channels are 0 through 27 and 32 through 43. To exit STATS, press the <Esc> key. To trace to a log file
use the DOS indirection mode. For example, to trace channel 2 to file CHAN2.LOG, type:
STATS 2 >CHAN2.LOG.
The value "96" can also be specified. This provides a single channel trace as above, but will "scan" for the next
channel that changes from "ON-HOOK" to "OFF-HOOK". The channel scan is performed at (1) program startup,
(2) when current channel returns to "ON-HOOK" state, or (3) whenever the <space> bar is pressed.
A single line is output every time a change occurs in any of the fields. The output format consists of the following
information:
Field 1> Audio channel number (00-43)
Field 2> Hook Status
" onhk "
=> channel is on-hook
"*onhk*"
=> channel has just CHANGED to on-hook
" OFFH "
=> channel is off-hook
"*OFFH*"
=> channel has just CHANGED to off-hook
Field 3> Ring voltage flag
"#"
=> ring voltage or wink detected in last 500ms
"1...9"
=> in ringing cycle, after nth ring
I&M
"="
=> in ringing cycle, after 10th ring
"R"
=> not in ring cycle, phone not answered
"."
=> not ringing
?
Field 4> CPM audio input status. This has three subfields:
a) "<T>" if currently tone, " s " if currently silence
b) Driver actual duration of CPM tone/silence. If this is a change then either "nnnT" or "nnns" of
previous tone or silence. If not a change then "... ". If CPM was reset or a tone/silence was missed,
then "nnn?".
c) Computed duration of cpm tone/silence. If this is a change then either "nnnT" or "nnns" of previous
tone or silence. If not a change then "nnn " of current tone or silence. (This only works with driver
17APR91 or newer) This subfield is only reported if computed is different then actual.
Field 5> Current threshold setting (if physical channel). If CPM enabled OR recording is active this is the "high"
threshold setting of the board; otherwise, it is the "low" threshold setting. If not a physical channel, then
"..."
79
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
Field 6> CPM pattern match status /CLASS
"d1 "
=> CPM on,after dialing, but no ringback (/TYPE=6)
"d2 "
=> CPM on,after dialing, ringback (/TYPE=6) matched
"d4 "
=> CPM on,dialing OR after dialing AND pattern other then TYPE=6
"g8 "
=> CPM on, not dialing AND not output AND not record
"h16"
=> CPM disabled
"r32"
=> not dialing and RECORDING is on
"raw"
=> CPM on in RAW (not pattern) mode
"..."
=> CPM disabled AND on-hook AND not dialing
Field 7> CPM pattern match status /TYPE
"......"
=> no status available (no pattern matched)
"DIALTN"
=> last pattern was dialtone
/TYPE=4
"BUSYSG"
=> last pattern was busy signal /TYPE=5
"RINGBK"
=> last pattern was ringback /TYPE=6
"ANSWER"
=> last pattern was answer /TYPE=7
"HANGUP"
=> last pattern was hangup /TYPE=16
"REORDR"
=> last pattern was reorder /TYPE=128
"GRUNTD"
=> last pattern was grunt /TYPE=129
"NOGRNT"
=> last pattern was silence /TYPE=130
"CLICKD"
=> last pattern was click/retry /TYPE=131
"GDMESG"
=> last pattern was good message /TYPE=132
I&M
"strtup"
=> cpm started, but tone/silence not determined yet
"sil>6s"
=> channel has been silent for more then 6 seconds
"wt-raw"
=> RAW mode CPM will be enabled at <EOO>
?
"wt-pat"
=> pattern mode CPM will be enabled at <EOO>
Field 8> This is the last 8 DTMF tones received
Field 9> New DTMF Flag.
"n"
=> new DTMF(s) and DTMF_ACTION is NO_ACTION
"x"
=> new DTMF(s) and DTMF_ACTION is STOP_ACTION
" "
=> no new DTMF tones received
"z"
=> no new DTMF tones AND buffer contains null character
80
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
Field 10>Driver IO status
"...."
=> no audio is active
"RECD"
=> recording is ACTIVE to file
"RBUF"
=> recording is ACTIVE to buffer
"PLAY"
=> Speech files being loaded (before <EOF>)
"play"
=> Speech files (after <EOF> before <EOO>)
"PLSE"
=> Pulse dialing files being loaded (before <EOF>)
"plse"
=> Pulse dialing (after <EOF> before <EOO>)
"DTMF"
=> Tone dialing files being loaded (before <EOF>)
"dtmf"
=> Tone dialing (after <EOF> before <EOO>)
"fill"
=> remainder or buffer being filled with silence
"silo"
=> application requested output of silence
Note: If recording AND playback are active, only recording status will be displayed.
Field 11>If disk I/O is queued on this channel "*". If detected during last 2 seconds then "+", else " ". (This
indicates heavy disk traffic, and possible overruns.)
Field 12>This field has a variable format.
a) If recording is on, this shows the number of seconds recorded and the maximum length of recording in
seconds
b) Or if file is being played (before EOF) this shows the play position and file size in seconds
I&M
"pppp/ssss".
c) Or if file is being played (after EOF) this shows the length of file in seconds "nnnn/eof "
d) Or this shows Active timer status. Shows which timers (0-3) are active and Out-dialing Status
?
"...."
=> dialing is not active
"dial"
=> a dialstring (number) is being dialed
"wait"
=> waiting to dial a dialstring
"abrt"
=> dialing has aborted (file too big or not found)
"wtrb"
=> number has been dialed, no ring-back heard
"wtan"
=> number has been dialed, ring-back detected
Field 13>Elapsed time in hours:minutes'seconds"tics (if DEBUG and driver 01SEP91 or newer, this field is
elapsed time since last hook change). Tics are displayed as 00-17 with the assumption of exactly 18 tics
per second.
81
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
Field 14>If a file name or dialstring is in use, then a second line appears. Audio output source during buffer loading
a) "buffer=xxxxxxxx" hex address of buffer
b) "EMSbuf=xxxxxxxx" hex offset of EMS filename
c) "EMSm= NNNNNNNN.XXX" filename being loaded from EMS
d) "File= NNNNNNNN.XXX" filename being loaded from disk
e) "File= (not known)" a file being loaded from disk
f) "File= ?nnnnnnnn.xxx" last filename loaded from disk
g) "Dial= ddddddddddd" dialstring being dialed
h) "Dial= ?dddddddddd" last dialstring dialed
Note: Forms (f) and (h) are the LAST one played. And this field is NOT cleared by HANGUP or EMS output.
So beware that this may show a file or dialstring that is old and no longer valid. This is typically indicated
by a '?' character.
I&M
?
82
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
CALLER SIMULATION MODE
While STATS is running, it is also possible to simulate caller actions, such as CPM and DTMF. This is only
available with 18APR91 driver and later, and on channels that are activated in transaction mode. The audio driver
has NO knowledge of these transactions, and hence, will not display the results. However, STATS does keep track
of these and pretends that the driver did see these actions.
To ENABLE, enter "!Cnn" where nn is the two digit channel number (00,01,...43) to send transactions to the
channel. A double beep will sound if simulation is activated and a high-low tone will sound when it is deactivated.
And if in display mode, the channel number will blink while activation is on. To DISABLE enter "Q".
To ENABLE and ACTIVATE a channel enter "!Ann" where nn is the two digit channel number to be activated. If
a virtual channel is specified, then the next available virtual channel will be selected. To DEACTIVATE a channel
enter "!Dnn".
WARNING! Simulation allows STATS to tamper with the audio channel and the functions of applications. While
none of these actions should impact system performance, they may cause hang ups or incorrect functioning of the
application.
With STATS ENABLED and a CHANNEL ACTIVATED in ANY mode, you may press the keys below to
perform specified function. To perform a "SEND" function, the channel must be in TRANSACTION mode.
0123456789*#ABCD
SEND a DTMF transaction
.
SEND a DTMF # transaction
,
SEND a DTMF # transaction
I&M
+
SEND a RING voltage (AC pulse)
-
SEND a WINK voltage (reversal/break)
?
<F1>
SEND a HANGUP CPM Type 16
<F2>
SEND a REORDER CPM Type 128
<F3>
SEND a SILENCE CPM Type 130
<F4>
SEND a DIALTONE CPM Type 4
<F5>
SEND a BUSY CPM Type 5
<F6>
SEND a RINGBACK CPM Type 6
<F7>
SEND a ANSWER CPM Type 7
<F8>
SEND a GRUNT CPM Type 129
<F9>
SEND a CLICK CPM Type 131
<F10>
SEND a GOODMESG CPM Type 132
83
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
<Shift+F1>
SEND a Timer 0 expired transaction
<Shift+F2>
SEND a Timer 1 expired transaction
<Shift+F3>
SEND a Timer 2 expired transaction
<Shift+F4>
SEND a Timer 3 expired transaction
<Shift+F5>
cancel Timer 0
<Shift+F6>
cancel Timer 1
<Shift+F7>
cancel Timer 2
<Shift+F8>
cancel Timer 3
<Shift+F9>
(unused)
<Shift+F10>
(unused)
<Ctrl+F1>
Clear DTMF input buffer
<Ctrl+F2>
place channel ON-hook
<Ctrl+F3>
take channel OFF-hook
<Ctrl+F4>
toggle hook setting
<Ctrl+F5>
Perform 110 ms flash (if Off-hook)
<Ctrl+F6>
Perform 165 ms flash (if Off-hook)
<Ctrl+F7>
Perform 495 ms flash (if Off-hook)
<Ctrl+F8>
Perform 770 ms flash (if Off-hook)
<Ctrl+F9>
(unused)
<Ctrl+F10>
(unused)
<Alt+F1>
Disable CPM ("LOW" threshold)
<Alt+F2>
Enable CPM pattern mode ("HIGH"threshold)
I&M
<Alt+F3>
Enable CPM raw mode ("HIGH" threshold)
<Alt+F4>
SEND a CPM "raw tone" transaction
<Alt+F5>
SEND a CPM "raw silence" transaction
?
<Alt+F6>
Cancel Output/playback
<Alt+F7>
SEND an End-of-file transaction
<Alt+F8>
SEND an End-of-output transaction
<Alt+F9>
Cancel Recording
<Alt+F10>
SEND an End-of-recording transaction
/
Pause until next character pressed
Note: Setting <Num Lock> ON, allows keypad to work as dial pad.
84
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
AUDIOBOARD
USE THE AUDIOBOARD SCREEN TO:
Display information on the device driver version number.
Display a status line for each audio board found in the system
TO ACCESS:
Select SCREENS
Select AUDIO
Select AUDIOBOARD
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS:
Copyright (c) 1991-1994. All rights reserved.
-------- System Information Report ----- 4-18-1996 Thu 1:36:58p --------
** Audio Driver Version KV31OCT95
Brd Port Memory Microcode
Status Rng Cpm 0lo 0hi 1lo 1hi 2lo 2hi 3lo 3hi
---- ----- ----------
-------------- --------
----- ------ ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
0 35F CC00 KV04JUL95 ACTIVE 4 11 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 115
1
35E CC00 KV04JUL95 ACTIVE 4 11 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 115
2 35D CC00 KV04JUL95 ACTIVE 4 11 44 115 44 44 44 44 44 44
3 35C CC00 KV04JUL95 ACTIVE 4 11 44 115 44 44 44 44 44 115
--- ----- ------- ---------------- ---------- -- ------ --- ---- ---- ---- ----- ---- ---- ----
I&M
** Total equipped channels = 16. (Logical channels = 44)
** Driver is using interrupt IRQ2
** Driver active time
= 4d,4:14'06" (6569724 tics)
** Driver startup time = 4-14-1996 Fri 9:22:52a
?
Brd - The audioboard number (0-6,8-10) set by jumper.
Port - The I/O port number assigned to the board.
Memory - The DMA address for the board. Either CC00 or CE00.
Microcode - The version number of the main microcode chip (E-PROM).
Status - The board status (ACTIVE or DEAD).
Rng - The Ring-Voltage Integration value. This is only used with microcode prior to SV01JUN91.
Cpm - The cpm audio integration number.
xlo - The current low cpm threshold for channel x.
xhi - The current high cpm threshold for channel x.
85
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
SPEECH EDIT
USE THE SPEECH EDIT SCREEN TO:
Review and/or edit one or more speech files, using the Audioed utility.
TO ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS
Select AUDIO
Select SPEECH EDIT
I&M
?
COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
Open
Loads in a previously recorded speech file. The speech file is loaded into the topmost unused buffer on the
screen. A total of three speech files may be edited at one time.
Record
If there is an available buffer, and there is an Audioboard and device driver installed, this command will begin
recording on the Audioboard channel. Recording will terminate on silence or when any key on the keyboard is
pressed. The Recording silence time-out and Audioboard channel can be changed in the setup screen (see F4-
setup).
86
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
F1 (Help)
Displays the Help screen for the Speech File Editor as shown below .
F4 (Setup)
Accesses the Setup screen for the Speech File Editor which allows options to be changed. Each option is either
a numeric value or a fixed value. Fixed options are represented by two values separated by a slash. Fixed
options may only be one of the two values listed. To select an option to change, move the cursor to the
appropriate option (by using the up and down arrow keys). To change the value of a fixed option, press the
right arrow to select the right value, or the left arrow to select the left value. For numeric options, simply enter
the new value. Press <ESC> at any time to return to the editing screen with option changes in effect. To save
the changes made to the options so they will be in effect on subsequent Audioed sessions, press F10. F5 will
reset the options to the defaults and F2 will reset the options to the saved values.
Esc
Press the Esc key will quit the program and exit back to Task Manager. If the speech file has been edited,
confirmation of exit will be presented before exit takes place.
SETUP SCREEN
I&M
?
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Audioboard Channel for Play/Rec
Channel used when recording or playing from an Audioboard. If the value is *, then playback is from the PC
speaker.
Recording silence timeout (secs)
When recording into an Audioed buffer, this is the number of seconds of silence which will cause recording to
stop. The default value is 10 seconds.
87
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
Recording maximum duration (secs)
When recording into an Audioed buffer, this is the maximum number of seconds of recording allowed. The
default value is 300 seconds.
DTMF to END recording
This is the DTMF digit that will cause recording to stop. The default is "#".
DTMF to START recording
This is the DTMF digit that will cause record mode to begin. The default is "*".
Default silence threshold
Default threshold used when new buffers are opened. This should be set to the same value as the silence
threshold in the Telephone System setup of System in SCREENS.
Default initial scale
Default scale used when new buffers are opened.
Time format base value
Selects whether time values are displayed in seconds (SEC) or milliseconds (MSEC).
Channel Auto Answer (Play/Rec)
When ON,OFF is selected, the Audioboard channel will automatically go off hook before recording or playing,
and automatically return on-hook when done playing. More control is available by selecting MANUAL line
mode, in which case the channel must be taken on and off hook manually with F7.
Record Prompt Filename
The full filename of the speech file to be recorded.
DTMF to START playback
This is the DTMF digit that will cause the playback of the speech file to begin.
Maximum Buffer Characters
This value sets the maximum number of characters that may be displayed in a buffer.
I&M
?
88
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
A (Analyze)
Turns on a special waveform analyzer which allows you to view the actual waveform of the speech at the cursor
in the current buffer. The analyzer uses the bottom 3/4 of the screen to display 64 bytes of the waveform at the
cursor. This is most useful when the scale is set at 1/64 seconds. The waveform viewed is an approximation of
the expanded speech. The command window will disappear from the screen while the analyzer is on but any
commands may still be used while the analyzer is invoked. Pressing 'A' again or ESC will turn the analyzer
I&M
off.
T (Threshold)
Changes the threshold of the current buffer. The threshold may be a value from 0 to 127. The threshold is the
?
cutoff point in the speech amplitude for how the tone and silence ('N' and '.') characters are calculated in the
speech. The threshold should be set to the same value as the voice threshold in the Telephone System Setup.
S (Scale)
Changes the scale of the current buffer. The scale is the fraction of a second that each speech representation
character ('N' or '.') shows. Values range from 1/1 to 1/128 of a second, with 1/128 providing the most detail.
M (Mark)
Toggles marking on or off in the current buffer. Each buffer has its own mark status, so one buffer can have
marking on the same time another has marking off. When marking is on, moving the cursor will define a
section of speech that is marked. Various editing functions can be used on the marked speech.
U (Unmark)
Unmarks a contiguous block of marked speech under the cursor, and turns marking off if it is on.
89
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
P (Play)
Plays the current buffer on the playback channel of the Audioboard if an Audioboard and device driver are
installed. Any key may be pressed to terminate playback early. If playing on an Audioboard, playback will
begin at the current position of the cursor. The cursor will follow along the speech displayed on-screen while
playing. P may be pressed to pause the playback.
L (Play)
Plays the current buffer through the PC speaker. Any key may be pressed to terminate playback early. If
playing on an Audioboard, playback will begin at the current position of the cursor. The cursor will follow
along the speech displayed on-screen while playing. P may be pressed to pause the playback.
W (Write)
Writes the contents of a buffer to a speech file.
B (Write)
Writes the contents of a buffer to an empty buffer.
D (Delete)
Deletes the current buffer. If the buffer has changed since it was originally loaded, then prompting for
verification will occur. This command will not delete the speech file on disk, only the buffer inside Audioed.
Delete Marked (Alt D)
Deleted the marked speech of the current buffer.
Unmark buffer (Alt U)
Unmarks the entire current buffer.
Play Marked to channel (Alt P)
Plays the marked speech of the current buffer out an audioboard channel (see Play).
Play Marked to speaker (Alt L)
Plays the marked speech of the current buffer out on the PC speaker (see Play).
I&M
Write marked to file (Alt W)
Writes the marked portion of the current buffer to a speech file, or to an empty buffer.
Write marked buffer (Alt B)
Writes the entire buffer to a speech file, or to an empty buffer.
?
Insert Buffer ([,])
Turns insert mode on and prepares the current buffer to be inserted into any buffer at any point. While in insert
mode, the portion of speech that is to be inserted will flash on the screen, and the cursor can be moved to the
desired buffer and insertion point. Sets the insertion point for the buffer before "[" or after "]" the bracket.
Pressing <Esc> while in insert mode will abort the insertion with no action.
Insert Marked (<,>)
Turns insert mode on and prepares the current marked speech to be inserted into any buffer at any point. While
in insert mode, the portion of speech that is to be inserted will flash on the screen, and the cursor can be moved
to the desired buffer and insertion point. Pressing '<' or '>' will insert the flashing portion of speech before or
after the cursor, respectively. Pressing <Esc> while in insert mode will abort the insertion with no action.
90
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
F2 (Open)
Loads in a previously recorded speech file. The speech file is loaded into the topmost unused buffer on the
screen. A total of three speech files may be edited at one time.
F3 (Delete)
Deletes the current buffer. If the buffer has changed since it was originally loaded, then prompting for
verification will occur. This command will not delete the speech file on disk, only the buffer inside Audioed.
F4 (Edit Setup)
Goes into the Setup screen for the Speech File Editor which allows options to be changed.
F7 (On/Off Hook)
Toggles the Audioboard channel between on and off hook. Users who are playing and recording speech files
through a telephone system and telephone can greatly speed up their work using the Audioboard line mode
setting in conjunction with the F7 command. When Audioboard line mode is set to ON/OFF, each time a
speech file is played or recorded, the Audioboard channel will automatically first go off hook before playing or
recording, and then go back on hook when the operation is complete. When using a telephone system and
telephone, the user must typically set up an extension to the audioboard channel, and dial that extension with
the telephone each time they want to play or record. This can become tedious if many audio operations are
being performed. Instead, the user can switch Audioboard line mode to manual, and then go off hook only
once, at the beginning of the session, and then go back on hook at the end of the session (by using the F7
command.)
F8 (DOS)
Goes into a temporary DOS shell so that DOS commands may be typed. Audioed will remain resident in the
background. To return to Audioed from the DOS shell, type "exit" and press the <Enter> key.
F9 (Zoom)
Toggles zoom mode between on and off. When zoom mode is off, the area above the command window is
partitioned into three sections each capable of displaying one speech file. When zoom is turned on, the area
which normally displays three buffers is used to display only the current buffer. This allows more of the speech
file to be viewed if the file cannot be entirely displayed in one window.
I&M
F10 (Redraw Screen)
Repaints the screen. This is useful if the screen becomes corrupted by other receptionist-type applications
running in the background that print to the screen.
?
Esc (Quit)
Exits Audioed and returns to DOS. If a file has been modified, Audioed will prompt for verification if any
work has not been saved.
91
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
As an example of the file editing procedure, the following steps would be used to edit the custom speech file
TEST.SPH. To open the buffer as shown above, type O for the Open command from the initial Audioed screen. A
line will appear at the bottom of the screen requesting the name of the speech file to open. Type
D:\MESG\TEST.SPH and press the <Enter> key. Audioed will open the previously recorded speech file
TEST.SPH.
I&M
The large area at the top of the screen is used to display speech files that are being edited. Notice that TEST.SPH
has now been loaded into buffer A as shown above. Note there is plenty of space left in the middle of the screen.
This space can be used to edit up to two more speech files (buffers B and C), simultaneously. Double bar divider
lines separate these three buffers.
?
The buffer consists of a statistics line and a representation of the digitized speech contained in the buffer. The
statistics line is the first line of the buffer and identifies the speech file name in the buffer. Also in the statistics line
is the buffer letter (either A, B, or C) which is useful for cutting and pasting speech between buffers. The rest of the
buffer contains asterisks, equal signs and dots. These characters correspond to tone and silence in the actual
digitized speech according to the threshold setting of the buffer. The speech file TEST.SPH contains the phrase:
"Hello, This is a test of Audioed"
The resulting pattern of characters are:
(A)
D:\MESG\TEST.SPH 5120
+0:00'00.625"
.........=SSSSSS----SS=S=S---==S=--SS=SSSSSSSSSSSSSS---.......................
92
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
The characters correspond to the voice (tone) and silence in the phrase to give a representation of the phrase. The
scale determines how much speech one character represents. The default scale is 1/16 second or 16 characters for 1
second of speech. The scale can be changed with the Scale command. Press S to change the scale. Audioed will
ask for the new scale on the status line at the bottom of the screen. There is a wide range of values to choose,
ranging from 1/1 to 1/128 seconds. Type 64 and then press the <Enter> key. This will change the scale to 1/64
second for each character and changes the buffer display at the bottom of the screen. This gives a much finer
resolution for viewing the speech. The speech file now appears at 4 times greater detail than before. This will allow
for 4 times greater precision when editing.
(A)
D:\MESG\TEST.SPH 5120
+0:00'00.625"
.........=SSSSSS----SS=S=S---==S=--SS=SSSSSSSSSSSSSS---.......................
(A)
D:\MESG\TEST.SPH
5120
+0:00"00.625"
...........................................===SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS
SSSS======SSSS=====SSS=S====SSS=========SSSSSSS=
==SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS=SSSSSSS=SS
SSSSSS..............................................................
Difference Between 1/16 Scale and 1/64 Scale
Notice that the cursor is blinking on the first character of the speech representation in buffer A. This indicates the
buffer being edited. The cursor can be moved with the four arrow keys, and the <Home> and <End> key on the
keypad. The <End> key moves the cursor to the end of the buffer, and the <Home> key moves the cursor to the
beginning of the buffer. Press P (Play) to play the speech in the buffer. The speech file will play from the channel
selected in setup if an Audioboard is connected to a speaker and an amplifier on that channel. If an Audioboard is
not connected, the speech file will play from the PC speaker at a somewhat lower quality.
Simple cutting and pasting may now be performed. Creating a separate speech file that only contains the word
I&M
"Hello" can be done with the Mark and the Write-marked (Alt-W) command. Start with TEST.SPH which contains
the phrase: "Hello, this is a test of Audioed". By viewing the speech representation and from hearing the speech
play, it appears as if the first group of N's and asterisks make up the word "Hello". Press M to turn marking on, and
move the cursor to the right until that section is highlighted. Press M again, to turn marking off. The marked speech
may now be manipulated in various ways. First of all, it may be played with the Play marked command (Alt-P) to
?
make sure it says "Hello". If not enough of the section was marked to include the word "Hello", additional speech
can be marked with the Mark command. If too much was marked, start over by using the Unmark command. Once
the correct amount of speech is marked, write it to a new speech file by pressing Alt-W and typing HELLO.SPH
followed by the <Enter> key. A new speech file has just been created! To verify this, use the Open command to
load HELLO.SPH into buffer B.
With more than one buffer open at a time, the PgUp and PgDn keys are used to move between buffers. For
example, to change the speech file TEST.SPH so that it said "Hello Hello, this is a test.", insert another "Hello"
after the first "Hello", and then delete the words "of Audioed" at the end of the buffer. To do the insert, press M
(Mark) and mark the speech file. Press PgUp to move up to buffer A, and move the cursor after the first "Hello",
and press '[". Now buffer A has two Hello's at the front. Play it again to verify. To delete the words "of Audioed",
move to the end of the speech file and mark the last section. Use Alt-P to play the marked section of buffer A to
verify that it is the words "of Audioed.". If it is correctly marked, press Alt-D (Delete marked). That is all there is
to it! Marking and Insertion with a combination of other commands is used to perform cutting and pasting of
speech with Audioed. Note that any changes in any buffer must be written to a file name to be saved before exiting
from Audioed. If changes are not saved before exiting, the utility will prompt for confirmation of exit without
saving.
93
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
To save buffer A, press W (Write). Audioed will verify the filename. A new file name may be typed in the field or
just press <Enter> to save it under the same name TEST.SPH. The file can also be written to another buffer, for
example, buffer C. To write to buffer C, use the B command.
Familiarization with the commands of Audioed will allow for precision editing of custom speech files. These files,
once recorded, may be manipulated to removed silence, remove unwanted sounds (such as the replacement of a
handset in the cradle, or piecing speech together to create a new file).
TECHNICAL TERMS
Audioboard - a PC board which can physically connect to a telephone system to allow the PC to run one or more
interactive voice response applications. The audioboard has special hardware for playing digitized speech files.
Buffer - Memory allocated to Audioed which contains either a portion of speech or a complete speech file.
Channel - A telephone port on an audioboard. The basic physical unit of system capacity for voice response
systems.
Current buffer - The buffer that is being edited. The statistics line at the top of the current buffer will be
highlighted, and the cursor will display in the speech of the buffer.
Device driver (AUDIO.EXE) - Software (installable device driver) which allows application software to interface
with audioboards.
Insert mode - An intermediate mode where Audioed is waiting for the user to press '<', '>', or <ESC> to insert a
flashing piece of speech.
Off hook - The state of a telephone line when the receiver is in use and sound may travel through the line.
On hook - The state of the telephone line when the telephone is hung up and not in use.
Speech file - A file which contains digitized speech or sound which a Audioboard can record and playback in an
interactive voice response application.
Statistics line - The top line in an Audioed buffer, which contains information about the buffer.
I&M
?
94
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
BOARD TEST
USE THE BOARD TEST SCREEN TO:
Determine the level of compatibility between the computer and an installed audioboard
Gather performance benchmarks for the computer and an installed audioboard
TO ACCESS
Log in to SCREENS
Select AUDIO
Select BOARD TEST
WARNING: Do not use this program except under the strict supervision of a qualified, certified technician.
Running this program on a live system could result in system failure.
I&M
?
95
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
SYSTEM
The System section of the Installation and Maintenance manual refers to the configuration of the Perfect Voice
system and how it functions in relation to the telephone system. The topics include the activated channels on the
Perfect Voice system and how they will function, how the telephone system will interface or integrate with the
Perfect Voice, details on configuring IBS or SMDI integration between the Perfect Voice system and the telephone
system, explanation of the configuration of the hardware key, definitions of the Fax delivery options, and defining
outbound calling parameters for Fax delivery.
I&M
?
96
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
CHANNELS
The Channel Setup menu defines how many channels are active on the system, what applications run on each
channel and what language each channel will function in when going off hook. Please note that any changes to the
channels will not take effect until the next reboot of the system.
USE THE CHANNELS SCREEN TO:
Add a channel to the system.
Remove a channel from the system.
Change or review the default language for a channel.
View the extension number associated with a channel.
TO ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS
Select SYSTEM
Select CHANNELS
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
I&M
?
Channel Number
This field specifies a unique identifier for this Perfect Voice channel.
Description
This field specifies a description of how this channel is used. This is not a required field.
97
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
Extn/Access Number
This field specifies the telephone system extension number to which this channel is connected.
Telephone Sys Type
This field specifies the Line Type from the Telephone System Setup database to use for this channel. This is
usually set to 0, the index of the only record in the Telephone System Information database.
Dialplan Instance
This field specifies the instance number to assume after answering a call. This controls which User IDs are
available to the caller immediately after the call is answered.
Language Instance
This field specifies the language instance number to assume after answering a call. If this field is non-blank, the
language parameters of this instance are used. The language parameters include all instance parameters except
for those related to the DIALING PLAN (screen 2 of 4 in Instance Setup).
NetwrkIN Instance
This field specifies the dialplan instance number to assume when Receptionist receives an inbound Network
call. This overrides all parameters on the Dialplan Instance field. This field is only valid for channels which
are assigned to Receptionist. This allows, on a per-channel basis, for voice calls to be directed differently than
Network calls.
Channel Usage
This field specifies which application or applications are assigned to the channel. Valid applications are
described below.
Unassigned
(2) Channel not assigned to any standard applications.
Rcpt+AMIS
(3) Channel shared between Receptionist and AMIS. After terminating an
outbound call, control of the channel returns to Receptionist.
Notify ONLY
(4) Channel dedicated to Notify functions only.
Rcpt+Ntfy+AMIS (5) Channel shared among Receptionist, Notify and AMIS. After terminating a call,
I&M
Notify and AMIS return control of the channel to Receptionist.
Notify & Rcpt (6) Channel shared between Notify and Receptionist. After terminating a call, control of
the channel returns to Notify. If ring is received on this channel, control of
the channel is passed back to Receptionist.
?
Rcpt ONLY
(7) Channel dedicated to Receptionist functions only.
Rcpt + Ntfy
(8) Channel shared between Receptionist and Notify. After terminating a call, Notify
returns control of the channel to Receptionist.
Rcpt + Remote
(9) Channel shared between Receptionist and Remote. Allows Receptionist to
directly pass the call to Remote Access. After terminating a call, control of
the channel returns to Receptionist.
Begin BLK (HR:MIN)
This field allows blocking of OUTBOUND NETWORK (AMIS) calls during a period of the day. This period
is defined with a BEGIN and an END time. Use of this field allows for dynamic allocation of channels for
outbound dialing without impacting incoming calls.
The time is specified in international time as either HOUR:MINUTE in 24 hour format (00:15 or 13:30) or as
HOUR:MINUTE AM/PM in 12 hour format (12:15 am or 1:30 pm). A blank field defaults to 00:00 (12:00
am). If the BEGIN BLK and the END BLK fields are the same, outbound blocking is disabled. Blocking can
cross midnight (i.e., 22:00 to 06:00)
98
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
End BLK (HR:MIN)
This field allows blocking of OUTBOUND NETWORK (AMIS) calls during a period of the day. This period
is defined with a BEGIN and an END time. Use of this field allows for dynamic allocation of channels for
outbound dialing without impacting incoming calls.
The time is specified in international time as either HOUR:MINUTE in 24 hour format (00:15 or 13:30) or as
HOUR:MINUTE AM/PM in 12 hour format (12:15 am or 1:30 pm). A blank field defaults to 00:00 (12:00
am). If the BEGIN BLK and the END BLK fields are the same, outbound blocking is disabled. Blocking can
cross midnight (i.e., 22:00 to 06:00)
SMDI - LTN Number
If Integration is enabled for this channel, set this field to the LTN or telephone system extension of this channel.
This is REQUIRED for SMDI services, and optional for IBS integration. For SMDI systems, setting this field
to blank (or to an invalid value) will disable integration on this channel. You can use the SMDI setup options to
display data packets, LTN information, or to setup this field.
New Call Training
If this field value is set to "Y", then callers will be prompted (TRAINING.RMS) to enter a digit after the
Greeting plays, but before the Whattodo plays. This feature is used to "train" the audioboard for dial-pulse
detection. Note: Only the Rhetorex audioboard can support pulse detection. The default setting is "N".
Ring Group Number
This field allows for support for telephone systems that use ring groups instead of hunt groups. All channels
assigned to the same ring group on the telephone system should be defined as the same ring group on the
Perfect Voice system. Up to three ring groups can be supported. The available ring group numbers are 1,2 and
3. If access is direct or with hunt group ringing, then this field must be left at the default setting of 0.
Ring to Answer on
This allows delayed answer. The value specifies which logical ring to answer on. A value of 1 answers on the
first ring, a value of 2 answers on the second, etc. Be sure that the RING CYCLE and RING MULTI
parameters are set correctly in the Telephone System setup parameters. If the telephone system sends double
ring or triple ring, this can count as a single ring or a multiple ring depending on RING CYCLE and RING
I&M
MULTI. For integrations that send data BEFORE the first ring (Sopho or 3100), set this value to 0 to answer on
receipt of data.
ON-hook Idle Time
When a channel is on-hook (in RCPT), this parameter determines how often housekeeping and channel sharing
?
and Network Dialing functions should be performed. Typically this is 30 or 60 seconds on channels shared
between RCPT, AMIS, and NOTIFY, and 120 seconds on channels dedicated to RCPT only. This also
determines how often AMIS Outbound calling is checked.
99
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
TELEPHONE SYSTEM
The Telephone System parameters define how the Perfect Voice system will communicate with the telephone
system. The parameters which must be addressed include thresholds, DTMF duration, timers for notify and the
automated attendant, dialstring needed to transfer calls and to return from transfers as well as dialstring and access
codes the Perfect Voice must use for outbound dialing and notification.
USE THE TELEPHONE SYSTEM SCREEN TO:
Change or review the default transfer type for the system.
Change or review the default number of seconds for the automated attendant to ring a User's extension.
Disable or enable wait-for-dialtone.
Change the call processing dialstrings, including those for MWI notification and de-notification.
Change the local and long distance trunk group access codes for message notification.
TO ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS
Select SYSTEM
Select TELEPHONE SYSTEM
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
I&M
?
100
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
Line Type Number
This field specifies a unique identifier for this phone system (usually 0).
Description
This field describes the name and model of the telephone system.
Line Type Name
This field specifies the 8 character name associated with this telephone system. This field cannot be edited. It
is only informational.
CPM THRESHOLDS
Hang-up
This field specifies the sensitivity setting to use during hang-up detection. This setting should be the same as
that listed in the C:\RCPT\RCPT.CFG file.
Voice Recording
This field specifies the sensitivity setting to use while recording messages. This setting should be the same as
that listed in the C:\RCPT\RCPT.CFG file.
Tone (Dialing)
This field specifies the sensitivity setting to use while supervising a call transfer. This setting should be the
same as that listed in the C:\RCPT\RCPT.CFG file.
Grunt Detection
The sensitivity setting used during grunt detection. This setting should be the same as that listed in the
C:\RCPT\RCPT.CFG file. For more information on grunt detection, consult the section entitled Advanced
Administration in this manual.
DTMF DURATIONS
Silence
This field specifies the minimum detection duration during silence. All DTMF tones shorter than this time will
be ignored.
I&M
Prompt Playback
This field selects the minimum DTMF duration, in milliseconds, for DTMF detection during system prompts
and personal greetings. All DTMF tones shorter than this time will be ignored.
?
Message Playback
This field specifies the minimum detection duration during message review or message playback. All DTMF
tones shorter than this time will be ignored.
Recording
This field specifies the minimum detection duration during recording. All DTMF tones shorter than this time
will be ignored.
TIMERS
Off-hk Dialtone
This field specifies the maximum time in seconds that the system waits to detect dialtone after going off-hook
to perform outdialing.
Xfer Dialtone
This field specifies the maximum time in seconds that the automated attendant waits to detect dialtone after
placing the caller on hold, but before dialing the User's extension.
101
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
Deflt Xfer Type
This field specifies the Transfer Type to assume for a User if that User is configured for a Transfer Type of
D. The following is a list of valid transfer types.
A Supervise all calls and wait for Answer (default). Only release call on Answer.
B Supervise all calls, return to calling party if busy, blind transfer if ring.
H Blind transfer all calls. Release immediately after dialing extension #.
T Supervise all calls, complete transfer only upon DTMF tone from called party.
P Use the setting specified in the Telephone System Setup database. (Used for LAP).
V This is used for overhead paging and for phone systems that allow an optional call park location.
Ntfy Exten Wait
This field specifies how long the system will wait for an answer when notifying a User of new messages with a
Call-At-Desk notification class of service. This is used in the action string variable $(LIN:TRYING). Setting
this field to 0 disables wait for answer.
Xfer Exten Wait
This field specifies the number of seconds to wait for an answer when supervising a call to a User whose Xfer
RNA seconds field is set to 0. If the User's Xfer RNA seconds field is set to a non-zero value, this field is
not used.
Park Exten Wait
This field specifies the number of seconds to wait for an answer when supervising a call to a User whose Park
RNA seconds field is set to 0. If the User's Park RNA seconds field is set to a non-zero value, this field is
not used.
Scrn Exten Wait
This field specifies the number of seconds to wait for an answer when supervising a call to a User whose Scrn
RNA seconds field is set to 0. If the User's Scrn RNA seconds field is set to a non-zero value, this field is
not used.
I&M
SYSTEM TIMERS
Ring Volt Cycle
?
This field specifies the maximum number of seconds to wait after receiving a ring, before resetting ring count.
This is used with delayed answer (See CHANNEL SETUP ring wait). If the telephone system sends a ring
(voltage pulse) every 4 seconds, set this to 5. The typical values are 1-10 seconds.
Ring Volt Multi
This field specifies the number of seconds to ignore (additional) rings after receiving a (first) ring. This is used
with delayed answer to count double or triple rings as a single logical ring (See CHANNEL SETUP ring wait).
If the telephone system sends <RING>+1second+<RING>+4seconds, set this to 2 (one second longer then the
shorter delay). The typical values are 0-10 seconds, and NOT longer then RING CYCLE seconds.
Flash (S) Time
This field specifies the duration in milliseconds of a switch-hook flash or "S" dialstring character. This value
should be the same as that found in the C:\RCPT\RCPT.CFG file. If this value is set to 0, then Receptionist will
not adjust the flash time, and will use the current value, typically from RCPT.CFG. Flash time is set in 55
millisecond increments, and accuracy is + or - about 10 milliseconds.
102
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED)
With Call Screening:
BEFORE DIALING EXTENSION
Trying (No WAIT)
This field specifies the dialstring used by Perfect Voice to place a caller on hold and try the extension of a User.
This parameter only applies to Users with Call-Screening enabled. Note that this dialstring is not used if the
"Wait for Dialtone" feature is enabled. See the notes in the configuration file, RCPT.CFG, for information on
the value of this field. Do not change this field from the recommended value except under the strict supervision
of Technical Support.
Dial Tone Wait
This field specifies the dialstring used to place a caller on hold and wait for transfer dial tone. This parameter
only applies to Users with Call-Screening enabled.
Dial Tone Received
This field specifies the dialstring used to call the User's extension after successfully detecting dial tone during a
I&M
call transfer. This parameter only applies to Users with Call-Screening enabled.
No Dial Tone Return
This field specifies the dialstring used to regain a connection with the caller in the event that dial tone was not
detected during a call transfer. This parameter only applies to Users with Call-Screening enabled.
?
AFTER DIALING EXTENSION
No-Answer Return
This field specifies the dialstring used to regain a connection with the caller in the event that the User did not
answer the telephone a call transfer. This parameter only applies to Users with Call-Screening enabled.
Busy Return
This field specifies the dialstring used by Perfect Voice to regain a connection with the caller in the event that a
busy signal was detected during a call transfer. This parameter only applies to Users with Call-Screening
enabled.
Hang-Up Return
This field specifies the dialstring used by Perfect Voice to regain a connection with the caller in the event that
the User, as part of the Call-Screening process, rejects the call and hangs up.
Connect on Answer
This field specifies the dialstring used by Perfect Voice to connect the caller to the User in the event that the
User, as part of the Call-Screening process, accepts the call. There are three available options: H=Hang up;
H0=Do not release the call without IBS hang-up or quick hang-up code (Example 998); H1=Hang up and play
speech file connect.rms on answer.
103
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
No Call Screening:
BEFORE DIALING EXTENSION
Trying (No Wait)
The field specifies the dialstring used by Perfect Voice to place a caller on hold and try the extension of a User.
This parameter only applies to Users with Call-Screening disabled.
Dial Tone Wait
The field specifies the dialstring used to place a caller on hold and wait for transfer dial tone. This parameter
only applies to Users with Call-Screening disabled.
Dial Tone Received
The field specifies the dialstring used to call the User's extension after successfully detecting dial tone during a
call transfer. This parameter only applies to Users with Call-Screening disabled.
No Dial Tone Return
This field specifies the dialstring used to regain a connection with the caller in the event that dial tone was not
detected during a call transfer. This parameter only applies to Users with Call-Screening disabled.
AFTER DIALING EXTENSION
No-Answer Return
This field specifies the dialstring used to regain a connection with the caller in the event that the User did not
answer the telephone and a busy signal was not detected during a call transfer. This parameter only applies to
Users with Call-Screening disabled.
Busy Return
This field specifies the dialstring used to regain a connection with the caller in the event that a busy signal was
detected during a call transfer. This parameter only applies to Users with Call-Screening disabled.
Blind Transfer
This field specifies the dialstring used to complete a call transfer after dialing the extension of a User whose
I&M
Transfer Type evaluates to "H". It is also used to complete a call transfer after dialing the extension of a User
whose transfer type evaluates to "B" and ringback is detected. This field is typically set to the dialstring, "H".
Connect on Answer
This field specifies the dialstring used by Perfect Voice to connect the caller to the User in the event that an
?
answer is detected while transferring a call to a User with Call Screening disabled.
104
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED)
Outbound Dialing and Notification
OUTSIDE/CO CALLS
Intercom Dialtone
This field specifies the dialstring used to access the telephone system's intercom dialtone. This is typically set
to the shortest pause dialstring character, "X".
Local Access prefix
This field specifies the dialstring character used to access a local trunk or trunk group for outdial notification.
This is typically set to the dialstring character, "9".
LDist Access prefix
This field specifies the dialstring character used to access a long distance trunk or trunk group for outdial
notification. This is typically set to the dialstring character, "9" or "9Z1".
I&M
LDist Access suffix
This field dialstring is used to dial a suffix to a trunk call. This is typically an accounting code required after a
toll call is dialed. This can be used in Notify COS Action Strings with $(L:ACNT).
?
Intnl Access prefix
This is the dialstring used to dial the trunk access code to obtain Central Office dialtone so that an international
telephone number can be called. For most telephone systems in the US, this is "9Z011" or "8Z011". For many
European countries, this is "0Z0".
Intnl Access suffix
This field specifies the suffix to be dialed after dialing an international telephone number. Usually this is an
account number or a credit card number which typically would contain one or two Z's used as pauses.
INTERNAL NOTIFICATION
Message Waiting ON
This field specifies the dialstring used to enable message waiting indicators (MWI). This field usually specifies
the dialstring used to turn on message waiting lamps or stutter dialtone for this telephone system. The "@"
symbol is substituted with the dialstring specified by the Extension field of the User ID record.
105
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
Message Waiting OFF
This field specifies the dialstring used to disable message waiting indicators (MWI). This field usually specifies
the dialstring used to turn off message waiting lamps or stutter dialtone for this telephone system. The "@"
symbol is substituted with the dialstring specified by the Extension field of the User ID record.
Call At Desk
This field specifies the dialstring used to call a User after detecting intercom dial tone. This applies to Call-at-
Desk notification classes of service only. The "@" symbol is substituted with the dialstring specified by the
Extension field of the User ID record. This field usually only contains only this character, although some
telephone systems require an additional digit to disable hands-free answer.
CALL CONTROL
Ring/Offhook
This is the dialstring to be used upon receiving an incoming ring and going off hook.
Overhead/PBX Paging
This field specifies the dialstring needed on the telephone system to perform paging (overhead or handset)
notification.
Park1 Call on Exten
This field specifies the code to park call at extension (used for local area paging LAP).
Park2 + Page on Exten
This field specifies the code to park and page call at extension (used for overhead paging). This is limited to
low volume applications since only one station at a time may access paging.
Park Busy Return
This field specifies the dialstring to return to caller if park is busy (recall).
Park Pickup/Answer
This field specifies the dialstring to pickup the parked call (answer).
I&M
Primary Serial Link
This specifies the primary SMDI type. Some telephone systems have two different SMDI types. For example,
Toshiba has a standard SMDI and a proprietary SMDI. During Quick Setup, if there is a primary and/or
?
alternate SMDI type, you will be given the option to set-up SMDI. If there is no primary or altenrate, you do
not get that option.
Alternate Serial Link
This specifies the secondary SMDI type. See above.
106
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
IMPORTING AND EXPORTING TELEPHONE SYSTEMS
Telephone system parameters
may be imported or exported
from the BROWSE screen using
the F10 and F12 function keys.
These functions are only
available from the BROWSE
screen.
The Configurator/SMDI diskette
included with the system
software contained a zipped file
with all the American telephone
systems currently supported.
The files on this diskette were
installed during the installation
process and are stored in the
RCPT/CFG directory on the hard drive of the system. Telephone systems may be imported from the hard drive or a
diskette.
IMPORTING TELEPHONE SYSTEMS
Following is an example of importing a telephone system:
From SCREENS, select System then select Telephone System
From the BROWSE screen (shown above), press the F10 key
I&M
?
Press N if the desired telephone system is on the hard drive. You are then prompted to Enter LINE TYPE to
IMPORT. All supported telephone
systems are pre-loaded; however the
pop-up menu displays only 20
telephone systems.
You may scroll through and select one of the telephone systems from the pop-up menu using the
Home
Home and End keys keys on the keyboard.
If the correct telephone system is not listed in the pop-up menu, refer to the Appendix for a
complete listing of available telephone systems that work Perfect Voice. From the list, enter the
End
corresponding "Quick Setup Code".
107
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
Press Y to import the telephone system parameters. You are prompted to Enter LINE TYPE to IMPORT.
Enter Line Type to import. You prompted to verify the import.
Press Y to Import Now. You are prompted to verify the overwrite.
Press Y to overwrite the existing line type. You are asked if you wish to apply to all channels.
I&M
?
In this example, we selected N. You are prompted to import call progress settings.
NOTE: You may not want to overwrite the call progress settings. If you are unsure, press N. The file may be
moved or re-imported at a later time. In this example, we selected Y. You are prompted to verify that you wish
to overwrite existing file.
108
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
You are prompted to verify integration. The integration screens depend on the telephone system being
imported.
After you verify/select the integration, the telephone system import is complete.
EXPORTING TELEPHONE SYSTEMS
The primary use of the Export function (F12) will probably be to update Engineering with new telephone systems.
Following is an example of exporting a telephone system:
Press F12.
You are then prompted to Enter LINE TYPE to EXPORT.
Enter the desired line type to export. You are asked if you want to export now.
I&M
You will be prompted to export call progress settings and the integration template. The telephone system
export is then completed.
?
109
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
INTEGRATION
Integration enhances the level of communication between Perfect Voice and the telephone system and results in
more efficient use of both systems. Callers and Users of an integrated voice messaging system find it easier to use
and more intuitive than non-integrated systems.
In an integrated configuration, the telephone system is programmed to be "aware" that a voice messaging system is
connected to it. As far as the telephone system is concerned, the Perfect Voice extensions are no longer single line,
analog, stations but voice processing ports. Calls directed to Perfect Voice are accompanied by information from
the telephone system about the source and status of the call. For example, this information may tell Perfect Voice
that the call was forwarded from a ring-no-answer extension as well as from what extension it was forwarded. This
allows Perfect Voice to place the caller into the appropriate state and the caller immediately hears that person's
personal greeting.
Another advantage of voice messaging integration with some telephone systems is apparent when a User calls
Perfect Voice from their desk. The phone system provides Perfect Voice with information about the calling party's
extension number and the fact that it is a direct call. Typically, Perfect Voice will be programmed to immediately
prompt the User for his password since the caller most likely wants to go into User mode.
There are a variety of methods for integrating telephone systems with Perfect Voice. Some telephone systems offer
no integration at all while others offer only minimal information. The two most common methods of integration
include in-band signaling (IBS) and out-of-band signaling (OBS).
IN BAND SIGNALING
In a telephone system that supports IBS integration, sequences of DTMF digits (integration strings) are sent to
Perfect Voice by the telephone system. For example, a call may be forwarded from extension 201 to Perfect Voice
if that extension did not answer. Soon after Perfect Voice answers, the telephone system provides the DTMF tone
sequence, *41*201. Please remember, this is a hypothetical case. This sequence of "*41*" is referred to as pilot,
or steering digits and indicates the call was forwarded under a ring-no-answer situation. The next three digits
I&M
indicate the extension number of the called party. Perfect Voice would interpret the digits appropriately and play
User 201's personal greeting.
Most IBS integration digit strings are sent soon after Perfect Voice answers a call. IBS digits indicating a hang-up
can be sent at any point during the processing of the call. Perfect Voice responds to this signal, terminating the call
?
as quickly as possible, thus freeing up the port for other calls.
The level of IBS integration that is available is determined by the telephone system manufacturer and model. For
example, some telephone systems are able to distinguish whether a forwarded call is a no answer or a busy situation
and then provide this information to Perfect Voice, while other phone systems do not. Some phone systems offer
information about whether the call originated from outside the telephone system or from the station side, while other
phone systems make no distinction. It is important to understand these differences and what type of IBS
information will be available to the Perfect Voice system.
"SIMPLE" IBS
Simple IBS is similar to more conventional IBS in that the call information comes in the form of sequences of
DTMF digits. However, unlike conventional IBS, simple IBS only offers the extension number of the station from
which the call was forwarded. No steering or trailing digits accompany the User's extension number. This can make
it difficult to distinguish between an extension number entered by a person wanting to be transferred to that person's
extension and one entered by the telephone system as part of a normal integrated call. However, if properly
configured, Perfect Voice will operate correctly.
110
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
OUT-OF-BAND SIGNALING
With a configuration using OBS, information about a call is sent as a packet of character data to Perfect Voice over
a serial link (RS-232). Using this data packet, Perfect Voice places the call into the appropriate state. Like IBS, the
information contained in the data packet specifies the calling and/or called party's extension number and the reason
for the call. Unlike IBS, this information may be sent just before or just after Perfect Voice receives the call.
With OBS, all packets come over the same physical, serial link. The data in the packet also contains information
which associates it with a particular channel. In addition to answering the call, Perfect Voice checks to see if there
is an incoming packet associated with that channel. Once the packet is identified, other information about the call
can be obtained. Because OBS is data passed over a serial link, the format of the information can vary. The most
common format of OBS signaling is Simple Message Desk Interface (SMDI).
SMDI INTEGRATION
Most central offices and some larger telephone systems offer serial ports that can provide information in SMDI
format to Perfect Voice. Although other telephone systems may not offer a direct SMDI link, the information can be
generated by a third party device that performs set emulation or protocol conversion.
Direct Link: A serial link from the telephone system is the most straightforward method of achieving SMDI
integration. For example, the Intecom S/80 telephone system has a serial interface that provides SMDI packet
information to Perfect Voice. All that is needed is the physical cable to connect the two. Most central offices are
also equipped to provide SMDI information through Centrex, or Essex, service. Since the actual telephone
switching equipment is located far from the Perfect Voice system, this link is accomplished with a dedicated modem
link.
Protocol Converter: Sometimes, the telephone system generates information that is not in SMDI format. In these
situations, an external device called a protocol converter may be used to convert the proprietary information from
the telephone system into SMDI format which the Perfect Voice is able to interpret.
Set Emulation: Some telephone systems do not provide a serial interface at all. In these situations, the information
needed to construct an SMDI packet may be obtained from a digital set interface. Integrated calls are sent directly to
a digital set extension. This station is controlled by a device that is capable of reading information in the display of
the digital set and operating the set. Information about the call received is obtained by reading the display and the
I&M
call is transferred to a Perfect Voice extension. An SMDI packet, whose contents are based on the information read
from the display, is generated and sent to Perfect Voice over the serial link of the set emulator.
?
111
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
USE THE INTEGRATION SCREEN TO:
Modify current IBS or SMDI integration parameters.
Add new integration parameters after a telephone system upgrade.
Create a new integration file.
TO ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS
Select SYSTEM
Select INTEGRATION
The RCPT.ITF file identifies the type of integration of the system and defines either the IBS or SMDI parameters
which control the integration. "I" or "S" may be entered to create a new IBS integration file or SMDI integration
file respectively.
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS (IBS INTEGRATION)
I&M
?
112
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
IBS INFORMATION
Input file name
This field contains the name portion of the integration file, specified in the previous screen. This field should
only be changed if a new integration file is being created.
Description
This field describes the integration file. It typically contains the name of the telephone system for which this
integration file is used.
Greeting Delay
This field specifies the amount of time to wait after answering a call before playing the greeting. Setting this to
a non-zero value may improve IBS packet detection for IBS-integrated calls.
No Integration TMO
This field specifies the maximum amount of time allowed for the telephone system to send IBS integration
information after Perfect Voice answers a forwarded call. After this time elapses, Perfect Voice only interprets
IBS packets that indicate a hang-up. All other IBS packets are interpreted as caller-entered information.
IBS Interdigit
This field specifies the maximum time between digits within an IBS integration packet.
ET/UIL Ack Wait
This field specifies the maximum amount of time to wait for an acknowledgment from the phone system after
answering a call, but before playing the greeting. This field only applies to systems utilizing ET-1000
integration.
Delivery Mode
This field specifies the way that integration from the telephone system will be delivered. There are two ways: it
can be delivered, either BEFORE the channel goes OFF-HOOK (answers) or AFTER the channel goes OFF-
HOOK. Typically, most IBS integrations are OFF-HOOK, then integration DATA. There are a few
exceptions: Reverse IBS - Philips Sopho, European Caller ID,
I&M
?
113
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS (IBS INTEGRATION)
Index
This field is used only to sequence the IBS packet definitions. Upon first entering Edit mode, Perfect Voice
numbers the packet index for each packet as 10 greater than the previous. The actual packet number simply
specifies the order in which the packets are read by Perfect Voice, with the most commonly received packets
appearing early in the sequence. To insert a new packet definition between two others, specify an index
between that of the other two packets. Teleco ships all Perfect Voice systems with the appropriate integration
file in the RCPT.ITF for the telephone system.
Type
This field specifies the integration packet type. Following is a list of the available integration packet types and
the state associated with each. Setting this field to BLANK will DELETE the pattern.
I&M
(DID) General Options:
GRE The call is sent to the main system greeting.
?
WHA The call is sent to the menu that plays after the system greeting.
(DID) Options for USERMODE access:
999
The caller hears, "Please enter your User code." This is equivalent to the caller entering the
System Access Code (999 by default) from the main system greeting or whattodo.
SEC
The caller hears, "Enter your password.." The requested password is the one associated with the
caller's extension. This is the equivalent to the caller entering the System Access Code (999 by
default), followed by his User Code. This normally only occurs when a User has dialed the
Perfect Voice system directly from the station side of the telephone system.
LGI
This logs the caller directly into either the default User mode (which is SEC, see above) or if the
default is LGI with a LGI code it will log the caller in without prompting for a password.
Naturally, this is for non-standard applications only where security is not an issue. Depends on
USER setting of LGI Action (m,p). (GRE,WHA,999,SEC,LGI,99H,SEH,LGH).
114
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
(DID) Options for "take message" only:
997
The caller hears, "To leave a message, enter the person's extension now." This is equivalent to
the caller entering the Direct Message Code (997 by default) from the main system greeting or
whattodo.
MSG The caller hears, "You have selected . . . ," followed by the User's name file, followed by, "Leave
your message at the tone." The User is assumed to be the one associated with the extension
from which the call was originally forwarded. This is equivalent to the caller entering the
Direct Message Code (997 by default), followed by the User's extension. This usually occurs
when a caller has been forwarded to Perfect Voice in a ring-no-answer situation.
MSI
The same as MSG, but the caller is calling from an internal extension.
(DID) Options for direct to User ID:
EXT
The caller hears the User's personal greeting and, if eligible, is asked to leave a message. The
User is assumed to be the one associated with the extension from which the call was originally
forwarded. This usually occurs when an external caller has been forwarded from a User's
extension to Perfect Voice in a ring-no-answer situation.
DEX
This is identical to the EXT state.
OPR
Same as EXT, but the caller is prompted for the User ID (like 996), then told to hang up.
BEX
The caller hears, "You have selected . . . ," followed by the User's name file, followed by, "That
extension is in use. To leave a message, press 1. To hold, press 2 . . . etc." The User is
assumed to be the one associated with the extension from which the call was forwarded. The
caller hears options that are the same as if the call was supervised and Perfect Voice detected a
busy signal.
BIN
This is identical to the BEX state but the caller is calling from an internal extension.
I&M
(DID) Options for direct to User ID Message:
UVx
Direct to personal greeting number "x" of User ID if the specified personal greeting has not
?
been recorded, then the default personal greeting will be used. If the personal greeting is
number 0, or the personal greeting has not been recorded, then the default system greeting will be
used. If messaging is enabled for this User ID, then a message will be taken.
(DID) Custom options for some integrations:
END Invalid DID information. End call immediately. (Philips,vm calling vm,AT&T System 25)
DID Use originate(m,p) information as destination. Treat caller-id as DID destination.
(IBS DID) DTMF Exclusion patterns:
LED All IBS integration must begin (lead) with one of the DTMF's specified in the pattern. If the
first DTMF is not one of these, then this DTMF is NOT part of IBS, and is a user dialed digit.
NOT This is NOT an IBS pattern, and must have been dialed by caller.
Note: SMDI does NOT use DTMF exclusion patterns.
115
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
(IBS HANGUP) Options for end call and disconnect:
HAN Perfect Voice hangs up, terminating the call, while not dialing.
HXX Perfect Voice hangs up, terminating the call, anytime. Use this if IBS is sent while caller is on
HOLD. (Toshiba)
HND Perfect Voice hangs up, terminating the call, with DTMF blocking. Use this if IBS must be
intercepted and blocked. ( Iwatsu, AT&T System 25, TIE, Onyx, Win)
HAL Hangup Detected - DRIVER LEVEL. This enables low (driver) level detection of HANGUP.
This overrides and IBS hangup parameters in RCPT.CFG. If the driver detects this pattern, it will
send a WINK transaction to the application. This is used to provide IBS hangup for applications
like AFORMS, NOTIFY, AUDIOED, and VPFAX.
Note: Hangup is ALWAYS IBS, even for SMDI configurations.
(IBS DID) Custom options for some integrations:
UBU Caller was busy, with ET-1000 protocol (n). Play Busy options.
URN Caller did not answer, with ET-1000 protocol (n). Play current personal greeting.
MID User ID Check, with MATRA protocol (n). Acknowledge and hangup.
IGN Ignore this pattern, AND do not pass these digits to RCPT.
(IBS DID) Progress DTMF Tones:
IDT
Telephone system returned a DTMF for dialtone.
IBY
Telephone system returned a DTMF for busy.
IRE
Telephone system returned a DTMF for reorder.
IND
Telephone system returned a DTMF for Do-Not-Disturb.
I&M
IRB
Telephone system returned a DTMF for Ringback.
IBR
Telephone system returned a DTMF for Ring or Busy.
IAN
Telephone system returned a DTMF for Answer.
?
INA
Telephone system returned a DTMF for No-answer.
IXX
Ignore DTMF patterns.
Pattern
This field specifies the integration patterns sent to the Perfect Voice system by the telephone system. The
DTMF digits or SMDI data within the pattern define in which state the call will be placed.
116
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS (SMDI INTEGRATION)
Input file name
This field contains the name portion of the integration file, specified in the previous screen. This field should
only be changed if a new integration file is being created.
Description
This field describes the integration file. It typically contains the name of the telephone system for which this
integration file is used.
Greeting Delay
This field specifies the delay between going off-hook and the playback of the GREETING. Set this to 0 to
immediately play GREETING at off-hook. If GREETING starts to play before integration is received, then set
this to the number of tics to delay. For ON-HOOK IBS and most SMDI, set this to 0. For all other integrations,
set this to the longest time it takes to receive integration information after going off-hook
I&M
No Integration TMO
This field specifies determines how long (in tics) Receptionist will wait for an SMDI packet, before giving up.
For Ericson MD-110 SMDI, this timer starts at OFF-HOOK, for all other SMDI, this timer starts at receipt of a
RING. NOTE: Setting this to 0 enables DIAGNOSTIC MODE, and Receptionist will prompt for SMDI input
from the PC KEYBOARD and NOT from SMDI SERVICES (COM port driver).
?
Hangup Interdigit
This field sets the maximum amount of time, in tics, that Receptionist will wait between Hangup DTMF digits
received. This field is typically kept as short as possible, since this minimizes the chance of treating caller
dialed digits as HANGUP. This field is typically set to 9 (500 milliseconds). Note, if one pattern is a subset of
another, an Inter-digit time-out is required for the shorter pattern to match. For example, if patterns "*999" and
"*9" are defined, then "*9" will require an Inter-digit time-out in order to match.
SMDI Re-check
Receptionist will check for an SMDI packet every time a RING is detected. Receptionist can ALSO check for
a packet every "n" tics. Set this to 0 to only check on RING. Set this to 18 to check for a packet once every
second and on every RING. the maximum amount of time to wait for an acknowledgment from the phone
system after answering a call, but before playing the greeting. This field only applies to systems utilizing ET-
1000 integration.
Delivery Mode
This field specifies the way that integration from the telephone system will be delivered. There are two ways
that integration from the telephone system can be delivered, either BEFORE the channel goes OFF-HOOK
(answers) or AFTER the channel goes OFF-HOOK. Typically, most SMDI integrations are integration DATA,
then OFF-HOOK. There are a few exceptions: Reverse SMDI- Ericsson MD110.
117
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS (SMDI INTEGRATION)
Type
This field specifies the function code describing the receptionist action that is performed when the
corresponding pattern string is matched. Setting this field to BLANK will DELETE the pattern.
(DID) General Options:
GRE The call is sent to the main system greeting.
WHA The call is sent to the menu that plays after the system greeting.
(DID) Options for USERMODE access:
999
The caller hears, "Please enter your User code." This is equivalent to the caller entering the
System Access Code (999 by default) from the main system greeting or whattodo.
I&M
SEC
The caller hears, "Enter your password.." The requested password is the one associated with the
caller's extension. This is the equivalent to the caller entering the System Access Code (999 by
default), followed by his User Code. This normally only occurs when a User has dialed the
Perfect Voice system directly from the station side of the telephone system.
?
LGI
This logs the caller directly into either the default User mode (which is SEC, see above) or if the
default is LGI with a LGI code it will log the caller in without prompting for a password.
Naturally, this is for non-standard applications only where security is not an issue. Depends on
USER setting of LGI Action (m,p). (GRE,WHA,999,SEC,LGI,99H,SEH,LGH).
(DID) Options for "take message" only:
997
The caller hears, "To leave a message, enter the person's extension now." This is equivalent to
the caller entering the Direct Message Code (997 by default) from the main system greeting or
whattodo.
MSG The caller hears, "You have selected . . . ," followed by the User's name file, followed by, "Leave
your message at the tone." The User is assumed to be the one associated with the extension
from which the call was originally forwarded. This is equivalent to the caller entering the
Direct Message Code (997 by default), followed by the User's extension. This usually occurs
when a caller has been forwarded to Perfect Voice in a ring-no-answer situation.
MSI
The same as MSG, but the caller is calling from an internal extension.
118
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
(DID) Options for direct to User ID:
EXT
The caller hears the User's personal greeting and, if eligible, is asked to leave a message. The
User is assumed to be the one associated with the extension from which the call was originally
forwarded. This usually occurs when an external caller has been forwarded from a User's
extension to Perfect Voice in a ring-no-answer situation.
DEX
This is identical to the EXT state.
OPR
Same as EXT, but the caller is prompted for the User ID (like 996), then told to hang up.
BEX
The caller hears, "You have selected . . . ," followed by the User's name file, followed by, "That
extension is in use. To leave a message, press 1. To hold, press 2 . . . etc." The User is
assumed to be the one associated with the extension from which the call was forwarded. The
caller hears options that are the same as if the call was supervised and Perfect Voice detected a
busy signal.
BIN
This is identical to the BEX state, but the caller is calling from an internal extension.
(DID) Options for direct to User ID Message:
UVx
Direct to personal greeting number "x" of User ID if the specified personal greeting has not
been recorded, then the default personal greeting will be used. If the personal greeting is
number 0, or the personal greeting has not been recorded, then the default system greeting will be
used. If messaging is enabled for this User ID, then a message will be taken.
(DID) Custom options for some integrations:
END Invalid DID information. End call immediately. (Philips,vm calling vm,AT&T System 25)
DID Use originate(m,p) information as destination. Treat caller-id as DID destination.
(IBS DID) DTMF Exclusion patterns:
I&M
LED All IBS integration must begin (lead) with one of the DTMF's specified in the pattern. If the
first DTMF is not one of these, then this DTMF is NOT part of IBS, and is a user dialed digit.
NOT This is NOT an IBS pattern, and must have been dialed by caller.
?
Note: SMDI does NOT use DTMF exclusion patterns.
(IBS HANGUP) Options for end call and disconnect:
HAN Perfect Voice hangs up, terminating the call, while not dialing.
HXX Perfect Voice hangs up, terminating the call, anytime. Use this if IBS is sent while caller is on
HOLD. (Toshiba)
HND Perfect Voice hangs up, terminating the call, with DTMF blocking. Use this if IBS must be
intercepted and blocked. ( Iwatsu, AT&T System 25, TIE, Onyx, Win)
HAL Hangup Detected - DRIVER LEVEL. This enables low (driver) level detection of HANGUP.
This overrides and IBS hangup parameters in RCPT.CFG. If the driver detects this pattern, it will
send a WINK transaction to the application. This is used to provide IBS hangup for applications
like AFORMS, NOTIFY, AUDIOED, and VPFAX.
Note: Hangup is ALWAYS IBS, even for SMDI configurations.
119
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
Pattern
This field specifies the integration patterns sent to the Perfect Voice system by the telephone system. The
DTMF digits or SMDI data within the pattern define in which state the call will be placed.
I&M
?
120
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
SERIAL SERVICES
An important factor when installing any SMDI system is the definition of the relationship between the Perfect Voice
channels, the physical extension numbers they are connected to, and the Logical Terminal Numbers (LTN) assigned
to incoming data packets. The relationship between the LTNs and the Perfect Voice channel numbers is defined in
Channels, System. The relationship between the LTN and the physical extension is done through telephone system,
protocol converter, or set emulator programming.
Before beginning an SMDI installation, use the table below to define the relationship. List all the Perfect Voice
integrated channel numbers in the right column and fill in the associated telephone system extension number in the
left column and assign an LTN to each channel accordingly. Note that LTN 0 is not valid; the numbering begins
with 1. Since Perfect Voice channels begin at 0, it is likely that a Perfect Voice channel number will not match its
associated LTN.
Finally, when programming the telephone system, protocol converter, or set emulator use the information from the
first two columns. The LTN and extension number relationship must match that on the worksheet.
Telephone System Extension
Logical Terminal Number (LTN)
Perfect Voice Channel Number
Number of Channel
I&M
?
121
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
USE THE SERIAL SERVICES SCREEN TO:
Set up link or links to serial interface devices.
TO ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS
Select SYSTEM
Select SERIAL SERVICES
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
CONFIGURATION
LAP Xmitter Type
This field specifies the LAP transmitter brand. (0=WaveLinks, 1=Connexions)
I&M
SMDI Protocol Type
This indicates the type of protocol in use on ALL data links (COM ports). This indicates the type of protocol
to use for SMDI services. SMDI (Simple Message Desk Interface) services means some combination of the
following features:
?
CALL Integration - information about incoming calls
MWI Service - set and clear Message Waiting Indicators
Feature Activation - Extension has Enabled/Disabled Feature
Mailbox verification - Check to see if Extension has Mailbox
Date Time - Synchronize PC and Telephone System
Keep Alive - Verify the link is still working
NOTE: SMDR services are typically independent of SMDI services. SMDR (Station Message Detail
Recording) is text (ASCII) data from the telephone system. It is usually in a printer format, output only, and is
delivered after the reported event occurs. Almost all telephone systems provide SMDR call accounting
information. Also, many telephone systems can also use the SMDR port for upload, download, and reporting of
configuration information. (To take advantage of this feature use the TERMINAL ACCESS option from the
MAIN MENU).
If SMDI services are NOT IN USE, then select "*SMDI Not Used". If SMDI services ARE IN USE, select the
protocol from the list. If you change the linktype, you will be asked if you want to select the defaults for the
new protocol. Enter 'Y' (YES) to select default link values, enter 'N' (NO) to keep existing settings. If the new
linktype uses a different TSR, a system reboot will be required for changes to take effect. For more
information, select [F1] HELP from DESCRIPTION field or MODEM SIGNALS field.
122
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
SMDI Comments
This is a general description of the type of SMDI you are using.
SMDI MaxPacket Age
This controls the lifetime of a data packet. If a packet of data is not retrieved within this many ticks, it will be
discarded.
Audio Channel LTN Number (C#00 -- C#23)
An LTN (Logical Terminal Number) is the number that the telephone system will use to reference a specific
voice channel. The numbering sequences for LTNs vary based on the SMDI Protocol type that is specified.
Once you have selected the appropriate SMDI type, edit the LTN field and press F1 for help on how to number
the LTN Audio Channel Numbers. Specifying BLANK denotes NO LTN and NO integration on selected
channels.
I&M
?
123
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
NOTE: Any time you make changes to COM port settings or move a COM port, you may need to do a hard
reboot of the system. (Turn the system off and then turn it back on.)
Enabled Usage
This field selects the protocols to be used on this link. The available options are:
Disabled - Not in service
SMDI only Only used for serial integration
SMDR only - Only used for ASCII Data Collection
SMDI+SMDR Only used if SMDI and SMDR are on the same link
SMDI+LOGB Only used to collect SMDI in a BINARY Collection format for debugging purposes
LOGB only - Only used for BINARY Data Collection
LAP only - Only used for Paging Transmitter
LAP+LOGB - Paging Transmitter and BINARY Collection
I&M
The number of enabled links should be 1 - 4, and each enabled link must have its own COM port. COM ports
cannot be shared.
Be aware that a link has several names:
?
The column on the display screen (LINK A-D). Most systems only enable LINK A.
The number assigned only to ENABLED links (0-3). Most systems only have LINK A enabled for use
with System ID 0.
The PC COM PORT NUMBER (1-4) servicing this link. Most systems use COM1 or COM2.
The assigned link SYSTEM ID for reference (0-99). Most systems use 0.
The number of links supported depends on the Integration type.
COM Port Number
This field specifies the PC COM port to be used for this link. Each Enabled link requires a separate COM port.
Use Option [F10] from VIEW display to determine which COM ports are equipped on this PC. For detailed
information on the COM ports on the PC, use function [F8].
IRQ Number
This field specifies the IRQ number assigned to this COM port. For detailed information on the COM ports on
the PC, use function [F8].
Baud Rate (BPS)
This field controls the data speed of the COM port.
124
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
Parity and Size
This field controls the format of data bytes transmitted and received. This MUST be set to the same values
programmed in the telephone system communications port. The supported options are:
8 bits + No parity + 1 stop (default)
7 bits + Even parity + 1 stop
7 bits + Odd parity + 1 stop
7 bits + Mark parity + 1 stop
7 bits + Space parity+ 1 stop
Check Modem Sigs
This field determines if modem signals (from DCE) are required for normal operation of the link.
XON/XOF Enabled?
This field determines if Xon/Xoff signals are required for normal operation of this link. If the telephone system
SMDR port supports character flow control (XON/XOFF), then set this to 'Y' (YES). If character flow control
is not used, set this to 'N' (NO).
Voice Channel Len
This is the number of digits in a received LTN number.
Rec'd Exten Len
This is the number of digits in a calling party number (ANI or CPID) - not used with the Voice Bridge.
Called Exten Len
This is the number of digits in a called party number (DNIS or CPID) - not used with the Voice Bridge.
System ID Number
Features utilizing a serial link reference this field. Message Waiting Indicators (MWI) reference the number to
identify the link MWI activity is done on. When retrieving call accounting data, this field is referenced.
NOTE: This field should NOT be changed: Link A should remain System ID 0; Link B = 1, Link C = 2, and
Link D = 3.
Channel LTN Type
This field is used to identify if the channel LTN will include different message desk numbers or system link
I&M
numbers along with the standard LTN.
STATISTICAL / ERROR INFORMATION SCREEN
?
The above screen gives statistical and error information. If you need more detail on what the errors or statistics are,
contact Teleco Technical Support.
125
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
FAX SERVICES
USE THE FAX SERVICES SCREEN TO:
Change the fax upload authorization code.
Change the delay between fax delivery attempts and other timers.
Change the dialstrings used to perform Fax-On-Demand functions.
TO ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS
Select SYSTEM
Select FAX SERVICES
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
I&M
Description
This field should be used to describe the type of Fax boards in the Perfect Voice system.
Journaling?
?
If this field is set to "Y", then Fax driver activity will be logged to a disk file. The disk file is named
D:\FAX_Cn.LOG where "n" is the fax channel number of 0 to 7. To VIEW this file, use the function [F10]
VIEW. NOTE: Since this file is not automatically deleted, do not leave journaling on indefinitely.
Use Park/Pickup?
If this field is set to 'Y' (YES), then "SAME CALL" fax delivery will use the telephone system PARK/PICKUP
to transfer the call. Set to 'N' (NO) for call transfers (the default).
Note: the Class 1/Class 2 fax driver (using the remote access modem) requires this field to be 'Y' (YES).
FOD Max Retries
This field specifies the maximum number of retry attempts for Fax-on-Demand callback delivery. Normally this
is set to 3 (3tries). (A setting of 0 is the same as a setting of 1.)
Fax Channels -- Extension
This field specifies the extension number, or numbers, on the telephone system the Fax board ports are
connected to. This data is used for same call send and upload.
126
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
To: prefix
This field specifies the prefix used in the header information on a fax document. The default value is "[". For
example, the left bracket ([) will appear before the extension number or User Name.
To: suffix
This field specifies the suffix used in the header information on a fax document. The default value is "]". For
example, the right bracket (]) will appear after the extension number or User Name.
To: TDD
This field specifies information that appears in the header of TDD fax documents. The default value is
"\TDD".
To: URGENT
This field specifies information that appears in the header of fax documents marked as Urgent. The default
value is "\URGENT".
To: PRIVATE
This field specifies information that appears in the header of fax documents marked as Private. The default
value is "\PRIVATE".
CAS MPX TSR
This specifies the HEX MPX number for access to the CAS compatible Fax driver. This field should be left
blank to specify the default value. Do not change this field from the recommended value except under the strict
supervision of Teleco Technical Support.
NOTE: If you are using a GammaLink fax coprocessor board, F5 (Fix) allows you to edit the
D:\ICAS\BIN\I3LOAD.INI file. If you are using the Class 2 fax modem, it allows you to edit the
C:\UTIL\FAXLOAD.BAT file. Refer to "Fax On Demand" in the Optional Applications section for more
information.
I&M
?
127
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
OUTBOUND CALLING
USE THE OUTBOUND DIALING SCREEN TO:
Define the outdialing rules and parameters for Fax On Demand calls
TO ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS
Select SYSTEM
Select OUTBOUND DIALING
NOTE: Because of the changes in area codes, check the fields on this screen carefully. If you have local 10-digit
dialing, particularly check the Access Control fields.
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
I&M
?
Description
This field typically will contain information about the local city, the local dialtone provider and the long
distance carrier (i.e., Greenville, SC USA. Southern Bell/CTG).
Country Code
This field defines the Country Code for this site and is used to determine if the number dialed is an international
or domestic call. "1" is the Country Code for USA/Canada.
Number Restrictions - International
These three fields define the dialing restrictions for international calls. The first field value specifies the
minimum number of digits in a valid international telephone number. The second field specifies the maximum
number of digits in a valid international telephone number. The third field specifies the digits that are valid as
lead digits in an international telephone number. If the telephone number is too short, too long, of begins with
an invalid digit, it will be rejected and not dialed by the Perfect Voice system. Valid numbers will typically use
the International Access Prefix and Suffix codes from the Telephone System parameters described previously.
128
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
Number Restrictions - Long Distance
These three fields define the dialing restrictions for domestic long distance calls. The first field value specifies
the minimum number of digits in a valid domestic telephone number. The second field specifies the maximum
number of digits in a valid domestic telephone number. The third field specifies the digits that are valid as lead
digits in a domestic telephone number. If the telephone number is too short, too long, or begins with an invalid
digit, it will be rejected and not dialed by the Perfect Voice system. Valid numbers will use the Long Distance
Access Prefix and Suffix codes from the Telephone System parameters described previously. Any specified
Access Control fields will be checked for exceptions to the Number Restrictions.
Number Restrictions - Local Calling
These three fields define the dialing restrictions for local calls. Local calls typically are defined by those calls
made within the same city or calling area. The first field value specifies the minimum number of digits in a
valid local telephone number. In the USA and North America, the minimum should always be set to 7 digits.
The second field specifies the maximum number of digits in a valid local telephone number. The third field
specifies the digits that are valid as lead digits in a local telephone number. If the telephone number is too
short, too long, or begins with an invalid digit, it will be rejected and not dialed by the Perfect Voice system.
Valid numbers will typically use the Local Access Prefix and Suffix codes from the Telephone System
parameters described previously. Any specified Access Control fields will be checked for exceptions.
Number Restrictions - Internal Extension
These three fields define the dialing restrictions for internal, behind PBX/PABX, calls. The first field value
specifies the minimum number of digits in a valid internal telephone number. For most telephone systems, the
minimum is between 2 and 5. The second field specifies the maximum number of digits in a valid internal
telephone number. The third field specifies the digits that are valid as lead digits in an internal telephone
number. If the telephone number is too short, too long, or begins with an invalid digit, it will be rejected and
not dialed by the Perfect Voice system. Valid numbers will be dialed as is with no added Prefix or Suffix and
Access Control fields will be not be checked.
Access Control - Area/City
These fields allow for specific handling of domestic telephone number (i.e., North American Dialing Plan).
This includes same country international calls (Country Code matches), long distance calls and local calls.
I&M
Each entry has an Option type, Length, and Area or City code. The four special Options available to be used
with a specified area or city code are:
X = "Local - Area": This is a local number and the specified area or city code is NOT dialed. For
example, if the Access Control field values are X 10 770 and the telephone number is a 10 digit number
?
that begins with "770", then Perfect Voice will ignore the 770 and the remaining 7 digits will be treated as
a local telephone number and the Access Control fields will then be checked.
A = "Local + Area": This is a local number and the specified area or city code IS dialed. For example, if
the Access Control field values are A 10 404 and the telephone number is a 10 digit number that begins
with "404", the Perfect Voice will include the 404 in dialing, the remaining 7 digits will be treated as a
local number, and Access Control fields will then be checked. Or, as another example, if the Access
Control field values are A 7 664 and the telephone number is a 7 digit number that begins with 664, then
dialing includes the 664, the remaining 4 digits will be treated as a local number, and Access Control fields
will then be checked.
L = "Long Distance": This is a long distance number. For example, if the Access Control field values are
L 10 404664, and the telephone number is a 10 digit number that begins with "404664", then the number is
a long distance number and will be dialed as is without any further checking. Or, as another example, if
the Access Control field values are L 7 664 and the telephone number is a 7 digit number that begins with
664, then the number is long distance and will be dialed without any further checking.
129
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
B = "Call Block": Any telephone number that matches this option are "blocked" and not dialed. For
example, if the Access Control field values are B 10 900 and the telephone number is a 10 digit number
that begins with "990", then the number will be treated as invalid and will not be dialed. For example, if
the Access Control field values are B 7 976 and the telephone number is a 7 digit number that begins with
"976", then the number will be treated as invalid and will not be dialed.
The exact length of the telephone number (excluding County Code) must be entered when the specified Area or
City Code is used. If the telephone number does not match this length, then the Access Control entry will be
bypassed. For USA and North America, the length for Area code entries is 10 and 7 for local exchanges.
I&M
?
130
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
HARDWARE KEY
USE THE HARDWARE KEY SCREEN TO:
Review enabled features for the current hardware key.
TO ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS
Select SYSTEM
Select HARDWARE KEY
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
This screen displays a summary of the enabled features for this system's hardware key. The settings on a hardware
key can only be changed by a Perfect Voice factory representative.
I&M
?
131
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
UTILITIES
The Utilities section defines those functions used to maintain the Perfect Voice system. The Utilities menu option
includes a description of all of the items in the Task Manager menu, setup and maintenance of the Scheduler, setup
and use of Remote Access, changing login passwords and resetting the system date and time.
I&M
?
132
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
TASK MANAGER
USE THE TASK MANAGER SCREEN TO:
Perform a predefined task.
TO ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS
Select UTILITIES
Select TASK MANAGER
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Note that entries to this database can only be added, deleted or edited by a Teleco Technical Support Engineer.
I&M
?
Task Number
This field specifies a unique identifier for this task and is used only to determine the ordering of tasks in
Browse. Tasks are displayed during Browse in ascending Task Number order.
Description
This field specifies a description for this task that appears in the Browse screen. This should clearly describe
the task for the person who might use the task. Avoid unnecessary technical jargon.
133
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
Command Line
This field specifies the DOS command line to execute. Note that for internal DOS commands (such as DIR,
VER, etc.) the command should be specified as "C:\COMMAND.COM /C" followed by the internal
command. The command may also contain references to the working directory and a User-supplied command
parameter (see Working Path and Prompt for Input).
Do not redirect input or output on the command directly. Instead, write a batch file to execute the command
with the appropriate redirection syntax and insert the batch command in this field.
Working Path
This field specifies a parameter that can be substituted for the %0 symbol in the Command Line.
Prompt for Input
This field specifies the prompt for User input for additional command line information. The User's input is then
substituted for the %1 symbol in the Command Line. If this field is blank, the User is not prompted for
additional command line information.
Input Field Width
This field specifies the maximum number of characters allowed for the User's input for this task. A value of 0
in this field defaults the maximum number of characters to the maximum allowed by the Task Manager.
Help Search
This field specifies the search file path for help files. This allows for custom help prompts. If this field is not
blank, then the help provided when this procedure is selected will be searched for in this help file. Valid names
are 1-8 alphanumeric characters.
Authorization
This field specifies the current authorization level.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
These fields specify the authorization levels that are allowed to perform this task.
I&M
?
134
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
OVERRIDE SCHEDULER OR SHUTDOWN SYSTEM
Tasks 100, 110, 120 and 130 allow for manual override of the system scheduler. Task 121 will cause a "graceful"
shutdown of the system by taking channels off hook as they become available.
ADJUST VOLUMES OF SPEECH FILES
Tasks 140 through 210 deal with the db level adjustment of specific custom and system speech files. If DTMF
detection appears to be a problem during the playback of the greeting or whattodo, the files should be adjusted to
the recommended db level through the use of these tasks. Anytime that the custom speech is re-recorded,
adjustment should be made so all custom speech plays back at the same level.
I&M
C
?
REATE A PUBLIC LIST OF ALL USERS
Task 220 allows for the creation of a system wide broadcast list of all Users on the system. If a system-wide
broadcast list exists and Task 220 is used, then the existing list is updated to include any new Users that have been
added to the system since the last update of the broadcast list.
135
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
TDD TASKS
Task 230 through 245 are used for TDD. Tasks 231 through 234 and 241 through 244 will convert ASCII text type
at the prompt to TDD tones that then become a personal greeting/Tbox greeting or audiotext message. Task 240 and
245 append the TDD tones to the whattodo.
CREATE REPORTS
I&M
?
Tasks 250 through 450 will create the specified report selected. After a report is generated, it is displayed on the
screen and written to C:\RCPT. The file name of the report is an acronym of the report description with an .LST
extension. A hard copy of the report may be created in one of two ways:
1. Copy the file from C:\RCPT to a floppy diskette and print from another PC.
2. If a printer is connected to the system, use the print command from the DOS prompt. If a printer connected
to the parallel port with the hardware key still in place, the printer MUST remain on and on-line until
disconnected. A description of the fields in each report is available on the last page of each report.
For a more detailed description of available reports, refer to the System Administration section.
136
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
EDIT TEXT FILES
Tasks 460 through 550 allow for viewing and editing text files on the system. For additional information on editing
the AUTOEXEC.BAT or CONFIG.SYS files, refer to System Startup Files, Advanced Administration. For
additional information on editing the batch files used by the Scheduler, refer to System Administration.
DISPLAY DOS SYSTEM DIRECTORIES
Tasks 560 through 620 will display information on the DOS directories on the system.
I&M
VIEW BOOT INFORMATION OR HISTORY
?
Tasks 630 through 650 will display the information contained in the log files during every reset of the system. The
Lastboot.log file will contain all of the information collected during the execution of the AUTOEXEC.BAT file.
The Pastboot.log contains the information on the previous system reset. The Boot.log file contains the time and
date of every system reset.
137
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
BACKUP OR RESTORE SYSTEM
The above Tasks, 660 through 695, can be used by Perfect Voice systems that are using MSDOS 6.22 as the
operating system. See Backing Up the System, Advanced Administration for more detailed information on backup.
START OR STOP SCHEDULER
Take great care when using these two tasks. If the scheduler utility is stopped, the daily batch files will not execute
and the system will not change mode until the scheduler utility is restarted.
HOSPITALITY USERS: CHANGE SPEECH TO SAY "GUEST ROOM"
I&M
Task 730 is used only with the Hospitality Users. Any time a caller enters digits to reach a User, the system prompt
"User ID" is replaced with the term "Guest Room". The same task is used to return to the term "User ID".
?
CHANGE THE TIME ZONE
Task 750 allows the time zone to be changed according to the location of the installation.
138
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
DISPLAY CACHE SIZE OR MORE DETAILED MEMORY USAGE INFORMATION
Task 760 displays the cache size and the disk caching status of each drive on the system. Tasks 770 through 790
display information on memory usage, the amount of free memory, which programs are resident in memory and
where they reside.
RESET CALL COUNTS
The above two tasks reset the call counts of each User ID to zero. Resetting the calls counts for each User ID is
used when maintaining call statistics for a specific time period.
COPY AMIS NETWORK SITE DATABASE
I&M
Tasks 820 and 830 will copy an AMIS Network Site database and names to and from floppy diskettes. They are
used when creating the network site database.
?
COPY CALL ACCOUNTING DATA AND DELETE OLD SMDR DATA
Tasks 860 transfers SMDR call data to the Call Accounting PC by modem. Task 870 exports the data to floppy
diskette. Task 880 deletes old SMDR data from the Perfect Voice system.
139
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
IMPORT FAX FILES
Task 900 imports a disk file of a fax document into the User ID for Fax-on-Demand.
INSTALL FAX DRIVERS
Tasks 910 through 920 install fax drivers. Reboot the system when task is complete. Refer to Fax-On-Demand in
System Administration for more information on fax setup and fax files.
INSTALL AUDIOBOARDS
I&M
Tasks 940 through 960 convert the system to the appropriate audio board. You must reboot the system after the task
is completed. Refer to the Installation section and the Appendix of this manual for additional information on
Dialogic, Rhetorex and VP4E boards.
?
ADD/DELETE RAMDRIVE.SYS TO/FROM CONFIG.SYS
Task 970-980 will add or delete ramdrive.sys to/from the config.sys file. Reboot the system when task is complete.
LOAD STANDARD SMDI ITF FILE
Task 990 will load the standard SMDI ITF file. Reboot the system when task is complete.
140
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
SCHEDULER
The following information describes how the Scheduler program works and how events are setup in the scheduler
queue. The event queue is the operating basis for Scheduler. An event consists of a command (a DOS command,
batch file, Receptionist utility, etc.) and various scheduling parameters. Items such as date, time, days and
frequency are some of the parameters recognized by the Scheduler. The scheduler queue dictates the Scheduler
operation. The queue is a list of events in their scheduled order. The first event in the queue is the next event to be
executed. When that event is performed, the events in the queue will be rearranged. The event that was second will
now be first, and the one now completed will be repositioned in the queue according to its rescheduling parameters.
If it was a one-time only event, it will be deleted after execution. Anytime an event is executed, added, or deleted,
the queue is rearranged.
USE THE SCHEDULER SCREEN TO:
Schedule an event (a batch file) to run once or on a regular basis.
Remove a previously scheduled event.
Change the parameters for a scheduled event.
TO ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS
Select UTILITIES
Select SCHEDULER
I&M
?
141
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
The default database contains seven events: MAINTAIN, DAYTIME, NITETIME, AGCMESG, AGCNAME,
HOLIDAY, and WORKDAY. On the BROWSE screen, you see:
The description (Jobname) of the event: Event 2 is DAYTIME
The date, day, and time that the event is scheduled to run: DAYTIME is scheduled to run on Monday,
12-31-2001 at 8:00am
The style of the event: DAYTIME is style "B" (see Field Descriptions for definitions of styles)
Which days of the week it may run: DAYTIME may run every day, Monday through Friday
The DOS command that executes the event: C:\UTIL\DAY.BAT executes DAYTIME
I&M
NOTE: F5 adjusts the date only for the highlighted event.
?
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
142
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
Job Name
This field specifies a one word description of the event to be run.
Description
This field specifies up to a 40-character description of this event.
Scheduled Date
This field specifies the next valid date on which this event is scheduled to run.
Scheduled Time
This field specifies the time of day at which this event is scheduled to run. Be sure to specify "p" (PM) for
events scheduled to run after 12:00 noon, if a 12-hour time format is used.
Schedule Style
This field specifies the schedule style to use. Following is a list of the valid schedule styles.
B This style of event runs at the specified time on all valid days. This is the default style for events. The
event is rescheduled at the very start of the event so if the system is rebooted while a style B event is
running, that event will not run again until its next valid day. It is not necessary for a B style event to
return to a DOS prompt in order to be rescheduled. NOTE: To schedule an event to run only one
time, such as Holiday.bat, make sure that Repeat On Days is set to "N".
C This style of event runs at the specified time on all valid days. This style event is rescheduled after it
successfully runs so if the system is rebooted while a C style event is running, Perfect Voice attempts
to rerun the event immediately after the system has restarted. Events that change system greeting and
whattodo, which are critical to the correct operation of the system, should be scheduled as C style
events. Events of this style must return to a DOS prompt in order to be rescheduled. The insertion of
control-C is performed prior to the reschedule command to ensure that it returns to a DOS prompt.
D This style of event runs every "n" minutes on all valid days. The time between events is specified in
the After +Minutes field. The typical use for this type of event is an event that checks for changing
conditions such as events that adjust volume of new messages or that scan for TDD tones in messages.
Events of this style must return to a DOS prompt in order to be rescheduled. Therefore, control-C is
performed prior to the reschedule command.
N
I&M
This style of event is NOT automatically rescheduled. The assumption is that the batch file will
perform its own rescheduling. This style is for the advanced user that wants complex scheduling using
the SCHED/RES command. The REPEAT DAYS and INCREMENTAL MINUTES fields are not
used.
After + Minutes
?
This field specifies the minimum amount of time in minutes that must elapse between the time a D style event
completes execution and when it executes again for the next iteration.
Event Number
This field indicates the current position of the event in the scheduler queue.
Performed
This field indicates the number of times this event has been run since it was first scheduled.
Last Startup
This field indicates the last date and time that this event was run.
Repeat On Days
This is a set of seven fields, one for each day of the week. It specifies on which days of the week this event may
run. Note that these fields are ignored for style N events.
Command>
This field specifies the DOS command line to execute for this event. To avoid confusion, specify the complete
command file name, including path and file extension information.
143
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
REMOTE ACCESS
In order to access a remote site, you will need a modem and a PC set up to run standard communications software.
The modem should be capable of data speed transmission rates between 300 and 14,400 baud. Although supported,
speeds below 2400 baud are not recommended, especially if file transfers are required.
The communications software must support VT-100 terminal emulation (most do).
Dial into the remote system, using your communications software. It is often useful to access the remote system by
using a telephone in conjunction with the terminal session. Key in the following modem command sequence and
follow the directions to manually connect to the remote site modem.
Reset modem to factory default settings by keying in the following command.
AT&F
Do not hit Enter just yet after keying in the following command.
ATX1D
Using the telephone connected to the modem, call the remote modem. If necessary, enter the User ID associated
with the remote modem extension or ask the operator to transfer you to that extension.
When you hear carrier tone, press Enter, wait a couple of seconds and hang up the phone.
After you are prompted, enter the remote access password. Your screen will then be updated to match that of the
remote system.
USE THE REMOTE ACCESS SCREEN TO:
Perform maintenance on a remote system
Transfer files to and from a remote system
T
I&M
O ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS
Select UTILITIES
Select REMOTE ACCESS
?
144
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Access Information
This field is used to hold descriptive information about accessing this site via remote communications.
Typically this contains the telephone number and access codes needed to place a connection. This field is used
to define information about accessing this site via remote communications.
GENERAL SETUP
Enabled for Use?
If this field is set to "Y", then remote is enabled for use. If set to "N", then remote is disabled.
Connection Type
This field defines the modem or modem type installed in or connected to the PC.
Password
This field defines what password is needed to access this system via remote communications.
I&M
PW Fail Lockout
This field defines how many attempts to enter the password will be allowed per call before the system locks
out remote access. This value should be set very low. A system reboot is the only way to clear the password
?
tries counter.
BATCH MODE SETUP
Job Name
This is the descriptive name that will be displayed by the scheduler when this batch job is waiting to start.
Access Password
This is the password used to gain access to BATCH mode (typically SMDR call collection). The password can
be from 1 to 8 alphanumeric (0-9,A-Z) characters to ENABLE batch mode, or BLANK to disable. The
password is case insensitive (uppercase is same as lowercase).
145
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
Command to Type
This is the batch command to be performed. This is a maximum of 255 characters Control characters are not
allowed. (However, REMOTE style control characters are permitted in {}). Also, a return (actually {Enter})
will be appended to the end of the command. Most commands are of one of the following formats:
(1) Single Program -Example: COPY C:\RCPT\DB*.* C:\RCPT\SAVEIT
(2) Batch Command - Example: C:\SMDR\COLLECT.BAT
COM/MODEM SETUP
COM Port Number
This field is used to select the PC COM port to be used for remote access. Pressing F10 in View Mode will
display the COM ports equipped on the PC. Systems shipped by Teleco are set for COM3.
IRQ Number
This field defines the IRQ number (2-5) assigned to the COM port. A value of 0 will select the default IRQ
(IRQ3 for COM2 and COM4, IRQ4 for COM1 and COM3). Normally, the IRQ is determined by the jumper
settings on the COM board in the PC. Systems shipped by Teleco are set for IRQ5.
Parity and Size
This field controls the format of the data bytes that are transmitted and received. The only available options are
7 bits or 8 bits with even, odd or no parity. Systems shipped by Teleco are set for 8 bits, no parity.
Baud Rate (BPS)
This field defines the data transmission speed of the COM port. The available values are from 300 baud to
19200 baud. The default transmission rate for systems shipped by Teleco is 14400 baud.
AutoBaud Enabled?
Enter 'Y' (YES) to adjust the COM port speed to match the speed provided by the "CONNECT" information
provided by the "hayes" compatible modem. Enter 'N' (NO) to leave the COM port speed fixed. This field only
applies to "hayes" compatible modems. Older or slower (2400 baud) modems typically change the COM port
speed to match the connection (carrier) baud rate. Most newer high speed modems can be configured to match
I&M
the connection (carrier) baud rate, OR (the default) to always connect at the current baud rate, and buffer the
difference using flow control. his field defines the data transmission speed of the COM port.
Non-std Baud OK?
Set this to 'Y' (YES) to exactly set the baud rate. Set this to 'N' to round up to nearest standard baud rate (300,
?
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 384000, 57600). This field only applies to "hayes" compatible modems.
Many of the high speed "hayes" compatable modems support many connection baud rates but not all rates
support AT commands. In particular, many modems support connections at 7200/12000/14400/28800/etc, but
DO NOT support "AT" commands at these rates. Check the reference manual for your modem to determine
the available baud rates.
CTS pin Enabled
Remote access supports both hardware and software flow control to control data transmission from the system.
If HARDWARE (CTS) flow control is used (this is the recommended mode) set this field to 'Y' (YES). If not
used, set this field to 'N' (NO). Enter 'Y' (YES) to adjust the COM port speed to match the speed provided by
the "CONNECT" information.
XON/XOFF Enabled?
Remote supports both hardware and software flow control. If hardware flow control is used (the recommended
mode), this field must include CS (Clear to Send). If software flow control (XON/XOFF) is used, the field
must be set to "Y". Set to "N" if software flow control is not used.
Ring Wait Count
This field defines how many rings the modem is to wait before answering.
146
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
REMOTE STATISTICS
This screen displays statistics which may be used to identify any errors that may have occurred.
I&M
?
147
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
TERMINAL ACCESS
USE THE TERMINAL ACCESS SCREEN TO:
Upload telephone system dial plan information from WIN 100D and Teleco UST1280 system and add
Users to the system accordingly.
Change the serial communications setup for uploading telephone system information.
Change how PBX extension number information is mapped to the Perfect Voice User ID dial plan.
TO ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS
Select UTILITIES
Select TERMINAL ACCESS
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
I&M
?
COM Port
This field specifies the serial port number to use for uploading information from the PBX.
IRQ
This field specifies the IRQ number for the serial port used for upload information from the PBX.
Baud Rate
This field specifies the baud rate of the local maintenance port on the telephone system.
Stop Bits
This field specifies the number of stop bits for the telephone system used for importing information from the
PBX.
148
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
Size
This field specifies the character size in bits for the telephone system used for importing information from the
PBX.
Parity
This field specifies the parity for the telephone system used for importing information from the PBX.
Chk Modem Sigs
This field specifies the required modem signals.
Local Echo
This field specifies LOCAL ECHO. (Y=half duplex, N=full duplex)
Password
This field specifies the password to use when accessing the telephone system.
Log File Name
This field specifies the log file name for the upload process. This field should not be modified.
Data File Name
This field specifies the data file name for the upload process. This field should not be modified.
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED)
I&M
?
SINGLE LINE STATIONS
From Instance
This field specifies the instance from which to obtain the template User ID for single line station Users. This is
normally set to 0, the instance number containing the default "Full Feature Extn User".
From User ID
This field specifies the User ID to use as a template when building the new User ID records for single line
station Users. This is normally set to 950, the default "Full Feature Extn User".
Dialstring
This field specifies how the PBX extension number is translated to the Extn field in the new User ID records
for single line station Users. The @ character is substituted with the PBX extension number. In most cases, this
field should simply be set to @.
149
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
DIGITAL STATIONS
From Instance
This field specifies the instance from which to obtain the template User ID for digital station Users. This is
normally set to 0, the instance number containing the default "Full Feature Extn User".
From User ID
This field specifies the User ID to use as a template when building the new User ID records for digital station
Users. This is normally set to 950, the default "Full Feature Extn User".
Dialstring
This field specifies how the PBX extension number is translated to the Extn field in the new User ID records
for digital station Users. The @ character is substituted with the PBX extension number. In most cases, this
field should simply be set to @.
MERGE INFORMATION
To Instance
This field specifies the instance number to which new User ID records are added.
First User ID
This field specifies the first User ID to create from uploaded telephone system information.
User ID Step
This field specifies the increment to use when adding User ID records.
I&M
?
150
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
SET PASSWORD
USE THE SET PASSWORD SCREEN TO:
Change the password for an access level to SCREENS
TO ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS
Select UTILITIES
Select SET PASSWORD
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Level
This field indicates the current authorization level.
Logins
This field indicates the number of times someone successfully logged in to this authorization level.
Fails
This field indicates the number of times someone attempted, but failed to log in to this authorization level.
I&M
Last Time
This field indicates the last date and time someone successfully logged in to this authorization level.
Last Fail
?
This field indicates the last date and time someone attempted, but failed to log in to this authorization level.
PW Change
This field indicates the last date and time someone changed the password for this level. Note that this may
predate the installation date of the system.
WHICH LEVEL?
This field specifies the authorization level for which the password is to be changed. Each level has access to
modify its specific password, or the password of any lower level.
151
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
PASSWORD
This field specifies the current password for the authorization level chosen from the previous screen.
NEW PASSWORD
This field specifies the new password for the authorization level chosen from the previous screen.
VERIFY NEW
I&M
This field re-specifies (for confirmation) the new password for the authorization level chosen from the previous
screen.
?
152
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
DATE TIME
USE THE DATE TIME SCREEN TO:
Review and/or change the system date and/or time.
TO ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS
Select UTILITIES
Select DATE TIME
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Today's Date
This field indicates the current system date and weekday.
Day-Of-Year
This field indicates, according to the system date, how many days have elapsed since January 1, plus 1.
Time Now
This field indicates the current system time.
Week-Of-Year
This field indicates, according to the system date, how many weeks have elapsed since January 1, plus 1.
I&M
?
Year
This field specifies the current year.
Month
This field specifies the current month.
Day
This field specifies the current day.
Hour
This field specifies the current hour.
Minute
This field specifies the current minute.
Second
This field specifies the current second.
153
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
TEXT FILE EDIT
USE THE TEXT FILE EDIT SCREEN TO:
Edit text files
TO ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS at level 6 or above
Select UTILITIES
Select TEXT FILE EDIT
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
TEXT FILE BROWSE
USE THE TEXT FILE BROWSE SCREEN TO:
Browse text files of any size
I&M
TO ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS at level 6 or above
Select UTILITIES
?
Select TEXT FILE BROWSE
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
154
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
QUICK!
The Quick! menu allows you to set up a basic Perfect Voice system and dialplan. The following section outlines the
screens and options you may be presented with while configuring the system and dialplan. Keep in mind that this
only presents the basics for getting a system "up and running". For advanced features, the system must still be
customized using the SCREENS menu options.
NOTE: If you have any questions during Quick Setup, you may press F1 or refer to the standard SCREENS menu
options described earlier in this section.
I&M
?
155
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
SYSTEM
USE THE SYSTEM OPTION TO:
Select the number of audio channels
Select the telephone system
Set the default call transfer method
Set the trunk access codes for local, long distance, and international calls
Allocate the COM port(s) for SMDI, SMDR, and/or L.A.P.
TO ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS
Select QUICK!
Select SYSTEM
You are asked if you would like to begin Quick Setup. To begin, press Y and respond to the prompts on the
following screens.
I&M
?
156
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
SELECT THE NUMBER OF AUDIO CHANNELS AND ENTER THE TELEPHONE EXTENSION
NUMBER(S)
You are first prompted to select the number of audio channels (voice ports) for this system. Next you are prompted
to enter the Telephone System Extension Number for each voice port. The extension numbers will be entered in the
"Extn/Access Number" field for the corresponding channel (voice port). (The Extn/Access Number field is
located in SCREENS System -Channels on Screen 1.)
I&M
?
157
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
SELECT THE TELEPHONE SYSTEM
The telephone system may be changed from this screen. If you choose to change the telephone system, press Y. All
telephone systems are pre-loaded; however the "pop-up" menu displays only 20 telephone systems. You may select
one of these telephone systems by using the Home and End keys. If the correct telephone system is not listed in the
pop-up menu, refer to the Appendix for a complete listing of available telephone systems that work with Perfect
Voice. From the list, enter the corresponding "Quick Setup Code".
When you select the telephone system from this screen, the information is entered in SCREENS System
Telephone System on Screen 1. The 8 character filename is entered in the Line Type Name field.
I&M
?
158
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
SELECT THE DEFAULT CALL TRANSFER METHOD
The selection on this screen is entered in the "Default Transfer Type" field. (The Default Xfer Type field is
located in SCREENS System Telephone System on Screen 1.)
I&M
?
159
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
SELECT THE ACCESS CODES
The next few screens prompt for the trunk access codes to be dialed before local, long distance, and international
calls. Selections on these screens are entered in the corresponding fields (Local Access prefix, LDist Access
prefix, and Intnl Access prefix). (These fields are located in SCREENS System Telephone System on Screen
3.)
I&M
?
160
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
ALLOCATE THE COM PORT(S) FOR SMDI, SMDR, AND/OR L.A.P
The next few screens prompt for information to allocate the system COM ports for SMDI, SMDR, and/or L.A.P.
Respond appropriately to each screen to assign the COM port(s). Selections made on these screens are entered in
the appropriate fields located in SCREENS System Serial Services on Screens 1 and 2.
NOTE: If you do not plan to use SMDR, SMDI, or L.A.P., press N and disregard the next few sections.
I&M
?
161
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
DO YOU PLAN TO USE SMDI, SMDR, AND/OR L.A.P?
Next you specify whether you plan to use SMDI, SMDR, and/or L.A.P. Depending upon your selection(s), the
following screens may differ from below.
I&M
?
ASSIGN THE COM PORT(S) FOR SMDI, SMDR AND/OR L.A.P
NOTE: The following screens are dependent upon earlier selections.
162
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
I&M
?
163
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
CONFIRM THE CHANGES
A screen displaying your selections is displayed. You are then prompted to accept your selections.
When you select "Yes" here, you are immediately asked if you wish to configure the dialplan. You may configure
the dialplan at this time or access it later by selecting Quick-Dialplan from SCREENS.
I&M
?
164
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
DIALPLAN
The Dialplan option of the Quick! menu allows you to change the Instance Parameters and create the User database
for the system. The screens that are displayed are dependent upon the previous selections made. For example,
when User IDs are created, depending on the type of User created, different screens are displayed.
USE THE DIALPLAN OPTION TO:
Change Instance Parameters
Create the User database
TO ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS
Select QUICK!
Select DIALPLAN
You may alternate between Quick Setup and Receptionist - Instance Parameters or Receptionist - User
Directory by pressing the corresponding function key at the bottom of each screen (F11 and F12). These
options are not available at Level 0.
I&M
?
165
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
CHANGE INSTANCE PARAMETERS (GLOBAL SYSTEM PARAMETERS)
I&M
?
166
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
Selections made on the following 3 screens are entered in the corresponding fields in SCREENS Receptionist
Instance Parameters.
I&M
?
167
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
CREATE USER DATABASE
The User database may also be created from Quick Setup. The screens that are displayed are dependent upon
previous selections. In general, you are prompted to copy template User IDs to selected ranges. Refer to the
Appendix for a listing and description of available template Users. If you select to copy advanced options, you will
have the opportunity to create additional notification event records for the new Users. When the new User IDs have
been created, you may edit them from Quick Setup or Receptionist User Directory.
You may copy advanced
I&M
options. If you select Y
to copy advanced
options, additional
screens will appear.
?
Select the User Type you
wish to copy.
You will be asked to
confirm the prototype
you have selected.
168
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
You will be prompted to
enter the range of User
IDs to copy. Enter the
first and last User ID of
the range. User ID step
specifies the increment
of the range. For example, suppose the First User ID is 200 and the Last User ID is 250. If User ID step is 1, User
IDs 200, 201, 202 ...250 will be added. If User ID step is 10, User IDs 200, 210, 220, ...250 will be added.
If you selected to copy
advanced options, the
following screens
appear.
I&M
?
You will be asked if you
want to perform the
copy.
When the copy is
complete, you may edit
the User IDs.
169
Perfect Voice
System Configuration
I&M
?
170
Optional
Applications
I&M
?
I&M
?
CONTENTS
ENABLING AMIS NETWORKING...............................................................................................................................1
DESIGN THE NETWORK .................................................................................................................................................2
CHANNEL SETUP ...........................................................................................................................................................3
TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP ..........................................................................................................................................4
BUILDING THE NETWORK SITE DATABASE ...................................................................................................................5
EDIT EACH SITE ACCORDING TO YOUR NETWORK DESIGN WORKSHEET. ........................................................................5
RECORDING SITE NAMES ..............................................................................................................................................8
EXPORT THE NETWORK SITE DATABASE AND SITE NAME RECORDINGS ......................................................................9
IMPORT THE NETWORK SITE DATABASE AND SITE NAME RECORDINGS .......................................................................9
PROGRAMMING OTHER SITES .......................................................................................................................................9
EDIT ACCESS CODES...................................................................................................................................................10
ENABLE AMIS FEATURES ON PER USER BASIS...........................................................................................................10
ADD A NEW SITE .........................................................................................................................................................12
PREFERRED METHOD: ADD THE SITE TO EACH LOCATION ........................................................................................13
EDIT THE NEW SITE.....................................................................................................................................................13
ALTERNATIVE METHOD: UPDATE ONE SITE AND COPY TO OTHER SITES ..................................................................13
SENDING AN AMIS NETWORK MESSAGE ...................................................................................................................14
TROUBLESHOOTING AMIS..........................................................................................................................................15
AMIS NETWORK SITES WORKSHEET (FOR PRIMARY SITE)........................................................................................16
FAX-ON-DEMAND ........................................................................................................................................................17
CALLER AND FAX MACHINE INTERFACE.....................................................................................................................17
SAME CALL DELIVERY................................................................................................................................................17
CALLBACK DELIVERY.................................................................................................................................................17
FAX COPROCESSOR BOARD LIMITATIONS...................................................................................................................17
SET UP FAX-ON-DEMAND USER ID ............................................................................................................................19
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS ..................................................................................................................................................19
CONVERTING FILE FORMATS ......................................................................................................................................21
UPLOADING THE FAX FROM A FAX MACHINE OR DISKETTE .......................................................................................22
RECORDING THE NAME FILE .......................................................................................................................................22
I&M
FAX MAIL.......................................................................................................................................................................23
ENABLE FAX MAIL ON A PER USER BASIS ..................................................................................................................23
SENDING FAX MESSAGES............................................................................................................................................24
SENDING A FAX MAIL MESSAGE USING THE DIRECT FAX MESSAGE CODE ................................................................24
?
SENDING A FAX MAIL MESSAGE USING THE ALIAS FAX ID .......................................................................................25
RETRIEVING FAX MESSAGES ......................................................................................................................................26
CALL ACCOUNTING SETUP AND ADMINISTRATION.......................................................................................27
HOW DOES PERFECT VOICE WORK WITH CALL ACCOUNTING? ..................................................................................27
SET UP THE PERFECT VOICE SERIAL PORT...................................................................................................................27
SET UP AUTOMATIC DELETION OF OLD CALL DATA...................................................................................................29
SET UP CALL ACCOUNTING TRANSFER METHOD ON PERFECT VOICE SYSTEM............................................................30
L. A. P. LOCAL AREA PAGING...............................................................................................................................32
COMPLETE THE LICENSING AGREEMENT ....................................................................................................................32
INSTALL THE PAGING TRANSMITTER ..........................................................................................................................32
HOW TO IMPLEMENT L. A. P. ON A TELECO UST 1280 PHONE SYSTEM.....................................................................33
SET UP COM PORT FOR L. A. P. ...................................................................................................................................33
SET UP TELEPHONE SYSTEM PARAMETERS FOR L. A. P..............................................................................................33
SET UP USERS FOR L. A. P. .........................................................................................................................................34
ENABLE L. A. P. ON A PER USER BASIS ......................................................................................................................34
SET UP ALTERNATE ID ...............................................................................................................................................35
ASSIGN PHANTOM DN TO THE USER'S EXTENSION ....................................................................................................35
TROUBLESHOOTING L. A. P. .......................................................................................................................................36
IMPLEMENTING TDD .................................................................................................................................................37
WHAT IS TDD? ...........................................................................................................................................................37
OVERVIEW ................................................................................................................................................................. 37
NEW INSTALLATION: SYSTEM LEVEL SET UP ........................................................................................................... 38
DESIGNING A TDD SOLUTION.................................................................................................................................... 38
CALL ROUTING CONSIDERATIONS.............................................................................................................................. 40
TDD USER SETUP: NEW INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................... 40
UPGRADING TO TDD.................................................................................................................................................. 41
SYSTEM LEVEL SET UP: UPGRADES .......................................................................................................................... 41
TDD LANGUAGE INSTANCE SETUP: UPGRADES........................................................................................................ 42
TDD USER SETUP: UPGRADES.................................................................................................................................. 42
HOW TDD FAXBACK WORKS .................................................................................................................................... 43
SET UP NOTIFICATION CLASS OF SERVICE 600: TDD TO FAX MACHINE FOR TDD MESSAGE .................................. 43
ADD NOTIFICATION EVENT RECORD FOR EACH TDD USER...................................................................................... 44
TDD FAXBACK LIMITATIONS .................................................................................................................................... 44
TDD TEXT FILE CONSIDERATIONS ............................................................................................................................ 45
IMPLEMENTATION NOTES........................................................................................................................................... 46
ADDITIONAL TDD UTILITIES.................................................................................................................................. 47
SCANNER UTILITY...................................................................................................................................................... 47
MAKE_ONE UTILITY ............................................................................................................................................... 47
TEXT2TDD UTILITY................................................................................................................................................. 48
TDD2TEXT UTILITY................................................................................................................................................. 50
TELECO CALLER ID................................................................................................................................................... 51
WHAT IS REQUIRED .................................................................................................................................................... 51
LIMITATIONS .............................................................................................................................................................. 51
CREATING AUDIOFORMS APPLICATIONS ......................................................................................................... 52
BASIC SCRIPT RULES.................................................................................................................................................. 52
BRANCHES AND LABELS............................................................................................................................................. 52
COMMENTS ................................................................................................................................................................ 53
FORMAT SPECIFIERS AND STRING VARIABLES ........................................................................................................... 53
PIECED SPEECH .......................................................................................................................................................... 54
COMMAND LIST.......................................................................................................................................................... 55
COMMAND SUMMARY................................................................................................................................................ 55
I&M
?
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
ENABLING AMIS NETWORKING
Audio Messaging Interchange Specification, or AMIS, is a series of standards that enables voice messaging
systems produced by different vendors to network or inter-network. Before AMIS, systems from different
vendors could not exchange voice messages. AMIS has two specifications: AMIS-Digital and AMIS-Analog.
The Perfect Voice system is AMIS-Analog compatible. The AMIS-Analog specification calls for the use of
DTMF tones to convey control information and transmission of the message itself in analog form. This means
that the Perfect Voice system may be networked to other Perfect Voice systems and/or other vendors' voice
messaging systems that are also AMIS-Analog compatible. With AMIS networking, Users from different
locations can communicate as if they are all on the same voice mail system.
The following section presents the steps needed to set up your AMIS network. They include:
Design the Network In this step, you choose between a controlled or open network and organize
information for each network site.
Channel Setup In this step, you specify which channels will be assigned to AMIS outdial networking.
Telephone System Setup The main purpose of this step is to verify the trunk access codes.
Building the First Network Site Database Now you input the information for all network sites into one
site, including recording site names. Then you export the database to floppy diskette.
Programming Other Sites You import the database from floppy diskette to each site and edit fields for
each site.
In addition, steps for enabling AMIS features on a per User basis and adding a new network site are included.
I&M
?
1
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
DESIGN THE NETWORK
Before you build your network site database, you need to decide which type of network you want to create and
gather information about each site. There are two basic approaches for building your network site database. It
is recommended that you create a controlled network.
Controlled Network: A controlled network is one in which an administrator knows where every site is
located and manually registers all network sites. Under this scenario, each location has a unique site
number and all sites have an identical network site database with regard to the numbering plan. The
advantage to this method is that a single list of site numbers may be distributed to every secondary site just
as you would a phone list.
Open Network: An open network is one in which the network site database is built automatically. When
any AMIS-compatible system calls a site for the first time, during the "handshake", the new site is added
to the local site's network site list. The newly registered sites are added to the list counting backwards
from 999. This means that the system administrator has no control over which site number is assigned to a
newly registered site.
Note: Some system administration may be required after a site is automatically added before a response
can be sent to that site.
Below are steps for creating a controlled network:
Make a list of your network sites using the AMIS Network Sites worksheet for the primary site. Include
site number, name, location, System ID #, channel information, and voice mail version. (For a copy of
the worksheet, refer to the end of this section).
Identify access codes from each site to the other sites. Example: It is a long distance call when Oakland
calls London; it is a local call when San Francisco calls Oakland, etc. See below.
Site 1: Teleco of Oakland
I&M
* 1. Teleco of Oakland
2. London
3. Teleco of San Francisco
Site 1
?
Oakland
Long Distance
Local
Site 3
Site 2
San Franciso
London
Long Distance
Site 3: Teleco of San Francisco
Site 2: London
1. Teleco of Oakland
1. Teleco of Oakland
2. London
*2. London
* 3. Teleco of San Francisco
3. Teleco of San Francisco
* Indicates Local Site
2
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
CHANNEL SETUP
The first step is Channel Setup. To specify which of your channels will be assigned to outbound AMIS
networking, you need to edit the Channel Usage field. You will also edit the BEGIN BLK and END BLK
fields. These fields enable you to block outbound AMIS calls from a channel at a certain period of the day.
For example, if you know that you receive the bulk of your customer calls from 1:00 pm to 4:00 pm during the
day, you may want to block outbound AMIS calls during that period to free up the channel for incoming calls.
NOTE: When the AMIS option is enabled on the hardware key, all Receptionist channels may receive
AMIS calls.
Log in to SCREENS
Select SYSTEM
Select CHANNELS
Ensure that the appropriate number of channels are configured for the system.
Press F4 and edit the following fields on each channel.
Channel Usage
This field specifies which application or applications are assigned to the channel. Valid AMIS applications are
described below.
Rcpt+AMIS (3)
Channel shared between Receptionist and AMIS. After terminating an
outbound call, control of the channel returns to Receptionist.
Rcpt+Ntfy+AMIS (5)
Channel shared among Receptionist, Notify and AMIS. After terminating a
call, Notify and AMIS return control of the channel to Receptionist.
I&M
Begin BLK (HR:MIN)
This field marks the beginning of blocking of OUTBOUND NETWORK (AMIS) calls during a period of the
day. This period is defined with a BEGIN and an END time. Use of this field allows for dynamic allocation of
channels for outbound dialing without impacting incoming calls.
?
The time is specified in international time as either HOUR:MINUTE in 24 hour format (00:15 or 13:30) or as
HOUR:MINUTE AM/PM in 12 hour format (12:15 am or 1:30 pm). A blank field defaults to 00:00 (12:00
am). If the BEGIN BLK and the END BLK fields are the same, outbound blocking is disabled. Blocking can
cross midnight (i.e., 22:00 to 06:00)
End BLK (HR:MIN)
This field marks the ending point of blocking of OUTBOUND NETWORK (AMIS) calls during a period of
the day. This period is defined with a BEGIN and an END time. Use of this field allows for dynamic
allocation of channels for outbound dialing without impacting incoming calls.
The time is specified in international time as either HOUR:MINUTE in 24 hour format (00:15 or 13:30) or as
HOUR:MINUTE AM/PM in 12 hour format (12:15 am or 1:30 pm). A blank field defaults to 00:00 (12:00
am). If the BEGIN BLK and the END BLK fields are the same, outbound blocking is disabled. Blocking can
cross midnight (i.e., 22:00 to 06:00)
3
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP
During this step you verify that all AMIS ports have trunk access and correct trunk access codes. Trunk access
codes are the dialstrings used to get an outside line for making local, long distance, and international calls.
First, verify that all AMIS outbound ports on the phone system have trunk access.
Log in to SCREENS
Select SYSTEM
Select TELEPHONE SYSTEM
Verify that the highlighted telephone system matches the phone system the Perfect Voice is being installed
on. If a different telephone system configuration is needed, obtain the correct configuration from Teleco
Technical Support.
Enter the appropriate trunk access codes on screen 3 (as well as suffix codes if Long Distance and
International account codes are required). Trunk Access codes must be tested on the telephone system for
ALL ports expected to perform AMIS dialout responsibilities. Receptionist uses all outbound access
codes with AMIS network calls.
Intercom Dialtone
This is the dialstring used access telephone system (intercom) dialtone, so that outbound dialing can be
performed. For most telephone systems, dialtone is automatically provided when the line is taken off-hook, in
which case this should be set to "X"..
Local Access prefix
This is the dialstring used to dial the trunk access code to obtain Central Office dialtone, so that a local
telephone number can be called. For most telephone systems in the USA, this is typically "9Z"; for European
telephone systems, this is typically "0Z".
LDist Access prefix
This is the dialstring used to dial the trunk access code to obtain Central Office dialtone, so that a long distance
telephone number can be called. For most telephone systems in the USA, this is "9Z1" or "8Z1"; for many
European telephone systems, this is "0Z0".
I&M
LDist Access suffix
This is an optional dialstring used to dial a suffix number. This is typically an accounting code or credit card
number required after a toll call is dialed. If used, then one or two Z characters are typically required at the
start of this string to provide a delay.
?
Intnl Access prefix
This is the dialstring used to dial the trunk access code to obtain Central Office dialtone, so that an
international telephone number can be called. For most telephone systems in the USA, this is "9Z011" or
"8Z011"; for many European telephone systems, this is "0Z0".
Intnl Access suffix
This is an optional dialstring used to dial a suffix number. This is typically an accounting code or credit card
number required after an international number is dialed. If used, then one or two Z characters are typically
required at the start of this string to provide a delay.
NOTE: Changing the LD access code to 9Z1 will create problems with any notification to an outside
number using wait for CO dialtone. For this reason, you must remove any W[D] actionstrings found after
trunk access in a notification COS.
4
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
BUILDING THE NETWORK SITE DATABASE
Now that you have designed your network and assigned numbers to your sites, it is time to build the database.
Have your worksheet handy, as you will need that information to create the database. We recommend that you
build the database on the system of one of your sites and then import that database to each of your other sites,
making the necessary field changes.
Log in to SCREENS
Select RECEPTIONIST
Select NETWORK SITES
Network Sites contains the default network site information as well as any future site information. Your
system has been supplied with a default database including several sites that you may not want on your system.
Review the sites and delete the sites you see as unnecessary.
To build your database, you can use the F2 key to Add the new records but we recommend that you use F6 to
Copy the first record (site 1) to sites 2 through ??, with ?? being your last site number.
Choose site number 1.
Press F6 to copy
EDIT EACH SITE ACCORDING TO YOUR NETWORK DESIGN WORKSHEET.
After you have copied your sites, you need to enter site-specific information. This information includes the
site description (name), location, system ID number and callback number. You will also record site names.
After you import the primary database to each secondary site, you will have to edit the Access Codes, Admin
Message User ID, and Protocol Extension.
I&M
Log in to SCREENS
Select RECEPTIONIST
Select NETWORK SITES
?
Edit the following fields in Network sites: Description, Location, System ID Number,
and CallBack Number. You will edit Access Codes and Admin MSG User ID for each
site after you export this primary database and import it to each secondary site.
NOTE: For this example, the primary database refers to the first network site you create and the
secondary refers to all subsequent sites.
5
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
Edit the following fields for ALL sites:
Description
This is a description of the site. Typically this is the company name of the site.
Location
This field designates where the site is located. Typically this is the City and State for U.S. locations, or City and
Country for international locations.
System ID Number
This field contains a unique string that identifies this site to all other sites that it may ever contact and also
identifies the callback telephone number. For LOCAL sites, this specifies the SYSTEM ID that will be used on
outbound calls to uniquely identify this site to all other sites. For REMOTE sites, this is used to match the
SYSTEM ID used by the REMOTE site, and provide the default callback telephone number to reach the REMOTE
site.
AMIS has strict guidelines on the format of a system ID. It is composed of three numeric fields (characters 0-9),
each terminated with a # (poundsign). The maximum length of the entire field is 18 characters, and the minimum is
3 (i.e. ###). There are two types of IDs, public and private:
I&M
Public System IDs are for all sites that can be direct dialed using the public (international) telephone network.
These ID numbers are always in the format: ccc#nnn#sssssss#, where the value "ccc" is the international country
code (1-4 digits, not blank!), the value "nnn" is the national significant number (area or city code of 0-14 digits),
and the value "ssssssss" is a local subscriber number of 0-14 digits.
All locations in North America must use the format: 1#aaa#sssssss#, where the value "aaa" is the 3 digit area code,
?
and the value "sssssss" is the 7 digit local telephone number.
Private System IDs are for all sites that are accessible though a private network or behind PBX access. These
always have the format: 0##nnnnnnn#, where "nnnnnnn" is a site defined number, typically the extension of the
site. The value "nnnnnnn" can be from 0-14 digits.
CallBack Number
This field defines the dialstring, or number, to be dialed to call this site. The format of this field is dependent on the
ACCESS CODES being used. Incoming calls from NEW (undefined) sites will automatically be added to the
Network Sites listing and the CALLBACK NUMBER and ACCESS CODES will be computed based on the
SYSTEM ID of caller as compared to SYSTEM ID of local site. Typically the ACCESS CODES should contain
the dialing prefixes (like 1 or 011) so just enter the telephone number without prefixes or suffixes.
Protocol Extension
This field specifies the level of AMIS to assume when calling from the local site to this remote site. The valid
Protocol Extension depends on the voice mail software being used at the remote site. "None" provides basic AMIS
capability for any AMIS-compliant voice mail software or versions. "Extn 1" allows Users to mark messages
urgent, private, or certified and also provides the time difference between the local and remote site. "Extn 1" is
only valid for other sites using AMIS with Perfect Voice Releases 4.1 and higher. In addition to the features
provided with "Extn 1", "Extn 2" allows the User 2 additional special delivery options when sending an AMIS
message. The User may record his/her name and personal greetings and send them to the remote site mailbox.
"Extn 2" is only valid for site using AMIS with Perfect Voice Release 4.3.
6
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
Edit these fields only for the LOCAL site (the site that the current system belongs to):
Access Codes
This defines the optional prefix (PFX) and suffix (SFX) used when dialing the CALLBACK NUMBER. Typically
the prefix selects trunk and service provider dialtone, and the suffix is some type of account code. Choices are:
0 - Private Number - no Prefix or suffix
1 - Local Number - (LOCAL PFX)+(CALLBACK)
2 - Long Distance Number - (LDIST PFX)+(CALLBACK)+(LDIST SFX)
3 - International Number - (INTL PFX)+(CALLBACK)+(INTL SFX)
The prefix and suffix dialstrings are defined on Screen 3 of 3 in the Telephone System Setup Menu of SCREENS.
Access codes should be adjusted for each site based on whether it is local or long distance from that LOCAL
site.
Admin Msg User ID
This field is only used for LOCAL sites, and is unused for REMOTE sites. The Admin Msg User ID field specifies
the User ID that will receive messages that are not able to be returned to the mailbox that sent the message. The
default value for this field is blank. If the message is non-returnable, for example, the original mailbox has been
deleted, then the message will be put into the mailbox specified in the Admin Msg User ID field. If this field is left
blank and the message is non-returnable, then the message will be deleted.
YOU WILL PROBABLY NOT NEED TO EDIT THE OTHER FIELDS IN NETWORK SITES TO BUILD YOUR
DATABASE; HOWEVER, IF YOU DO, REFER TO SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, NETWORK SITE
PROFILES FOR MORE DETAILED INFORMATION.
I&M
?
7
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
RECORDING SITE NAMES
To record site names, select a User that has Administrative privileges.
Log in to Mailbox.
Press i
to select the System Administration Menu
Press i
to record network site name. You will be given the following choices:
q
Review first site
t
Review last site
i
Select site
o
Exit this menu
p
Log out
*
Replay options
Press 1
to review first site. You will be given the following choices:
1
Review next site
w
Replay current site
e
Record site name
r
Delete site name
I&M
t
Review previous site
i
Select site
o
Exit this menu
?
p
Log out
*
Replay options
Press e
to record site name.
After recording site name, press 1
to go to next site.
Press e
to record next site name.
Proceed until all site names have been recorded.
8
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
EXPORT THE NETWORK SITE DATABASE AND SITE NAME RECORDINGS
At this time, the network site database should be set up on the primary system. To copy the database to other
sites, first export the primary network site database and site name recordings to floppy diskettes.
Log in to SCREENS
Select UTILITIES
Select TASK MANAGER
Select Task 820: Copy AMIS Network Site database and names to floppy
IMPORT THE NETWORK SITE DATABASE AND SITE NAME RECORDINGS
You will perform the following steps at each of your other sites.
Log in to SCREENS
Select UTILITIES
Select TASK MANAGER
Select Task 830: Copy AMIS Network Site information from floppy to system
PROGRAMMING OTHER SITES
When the database and site name recordings have been imported, you will need to edit the Network Site
Number value in Instance Setup and Access Codes and Admin Msg User ID in Network Sites.
I&M
Log in to SCREENS
Select RECEPTIONIST
Select INSTANCE SETUP
?
Press F4 to edit the Network Site # (Screen 2)
Network Site #
When you edit this field, you should see a pop-up menu which includes all the sites from your database.
Choose the correct site number from the pop-up menu. This indicates the LOCAL site for this system. (If you
do not see all the sites, check to be sure that you imported the database from floppy diskette.) This field
identifies whether users in this instance can send network messages. The site number also provides the
CALLBACK telephone number for messages sent to other sites. The number must be set to a pre-configured
site number from 1-999 or left blank. If left blank, then Users are not able to send messages to other network
sites.
9
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
EDIT ACCESS CODES
Log in to SCREENS
Select RECEPTIONIST
Select NETWORK SITES
Go to Screen 1 of 1, edit the Access Code and Protocol Extension fields for each remote site as
it relates to this LOCAL site. NOTE: To ensure that you enter the appropriate access codes and
protocol extensions, keep in mind which site is LOCAL.
Access Codes
This defines the optional prefix (PFX) and suffix (SFX) used when dialing the CALLBACK NUMBER.
Typically the prefix selects trunk and service provider dialtone, and the suffix is some type of account code.
Choices are:
0 - Private Number - no Prefix or suffix
1 - Local Number - (LOCAL PFX)+(CALLBACK)
2 - Long Distance Number - (LDIST PFX)+(CALLBACK)+(LDIST SFX)
3 - International Number - (INTL PFX)+(CALLBACK)+(INTL SFX)
Protocol Extension
This field specifies the level of AMIS to assume when calling from the local site to this remote site. The valid
Protocol Extension depends on the voice mail software being used at the remote site. "None" provides basic
AMIS capability for any AMIS-compliant voice mail software or versions. "Extn 1" allows Users to mark
messages urgent, private, or certified and also provides the time difference between the local and remote site.
"Extn 1" is only valid for other sites using AMIS with Perfect Voice Releases 4.1 and higher. In addition to the
features provided with "Extn 1", "Extn 2" allows the User 2 additional special delivery options when sending
an AMIS message. The User may record his/her name and personal greetings and send them to the remote site
mailbox. "Extn 2" is only valid for site using AMIS with Perfect Voice Release 4.3.
I&M
ENABLE AMIS FEATURES ON PER USER BASIS
Log in to SCREENS
?
Select RECEPTIONIST
Select USER DIRECTORY
Carbon Copy ID
This field specifies the User ID that automatically receives a copy of each caller message for this User. Only
caller messages that are not marked private are copied to the Carbon Copy User ID; no internal messages that
are sent or forwarded to this User from another User are copied. To disable carbon copy, set this field to
blank. To enable, set this to the ID of the message box to receive a copy. This can either be a local User ID
(usertype U or I) or a remote Network ID (nnnnnn#sss). Local User IDs are in the range 0 to 99999999, and
must be usertype U or I, with pooling disabled.
Remote Network IDs are of the form "nnnnnn#sss", where "nnnnnn" is the remote mailbox number in
the range 0 to 999999, and "sss" is the remote Site number in the range 1 to 999. Messages can only be
delivered to a remote Network ID if networking is enabled, the site is defined, and calls to this site are
enabled.
Carbon Copy is useful for situations where a message needs to be copied to a supervisor, archive message box,
or multiple sites.
10
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
Mesg Pool ID
This is an optional field that specifies the User ID that is to receive ALL messages recorded for this User ID,
including all internal messages that are sent or forwarded from another User. To disable message pooling, set
this field to blank. To enable message pooling, set this to the ID of the message box to receive all messages.
This can either be a local User ID (usertype U or I) or a remote Network ID (nnnnnn#sss). Local User IDs are
in the range 0 to 99999999, and must be usertype U or I, with pooling disabled.
Remote Network IDs are of the form "nnnnnn#sss", where "nnnnnn" is the remote mailbox number in
the range 0 to 999999, and "sss" is the remote Site number in the range 1 to 999. Messages can only be
delivered to a remote Network ID if Networking is enabled, the site is defined, and calls to this site are
enabled.
If Message Pooling is enabled, then this User will NEVER have messages, and will not be able to access
MESSAGE MENU from User Mode. Also, message pooling can ONLY be enabled if this user has no
messages (message box is empty).
Message Pooling is useful for situations where a user owns more than one User ID. In these situations, the
user can have messages from all but one of the User IDs pooled to a single User ID (at a single site). This
simplifies the retrieval of messages from multiple User IDs.
PERFORM AGC CHK?
If this is 'Y' (YES), then perform AGC volume adjustment on all new messages for this User ID. This is
typically used for User IDs that retrieve messages via a long distance call, or send network messages to
other sites. The default is 'N' (NO). This value is checked when a message is recorded, and changing this
value will not affect existing messages.
Note: This requires the AGC_TDD batch job to be active in the Scheduler Event Queue.
I&M
?
11
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
ADD A NEW SITE
You may need to add another site after your network has been set-up. The illustration below shows the
addition of Teleco Greenville to the network site database which already includes Oakland, London, and San
Francisco.
Site 1: Teleco of Oakland
* 1. Teleco of Oakland
2. London
3. Teleco of San Francisco
4. Teleco of Greenville
Site 1
Oakland
Long Distance
Local
Site 3
Site 2
San Franciso
London
Long Distance
Long Distance
Site 3: Teleco of San Francisco
Site 2: London
1. Teleco of Oakland
1. Teleco of Oakland
Site 4
2. London
*2. London
Greenville
*3. Teleco of San Francisco
3. Teleco of San Francisco
4. Teleco of Greenville
4. Teleco of Greenville
Long Distance
Long Distance
I&M
?
Site 4: Teleco of Greenville
1. Teleco of Oakland
2. London
3. Teleco of San Francisco
*4. Teleco of Greenville
* Indicates Local Site
First, assign a number to the new site. (In the example above, Site #4 is assigned to Teleco of Greenville.)
Next, create the network site database at the new location.
Now it is time to update the other sites. We recommend that you add the new site to each location. An
alternative method is to update one location , then copy the updated database to your other sites.
12
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
PREFERRED METHOD: ADD THE SITE TO EACH LOCATION
To add the site to each location, you need to perform the following steps for each network site location.
Assign a number to the new site (In the example above, Site # 4 is assigned to Teleco of Greenville.
Log in to SCREENS
Select RECEPTIONIST
Select NETWORK SITES
Add the site. To add the new site, you can use the F2 key to Add the new record or the F6 key to Copy.
We recommend that you copy a record to the number you have assigned to the new site. In the example
above, copy a record to Site #4.
EDIT THE NEW SITE
Log in to SCREENS
Select RECEPTIONIST
Select NETWORK SITES
Edit the following fields: Description, Location, System ID Number, CallBack
Number, Access Codes and Admin MSG User ID for the new site.
Record new site name (Refer to "Recording Site Names" in this section)
ALTERNATIVE METHOD: UPDATE ONE SITE AND COPY TO OTHER SITES
Choose one site to update first. In our example, we'll choose to update Site #2, Teleco of Atlanta. Update Site
#2 with the new site as explained above. Instead of updating all sites, after Site #2 is updated, Use Task 820 in
Task Manager to export the new primary database to floppy diskette (refer to "Export the Network Site
Database and Site Name Recordings" in this section).
I&M
Use Task 830 in Task Manager to import the new primary database from floppy to each secondary system.
When the database and site name recordings have been imported, you will need to modify the Access
Codes in Network Sites (as explained in "Programming Other Sites"). In addition, while in Network Site
Profiles, clear out the statistical information (Screens 2 and 3) by Pressing F10 for each site, press Y to
?
confirm clearing the statistical information.
13
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
SENDING AN AMIS NETWORK MESSAGE
To send an AMIS message, perform the following steps:
Select y
to send a new message.
Select w
to record your message.
Record your message and press#
.
Press i
to select Network ID.
Enter Network ID & press #
.
Enter the
Press #
#
for a
appropriate
listing of sites.
site number
and press #
.
q
w
t
i
o
First Site Current Last Site Select Specific Exit
I&M
Next Previous Site Accept
o
?
to accept.
You have selected . . .
Select q
to send message.
14
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
TROUBLESHOOTING AMIS
Check ports -- plug in telephone at port and try it.
Can I get an outside line?
Do the callback numbers work?
In Telephone System, check that the Intercom Dialtone and Access Codes are correct.
Check if Skip is AGC Wait field is set to "Yes". If so, make sure it is set to run. If AGC is not set to run
or scheduler is on hold, AMIS messages will not be sent.
Verify that Intercom Dialtone and Access Codes are set correctly in Telephone System.
No AMIS selections are accessible from the user mode
Is AMIS enabled on the User Record, screen 3 of 4, AMIS SelNetId [8]?
Is the Network Site # defined in Screen 2 of 4 in Instance Setup parameters?
Is AMIS enabled on the key?
Problems sending messages between two specific sites
Send a test message to another site: 987654#site number. This sends a loopback (it sends the same
message back to you).
Look at each site, clear statistics at both sites.
Send a new message to other site and check statistics for reason call did not go through.
Check SITE_??.LOG (site you are sending to) on the root of drive D for errors.
Check to see if "Skip if AGC Wait" is set to yes. If this field is set to yes, AMIS messages will not be sent
until AGC runs. Make sure that AGC is set to run and that Scheduler is not on hold.
If the remote site is not a Perfect Voice system, then the "Protocol Extension" field for the remote site may
need to be set to None.
Sent messages are being returned to the User's mailbox with the message prefix: "Remote mailbox is not
receiving messages"
I&M
Verify that the User is not replying to or sending an AMIS message to a mailbox that is pooling messages
back to the same mailbox they are sending from. For example, mailbox 270 at site #1 is pooling messages
to mailbox 270 at site #2. If the User at site #2 replies to one of these pooled messages, the reply
destination will be mailbox 270 at site#1. Since mailbox 270 at site #1 is set to pool messages to mailbox
270 at site #2, the User at site #2 will receive the reply message with the message prefix "Remote mailbox
?
is not receiving messages"
While listening to messages sent via AMIS, the User is exited from the message and placed at an unexpected
menu (talk-off on message playback)
In certain environments such as opx circuits, you may need to configure the system to only run AGC
(Automatic Gain Control) on the message once. It is probably best to run it at the receiving site. Since the
volume loss is not great, running AGC twice is making the message too loud.
15
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
AMIS NETWORK SITES WORKSHEET (FOR PRIMARY SITE)
Site # Name
Location
System ID # CallBack #
Voice Mail
S/W
Version
I&M
?
16
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
FAX-ON-DEMAND
Fax-On-Demand enables Perfect Voice to fax information to callers at their request. Fax files are set up in
Perfect Voice one time for information that may be delivered many times. When using Fax-On-Demand, a
special Fax-On-Demand User ID is set up through SCREENS for each fax desired, and each fax is stored as a
disk file. Callers may request a fax from these special User IDs by pressing the appropriate digit(s) on a touch
tone phone.
There are two implementations of Fax-on-Demand:
One port fax coprocessor board
Two port fax coprocessor board
CALLER AND FAX MACHINE INTERFACE
Fax-On-Demand is easy to use. Upload delivery is one method of loading a fax document to the User ID for
future delivery to callers. In order to send a fax to a Fax User ID, the caller must enter an authorization code
before being allowed to upload the fax to the hard drive.
Fax-On-Demand is also easy for callers to use. Two methods of fax delivery are available from the Fax Menu.
Any combination of these options may be enabled or disabled for each Fax User ID.
Same Call Delivery
Callback Delivery
SAME CALL DELIVERY
I&M
Same Call fax delivery is used when a caller is calling Fax-On-Demand from a fax machine and wants the fax
to be delivered during the same call. Some inexpensive fax machines may not support this operation and some
may have a poll button that should be used instead of the start button.
To use Same Call Fax delivery, the caller calls the Receptionist, enters the Fax-On-Demand User ID of the fax
?
document they wish to receive and presses option #1 from the Fax Menu. Fax-On-Demand transfers the call to
the fax board. When the caller hears the fax tones, they must press the start or poll button on their fax machine
and then hang-up the phone in order to receive the fax.
CALLBACK DELIVERY
Callback delivery is supplied for fax machines that do not support polling, for callers that are not at the fax
machine or when there is no urgency to receive the fax.
To use Callback delivery, the caller calls the Receptionist, enters the Fax-on-Demand User ID of the fax
document they wish to receive and presses option #2 from the Fax Menu. The caller is prompted to enter the
phone number of the fax machine that Fax-on-Demand is to call. The phone number may or may not be
restricted to a certain length. Certain leading digits may be denied to restrict long distance calls.
FAX COPROCESSOR BOARD LIMITATIONS
The fax coprocessor board supports only DCX, PCX, and ASCII files.
17
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
INSTALLING THE FAX COPROCESSOR BOARD ON AN EXISTING SYSTEM
The same hardware requirements are necessary for Fax-On-Demand capability as those for Perfect Voice. A
minimum of an 80386 machine, at least 4 MB total system RAM and MS DOS 6.22 or greater is required for
implementation of any fax capability. Before installing Fax-On-Demand, Receptionist version 4.1 or higher
and at least one Audioboard must be installed.
Before installation, check the package contents for the following items. If any items are missing, contact your
Teleco Sales Representative or Teleco Customer Support.
Fax coprocessor board, software package, and manuals
Software protection key, programmed for Receptionist, and Fax-On-Demand
(other options may also be enabled).
NOTE: If Fax-On-Demand was requested on the original order from Teleco, then the fax coprocessor board
and software has been loaded prior to shipment and the Fax-On-Demand application is ready to set up and use.
If this is a field upgrade to add Fax-On-Demand to an existing system, complete the following steps for
installation:
The fax coprocessor board should be jumpered for I/O address 350H. This is the factory setting and
should not be changed.
NOTE: Check the fax board documentation to verify that the addresses on the coprocessor board
are correct.
Install the fax coprocessor board. The board may be installed in any vacant slot in the PC chassis.
Connect phone cord from the modular (RJ11) jack on the fax board (labeled "wall") to the telephone
extension number for the fax board.
Perform the appropriate task in Task Manager to install the board. (Use Task 910 to install the 1-port
board, Task 915 to install the 2-port board.)
In SCREENS: Select System, select Fax Services and enter the extension number of the fax board. Then
press F5. Edit the file D:\ICAS\BIN\I3LOAD.INI:
I&M
Find the entry "tsid =" and insert the fax telephone number after the "=" (i.e. 864-297-9983)
Find the entry "csid =" and insert the fax telephone number after the "=" (i.e. 864-297-9983)
Save the changes in the D:\ICAS\BIN\I3LOAD.INI file.
In SCREENS: Select System, select Telephone System and verify that the outbound dialing parameters
?
are set properly.
No fax coprocessor board software needs to be installed as it is preloaded on all Perfect Voice systems.
18
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
SET UP FAX-ON-DEMAND USER ID
When you have created a document and you wish to make it available to callers through Fax-On-Demand, you
first need to set up the Fax-On-Demand User ID in SCREENS.
Log in to SCREENS
Select RECEPTIONIST
Select USER DIRECTORY
Press F2 to Add a User
Select F: Fax-On-Demand Document as the User ID Type
Enter the User ID you wish to assign to this document
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
I&M
Consider the following fields on Screen 2:
?
Screen 2
PERSONAL GREETING: Set the personal greeting to 1 for the first fax document for this User. The
Current Selection
personal greeting is the fax document (1-9) to be delivered. This feature allows
the administrator of this User ID to quickly change the Fax document to be sent
out by changing the personal greeting number of the User ID through
SCREENS or via the telephone through User mode.
Same Call OK?
Set this field to "Y" to enable Same Call Fax document delivery. Set to "N" to
disable the Same Call menu prompt and option 1 from the Fax menu.
Same Call Pswd:
To require a password to receive a same call Fax document, enter a 1 to 8 digit
password. A blank field indicates that no password is required.
19
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
Screen 2
Call Doms OK?
Set this field to "Y" to enable domestic (same country only) call back Fax
document delivery. Set to "N" to disable menu prompt and option 2 from the
Fax menu.
Call Doms Pswd:
If you want to require a password for callers to receive a domestic call back Fax
delivery, enter a 1 to 8 digit password. A blank field indicates that no password
is required.
Call Intl OK?
Set this field to "Y" to enable international (same or different country) call back
Fax document delivery. Set to "N" to disable menu prompt and option 3 from
the Fax menu.
File Format
This field selects the format of the Fax document file that is to be delivered.
The options are:
DCX = Binary multiple page Fax document
PCX = Binary single page Fax document
80 = 80 column ASCII text file
132 = 132 column ASCII text file
Custom FROM: Name
This is the name or description that will appear in the "FROM:" field of
delivered Fax documents. If the field is left blank, then the default value from
the Instance Setup Parameters will be used.
Send COVER PAGE?
Set this field to "Y" if a cover page is to be sent with the delivered Fax
document. The cover page includes the following information:
To: [nnn] Date: 0X/XX/97
From: ABC Co. Page 1 of ?
To: The left ([) and right (]) brackets come from the To: prefix and To: suffix
I&M
fields in Fax Services. The "nnn" is the extension number entered by the
requestor of the fax.
From: is value entered in the Custom FROM: Name field above. If the field
is left blank, then the default value from the Instance Setup Parameters will be
?
used.
20
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
CONVERTING FILE FORMATS
If the fax file is not in DCX, PCX or ASCII format, refer to one of the following procedures for file
conversion.
Converting from VPFAX files prior to Perfect Voice release 3.1:
Execute "faxc.exe -b0 <file name>" on each VPFAX document to convert to PCX format. The faxc.exe
file should be located in the D:\VPFAX directory.
Rename the converted files using the format ZZZZZZZZ.fxY where ZZZZZZZZ is the User ID and Y is
the fax number for the User ID (1-9).
Copy the converted, renamed files to the proper message directory for the User ID.
Converting from VPFAX files from Perfect Voice release 3.1:
Execute "faxc.exe -b0 <file name>" on each fax document to convert to PCX format.
If the document is a single page, rename the converted files using the format ZZZZZZZZ.fxY where
ZZZZZZZZ is the User ID and Y is the fax number for the User ID (1-9).
If the fax is a multi-page document, use the PCX2DCX.EXE in C:\UTIL to add all the PCX files for the
fax into a single DCX file. The syntax is: PCX2DCX [file to create] [files to add]. (Examples:
PCX2DCX FAX.DCX *.PCX or, PCX2DCX FAX.DCX FAX1.PCX FAX2.PCX FAX3.PCX)
Rename the final DCX file using the ZZZZZZZZ.fxY format.
Copy the converted, renamed files to the proper message directory for the User ID.
Combining multiple ASCII pages into one ASCII page:
Create the ASCII pages with a Form Feed (^L) as the last character in the file.
Copy the ASCII files together using DOS copy in binary mode. (Example: COPY /B
FAX1.TXT+FAX2.TXT+FAX3.TXT BIGFAX.TXT)
Rename the final ASCII file using the ZZZZZZZZ.fxY format.
I&M
Copy the converted, renamed files to the proper message directory for the User ID.
?
21
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
UPLOADING THE FAX FROM A FAX MACHINE OR DISKETTE
Once a Fax User ID has been created, a Fax may be uploaded to the system from a fax machine, a Fax image
file copied from a diskette, or uploaded from the DOS command line.
From a Fax Machine:
Uploading a fax to the Perfect Voice system is as easy as sending a fax to any other fax machine. Call the
system from a fax machine. Upon hearing main greeting, select the Fax User ID. From the fax menu prompts,
select "8" to upload a fax. Enter the login password for the Fax User ID you have selected. Receptionist will
transfer your call to the Fax board. When you hear the fax tone, press the start key on your fax machine. After
the transmission is completed, the fax may be downloaded by Fax-On-Demand upon request.
From a Diskette:
To copy a fax image file from a floppy disk, use the following procedure:
1. Select the Task Manager from the Utilities Menu.
2. Choose Task 900: Import Fax Files
3. Enter the full path of the fax directory (i.e., D:\MESG\).
4. Enter file format: DCX, PCX or ASCII.
5. Enter the User ID.
6. The imported fax is now ready for use.
RECORDING THE NAME FILE
When the Fax User ID is selected, Perfect Voice plays: "You have selected . . . Fax" and then the fax menu.
A name file may be recorded so the selected Fax User ID may give a description of the fax instead of saying
"Receptionist Fax." For example, if Fax ID 101 contained a map to the office, the recorded name file could
say "You have selected . . . Map and directions to the office."
I&M
When the Fax User ID is selected, if you have fax administrative privilege, you can press u
to select the fax
document number; t
to record the description of the document and y
to record the name of the
document.
?
22
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
FAX MAIL
Fax Mail gives you the ability to receive and store fax messages in a voice mailbox, with the message-handling
capabilities of a voice message. Fax messages may be sent using the Direct Fax Message Code or an Alias Fax
ID. Faxes may be retrieved at any fax machine via Same Call delivery or Call Back delivery. Many of the
voice message delivery options are available as well. For example, fax messages may be forwarded, set
private, set certified, set urgent, or set for future delivery.
NOTE: A fax coprocessor board is required for Fax Mail. For field upgrades to Fax Mail, refer to "Installing
the Fax Coprocessor Board on an Existing System" in this section.
ENABLE FAX MAIL ON A PER USER BASIS
The ability to receive fax mail messages may be enabled on a per User basis.
Log in to SCREENS
Select RECEPTIONIST
Select USER DIRECTORY
To allow this User to receive fax messages, set Caller FAX Msgs? To Yes
I&M
?
23
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
SENDING FAX MESSAGES
There are two ways to send a fax message:
Direct Fax Message Code
Alias Fax ID
SENDING A FAX MAIL MESSAGE USING THE DIRECT FAX MESSAGE CODE
Fax Mail messages may be sent by dialing the value from the Direct Fax Message field in Screen 2 of Instance
setup. The default fax code is 994.
I&M
To send the fax:
Dial Perfect Voice from a fax machine.
At the main greeting, dial o
o
r
+ User ID of the person you wish to receive the fax message.
?
Listen for the fax tone and then press the Start or Send button.
24
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
SENDING A FAX MAIL MESSAGE USING THE ALIAS FAX ID
An Alias Fax ID may be set up to receive fax messages. To set up an Alias Fax ID:
Log in to SCREENS
Select RECEPTIONIST
Select USER DIRECTORY
Press F2 to Add a User
Select A: Alias to another User ID as the User ID Type
Enter the User ID
Set Coverage Type to Fax Message
Enter the Alternate ID
I&M
To send the fax:
Dial Perfect Voice from a fax machine.
?
At the main greeting, dial the Alias Fax ID of the person you wish to receive the fax message.
Listen for the fax tone and then press the Start or Send button.
25
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
RETRIEVING FAX MESSAGES
Fax messages may be set for automatic delivery, retrieved from any fax machine using Same Call delivery, or
from any telephone using Call Back delivery. When automatic delivery is enabled for a User, the fax message
automatically prints at the User's default fax machine. From the Message Management menu, choose e
Advanced Options, then w
for Fax Delivery. You get the following options:
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
Same Call Call Back
Call Back
Set Default
Set Default
Set Default
Enable/Disable
Delivery
(Domestic) (International) Fax ID Extension
Domestic #
International#
Auto Delivery
"The telephone number of the fax
machine to be called is . . . *
*Plays the default telephone number if your previously set it
with options 5 or 6 above.
Enter telephone # w
If this is correct, press q,
To enter a new number, press w.
q
I&M
"The identifying extension is . . .**
**Plays the identifying extension if your previously set it
with option 4 above.
?
Enter new number
If this is correct, press q,
w
Your User Name
e
To enter a new number, press w,
To set fax identity to User Name, press e.
q
Fax Delivery Options
q w e r t y u i
o
Send/
Set
Set
Set
Set
Disable
Enable
Reset
Exit &
Send
Private
Certified
Urgent
Future
Cover
Headers Options Cancel
w/options
Delivery
Page
Send
26
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
CALL ACCOUNTING SETUP AND ADMINISTRATION
HOW DOES PERFECT VOICE WORK WITH CALL ACCOUNTING?
Perfect Voice is used as a collection device for all SMDR data. This eliminates the need for a stand-alone
collection platform. Most brands of telephone systems may be configured to send SMDR data to Perfect
Voice. Once collection of data is complete, the data must be transferred to a windows-based machine running
the Perfect Call Accounting software. This section presents the instructions for setting up your Perfect Voice
system for Call Accounting, including setting up the serial port, automatic deletion of old call data, and the
Call Accounting transfer method.
SET UP THE PERFECT VOICE SERIAL PORT
Determine which COM port to use:
To set up the serial port, first determine which comport to use. To identify which comports are active on the
PC (it is common to have physical hardware for the comports but not have the comports enabled on the
motherboard). Go to Serial Services and press F10 to see which comports are enabled.
Log in to SCREENS
Select SYSTEM
Select SERIAL SERVICES
Press F10 to see the COM port signals. The below "pop-up" screen will appear.
I&M
In the above example, the highlighted (gray) COM ports 1 and 2 are active. COM1 is active at 2400 baud and
?
COM2 is active at 1200 baud. COM3 and COM4 are disabled. This does not mean that the COM port does
not exist but if it does exist, it is disabled. If you need a disabled COM port, you will need to enable it on the
motherboard.
27
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
Select and edit the COM port:
Select the first available COM port or "Link". By default, Link A is COM 1, Link B is COM 2, etc. Edit the
Enabled Usage field to SMDR Only.
Save the changes. Remember the System ID Number Perfect Voice will prompt you for it again later.
In the example above, if you chose Link B (COM port 2), the System ID Number is 01 (For LINK A it is 00;
LINK C, 02; and LINK D, 03). After you save the changes, use F5 to Load the new changes. If the TSR Not
in Memory error appears, then reboot the system for the changes to take effect.
Note: If you have enabled a Link for SMDR collection, rebooted and the TSR is still not loaded in
memory, verify that the hardware key is enabled for SMDR data collection.
I&M
Plug in serial cable:
Find the SMDR port on the UST phone system. The SMDR telephone port setup is covered in detail in UST
phone system manual. Insert the RJ-11 jack end of the supplied cable into that port. Plug the DB-9 end of the
supplied cable into the serial port on the Perfect Voice system.
?
NOTE: Every time you make a COM port change (change the settings or move), you may need to do a hard
reboot of the system. (Shut the system down turn it off and then turn it back on.)
28
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
SET UP AUTOMATIC DELETION OF OLD CALL DATA
Log in to SCREENS
Select UTILITIES
Select TASK MANAGER
Go to Task 880 Start Call Accounting data delete task, SysId XX
Execute the task to start the automatic deletion of old call data at 2:00 AM in the morning.
Perfect Voice prompts you to enter the System ID number from the step above. Remember that it is a 2
digit number (00, 01, 02, or 03)
NOTE: Start deletion of old call data for all types of data transfer; otherwise the disk will fill up with
call data. After 15 days, Perfect Voice deletes call data that has been copied to floppy diskette or
transferred via modem. After 30 days, Perfect Voice automatically deletes call data that has not
been copied or transferred.
I&M
?
29
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
SET UP CALL ACCOUNTING TRANSFER METHOD ON PERFECT VOICE SYSTEM
There are three ways to transfer call record data from the Perfect Voice system to the Call Accounting PC.
Select one of these methods and set up your Perfect Voice voice processing system:
1. By floppy diskette
2. By Perfect Voice initiated modem
3. By Call Accounting initiated modem
Diskette File Transfers
To set up the Perfect Voice Task Manager to transfer SMDR call record files to diskette(s):
Log in to SCREENS
Select UTILITIES
Select TASK MANAGER
Go to Task 870 Start Call Accounting data to floppy, SysId XX
Execute the task to transfer files to diskette. Perfect Voice prompts you to enter the System ID number.
Remember that it is a 2 digit number (00, 01, 02, or 03)
I&M
?
30
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
Perfect Voice initiated transfer
To set up Perfect Voice to transfer SMDR call record files to the Call Accounting PC on a daily basis:
Log in to SCREENS
Select UTILITIES
Select TASK MANAGER
Go to Task 860 Start Call Accounting data send by modem, SysId XX, EXT
Execute the task to set up Perfect Voice to transfer the data at 1:00 AM every morning to the Call Accounting
PC. When you execute the task, Perfect Voice prompts you to enter the System ID number and extension
number of the Call Accounting PC's modem. Enter the System ID number, a space, and then the modem
number. Example: If your System ID number is 01 and modem extension is 123, you enter: 01 123
NOTE: Perfect Voice allows you to enter a phone number with up to a seven digits.
Call Accounting initiated transfer
To set up Perfect Voice to transfer SMDR call record files upon request from the Call Accounting PC:
Log in to SCREENS
Select UTILITIES
Select REMOTE ACCESS
Edit the Command to type line: Verify that the correct System ID Number from the serial port setup step
above is entered. The default value is 01.
Example: C:\SMDR\COLLECT.BAT 01
The Call Accounting software will execute this command when it dials into the system remotely.
I&M
?
NOTE: You may change the Access Password. Be sure that it matches the password specified
on the Call Accounting PC.
31
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
L. A. P. LOCAL AREA PAGING
This feature allows Users to be paged on a beeper when they receive a call and are away from their desk. L. A. P.
can be especially useful for Users that are often away from their desk or out of range of the operator overhead/PBX
page. Users can pick up the call from any phone. This section presents the steps needed to install the paging
transmitter system, set up the COM port on the Perfect Voice system, set up telephone system parameters for the
Teleco UST1280 phone system, enable L. A. P. on a per User basis, and assign the phantom DN to the User's
extension.
COMPLETE THE LICENSING AGREEMENT
First, complete the licensing agreement included in the paging transmitting package. The WaveLinks paging
system, when used in the United States, is subject to the rules and regulations of the FCC.
INSTALL THE PAGING TRANSMITTER
Your WaveLinks Computer Controlled Paging System includes a Transmitter Unit, A "Rubber Duck" Antenna, a
Right Angle Antenna Adapter, a PC Adapter, a Power/Comm Adapter Cable, and a Power Brick. To install the
paging system, perform the following steps:
1. Attach the "Rubber Duck" antenna to the Transmitter Unit. The Right Angle Antenna Adapter is available for
proper antenna positioning. In normal paging operations, the paging transmitter antenna should be oriented in
a vertical position to maximize the paging range.
NOTE: Do not attempt to operate the paging system without the antenna connected to the paging
transmitter because damage to the paging transmitter may occur.
2. Plug the PC adapter into an available DB9 serial port on the back of the Perfect Voice system PC. If the DB9
serial port is not available, you need a DB25 to DB9 adapter which is available from most computer supply
companies.
3. Plug the Power/Comm Adapter Cable into the DB9 female connector on the Transmitter Unit.
I&M
4. Connect the PC Adapter and the Power/Comm Adapter Cable.
5. Connect the Power Brick and the Power/Comm Adapter Cable. Plug the Power Brick into a 110 VAC power
outlet. The red colored PWR/BAT LED indicator on the Transmitter Unit should be illuminated when power
is properly applied.
?
For more details on the paging system, refer to the "On-Site Controlled Paging System Handbook" enclosed with
your transmitter.
32
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
HOW TO IMPLEMENT L. A. P. ON A TELECO UST 1280 PHONE SYSTEM
SET UP COM PORT FOR L. A. P.
In Screens, go to System, Select Serial Services
On Screen 1, specify the appropriate L.A.P. transmitter in the LAP Xmitter Type field
On Screen 2, set the Enabled Usage field to LAP Only
When prompted, enter Y to use the defaults for the particular transmitter you selected
SET UP TELEPHONE SYSTEM PARAMETERS FOR L. A. P.
In Screens, go to System, Select Telephone System
Edit the following fields on Screen 3
Screen 3
Park1 Call on Exten
Enter %@ This is the default setting.
I&M
?
33
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
SET UP USERS FOR L. A. P.
Following is an example of how L. A. P. works on a Teleco UST 1280 phone system for User ID 200 who is set up
for L. A. P., with an Alternate ID 500:
Caller dials extension 200, does not get an answer, call forwards to voice mail
Caller hears personal greeting: ". . . if you want to page me, press 1 . . ." ("1" is the digit set up for
Personal Assistant)
Caller presses 1 to page User
User's pager is activated
Extension 500 (Phantom DN) rings
Two possible scenarios:
User picks up page by pressing: Intercom #5#2Phantom DN extension #
Page is not picked up. Phantom DN 500 call forwards to voice mail and caller hears the personal
greeting for Alternate ID 500 which says something like "I was unable to pick up my page, please
leave a message . . ." (Messages for Alternate ID 500 are pooled to the primary extension, 200, so
User can retrieve all messages from one box.)
ENABLE L. A. P. ON A PER USER BASIS
In Screens, go to Receptionist, Select User Directory
Select User (in example above, User 200)
Edit the following fields on Screen 1 of the primary extension.
Screen 1
Coverage Type
Set Coverage Type to Personal Assistant.
Alternate ID
Set Alternate ID to the User ID to be used for paging. This field specifies
the primary User ID for automatic call coverage, or the personal assistant for
I&M
manual call coverage. (In the example, this is User ID 500)
Record greeting for primary User ID, adding the paging option
?
34
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
SET UP ALTERNATE ID
In Screens, go to Receptionist, Select User Directory
Add User ID that will be used as the Alternate ID for the above User. (in the example, add User ID 500)
Edit the following on Screen 1 and 2:
Screen 1
Transfer Type
Select Park1 as the Transfer Type.
Beeper Pager ID
Enter in the baud rate code + pager type code + capcode of the beeper this
user will use.
Baud Rate Codes: 5=512 bps (Tone/Vibe pagers)*
1=1200 bps
2=2400 bps (Alphanumeric pagers)*
Pager Type Codes: 1=One Beep (tone/vibe only pagers)
2=Two Beeps (all pager types)
3=Three Beeps (all pager types)
4=Four Beeps (tone\vibe only pagers)
5=Alphanumeric
6=Numeric
Capcode: This is the code that appears on the beeper itself.
Example: For an alphanumeric beeper with a baud rate of 2400 bps and a
capcode of 0001419, you enter: 250001419.
* The current baud rate for tone/vibe pagers is 512 bps and for numeric
and alphanumeric pagers, 2400 bps.
I&M
Screen 2
Mesg Pool ID
Enter the User's primary extenion number here. This field is an optional
field that specifies where ALL messages for this User should be placed. To
ENABLE message pooling, set this to the ID of the message box to receive all
?
messages.
Record the appropriate personal greeting for Alternate User ID
ASSIGN PHANTOM DN TO THE USER'S EXTENSION
Program the Phantom DN to appear on the telephone. (Program 39)
Program the User's phone to have ownership of the Phantom DN. (Program *33)
Program the Phantom DN to call forward to voice mail. NOTE: Make sure that the transfer recall time is
greater than the call forwarding timer. (Program 37)
35
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
TROUBLESHOOTING L. A. P.
The Transmitter does not seem to be transmitting:
Did you do a hard reboot of the system after you enabled the link/COM port for L. A. P. ?
Use F6 from Serial Services to send a packet from the transmitter to activate the pager (s).
Verify that you are plugged into the appropriate COM port and that you have the correct IRQ for that
COM port.
In Serial Services, press F9 to view COM status. Unplug the transmitter and plug it back into the COM
port: look for changes.
If COM port and IRQ are correct, try a different COM port to verify that you do not have a bad COM port.
(Be sure to do a hard reboot if you change the COM port.)
Verify that Local Paging is enabled on the key. (If this is a field upgrade, Teleco Technical Support must
get remote access to your system to make the key change.
The Packet is being sent but the pager is not going off:
Verify that the baud rate, pager type and capcode are entered correctly.
Make sure that the pagers are not too close to the transmitter. The transmitter may be overdriving the
pager if the pagers are to close.
I&M
?
36
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
IMPLEMENTING TDD
WHAT IS TDD?
TDD, Telecommunications Device for the Deaf, was invented in 1963 by Dr. Robert H. Weitbrecht as a
reliable method for TELETYPES (a.k.a. TTY) to communicate over normal telephone lines, using an acoustic
coupler. The combination of the Weitbrecht coupler (or RJ11) and TTY, integrated as a single unit, is called a
TDD.
The TDD application of Perfect Voice allows personal communication for the deaf and speech-impaired
communities on the same system as those with normal hearing. Both communities may call a single system
and receive the organization's greeting and instructions for contacting someone or how to receive information,
either verbally or with text on a TDD.
This TDD Application takes advantage of high sampling rates during recording and accurate playback
capabilities of the Perfect Voice system combined with the standard flexibility of multilingual support provided
as a standard feature of Perfect Voice.
There are three types of call-ins.
1. TDD with an acoustic coupler connected to a plain old telephone set (POTS) that generates true Touch-
Tones.
2. Newer TDD units with a RJ-11 connector and no telephone set, where Touch-Tones may be generated
from the TDD keyboard.
3. AT&T Airport TDD telephones are severely limited in functionality because they disable touchtone
dialing after the call has been connected. Only DID calls forwarded directly to a TDD mailbox allow a
caller to type in a message.
OVERVIEW
You may set up the There are two basic areas when enabling TDD on Perfect Voice: programming the system
I&M
and setting up users.
NOTE: Whether you are enabling TDD on a new installation or upgrading to TDD,
you must perform Task 230 Install TDD Option.
?
To enable TDD on a new installation:
1. Program the system.
2. Design a TDD solution. We provide two examples (TDD Faxback and Full TDD Voicemail).
3. Set up TDD Users.
Upgrading to TDD:
1. Perform system-level programming.
2. Create new Instance 98 for the TDD language.
3. Set up TDD Users.
4. You may need to manually create TDD greetings and whattodos.
5. If using TDD Faxback:
Set up Notification Class of Service 600.
Add Notification Event Record for each TDD User.
37
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
NEW INSTALLATION: SYSTEM LEVEL SET UP
System level programming is performed one time. System level set up varies depending on whether Perfect
Voice is configured for Fax on Demand or Fax Mail. Below are the items that need to be programmed.
If Perfect Voice is already configured for Fax-on-Demand or Fax Mail:
Perform Task 230.
Schedule AGC_TDD. To schedule AGC_TDD: In SCREENS, select Utilities, Scheduler. Highlight
Jobname AGCMESG and press F5.
If Perfect Voice is not configured for Fax-on-Demand or Fax Mail:
Perform Task 230.
Verify that the key is programmed for one fax channel.
Install Class 2 fax driver
Schedule AGC_TDD. To schedule AGC_TDD: In SCREENS, select Utilities, Scheduler. Highlight
Jobname AGCMESG and press F5.
DESIGNING A TDD SOLUTION
It is helpful to think of TDD as a foreign "language" on the system. Before designing a solution, first determine
the target audience. Consider how many people will be involved with the TDD "language", potential callers
and hearing-impaired employees. For example, you would not dedicate specific incoming lines to a foreign
language if you did not expect a high volume of foreign language calls. Instead, you would offer the "foreign"
caller the option to select their language: "For Expanol press 2". This approach works well for spoken foreign
languages; however, TDD presents an additional issue because the TDD language is made up of TDD tones.
The TDD caller cannot hear the verbal options and the hearing caller is unfamiliar with and unable to interpret
the TDD tones. The main challenge is to design a tactful script combining voice and TDD.
I&M
An example of a typical greeting with TDD tones at the end is:
"Thank you for calling ABC Co., please enter the extension of your party or hold through the tones for
the hearing impaired for assistance . . . " [PLS DIAL 833 GA]
?
"Spoken"
[TDD TEXT]
The hearing caller will hear "Thank you for calling hearing impaired for assistance" followed by the TDD
tones. If using a TDD terminal, the hearing-impaired caller will read: PLS DIAL 833 GA.
Below are two basic TDD strategies to help you get started:
TDD Faxback
Full TDD Voicemail
38
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
TDD Faxback:
In this configuration, it is assumed that no employees are using TDD terminals to communicate with incoming
callers. The TDD caller (after waiting through the verbal portion of the whattodo) reads a prompt instructing
them to dial a code that routes to a TDD greeting\mailbox. This TDD mailbox should contain text including
your company name and any other information you wish to convey. At the end of this message, the TDD
caller may type in a message that is automatically delivered to a fax machine.
NOTE: A Class 2 fax modem is required.
User ID 833 is the default TDD User set up to receive TDD messages and automatically deliver messages to a
fax machine. The TDD tone portion of the whattodo should instruct the caller to dial 833.
To set up TDD Faxback:
Perform Task 920 (Install Class 2 Fax Drivers)
Use Task 240 to create and append the TDD tone portion of the whattodo that instructs the TDD caller to
dial User ID 833. The text should say: PLS DIAL 833 GA (GA means Go Ahead.)
Perform Task 233 to create the personal greeting for User ID 833. An example script should include your
company name and any other information. (After the caller types in a message, it is automatically
delivered to the fax machine.)
Enter the extension or telephone number of the fax machine that will receive the TDD messages. To do
this, in SCREENS, select Notify, Notification and edit the notification event record for User 833. Change
the Pager or Outside Number field from "FAX#" to the appropriate telephone number. If the telephone
number is not local, place the following letter before the telephone number:
Internal Telephone Extension: A
Local Telephone Number: B (default, not required)
Long Distance Telephone Number: C
International Telephone Number: D
For example, to specify a long distance fax number, you enter: C8642979983
I&M
?
39
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
Full TDD Voicemail:
In this configuration, personnel in the office have TDD terminals and are able to conduct a real-time
conversation with a TDD caller. There may also be hearing-impaired employees who require full auto-
attendant and voice mail. The TDD language may be invoked using the same method as the TDD
greeting\mailbox above or, if high TDD traffic is expected, channels may be dedicated to TDD. In addition,
TDD Users need to be added.
To set up Full TDD Voicemail:
1. Use Task 240 to create and append the TDD tone portion of the whattodo that instructs the TDD caller.
2. Perform Task 233 to create the TDD Day and Night greetings and Whattodos for User ID 988. Task 233
only creates the UV1 (D:\MESG\00000988.UV1) file which will be used for the TDD Daytime Greeting.
To create the additional files, you should perform Task 233 three separate times and copy the UV1 file to
the TDD Daytime Whattodo (D:\MESG\00000988.UV2), the TDD Nighttime Greeting
(D:\MESG\00000988.UV3) and the TDD Nighttime Whattodo (D:\MESG\00000988.UV2). Use Task
480 to copy the files. Then perform Task 233 one more time to create the TDD Daytime Greeting
(D:\MESG\00000988.UV1).
3. Add TDD Users (Refer to "TDD User Setup")
CALL ROUTING CONSIDERATIONS
In the Full TDD Voicemail implementation, there are three basic call routing configurations:
1. Primary Attendant Answering with English on all Channels.
This configuration places the responsibility of selecting TDD prompts in the caller's hands.
2. Primary Attendant with TDD language dedicated to specific channels.
I&M
On a per channel basis, enter 98 for the TDD language in the language instance field. All calls starting on
these channels will begin with TDD.
?
3. DID to language specific Users
For DID calls ringing directly to a station and forwarding with integration to a specific User, set the
Alternate Instance field in the User record to 98.
TDD USER SETUP: NEW INSTALLATION
F6 to copy an existing User
Edit the following fields in Screen 1 and Screen 2:
Alternate Instance
Set to 98 (TDD Language).
Perform TDD chk?
Set to Y.
Perform the appropriate tasks to create the personal greetings for the User IDs you added (Tasks 231-234,
241-244).
User ID 833 is the default TDD User set up to receive TDD messages and automatically deliver messages to a
fax machine. If you wish to enable TDD Faxback for the new Users you just added, you may use the
Notification event record for User ID 833 as a template to copy from. Enter the appropriate extension or
telephone number in the Pager or Outside Number field.
40
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
UPGRADING TO TDD
If upgrading to Release 4.3 or adding TDD to Release 4.1, you need to manually create TDD Users and
mailboxes for the TDD greetings and whattodos and create the TDD Language Instance. In addition, if adding
TDD to Release 4.1, contact Technical Support for the additional batch jobs (MAKTDDGR.BAT,
TDDAPPD.BAT) and changes to DAY.BAT and NIGHT.BAT.
SYSTEM LEVEL SET UP: UPGRADES
System level programming is performed one time. System level set up varies depending on whether Perfect
Voice is configured for Fax on Demand or Fax Mail. Below are the items that need to be programmed.
If Perfect Voice is already configured for Fax-on-Demand or Fax Mail:
Schedule AGC_TDD (Refer to Advanced Administration.)
Perform Task 230
If Perfect Voice is not configured for Fax-on-Demand or Fax Mail:
Verify that the hardware key is programmed for one fax channel.
Install Class 2 fax driver
Schedule AGC_TDD (Refer to Advanced Administration.)
Perform Task 230
*If upgrading to Release 4.3, you must perform Task 230. If adding TDD to Release 4.1, there is a remote
possibility that the TDD option diskette is needed. If the D:\SCHTDD directory does not contain .rms files, the
TDD diskette is required.
I&M
?
41
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
TDD LANGUAGE INSTANCE SETUP: UPGRADES
Use Instance 0 as a template to create a new Instance 98 for the TDD language. Edit the following fields:
Description
Set to TDD Language
Greeting Filename
Set to D:\MESGTDD\GREETING.RMS
Whattodo Filename
Set to D:\MESGTDD\WHATTODO.RMS
Speech Prompt Path
Set to D:\SPCHTDD\
TDD Language?
Set to Y.
Voice Record Path
Set to D:\MESGTDD\
TDD USER SETUP: UPGRADES
Adding TDD Users
If upgrading to Release 4.3, you need to manually create TDD Users and mailboxes for the TDD greetings and
whattodos.
F6 to copy an existing User
Edit the following fields in Screen 1 and Screen 2:
Alternate Instance
Set to 98 (TDD Language).
Perform TDD chk?
Set to Y.
I&M
Perform Task 230 to create the personal greetings for the User IDs you added.
Adding TDD Greetings and Whattodos
?
If upgrading to Release 4.2A or adding TDD to Release 4.1, you need to manually create the TDD mailboxes
for the TDD greetings and whattodos. You should create the following:
User ID 981: TDD Daytime Greeting
User ID 982: TDD Daytime Whattodo
User ID 983: TDD Nighttime Greeting
User ID 984: TDD Nighttime Whattodo
User IDs 901 through 904 should be used as templates to copy from.
NOTE: If adding TDD to Release 4.1, you also need to contact Technical Support for the additional batch jobs
(MAKTDDGR.BAT, TDDAPPD.BAT) and changes to DAY.BAT and NIGHT.BAT.
42
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
HOW TDD FAXBACK WORKS
Users who receive TDD messages have a Notification Class of Service (600) designed to flag messages for
delivery to an in-house or remote fax machine. All TDD messages are faxed from the Perfect Voice fax
modem to a per User specified fax machine.
The following hardware is required:
A Perfect Voice system with the TDD option installed and enabled
A Class 2 fax modem installed on Perfect Voice
A standard office fax machine or PC ready to receive faxes
The following software settings are required:
Set up new Notification Class of Service: TDD to Fax Machine for TDD Message
Set up notification event records for each TDD User utilizing TDD Faxback
SET UP NOTIFICATION CLASS OF SERVICE 600: TDD TO FAX MACHINE FOR TDD
MESSAGE
If upgrading to Release 4.3 or adding TDD to an existing system:
In SCREENS, Go to Notify, Class of Service
F2 to add a Class of Service 600
Edit the following fields in Screen 1 and Screen 2:
Class of Service Number
Set Class of Service Number to 600.
Description
Enter TDD to Fax Machine for TDD Message.
I&M
Schedule Number
Enter 5.
TDDmsg Only Activation
Set to Y. This COS will only be used for TDD2FAX delivery. All
other fields will be ignored.
Action>
05 D X
?
43
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
ADD NOTIFICATION EVENT RECORD FOR EACH TDD USER
Determine which Users will be receiving TDD messages.
In SCREENS, Go to Notify, Notification
Use F2 to add a notification event record for each TDD User.
Edit the following fields:
New Messages Received COS
Enter 600.
Pager or Outside Number
Enter the extension or telephone number of the fax machine that
will receive the message.
If the telephone number is not local, place the following letter before
the telephone number:
Internal Telephone Extension: A
Local Telephone Number: B (default, not required)
Long Distance Telephone Number: C
International Telephone Number: D
For example:
To specify a long distance fax number, you enter: C8642979983
TDD FAXBACK LIMITATIONS
No messages will be delivered to the fax machine while remote diagnostics are accessed.
In-Line remote communication may not be used in conjunction with TDD Faxback
TDD Faxback will only send messages from outside Callers to a fax machine.
I&M
?
44
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
TDD TEXT FILE CONSIDERATIONS
When creating TDD prompts use the word "Type" when prompting the caller to type a TDD message and
"Dial" when requesting DTMF from the caller. Typing digits on the TDD terminal in an attempt to dial an
extension is the equivalent of speaking digits and Perfect Voice will not respond. Below are some commonly
used abbreviations used with TDD.
GA.................................... "Go Ahead" or "it's your turn to type, expecting response" (Use after Menu
options)
GA OR SK....................... Completing all messages and getting ready to hang-up ("I am finished. Start typing,
else acknowledge with SKSK")
Q....................................... Same as Question Mark. Means expecting answer.
Q GA................................ Asking question. Please reply.
SK..................................... "I have Stopped Keying" (End of conversation) (After recording or before call
transfer)
SKSK ............................... Acknowledge received SK (both finished so hang-up)
XXXX .............................. Erasing the error (Since backspace may be slow or confusing)
BYE.................................. Good-Bye
MSG................................. Message
MSGS............................... Messages
HD.................................... Hold
HLD ................................. Hold
DIAL................................ Press a button on the telephone (touch tone)
TYPE ............................... Press a key on the TDD terminal
PRESS.............................. Avoid this word; its meaning is unclear and confusing
ENTER............................. Avoid this word; its meaning is unclear and confusing
I&M
?
45
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
IMPLEMENTATION NOTES
Perfect Voice does not dynamically interpret TDD tones. All TDD is treated as voice during a call. After a
TDD message has been recorded the TDD Scanner utility converts the message from a raw TDD file to pure
TDD tones at an adjusted volume. Playback of unscanned TDD messages may cause certain symptoms.
While playing back a newly recorded TDD personal greeting the User may get cut off. The User should
record the TDD personal greeting and then wait for the TDD conversion utility to run. The converter runs
approximately every 5 minutes. For this reason it may be easier to start out with the Task Manager utility
to record the User's personal greeting as described above.
If a TDD User reports reading a time/date stamp followed by no message (while in Message
Management), tell them to NOT delete the message and call back in a few minutes. The TDD conversion
program may have been converting their message at the same time they tried to listen to it.
It is not possible, nor practical to have voice and TDD within the same message. When the TDD
conversion utility runs it looks for TDD tones within a message. When TDD is encountered the message
is rewritten with mathematically perfect TDD tones. Any voice that is part of the message will be
discarded.
Make sure the Message Review? field in the TDD Instance Setup is set to N. Playback of the raw TDD
message during message review may cause TDD callers to be hung up on.
The TDD standard supports different baud rates. You may want to configure different prompts for
different baud rates
TDD is very slow (about 4 or 5 characters per second). Keep message size to a minimum and avoid wasted
characters. Use abbreviations when possible.
Signal (volume) levels are very high. High Volume (LOUD) prompts are good for long distance and accurate
transmission, but are very loud to voice callers, and may decrease DTMF sensitivity.
A TDD terminal display may be either paper or electronic. Electronic displays are common and may be 1
line, 2 lines, or more. The number of columns range from 20 to 80 per line. Typically, single-line displays
continuously scroll from right to left, while multi-line displays scroll bottom to top, a line at a time. You may
want different prompts for different types of machines.
The size of a TDD speech file is about 2000 bytes per character.
End Recording Silence Times should be long, about double that used for voice recordings.
I&M
TDD only appears to be used primarily in English.
Prompts should begin with a CR-LF and an identifier character (like a star or slash) so that the TDD User can
determine the start of a new prompt. Some of the newer TDDs that have paper or LCD displays may show
RECEIVED data in uppercase, and TRANSMITTED data in lower case.
?
46
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
ADDITIONAL TDD UTILITIES
There are two programs or utilities provided for management of the TDD facilities. The purpose of these programs
are to allow you to create TDD messages and read TDD messages. They are:
Text TDD
TDD Text
The "Text to TDD" Utility allows a System Administrator to compose TDD messages for callers such as a
"greeting" and "caller instructions" without using a TDD. Instead, the Perfect Voice keyboard is used. The
composition of the message is important so that the recipient of the message can easily follow it.
The input file is created by using the appropriate utility in the Task Manager. Or, an ASCII file, created on another
computer, can be copied to Perfect Voice and manually converted. The output file for this procedure is a speech file
containing the tones (TDD Baudot) appropriate for a TDD device and for use by Perfect Voice TDD utilities.
To reverse the process, use the "TDD to Text" program which reads the TDD speech file and translates it into
ASCII text for visual access on a monitor or printout. Note that the Baudot tones of the TDD require three times
more disk storage than the equivalent spoken recording.
SCANNER UTILITY
The batch file, C:\AUDIO\AGC_TDD.BAT addresses the problem of low volume and noisy recording generated
from a TDD. It scans certain directories for message files containing TDD tones and, upon finding any, regenerates
them using mathematically perfect TDD tones. The utility also appends the content of those messages to a LOG file
for certain applications. A TDD message file is only regenerated once.
To implement this utility, set up a 'Type D' scheduled event that runs C:\AUDIO\AGC_TDD.BAT every 5 or 10
minutes.
MAKE_ONE UTILITY
I&M
Usage: C:\UTIL\MAKE_ONE.BAT <text_filename> <TDD_filename>
Description:...This command converts a text file to a TDD speech file. It calls TEXT2TDD.EXE (see
below).
?
Parameters: ...text_filename: This parameter specifies the name of the text file that contains the ASCII text
to be converted.
TDD_ filename: This parameter specifies the name of the output TDD speech file.
Example: .MAKE_ONE john.txt d:\mesgtdd\00000205.nam
In this example, the text file, john.txt is converted to a TDD speech file named
d:\mesgtdd\00000205.nam, the name recording for TDD User 205.
47
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
TEXT2TDD UTILITY
Usage: C:\AUDIO\TEXT2TDD.EXE /parameter1=value1 /parameter2=value2, etc.
Description:... This command converts an ASCII text file to a TDD speech file, allowing for specification of
conversion parameters.
Parameters:... /TEXT=filename The DOS filename (or device) for ASCII text input. The default is "CON"
(keyboard).
......./TDD=filename The DOS filename for PCM speech output. The default filename is the same name as the
/TEXT file. The default file extension is .SPH
......./BAUD=n Selects either 45 baud (USA - Default) or 50 baud (International)
......./STOPB=n Two stopbits are sent after every character. For compatibility with some TDD equipment
(older or slower), extra stop bits may be required. "n" specifies the number of additional
stop bits to be added. For example, /STOP=2 puts 4 stop bits on each character. The
default is /STOP=0 (2 stop bits).
......./ATTN=n The output audio is 0 dBM0 (maximum volume without distortion). "n" specifies the number
of dBM0 attenuation to place on the file (how much to reduce the volume). The values
for "n" ranges from 0 (very loud) to 30 (very quiet). Typical values are 3 to 9.
......./PAUSE=n The duration of a silence "pause" in milliseconds. This is used when the character "@" is
encountered on input, OR, when a spacing character is encountered, OR when a tone
block maximum is reached. (See /BLOCK qualifier). After a silence pause, a stop bit is
sent. Pauses can be used to prevent accidental dialtone detection, and to allow silence
for DTMF detection. NOTE: If using "pieced speech" be sure to place pauses on some
of the fragments to prevent the assembled phrase from being constant tone.
......./BLOCK=n The maximum duration, in milliseconds, of consecutive bits of tone before a pause is
automatically inserted.
......./HELP Display a brief command summary.
I&M
?
48
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
...... /TRACE=n Enable diagnostic trace levels. (For Testing only)
Input File:......Characters are input from either a file or the keyboard (or any other DOS device). The
default is the keyboard. The input is simple ASCII with carriage-return/line-feed at the
end of each line. (See /TEXT qualifier).
...... If input is from a file, input terminates on end-of-file. If input is from a keyboard, input terminates on a
Control-Z character. In either case, input can be terminated with the "~" character
(tilde). With keyboard input, DOS standard line editing is available (just like EDLIN),
and the input is not processed until an ENTER is pressed.
...... A pause for silence can be inserted by using the "@" character. (See /PAUSE qualifier)
Output File:...The output is an audio disk file, in 64Kb 8-bit u-Law PCM format. The content of the file is
a mathematically perfect combination of sine waves and silence. (See /TDD qualifier).
...... The file logically starts with 8 stop bits. After each pause, one stop bit is sent. Baudot characters received
before the first shift character are assumed to be LETTERS. The file always ends in
LETTERS mode.
Exit error-levels: Exit error levels are defined as follows.
...... 0 = output file created with no errors.
...... 1 = command syntax or semantic error or HELP message.
...... 3 = input file not found or disk error.
...... 4 = hardware key failure.
I&M
?
49
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
TDD2TEXT UTILITY
Usage: C:\AUDIO\TDD2TEXT.EXE /parameter1=value1 /parameter2=value2, etc.
Description:...This command converts a TDD speech file to an ASCII text file, allowing for specification of
conversion parameters.
Parameters:.../TDD=filename ..The DOS filename for PCM speech input. The default file extension is "SPH".
This qualifier is required.
......./BAUD=n Selects either 45 baud (USA - default) or 50 baud (International)
......./DBM0=n Selects the minimum signal level, in dBM0, for detection of valid TDD data. Note, values for "n"
are 0 to 45, which actually mean from 0 dBM0 (Loud) to -45 dBM0 (very quiet). The
default is 30 (or -30 DBM0 (quiet)).
......./HELP Display a brief command summary.
......./TRACE=n Select output display mode.
0 = no output
1 = verbatim text decoded (for input to TEXT2TDD)
2 = decoded text with header containing file name and date (default)
3 = detailed text with header and measurements
4-9 = reserved for testing.
Ouptut File:...The output is a display of the TDD text being decoded. To send output to a file, use DOS
redirection on the command line. The exact format of the output depends on the trace
level used. Following are several special characters that may be part of the output.
`>' indicates a carriage return,
`|' indicates a line-feed,
`<' indicates a backspace, and
`_' indicates a space.
I&M
Exit Error Levels:..... Exit error levels are defined as follows.
0 = No errors, and valid TDD characters detected.
1 = Command syntax error, or semantic error, or HELP message.
2 = No errors, No TDD bits found in file.
?
3 = TDD bits found, but either framing errors or insufficient characters
4 = Hardware key failure or authorization failure.
50
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
TELECO CALLER ID
Perfect Voice with SMDI integration may be configured to provide Caller ID information to Users on telephone
systems with Caller ID capability. For example, when an outside caller leaves a message in a voice mail box,
Perfect Voice plays back the calling party's 10 digit phone number as part of the message time and date stamp. If
LAP (Local Area Paging) is implemented with Caller ID, the calling party's number is displayed on the pager, so
regardless of where the User is in the building, they know who is calling.
Special integration patterns may be set up to route incoming calls to special mailboxes, transaction boxes, or
dialplans, allowing better service to customers. A limited amount of inbound sorting may be done based on area
code and/or phone number of calling party. Refer to the System Administration section for more information.
Highlights:
Teleco UST1280 Caller ID supported on direct calls to voice mail
Ten digit extension length supported
Caller ID information played back in message envelope
Area code routing
This feature allows Caller ID information to be played to the User as part of the message envelope.
WHAT IS REQUIRED
Caller ID service from central office on all incoming trunks.
R3 phone system software and hardware.
SMDI voice mail integration in use.
10 digit ITF file format (provided with 4.3 as TSRSMDI.ITF)
I&M
LIMITATIONS
Perfect Voice must be programmed on the second ring to allow Central Office caller ID information to be
passed to the phone system.
?
Caller ID information is only passed to the first station to answer the call, therefore:
Calls forwarded due to a busy or ring no answer condition will not be accompanied by the Caller ID
information, nor will a subsequent message contain this information.
Caller ID should not be confused with DID, ANI or DNIS. These features are currently not supported.
51
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
CREATING AUDIOFORMS APPLICATIONS
Audioforms is a program used in conjunction with the automated attendant and voice messaging part of Perfect
Voice. With Audioforms, a flexible, script-driven interactive voice response application can be quickly
developed and tested, using the same system as the rest of Perfect Voice. Callers wishing to select the
application do so by selecting a type I User ID. Control of the Perfect Voice channel is then passed from
Receptionist to Audioforms and the appropriate script.
Audioforms supports the following applications and more.
Prompt the caller with a series of questions and concatenate the recorded answers into a single message.
The message may contain caller speech, selected pre-recorded files, caller-entered DTMF information
translated to spoken prompts, or any combination of these pieces.
Validate caller-supplied DTMF input to be a certain number of digits, within a range of values or a valid
time expression.
Check for the existence of a file.
Delete a file.
Output caller-entered information to a text file. The file can be created (overwriting the old version) or
appended to.
Execute a DOS command
NOTE: When using Audioforms, not all options may be used concurrently due to memory considerations.
This is particularly true when Rhetorex boards are installed.
BASIC SCRIPT RULES
The following rules apply for Audioforms script files.
Blank lines and all text following a "!" or ";" are ignored.
Commands may be upper or lower case.
All leading and trailing white space is ignored.
I&M
All white space (space, tab) between arguments is treated as a single space.
BRANCHES AND LABELS
?
Labels provide reference points within a script to which command execution can be directed. For example, the
following command directs command execution (or "branches") to the label, 1000.
B 1000
; branch past greeting & play
; whattodo
P D:\SPEHCNG\GREETING.RMS
; play the greeting
1000 P D:\SPEHCNG\WHATTODO.RMS
; play the whattodo
Labels are optional and are integers 0 - 9999. Note that leading zeros are ignored.
Labels do not need to be in numeric order.
Each label value can only be defined once.
Labels may be defined without a command.
Audioforms provides command to check whether or not the previous command executed successfully. Most
commands provide this option. After executing one of these commands, a return flag is set indicating success
or failure. For example, consider the command that checks for the existence of a file called
D:\MESG\00000123.UV1. Success indicates that the file exists and failure indicates that it does not.
52
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
In this example, if the file does not exist, execution is directed to label 2000. If the file exists, execution simply
continues with the command following the conditional branch statement.
C D:\MESG\00000123.UV1
; check for the User's personal greeting
BF 2000
; if the file's not there, skip next line
P D:\MARKET\REPLACE.SPH
; play "this file will be deleted"
2000 D D:\MESG\00000123.UV1
; delete the file
Audioforms allows branching on success as well as failure, along with a lot of other conditions. See the Bn
command summary.
COMMENTS
Like any source code, an Audioforms script should be well commented. The developer of the script is often the
one who benefits most from this practice. If nothing else, it forces the script developer to think about and
document the exact logic of the application.
Comments are simply everything else after a semicolon or exclamation mark. Comments can start in any
column on a script line. A comment may appear on the same line as a command (after the command),or it may
appear alone on a script line. Following are some examples of Audioforms comments.
; This is a comment
; This is another comment
B 1000
; the "B" command on this line will work
; the "B" command on this line won't work
B 1000
FORMAT SPECIFIERS AND STRING VARIABLES
Audioforms allows the use of up to 10 string variables numbered from 0-9. The string variable number is
referenced in a "format specifier." The format specifier may contain, among other text, a percent sign
character, `%', followed by other format parameters. The percentage character and other format parameters are
substituted with the appropriately formatted string number. See the example below.
I&M
?
53
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
Format parameters include the following.
%%..................................... interpreted as single percent character
%d..................................... convert to decimal, and substitute
%nd .................................. convert to decimal, minimum field width "n"
%.xd ................................ convert to decimal, maximum field width "x"
%n.xd.............................. convert to decimal, min width "n" and max width "x"
%0nd ................................ convert to decimal, leading zeros, min width "n"
%-nd ................................ convert to decimal, left justify, min width "n" Note that if the number is greater than
32000, you must place an "l" before the "d" ("ld" instead of "d")
%s..................................... substitute exact string
%ns .................................. substitute exact string, minimum field width "n"
%.xs ................................ substitute exact string, maximum field width "x"
%n.xs.............................. substitute exact string, min width "n" and max width "x"
%0ns ................................ substitute exact string, leading zeros, min width "n"
%o..................................... convert string to octal integer and substitute
%x..................................... convert string to hex (lowercase) integer and substitute
%X..................................... convert string to hex (uppercase) integer and substitute
%#o .................................. convert string to octal integer and sub leading 0
%#x .................................. convert string to hex (lowercase) integer sub leading 0x
%#X .................................. convert string to hex (uppercase) integer sub leading 0X
For the following example, if string variable number 6 is "123" (caller-entered information), the character
string, "123" would be substituted in place of %08d, causing the command to check for the existence of a file
with the name D:\MESG\00000123.UV1.
C6 D:\MESG\%08d.UV1 ; check for the User's personal greeting
I&M
PIECED SPEECH
A series of files can be played in sequence, based on the characters of a string variable. For example, suppose a
caller entered 123. Audioforms allows the script developer to easily play the following files in sequence,
?
resulting in the caller hearing, "one two three".
D:\SPCHENG\DIGIT1.RMS
D:\SPCHENG\DIGIT2.RMS
D:\SPCHENG\DIGIT3.RMS
This is illustrated in the following script fragment.
M D:\SPCHENG\DIGIT
; define file prefix
N .RMS
; define file suffix
P D:\SPCHENG\ENTERUSR.RMS ; "Enter your User ID..."
G0 3 5 2 ""
; get up to 3 digits of caller input
V0 0 200 5
; number must be between 0 and 200
P D:\SPCHENG\SELECTED.RMS ; "You have selected..."
P0
; play the speech files for digits
54
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
Assuming the caller entered "123", Audioforms constructs and plays the files defined by each digit in the
string. For each digit, the file name is constructed by appending the digit to the digit and appending the suffix
to that. Therefore for the digit 1, the filename is constructed by concatenating the following three strings.
"D:\SPCHENG\DIGIT" + "1" + ".RMS" = "D:\SPCHENG\DIGIT1.RMS"
COMMAND LIST
Following is a brief listing of the available Audioforms commands. Those commands followed by an `n' allow
a reference to a string variable number in the command parameter. Those commands followed by an `x'
require a number to determine the "flavor" of the command. Those commands marked with an `*' set a return
flag which can be evaluated with the Bn command.
Ax ..................................... alter destination RCPT Instance or User ID.
Bx ..................................... conditional Branch to label.
Cn ..................................... *check if file exists
Dn ..................................... *delete file
Fn ..................................... *append output text data to log File
Gn ..................................... *get string (DTMF) from caller
In ..................................... *append (insert) speech file to temp recording
Ln ..................................... *set logging file name OR Klinic job name
M ...................................... set default file path (prefix) for speech files.
N ...................................... set default file extension (suffix) for speech files.
Pn ..................................... *play speech file
R ...................................... *record/append from caller to temp recording
S ...................................... set diagnostic trace level 0-4.
U ...................................... set "cancel" and "end" DTMF digits
Vn ..................................... *validate string
I&M
W ...................................... wait and check for single DTMF digit.
Xx ..................................... end script and return to receptionist.
Yn ..................................... *close temp recording and append to speech file
?
Zn ..................................... set string to value.
COMMAND SUMMARY
Following is a detailed description of the available Audioforms commands. Command variations with the
phrase "fmt" are those which require modification by the inclusion of a string number (i.e. Pn to play a speech
file)
55
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
Ax id
Description:...This command specifies the return Instance or User ID to assume on exit. It only applies if the X2
command is used to exit the script. Note that Audioforms does not verify the existence
of the Instance and/or User ID.
Parameters: ..id... the Instance or User ID, based on the command variation (optional)
Variations:.....The meaning of the parameter depends on the value of `x' as shown.
A0 n..........................Set return Instance to "n" = 0-65534.
A1 n..........................Set return User ID to "n" = 0-99999999.
A0 ..............................Set return Instance to original value.
A1 ..............................Set return User ID to original value.
Return Flag...not implemented
Bn lbl
Description:...This command controls branching in a script. Branching may be unconditional, based on the
return code from the previous command, the caller's input DTMF or lack thereof. See
the W command for more on caller-input DTMF.
Parameters:...lbl.. the label number in the script
Variations:.....B lbl ... Always branch to label (unconditional).
BW lbl .......................Branch to label if Wink is detected.
BH lbl .......................Branch to label if Hangup is detected.
BF lbl........................Branch to label if Failure (error) on last command.
BS lbl........................Branch to label if Success (no error) on last command.
B0 lbl........................Branch to label if "W" command DTMF is [0].
B1 lbl........................Branch to label if "W" command DTMF is [1].
B2 lbl........................Branch to label if "W" command DTMF is [2].
I&M
B3 lbl........................Branch to label if "W" command DTMF is [3].
B4 lbl........................Branch to label if "W" command DTMF is [4].
B5 lbl........................Branch to label if "W" command DTMF is [5].
?
B6 lbl........................Branch to label if "W" command DTMF is [6].
B7 lbl........................Branch to label if "W" command DTMF is [7].
B8 lbl........................Branch to label if "W" command DTMF is [8].
B9 lbl........................Branch to label if "W" command DTMF is [9].
B* lbl ........................Branch to label if "W" command DTMF is [*].
B# lbl........................Branch to label if "W" command DTMF is [#].
BA lbl .......................Branch to label if "W" command DTMF is [A].
BB lbl .......................Branch to label if "W" command DTMF is [B].
BC lbl .......................Branch to label if "W" command DTMF is [C].
BD lbl .......................Branch to label if "W" command DTMF is [D].
BX lbl .......................Branch to label if "W" command any DTMF detected.
B~ lbl........................Branch to label if "W" command DTMF timeout (no DTMF).
Return Flag...not implemented
56
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
Cn filename
Description: ...This command checks for the existence of a file.
Parameters:...filename the name of the file to check for (optional)
Variations:.....The optional parameter is either an explicit speech filename or a format specifier which translates
to a speech filename.
C.................................Close and check for existence of RCPT temporary recording file.
C filename.................Check for existence of "filename".
Cn "fmt".....................Check for existence of filename specified by format string.
Return Flag ...Failure: File does not exist.
Success: File exists.
Dn filename
Description: ...This command deletes a file.
Parameters:...filename the name of the file to delete (optional)
Variations:.....The optional parameter is either an explicit filename or a format specifier which translates to a
filename.
D.................................Delete the RCPT temporary recording file.
D filename.................Delete the file named "filename".
Dn "fmt".....................Delete the file specified by format string..
Return Flag ...Failure: File does not exist or is write-protected.
Success: File was deleted.
Fn string
Description
I&M
: ...This command appends text to the current log file/device.
Parameters:...string ....the string to append to the log file.
Variations:.....The optional parameter is either an explicit string or a format specifier which translates to a
string. Output is not written to the file until a newline character is received. A newline
?
character is specified by a \n. At that point, the log file is opened, appended to with the
buffered information and immediately closed.
F string .....................Append "string" to the log file.
Fn "fmt".....................Append the string specified by the format string to the log file.
Return Flag ...Failure: unable to open file or append data, a serious error
Success: text was appended to log file
57
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
Gn max first more quit
Description:...This command gets a complete DTMF string from the caller and places it in the string number
specified by `n'.
Parameters:...maxthe maximum number of digits to accept for this command
first ............................the maximum time in seconds to wait for the first DTMF
more...........................the maximum time in seconds to wait between DTMF digits
quit.............................a quoted string of one or more DTMF digits which terminates the
entry and results in a failure return
Variations:.....none
Return Flag...Failure: no digits were received or quit string was encountered as part of input
Success: DTMF digits were received successfully; no quit string encountered
In filename
Description:...This command appends the specified speech file to the current temporary recording
Parameters:...filename the name of the file to append to the temp recording (optional)
Variations:.....The parameter is an explicit filename or format specifier which translates to a filename.
I filename..................Append "filename" to the current recording.
In "fmt".....................Append the filename specified by the format string to the current
recording.
In ..............................Append the filenames specified by the string number to the
current recording (see Piecing Speech).
Return Flag...Failure: unable to locate filename or filenames
Success: the file or files were appended successfully to the temp recording
I&M
Ln filename
Description:...This command specifies the logging file or device. It also can specify the KLINIC scheduler as
the log output. This is the mechanism for executing a DOS command from an
?
Audioforms application. The command will be performed before any pending scheduler
events, even if the scheduler is not started.
Parameters:...filename the name of the file to send log output to
Variations:.....The parameter is usually an explicit filename or a format specifier which translates to a filename.
It may also be an expression which causes logging output to go to the KLINIC scheduler
as an immediate event.
L filename..................Set the log file to the indicated filename.
Ln "fmt".....................Set the log file to that specified by the format string.
L *description ...........Set the log file to the KLINIC scheduler. Description is 1-8
characters associated with the immediate event.
Ln "fmt".....................Set the log file to the KLINIC scheduler, but only if "fmt" starts
with an "*" and contains no more than 8 characters for the
description (see above).
Return Flag...Failure: unable open output file for append or, if KLINIC scheduler is specified, KLINIC is not
loaded.
Success: the file can be successfully opened for append or, if KLINIC scheduler is
specified, KLINIC is loaded.
58
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
M filename
Description: ...This command specifies the default file prefix for speech files. It can be used to define a default
path, or, in the case of pieced speech, it can be used to define the path and first portion
of the filename and/or extension.
Parameters:...none
Variations:.....The optional parameter is either an explicit path or a format specifier which translates to a path.
M................................Use path from script.
M "" ..........................No default path.
M "." ..........................Use CURRENT speech path.
M "*" .........................Use MESG path (from temp file).
M "path" ....................Use specified path.
M "format".................Use formatted path with variable substitution.
Return Flag ...not implemented
N filename
Description: ...This command specifies the default file suffix for speech files. It is often used to define a default
file extension.
Parameters:...none
Variations:.....The optional parameter is either an explicit extension or a format specifier which translates to an
extension.
N ""...........................No default extension.
N "ext".......................Use specified extension.
N "format" .................Use formatted extension with variable substitution.
Return Flag ...not implemented
I&M
Pn filename
Description: ...This command specifies the name of the speech file to play.
?
Parameters:...filename the name of the file to play (optional)
Variations:.....filename.
P filename ..................Play "filename".
Pn "fmt".....................Play the filename specified by the format string
The parameter is either an explicit filename or a format specifier which translates to a Pn
Play the filenames specified by the string number (see
Piecing Speech).
Return Flag ...Failure: unable to locate filename or filenames
Success: the file or files were played successfully
59
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
R prompt max endsilence endDTMF
Description:...This command records up to "max" seconds of speech into the temporary file. The recording is
terminated if "endsilence" seconds of silence or "endDTMF" digit is detected. Just prior
to the recording, the speech file, "prompt" is played. The size of this file must be a
multiple of 8192 bytes.
Parameters:...prompt.. the file played just prior to recording, usually RECDBEEP.RMS
max ............................the maximum time in seconds to record
endsilence ..................the maximum amount of silence to record before terminating the
recording.
endDTMF ..................the DTMF which terminates the recording
Variations:.....none
Return Flag...Failure: zero-length recording unable to create output file (out of disk space?)
Success: a non zero-length recording was successfully created
S tracelevel
Description:...This command specifies the diagnostic trace level. Higher trace levels generate more information.
Parameters:...tracelevel..... the diagnostic trace level from the following list.
0 default for channel
1 errors only
2 messages
3 source trace and messages
4 full engineering trace
Variations:.....none
I&M
Return Flag...not implemented.
U cancel end
?
Description:...This command specifies the default DTMF digits used to cancel and end input DTMF strings.
Parameters:...cancel... the default DTMF digit that cancels DTMF input (default is *)
end .............................the default DTMF digit that ends DTMF input before reaching the
maximum number of digits, without having to time out. (default is
#)
Variations:.....none
Return Flag...not implemented.
60
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
Vn min max type
Description: ...This command performs validation checking of a string variable. The type of validation, specified
by the "type" parameter, determines how "min" and "max" are interpreted.
Parameters:...min depends on the value of the type parameter (see below)
max ............................depends on the value of the type parameter (see below)
type ............................the value of this parameter determines what kind of validation is
performed on the string variable
Variations:.....Vn min max 0.........type=0: Checked to see if string variable number n is no less than "min"
and no more than "max" digits in length.
Vn min max 1..........type=1: Strip off the first character of string variable number n
and checked to see if it is no less than "min" and no more than
"max" digits in length.
Vn min max 2..........type=2: String variable number n is checked to see if it is all
numeric characters.
Vn min max 3..........type=3: String variable number n is checked to see if it is numeric
and checksums to modulo 7. "min" and "max" are ignored.
Vn min max 4..........type=4: String variable number n is checked to see if it is a valid
hour/minute time. It must be between 0 and 2359 and last two
digits must be always between 0 and 59.
Vn min max 5..........type=5: String variable number n is checked to see if it is numeric
and is between "min" and "max". This validation method is most
commonly used for basic range checking.
Vn min max 6..........type=6: String variable number n is decremented by 1 and
checked to see if it is less than "min". "max" is ignored.
Vn min max 7..........type=7: String variable number n is incremented by 1 and checked
to see if it is more than "max". "min" is ignored.
Return Flag
I&M
...Failure: The specified check fails, or string is not an integer (types 1-5)
Success: The specified check passes.
W time
?
Description: ...This command waits "time" seconds for a single DTMF digit after the current recording finishes
playback. If 0 is specified, no waiting is done. This command is placed just before a B
command which branches upon receipt of a single DTMF digit.
Parameters:...timethe amount of time to wait in seconds.
Variations:.....none
Return Flag ...not implemented.
61
Perfect Voice
Optional Applications
Xx
Description:...This command terminates execution of the script and returns control of the channel back to the
RCPT. If a message file was recorded and the variation specifies it, the message is sent
to the AFORMS User ID based on that User ID's settings.
Parameters: ...none
Variations:.....X ... Save message and perform User ID default endcall option.
X0..............................Save message and transfer caller to the default Operator.
X1..............................Save message and transfer caller to whattodo.
X2..............................Save message and transfer caller to User ID specified with Ax
command (may be another AFORMS User).
X3..............................Save message and end call.
X4..............................Save message and transfer caller to main system Greeting.
X5..............................Save message and transfer caller to Security. (see Ax command)
Return Flag...not implemented
Yn filename
Description:...This command copies the current temporary recording to "filename". If "filename" already exists,
the temporary file is appended to it. The temporary recording is not deleted. To delete it,
use the D command.
Parameters:...filename the name of the file to copy the temp recording to
Variations:.....The parameter is either an explicit filename or a format specifier which translates to a filename.
Y filename..................Copy/append to "filename".
Yn "fmt".....................Copy/append to the filename specified by the format string
Return Flag...Failure: unable to create new file or append to existing file
I&M
Success: the file was copied/appended to successfully
Zn string
?
Description:...This command assigns a string to a string variable.
Parameters:...string .... the string to assign to the string variable
Variations:.....none
Return Flag: .not implemented
62
System
Administration
I&M
?
I&M
?
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION TO ADMINISTRATION................................................................................................................. 1
WHAT IS Perfect Voice? ............................................................................................................................................... 1
BEFORE YOU BEGIN ..................................................................................................................................................... 1
TERMS.......................................................................................................................................................................... 1
DUTIES OF A SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR .............................................................................................................. 3
BASIC SYSTEM MAINTENANCE..................................................................................................................................... 3
QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS........................................................................................................................................... 3
PROBLEM REPORTING................................................................................................................................................... 3
COMMON USER TYPES ............................................................................................................................................... 4
TYPE U USERS (PERSON).............................................................................................................................................. 4
TYPE D USERS (AUDIOTEXT)........................................................................................................................................ 4
TYPE B USERS (PUBLIC DISTRIBUTION LIST)................................................................................................................. 4
TYPE T USERS (SINGLE DIGIT MENU OPTIONS).............................................................................................................. 4
PRE-DEFINED USERS ................................................................................................................................................... 5
USER TEMPLATES......................................................................................................................................................... 5
USER TEMPLATES (CONTINUED) .................................................................................................................................. 6
AFORMS USERS ............................................................................................................................................................ 6
SYSTEM GREETING USERS............................................................................................................................................ 6
SYSTEM GREETING USERS (CONTINUED) ..................................................................................................................... 7
CHANGE A USER'S PASSWORD................................................................................................................................. 8
FUNCTIONAL SUMMARY:.............................................................................................................................................. 8
TO ACCESS:.................................................................................................................................................................. 8
VIA THE TELEPHONE..................................................................................................................................................... 8
LIMITING USER OPTIONS .......................................................................................................................................... 9
PURPOSE....................................................................................................................................................................... 9
I&M
FUNCTIONAL SUMMARY:.............................................................................................................................................. 9
TO ACCESS:.................................................................................................................................................................. 9
DESIGNATING ADMINISTRATIVE AUTHORITY ................................................................................................ 10
PURPOSE..................................................................................................................................................................... 10
?
FUNCTIONAL SUMMARY:............................................................................................................................................ 10
TO ACCESS:................................................................................................................................................................ 10
CREATE AN ALTERNATE LISTING FOR DIRECTORY ASSISTANCE............................................................ 11
FUNCTIONAL SUMMARY:............................................................................................................................................ 11
TO ACCESS:................................................................................................................................................................ 11
COPY THE MAIN USER'S NAME TO THE ALIAS USER .................................................................................................. 11
ENABLE NAME RECORDING PLAYBACK. .................................................................................................................... 11
ADD PAGER NOTIFICATION FOR A USER ........................................................................................................... 12
FUNCTIONAL SUMMARY:............................................................................................................................................ 12
TO ACCESS:................................................................................................................................................................ 12
FUNCTIONAL SUMMARY:............................................................................................................................................ 13
TO ACCESS:................................................................................................................................................................ 13
DISTRIBUTION LISTS................................................................................................................................................. 14
CREATE A PUBLIC DISTRIBUTION LIST....................................................................................................................... 14
FUNCTIONAL SUMMARY:............................................................................................................................................ 14
TO ACCESS:................................................................................................................................................................ 14
CONFIGURE A DEPARTMENTAL DISTRIBUTION LIST.................................................................................................... 14
PUBLIC DISTRIBUTION LIST OF ALL USERS................................................................................................................. 15
FUNCTIONAL SUMMARY: ............................................................................................................................................15
TO ACCESS: ................................................................................................................................................................15
MODIFYING A DISTRIBUTION LIST VIA THE TELEPHONE..............................................................................................15
MODIFYING A DISTRIBUTION LIST VIA SCREENS.........................................................................................................15
FUNCTIONAL SUMMARY: ............................................................................................................................................15
TO ACCESS: ................................................................................................................................................................15
DISTRIBUTION LIST REPORTS ......................................................................................................................................16
FUNCTIONAL SUMMARY: ............................................................................................................................................16
TO ACCESS: ................................................................................................................................................................16
RECORDING SYSTEM GREETINGS AND WHATTODOS....................................................................................17
COMPOSE OPEN AND CLOSE SCRIPTS ...........................................................................................................................17
RECORD GREETINGS ...................................................................................................................................................18
ADJUST VOLUME OF GREETINGS.................................................................................................................................19
ACTIVATE GREETINGS.................................................................................................................................................19
EMERGENCY GREETING AND WHATTODO........................................................................................................20
COMPOSE SCRIPTS ......................................................................................................................................................20
RECORD GREETINGS ...................................................................................................................................................20
TEST OPERATION ........................................................................................................................................................20
RETURN TO NORMAL OPERATION ...............................................................................................................................20
AUDIOTEXT MESSAGES ............................................................................................................................................21
FUNCTIONAL SUMMARY: ............................................................................................................................................21
TO ACCESS: ................................................................................................................................................................21
RECORD THE AUDIOTEXT MESSAGE............................................................................................................................21
FUNCTIONAL SUMMARY: ............................................................................................................................................21
TO ACCESS: ................................................................................................................................................................21
ADDING OR CHANGING SCHEDULER QUEUE EVENTS ...................................................................................22
IDENTIFY FUNCTIONS TO BE ADDED............................................................................................................................22
BACK UP ORIGINAL VERSION OF BATCH FILE.............................................................................................................22
CREATE OR CHANGE THE BATCH FILE ........................................................................................................................22
TEST BATCH FILE........................................................................................................................................................22
I&M
MAKE A BACKUP COPY...............................................................................................................................................22
ADD NEW EVENT TO THE SCHEDULER QUEUE ............................................................................................................22
HOLIDAY OPERATION...............................................................................................................................................23
COMPOSE HOLIDAY SCRIPTS.......................................................................................................................................23
?
RECORD HOLIDAY SCRIPTS .........................................................................................................................................23
CUSTOMIZE THE HOLIDAY.BAT FILE IF YOU WANT TO USE THE NIGHTTIME MAILBOX..............................................23
SCHEDULE WHEN THE HOLIDAY GREETING BEGINS ...................................................................................................25
RETURN TO WORKDAY MODE.....................................................................................................................................25
SCHEDULE WHEN THE HOLIDAY GREETING ENDS ......................................................................................................26
ADMINISTERING THE NIGHTTIME DEFAULT MAILBOX ...............................................................................27
COMPOSE NIGHTTIME DEFAULT MAILBOX SCRIPT ........................................................................................................27
RECORD GREETING FOR NIGHTTIME DEFAULT MAILBOX ............................................................................................27
DETERMINE THE RECIPIENT OF GENERAL DELIVERY MESSAGES...................................................................................27
FUNCTIONAL SUMMARY: ............................................................................................................................................27
TO ACCESS: ................................................................................................................................................................27
EDIT THE NIGHT.BAT FILE...........................................................................................................................................28
EDIT THE DAY.BAT FILE .............................................................................................................................................30
HOSPITALITY SETUP AND ADMINISTRATION ...................................................................................................32
FUNCTIONAL SUMMARY:............................................................................................................................................ 32
TO ACCESS:................................................................................................................................................................ 32
MESSAGE STORAGE SPACE..................................................................................................................................... 33
VIA THE TELEPHONE .................................................................................................................................................. 33
FREEING STORAGE SPACE .......................................................................................................................................... 33
ADDITIONAL DETAILED DRIVE USAGE INFORMATION ................................................................................................ 34
CREATING REPORTS FROM TASK MANAGER .................................................................................................. 35
RECEPTIONIST SETUP: RSU.LST............................................................................................................................... 36
PHONE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION: PSD.LST............................................................................................................. 37
USER DIRECTORY MANAGER INFORMATION BY USER ID: UDI.LST........................................................................ 37
USER DIRECTORY MANAGER INFORMATION BY DEPARTMENT/NAME: UDM.LST .................................................. 38
USER DIRECTORY USAGE BY USER ID: UDU.LST .................................................................................................... 38
USER DIRECTORY USAGE BY DEPARTMENT AND CALLS: UDG.LST.......................................................................... 39
USER DIRECTORY USAGE BY DEPARTMENT AND CALLS (SIMPLE): USE.LST............................................................ 39
USER DIRECTORY PARAMETERS AND PRIVILEGES BY USER ID: UDP.LST................................................................ 40
USER DIRECTORY DIALSTRING USAGE BY DIALSTRING: UDD.LST ........................................................................... 41
USER DIRECTORY UNAVAILABLE MESSAGE INFORMATION: UNV.LST ..................................................................... 42
USER MESSAGE SUMMARY BY MESSAGE COUNT: UMS.LST .................................................................................... 42
USER MESSAGES (UNHEARD) BY USER ID AND DEPARTMENT: UMN.LST............................................................... 43
USER MESSAGES (HEARD) BY USER ID AND DEPARTMENT: UMO.LST .................................................................... 43
USER MESSAGE DETAIL BY USER ID: UMD.LST ...................................................................................................... 43
USER MESSAGE DETAIL BY DATE AND TIME: UMT.LST........................................................................................... 44
USER MESSAGE RECORD COMPLETION STATUS: UMR.LST ...................................................................................... 44
DISTRIBUTION LISTS BY OWNER USER ID AND LIST NUMBER: DLL.LST.................................................................. 45
DISTRIBUTION LISTS BY MEMBER USER ID: DLM.LST............................................................................................. 45
USER NOTIFICATION EVENTS SUMMARY FOR ALL USERS: UNE.LST ....................................................................... 46
USER NOTIFICATION EVENT RECORD SUMMARY BY COS: NER.LST........................................................................ 46
CREATING SINGLE DIGIT MENU OPTIONS ........................................................................................................ 47
WHAT IS A T BOX?..................................................................................................................................................... 47
HOW TO BUILD A MULTILEVEL MENU TREE............................................................................................................... 47
I&M
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION VIA THE TELEPHONE.......................................................................................... 49
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR MENU OPTIONS ................................................................................................................. 49
TO ACCESS:................................................................................................................................................................ 49
CHANGE SYSTEM TIME OR DATE................................................................................................................................ 50
?
I&M
?
Perfect Voice
System Administration
INTRODUCTION TO ADMINISTRATION
WHAT IS Perfect Voice?
Perfect Voice is a system that functions with the telephone system to enhance an organization's overall
telecommunications environment. Depending on the capabilities of the telephone system, and how it and Perfect
Voice are configured, many productivity enhancing functions are available for callers and Users.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN
The System Administrator plays a key role in the everyday operation of Perfect Voice. It is important that the
System Administrator understand at least the basics of how Perfect Voice operates. The System Manager should be
familiar with all features available to Users and completely understand the User Guide before covering the material
in this manual.
TERMS
Understanding the meaning of the following terms is the first step to understanding Perfect Voice.
audiotext ............. ...... ......A message heard by a caller after selecting certain options (i.e. "Our mailing address is
543 Morton Avenue...").
automated attendant ... ......A function of Perfect Voice in which callers are transferred to a User's extension after
entering his User ID.
broadcast.........................A feature which allows a User to send a single message to several Users with one action.
Perfect Voice supports both public and private distribution lists.
caller ... .............. ...... ......An individual calling the company from an outside line. Callers typically are not set up
on the system with a User ID.
channel............................An independent set of circuitry on the audioboard which is capable of processing
transactions from a single call. Transactions include basic on-hook and off-
hook, DTMF recognition and dialing, audio recording and playback. Each
I&M
channel requires one single line extension on the telephone system.
dialstring.........................A series of characters which represent a sequence of DTMF, switch hook and/or pauses
which will be performed by Perfect Voice during the process of a call.
?
DTMF.. .............. ...... ......The tone generated by a push-button telephone when one of its keypad digits is pressed.
default User......... ...... ......The User to which a caller is transferred if he does not enter any DTMF digits.
distribution list.... ...... ......A group of Users to whom a message can be easily sent or forwarded by selecting a
single number.
greeting .............. ...... ......The recorded message heard by callers after the system answers their call (i.e. "Thank
you for calling ABC Company...").
Instance number..............An identifier associated with a unique set of Users and Receptionist parameters.
name file....................... ....A short recording which states the User's name. This is usually played just after the
prompt "You have selected.......".
Notify.........................A product within the Perfect Voice software that notifies a User of a new message.
password.................... A one to eight digit code controlled by the User which acts as a security code for access to
User Mode.
1
Perfect Voice
System Administration
personal greeting ...... The message heard by a caller when the User he is trying to reach is not available. This
message is normally recorded by the User in his own voice. A personal greeting
might sound something like, "You've reached the voice message box of Jack
Phatt. Please leave a message after the tone...".
physical extension...........The actual telephone system extension number which is dialed by Perfect Voice to reach
the called party.
scheduler.........................The program that, on a scheduled time-of-day and day-of-week, executes batch programs
to reconfigure the system.
SCREENS.......................The user interface used to configure and maintain the Perfect Voice system database.
site number .. ...... ...... ...... A unique number, from 1-999, assigned to each network site. This number is used in
SCREENS and in User Mode to reference site records.
switch hook...................... A signal sent to the telephone system by depressing the hook switch for a brief period of
time, usually about a 1/2 second. The switch hook is usually used to place
callers on hold by single line extensions.
User ................................ . An individual defined in the Perfect Voice User Directory database.
User ID............................A one- to eight-digit number assigned to each User. This is the number or "extension" that
a caller enters to select a User. The User ID is often the same number as the
User's telephone system extension number.
User Mode.......................A mode from which a User manages various User specific features. User Mode includes
Message Management, Call Management, List Management, Notification and
User Setup.
User type ..... ...... ...... ...... A field in the User record which specifies how the call will be handled when the User ID
is selected by a caller or another User.
voice messaging...............A function of Perfect Voice in which messages are recorded for a User or group of Users.
whattodo..........................The recorded message heard by callers immediately after the system plays the greeting.
The message tells callers what actions to take. (i.e. "Using your touch-tone
phone, please enter the extension of the person you wish to reach...").
I&M
?
2
Perfect Voice
System Administration
DUTIES OF A SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR
BASIC SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
As mentioned above, the System Administrator performs a key role in the operation of Perfect Voice. Following are
some examples of the basic duties as a System Administrator.
Add a new User to the Perfect Voice system.
Change new message notification parameters for a User.
Record an audiotext announcement.
Generate reports showing basic system information such as call counts, port usage, message counts,
available messaging space, etc.
Understand how to record the main system greeting and main system whattodo.
Maintain public distribution lists.
These procedures along with many others are documented in step-by-step detail later in this section of the manual.
A review of the System Configuration section of this manual will assist in the understanding of the SCREENS
menus.
QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS
The System Administrator is responsible for answering questions from Users and having a working knowledge of
how the system operates. The System Administrator will also help new or inexperienced Users become accustomed
to using the system. Answers can be found in a variety of sources, including at least the following:
Perfect Voice Installation and Maintenance manual
The End User Guide
Contact with the vendor's technical personnel
Personal experience with the system
I&M
PROBLEM REPORTING
In the event that a User or caller reports a problem with the system, the System Administrator and/or the vendor's
technical personnel work to determine the cause of, and solution to the problem. The cause of a problem may be one
or more of the following:
?
User error
Insufficient training
Incorrect system configuration
Faulty hardware
Faulty software
The System Administrator plays a central role in separating those issues which can be addressed within the
organization (i.e. training, User error, etc.) and those issues which need to be addressed by the vendor's technical
personnel. Some problems, especially those experienced just after the system is installed can only be resolved
through cooperation between both parties. In either case, a complete description of the situation is vital in
determining the problem and the solution. Information should be gathered as to when the situation occurred, who
was involved (caller and/or User), what occurred and how the system was being used at the time.
3
Perfect Voice
System Administration
COMMON USER TYPES
Perfect Voice allows for a number of different User types. Each User type is associated with a letter. For example,
the most common User type is `U'. The User types that you deal with most often are listed below. Note that this is
only a partial list of available User types; a complete list of User types is described in System Configuration.
TYPE U USERS (PERSON)
This is the most common type of User on the system. This is the standard, or normal, User type. A User of this type
is associated with each person in the company who has a physical extension number on the telephone system. This
type of User is set up for automated attendant and/or voice messaging. Type U Users can be configured in a variety
of different ways to allow automated attendant, voice messaging, both or neither.
Following are the parameters most often customized for a Type U User. Note that this is a partial list only; a more
complete description of the User parameters can be found in System Configuration.
User Name
the User's full name
Department
the User's department (for reporting purposes)
MESSAGE RECORDING-
Max Msg Length
maximum time for callers to leave a message
TYPE D USERS (AUDIOTEXT)
This type is not associated with a person. A caller who selects a User of this type is not transferred to an extension,
nor is the caller allowed to leave a message for the User. Only a message plays, after which, the caller is returned to
the whattodo. The audiotext message may be changed at any time by simply re-recording the type D User's personal
greeting.
For example, a company may want to play a message that offers the caller, 1) General company information, 2)
Directions to the office, or 3) The full business address and phone number. Each one of these caller options would
be configured as a D type User. The personal greeting for each of the Users would be recorded to play the specific
I&M
information for that topic to the caller. This method saves valuable time of employees who normally would have to
give the information to a caller.
T
?
YPE B USERS (PUBLIC DISTRIBUTION LIST)
A User of this type exists only to provide a list of Users to whom a message can be easily sent or forwarded by
selecting a single User ID. A message sent or forwarded to a type B User is really sent to the type B User's private
distribution list number 0. Callers are not allowed to select this User.
For example, when a User wants to forward one of his messages to everyone in the Sales department, he might
select 725, a type B User as the destination of his message. This causes the message to be sent to everyone in User
725's private list number 0.
TYPE T USERS (SINGLE DIGIT MENU OPTIONS)
This type of User allows Single Digit Menu options to be defined from this User ID. These single digit options may
be selected by the caller from the personal greeting of this User. For example, when a caller to an automobile
dealership is prompted to press 1 for Sales (Type T User), the personal greeting for User ID 1 then prompts the
caller to press 1 for new car sales or press 2 for used car sales. The additional single digit options of 1 and 2 are
defined User ID 1. Type T Users may be linked to other Type T Users to create menu layering. Refer to "Creating
Single Digit Menu Options" in this section for more information.
4
Perfect Voice
System Administration
PRE-DEFINED USERS
Perfect Voice comes pre-configured with some special User IDs in Instance 0. Some of the Users supplied with
Perfect Voice make recording greetings easier while others are used as templates for building the database.
940 (Nighttime Mailbox)
This User exists only as a general delivery mailbox for callers defaulting to the
operator position at night. Refer to Administering the Nighttime Default
Mailbox later in this section.
I&M
USER TEMPLATES
User IDs 950-959 provide a template for adding Users to the database.
?
950 (Full Feature Extn User)
This User exists only to provide a template for adding standard Users. When
adding a large group of mailboxes, use this User as a starting point for the copy.
951 (Limited Feature Extn User) This is a limited version of the Full Feature Extension User in that only one
personal greeting is allowed and the User has no access to lists, delivery options
or advanced messaging. This type of User is one that has only the basic voice
messaging needs of receiving and sending messages.
952 (Mailbox Only User (Full) This User exists only to provide a template for adding mailbox only Users. This
User ID will not perform any transfers.
953 (Limited Mailbox Only User) This is a limited version of the Mailbox Only User (Full) in that only one
personal greeting is allowed and the User has no access to lists, delivery options
or advanced messaging. This type of User is one that has only the basic voice
messaging needs of receiving and sending messages.
5
Perfect Voice
System Administration
USER TEMPLATES (CONTINUED)
954 (Audiotext User)
This User exists only to provide a template for adding audiotext Users. This
User ID will not perform any transfers or take any messages.
955 (Transfer Only User)
This User exists only to provide a template for adding transfer-only mailboxes.
These mailboxes cannot receive messages.
956 (T Box Template)
This User exists only to provide a template for adding Single Digit Menus.
957 (Hospitality User)
This User exists only to provide a template for adding Hospitality Users. This
User is designed for the resort, hotel or motel environment.
958 (CoProcessor Fax Test User) This User exists only to provide a template for testing Fax-on-Demand
documents.
959 (Class 2 Fax Test User)
This User exists only to provide a template for testing Fax-on-Demand
documents.
AFORMS USERS
970 (Open /Close Aform)
This User exists only to provide an easy way to manually place the system in
open or close mode without using the keyboard.
I&M
SYSTEM GREETING USERS
?
User IDs 980-989 provide a simple way of recording all greeting and whattodo messages.
980 (Main Instance Greetings)
This User exists solely to provide an easy and secured way of recording the
greeting and whattodo messages for the main company. Because it is a type B
User, callers are not allowed to select this User. The following greetings may
be recorded for User ID 980:
Greeting 1 (UV1):
This is the system's daytime greeting message.
Greeting 2 (UV2):
This is the system's daytime whattodo message.
Greeting 3 (UV3):
This is the system's nighttime greeting message.
Greeting 4 (UV4):
This is the system's nighttime whattodo message.
Greeting 5 (UV5):
This is the system's holiday greeting message.
Greeting 6 (UV6):
This is the system's holiday whattodo message.
Greeting 7 (UV7):
This is the system's emergency greeting message.
Greeting 8 (UV8):
This is the system's emergency whattodo message.
6
Perfect Voice
System Administration
SYSTEM GREETING USERS (CONTINUED)
981-987 (Alternate Greetings)
These Users exist solely to provide an easy and secured way of recording per-
channel greeting and whattodo messages. The same greeting numbers that are
available for User ID 980 may be recorded for User IDs 981-987.
988 (TDD Greetings)
This User exists solely to provide an easy and secured way of recording TDD
greeting and whattodo messages. The same greeting numbers that are available
for User ID 980 may be recorded for User ID 988.
989 (Spanish Greetings)
This User exists solely to provide an easy and secured way of recording Spanish
greeting and whattodo messages. The same greeting numbers that are available
for User ID 980 may be recorded for User ID 989.
These User IDs should not be removed from the system except under the direction of a qualified technician. Many
of the system functions assume the existence of these Users.
I&M
?
7
Perfect Voice
System Administration
CHANGE A USER'S PASSWORD
Some Users may change the password to the mailbox, then forget the new password. Other times, a User ID may
need to be reassigned to a new User. In both cases, the password for the User ID needs to be reset by the System
Administrator to give access to the mailbox. The password for any User on the system may be reset either through
the SCREENS interface or via the telephone by the System Administrator.
FUNCTIONAL SUMMARY:
Change a User's password from SCREENS
TO ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS
Select RECEPTIONIST
Select USER DIRECTORY
Select Screen 3 of the User ID to be reset and press F4 to Edit.
I&M
?
Change the password back to default (same as the User ID).
Press F10 to save.
VIA THE TELEPHONE
Users with access to Administrative Menu may follow these steps.
Call the system (from within the building).
Enter the system access code (the default is 999).
Enter User ID nnn.
Enter Password nnn.
Enter 8 for Administrative Menu
Enter 4 to reset a Users password.
Enter User ID for password reset.
The Users password is reset to match their User ID.
8
Perfect Voice
System Administration
LIMITING USER OPTIONS
PURPOSE
Limiting the options available to Users in User mode is an effective method for managing the system. Some reasons
for limiting options are:
Simplifying User mode
Tailoring mailboxes for specific tasks
Controlling abusive Users
Preventing a feature from being activated/deactivated in error.
FUNCTIONAL SUMMARY:
Limit the options available to a User in User Mode
TO ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS
Select RECEPTIONIST
Select USER DIRECTORY
Select Screen 3 of the User ID to be changed.
Press F4 and consider the following fields.
I&M
?
Tip: For Users only having message lamp notification (no pagers) set Notify Menu to N.
Refer to the System Configuration section of this manual for a detailed description of each field.
9
Perfect Voice
System Administration
DESIGNATING ADMINISTRATIVE AUTHORITY
PURPOSE
System Administration, in a limited capacity, can be accessed over the telephone. Allowing more than one User
access to the Administration Menu gives the System Administrator a backup in the event that they are not available
to perform their duties. For example, if a User has lost their password and the Administrator is not available, an
Alternate Administrator could (from their own mailbox) reset the Users password.
From the Administrative Menu you are given the ability to do the following:
Change system time.
Change system date.
Reset any User's password.
Reset a User ID (If User has Admin Reset Enabled)
Check available disk space.
Record network site name
FUNCTIONAL SUMMARY:
Enable Administrative access for a User
TO ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS
Select RECEPTIONIST
Select USER DIRECTORY
Select Screen 3 the User ID to be changed.
Press F4 and edit the following field.
I&M
Screen 3 of 3
CALL MENU
This field allows access to the Administrative Menu when set to Y.
?
Admin Menu ?
When set to N, Users hear the time and date stamp.
10
Perfect Voice
System Administration
CREATE AN ALTERNATE LISTING FOR DIRECTORY ASSISTANCE
Each User can have multiple alternate name spellings available from Directory Assistance. To provide a User with
multiple name spellings, an Alias User ID record must be created which references the main User ID record. The
listing of this Alias User ID with Directory Assistance contains the alternate spelling of the User's name. In this
procedure, the Alias User ID refers to this Alias User ID record while the Main User ID refers to the original User
ID. The original User ID and the exact alternate spelling of the User's name must be identified.
Choose an "Alias" User ID number, taking into account the system's dial plan. For example, if there are no 800
series User IDs and there are no plans to have 800 series User IDs on the system, you may want to select User ID
801 as the "Alias" User ID. The exact number really doesn't matter, as long as it does not conflict with any other
planned numbers in the dial plan. For more information on dial plans, refer to the Installation section of this
manual.
FUNCTIONAL SUMMARY:
Add an Alias User ID for alternate directory listing
TO ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS
Select RECEPTIONIST
Select USER DIRECTORY
Press F2 to Add a User
Create the Alias User ID record paying special attention to the following fields:
User Type
set to "A" (Alias to another User ID)
Directory Name
the alternate name spelling
I&M
Alternate ID
the User's Main User ID
Press (F10) to SAVE the changes.
COPY THE MAIN USER'S NAME TO THE ALIAS USER
?
Copy the main User's name recording to that which is used by Alias User. This can be done with the following
command sequence from the DOS system prompt. Substitute "mmm" with the main User ID and "aaa" with the
Alias User ID. Note that the number of zeros preceding either User ID in this command must be equal to eight
minus the number of digits in the User ID. For this example, the User ID is three digits in length, so the number of
zeros is five. The Task Manager, using Task 480 Copy one file to another may also be used to
complete the copy.
D:
CD \MESG
COPY 00000mmm.NAM 00000aaa.NAM
ENABLE NAME RECORDING PLAYBACK.
Key in the following command substituting the Alias User ID for "aaa".
SETUDT /INSTANCE=0 /USER=aaa /NAMEREC=Y
11
Perfect Voice
System Administration
ADD PAGER NOTIFICATION FOR A USER
Pager notification of new messages may be configured for any User on the system. Since a User may have multiple
classes of notification, a User may be paged for a new message received as well as having Notify activate the
message lamp at the desk, call the User at the desk or call the User at an outside number. To create pager
notification, identify the User ID and the User's pager telephone number then select the appropriate pager class of
service.
FUNCTIONAL SUMMARY:
Identify Pager Notification COS
TO ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS
Select NOTIFY
Select CLASS OF SERVICE
Browse the available pager Classes of Service to make the appropriate selection
I&M
?
12
Perfect Voice
System Administration
FUNCTIONAL SUMMARY:
Add Notification Event Record for a User
TO ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS
Select NOTIFY
Select NOTIFICATION
Press F2 to add a new NER
Fill in the appropriate fields
Press F10 to save
I&M
* Note: There should be no hyphens in the field containing the pager or outside telephone number or in the field
containing the pager PIN number.
?
13
Perfect Voice
System Administration
DISTRIBUTION LISTS
Users who send a message to a public list could, instead, set up their own personal distribution list that would
contain the User ID's of everyone in the Sales Department. Unfortunately, whenever someone joined or left the
Sales Department, everyone would have to edit their private list for the Sales Department. Creating the Sales
Department as a public list has the advantage of being centrally maintained. Only one list, that of the type B User
(User ID 725 in the example) needs to be changed. The creation of a public list includes selecting the User ID to be
assigned to the list and a list of Users for the public list (i.e. all Users in the Sales Department).
CREATE A PUBLIC DISTRIBUTION LIST
FUNCTIONAL SUMMARY:
Create a New Public Distribution List
TO ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS
Select RECEPTIONIST
Select USER DIRECTORY
Use the Add function (F2) to create a new User ID record. Be sure to specify the following parameters as shown.
Do not change any other parameters from their default value.
User Type
B for Broadcast User
User Name
Enter the "name" of the public list (i.e. "Sales Dist. List")
After creating the type B User ID, log in as the new User (the password defaults to the same number as the User
ID). New Users are automatically placed into Quick Setup after logging in the first time. While in Quick Setup, be
certain to address the following:
I&M
Password: Set this to whatever you feel provides adequate security.
Name recording: Record this to state what the list represents (i.e. "Sales Department distribution list").
Personal greeting: It is not necessary to make this recording.
Listing with directory assistance: Set this up accordingly (i.e. spell out "SALES")
?
After going through Quick Setup, select List Management (3) and add all the Users to the list.
CONFIGURE A DEPARTMENTAL DISTRIBUTION LIST
It is possible to configure a distribution list to contain all Users in a department. A public distribution list or a type
U User's private distribution list can be configured in this manner. However, this task should be performed only by
someone who is familiar enough with DOS to enter a command from the DOS system prompt.
From the DOS system prompt, enter the following command, making the appropriate substitutions.
SETBCAST /INSTANCE=aaa /USER=bbb /LIST=ccc /DEPT=ddd
aaa is the instance number.
bbb is the User ID whose list you want to contain all Users in a department.
ccc is the list number (when modifying public lists, use 0 or skip this qualifier altogether)
ddd is the Department as it appears in the User ID record.
When the command completes, a message will appear indicating what actions were taken.
14
Perfect Voice
System Administration
PUBLIC DISTRIBUTION LIST OF ALL USERS
FUNCTIONAL SUMMARY:
Creating a Public Distribution List to contain all Users
TO ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS
Select UTILITIES
Select TASK MANAGER
Highlight Task 225 the entry entitled "Configure a public list to contain all Users" and press Enter. Enter the new
User ID that you just created when prompted.
This public distribution list, or broadcast list, will include all Users on the system. This method should not be used
if there are Users on the system that are not "owned" by someone. Unwanted User IDs must be deleted from the
public distribution list in List Management.
Note that this method completely rebuilds the public distribution list from scratch, replacing the previous list of
Users with a completely new one. This method can therefore be used to periodically "refresh" the public list.
MODIFYING A DISTRIBUTION LIST VIA THE TELEPHONE
Modifying a public list is like managing a private distribution list. Simply log in as the type B User and select List
Management. List Management for a public distribution list automatically accesses list number 0, which contains
the User IDs associated with this public distribution list.
From the List Management menu, the following tasks can be performed.
Review the Users on the list.
Add Users to the list.
Remove Users from the list.
I&M
MODIFYING A DISTRIBUTION LIST VIA SCREENS
FUNCTIONAL SUMMARY:
?
Maintain a Distribution List
TO ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS
Select RECEPTIONIST
Select LIST MANAGEMENT
Refer to "Receptionist: List Management" in the System Configuration section of this manual for details on using
the List Management screens interface.
15
Perfect Voice
System Administration
DISTRIBUTION LIST REPORTS
FUNCTIONAL SUMMARY:
Generate a Distribution List Report
TO ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS
Select UTILITIES
Select TASK MANAGER
Highlight Task 420 (REPORT DISTRIBUTION LISTS BY OWNER)and press Enter. A report of all private
and public distribution lists will be generated and displayed on the screen. The report is an ASCII file named
C:\RCPT\DLL.LST and may be copied to a floppy disk for transport to another computer or workstation for
printing.
I&M
?
16
Perfect Voice
System Administration
RECORDING SYSTEM GREETINGS AND WHATTODOS
Perfect Voice is configured to play different greetings in day and night mode. These greetings are usually set up
during installation; however they may be re-recorded at any time. The steps to do this are listed below.
COMPOSE OPEN AND CLOSE SCRIPTS
The main greeting for both day and night mode is broken into two sections known as the "Greeting" and
"Whattodo". The Greeting is only heard once during a call, followed immediately by the Whattodo (the Whattodo is
a list of options available to the caller). The Whattodo may be heard at several points throughout the call.
A typical greeting may be "Thank you for calling Atlanta Promotional Products...."
The Whattodo is a list of options available to the caller such as, "If you know the extension of the person you are
calling you may enter it at any time", " for a directory of individuals press 411", or " hold for assistance."
Compose the scripts for daytime and nighttime Greetings and Whattodos before recording. Use the Standard
Greeting Scripts worksheets found in the Appendix of this manual. When writing the script for the whattodo, three
things should be kept in mind:
1. The whattodo is played immediately after the greeting, so the transition between the greeting and whattodo
should flow smoothly.
2. Callers may eventually come back to the whattodo, so the whattodo must make sense without being
prefaced by the greeting.
3. It is tempting to offer the caller as many options as possible. However, most callers only want one thing
that is to talk to someone. Give the caller no more than three or four options in the whattodo.
I&M
?
17
Perfect Voice
System Administration
RECORD GREETINGS
The process of recording the greeting and whattodo messages for the company is the same as recording a personal
greeting in a mailbox. All greeting and whattodo messages (daytime, nighttime, holiday, and emergency) for the
main company may be recorded in User ID 980. Follow this procedure to record the greetings.
Press intercom and call the system (from within the building).
Enter System Access Code (the default is 999*)
Enter User ID o
i
p
Enter Password (the default is 980*)
Press q
to play current personal greeting.
Press r
to
Press t
to
Press y
to
Press u
to
Press i
to
scroll to next
record current
delete any
choose
record any
greeting.
greeting.
greeting.
greeting.
greeting.
You may continue to
Enter the
Enter the
press r
to scroll
number of the
number of the
I&M
through the greetings.
Listen to the
greeting you
greeting you
When you hear the
greeting.
wish to delete
wish to record
greeting number you wish
(1-8).
(1-8).
to record press t
.
?
Available Personal Greetings
Press t
to
Record
Greeting 1: Daytime Greeting
greeting.
record greeting.
Greeting 2: Daytime Whattodo
Greeting 3: Nighttime Greeting
Greeting 4: Nighttime Whattodo
Greeting 5: Holiday Greeting
Greeting 6: Holiday Whattodo
**Greeting 7: Emergency Greeting
**Greeting 8: Emergency Whattodo
*System access code and Passwords may be changed for security purposes.
**Greetings 7 and 8 will immediately override the current greeting until the next change from day or night.
This change may be done manually or scheduled.
NOTE: Per-channel greetings and TDD greetings may be recorded using the same steps as above. To record per-
channel greetings, use User IDs 981-987; TDD greetings, User ID 988.
18
Perfect Voice
System Administration
ADJUST VOLUME OF GREETINGS
Log in to SCREENS, Select Utilities, Select Task Manager
Perform Task 160 to "Adjust volume of daytime greeting"
Perform tasks to adjust volume for daytime whattodo (170), nighttime greeting (180), and nighttime
whattodo (190)
NOTE: Adjust the volume of greetings only one time.
ACTIVATE GREETINGS
Once the recordings are completed, they must be activated by placing the system into day and night mode.
Log into SCREENS, Select Utilities, Select Task Manager
Perform Task 100 or 110 to place the system into day or night mode, or
Call the system and dial 970
Follow directions and select open or closed mode.
I&M
?
19
Perfect Voice
System Administration
EMERGENCY GREETING AND WHATTODO
During bad weather or any other circumstance that forces a site to be closed without warning, you may record the
system greeting without having to actually be on-site. This is a very powerful feature and should be used with
caution. Unlike a normal system greeting, there may not be time to approve the greeting script (unless it is done in
advance). And unlike a normal system greeting, the change is immediate. The moment you finish the recording, it
goes into effect.
The emergency greeting is recorded as a personal greeting for a pre-defined User ID. Recording this User's greeting
replaces the standard system greeting. The pre-defined User IDs for emergency greeting and whattodo are
summarized below.
Greeting number 7 emergency greeting
Greeting number 8 emergency whattodo
COMPOSE SCRIPTS
Normally it is sufficient to re-record only the greeting. However, the mechanism to re-record the whattodo is also
provided. Take a few moments to compose the script before recording the file.
RECORD GREETINGS
Follow this procedure to record the daytime greeting.
Call the system.
Enter the system access code 999*.
Enter User ID 980.
Enter Password 980*.
Enter 1 to listen to the current daytime greeting.
Enter 5 to record the daytime greeting.
I&M
Repeat these steps for the following User ID
Emergency Whattodo User ID 980
Password 980*
?
* System access code and Passwords may be changed for security purposes.
TEST OPERATION
Call the system after completing the procedure and verify that the appropriate speech plays.
RETURN TO NORMAL OPERATION
The next time a normal system greeting change is scheduled to occur or processed by hand (manually open/close),
the Emergency Greeting/Whattodo will be erased and the normal Open/Close Greeting will start playing
automatically. If you wish to continue with an emergency greeting, you must re-record that greeting just after the
time of the next scheduled normal greeting change.
20
Perfect Voice
System Administration
AUDIOTEXT MESSAGES
As explained earlier, audiotext messages are those recordings available to callers to give them information that is
normally repeated by a human, usually the operator. The use of audiotext messaging will free up the time of those
employees who usually spend an inordinate amount of time on the telephone giving callers such information as the
company address, directions to the company, the hours of operation, the fax number, etc. The creation of audiotext
messages includes an approved script, a person to record the script and the creation of the Instance and User ID to
be associated with the audiotext message.
FUNCTIONAL SUMMARY:
Add an Audiotext User ID record to the database
TO ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS
Select RECEPTIONIST
Select USER DIRECTORY
An audiotext User ID may be added to the system using the Add command (F2) or by using the Copy command
after highlighting the default audiotext User ID (952). Pay special attention to the following fields, and leave all
other fields at their default value.
Instance
the instance associated with the audiotext User (usually 0)
User ID
the selection callers will make to hear the audiotext message
User Type
D
RECORD THE AUDIOTEXT MESSAGE
After creating the type D User ID, log in as the new User (the password defaults to the same number as the User
I&M
ID). New Users are automatically placed into Quick Setup after logging in the first time. While in Quick Setup, be
certain to set the following:
Password: Set this to whatever you feel provides adequate security.
Name recording: Record this to state what the User represents (i.e. "Monthly Sales Special").
?
Personal greeting: Have the script reader record the audiotext message here.
Listing with directory assistance: Set this up accordingly (i.e., spell out "SPECIAL")
FUNCTIONAL SUMMARY:
Adjust the Volume of the Audiotext Message
TO ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS
Select UTILITIES
Select TASK MANAGER
Highlight Task 150, Adjust volume of audiotext and press Enter. When prompted, enter the audiotext
User ID.
Call the system and verify that the appropriate speech plays when selected.
21
Perfect Voice
System Administration
ADDING OR CHANGING SCHEDULER QUEUE EVENTS
If you are not comfortable with DOS, get some help from someone who is or use the Task Manager to edit the batch
files.
IDENTIFY FUNCTIONS TO BE ADDED
Functions such as switching between day and night mode and nightly maintenance are done by automatically
running a batch file according to a pre-determined schedule. If you wish to change or perform additional
maintenance functions, you may either modify the existing batch file or create another one. For example, to modify
the nightly maintenance routine, make changes to MAINTAIN.BAT in the C:\UTIL directory. For a complete list
of pre-defined batch files see the Advanced Administration section of this manual.
Lay out the DOS commands to be used in the batch file. For more information on DOS command utilities that are
used to control Receptionist, refer also to the Advanced Administration section of this manual.
BACK UP ORIGINAL VERSION OF BATCH FILE
If you choose to modify the pre-existing batch file, make a backup copy of it first. Store the backup copy in another
directory and set the READ-ONLY attribute bit, using the DOS ATTRIB command. For example, before changing
MAINTAIN.BAT, the following command sequence might be issued.
C:
CD \UTIL
XCOPY MAINTAIN.BAT SAFE\*.ORG
ATTRIB SAFE\MAINTAIN.BAT +R
CREATE OR CHANGE THE BATCH FILE
Using IEDIT or Task 460 in the Task Manager, write or make the changes to the batch file. Be sure to put
I&M
comments in the batch file explaining your actions.
TEST BATCH FILE
Manually execute the batch file and verify that the results of its execution are correct.
?
MAKE A BACKUP COPY
Copy the batch file to another directory in case you or someone else accidentally loses the working copy. For
example, a backup copy of the modified version of MAINTAIN.BAT could be saved using the following command
sequence.
C:
CD \UTIL
XCOPY MAINTAIN.BAT SAFE\*.NEW
ADD NEW EVENT TO THE SCHEDULER QUEUE
If the event is a new one, log into SCREENS, select Utilities and then Scheduler. Add (F2) the event, paying special
attention to the Command field. This should contain the fully qualified batch filename, including the drive,
directory and file extension (.BAT). For example, an additional nightly batch file, named NIGHT2.BAT stored in
C:\UTIL would have the Command field set to C:\UTIL\NIGHT2.BAT.
22
Perfect Voice
System Administration
HOLIDAY OPERATION
Perfect Voice can be configured to work differently for a holiday or any other scheduled company closing (i.e.
closing for inventory). The steps are listed below.
COMPOSE HOLIDAY SCRIPTS
Compose and get approval for the upcoming holiday greeting and whattodo scripts.
RECORD HOLIDAY SCRIPTS
Follow this procedure to record the holiday greeting.
Log in as the Main Greeting User (User ID 980)
Select Call Management (If new install, call management is automatically selected for you.)
Select Greeting Number 5 (Holiday Greeting)
Re-record the current personal greeting (option 5), reading the script for the holiday greeting.
Verify the recording by selecting 1 to play the current personal greeting. If necessary re-record the
greeting.
Repeat the above steps for Greeting Number 6 (Holiday Whattodo). If you do not want to change the
whattodo, copy the Greeting Number 2 (Daytime Whattodo) file or the Greeting Number 4 (Night
Whattodo) file to the Greeting Number 6 (Holiday Whattodo) file. This can be done by selecting Task 480
from the Task Manager in SCREENS.
CUSTOMIZE THE HOLIDAY.BAT FILE IF YOU WANT TO USE THE NIGHTTIME MAILBOX
The following is the default HOLIDAY.BAT file. If the DAY.BAT and NIGHT.BAT files have been modified for
a nighttime mailbox, you need to edit HOLIDAY.BAT if you want to use the nighttime mailbox during holiday
operation.
I&M
@if NOT "%ECHOSET%=="" echo %ECHOSET%
cls
echo.
?
echo. Replace the current GREETING and WHATTODO with the holiday version
echo.
rem echo. Setup for Night time Default mailbox
rem SETRCPT /INSTANCE=0 /DEFUSER=940
rem SETUDT /INSTANCE=0 /USER=0 /NODISTURB=Y
rem SETUDT /INSTANCE=0 /USER=0 /UNAVAIL=2
rem Set Instance to play holiday greeting (personal greeting 5 & 6)
setrcpt /INSTANCE=0 /GREETING=D:\MESG\00000980.UV5
/WHATTODO=D:\MESG\00000980.UV6
setrcpt /INSTANCE=91 /GREETING=D:\MESG\00000981.UV5
/WHATTODO=D:\MESG\00000981.UV6
setrcpt /INSTANCE=92 /GREETING=D:\MESG\00000982.UV5
/WHATTODO=D:\MESG\00000982.UV6
setrcpt /INSTANCE=93 /GREETING=D:\MESG\00000983.UV5
/WHATTODO=D:\MESG\00000983.UV6
setrcpt /INSTANCE=94 /GREETING=D:\MESG\00000984.UV5
/WHATTODO=D:\MESG\00000984.UV6
setrcpt /INSTANCE=95 /GREETING=D:\MESG\00000985.UV5
/WHATTODO=D:\MESG\00000985.UV6
23
Perfect Voice
System Administration
setrcpt /INSTANCE=96 /GREETING=D:\MESG\00000986.UV5
/WHATTODO=D:\MESG\00000986.UV6
setrcpt /INSTANCE=97 /GREETING=D:\MESG\00000987.UV5
/WHATTODO=D:\MESG\00000987.UV6
setrcpt /INSTANCE=98 /GREETING=D:\MESG\00000988.UV5
/WHATTODO=D:\MESG\00000988.UV6
setrcpt /INSTANCE=99 /GREETING=D:\MESG\00000989.UV5
/WHATTODO=D:\MESG\00000989.UV6
echo.
echo.
echo. Holiday greeting will be played until the "WORKDAY" command is issued.
echo.
echo. Enter the command WORKDAY to return to normal operation.
echo.
echo.
I&M
?
24
Perfect Voice
System Administration
To edit the HOLIDAY.BAT file:
Log in to SCREENS, select UTILITIES, select TASK MANAGER
Edit Task 540
Remove the remark ("rem") from the following lines as necessary:
rem SETRCPT /INSTANCE=0 /DEFUSER=940
rem SETUDT /INSTANCE=0 /USER=0 /NODISTURB=Y
rem SETUDT /INSTANCE=0 /USER=0 /UNAVAIL=2
Removing the "rem" from these three command lines in the batch file will set the default to User ID 940,
set call blocking for User ID 0 and set the current personal greeting for User ID 0 to number 2.
SCHEDULE WHEN THE HOLIDAY GREETING BEGINS
From the Main Menu in SCREENS, select UTILITIES, then select SCHEDULER
Highlight the HOLIDAY event and press F6 to Copy the holiday event to the queue. An "Add" screen is
displayed. You are prompted to enter a new Jobname. Edit the event, paying attention to the following
fields. Leave the other fields at their default value.
Jobname ... ...... ..... HOLIDAY
Description ...... ..... Holiday procedure for xxx ("xxx" is Labor Day, Christmas, etc.)
Scheduled Date ..... the first date on which you want the holiday procedure to take effect
Scheduled Time ..... the time at which you want the holiday procedure to take effect (usually
one minute after the NIGHT.BAT scheduled time)
Note that if you made any changes to HOLIDAY.BAT, you may need to add this event for each day during the
holiday period. If this is the case, make the additional events identical to the one defined above, setting the
Scheduled Date (and, if necessary, Scheduled Time) fields appropriately.
I&M
RETURN TO WORKDAY MODE
The following is the default WORKDAY.BAT file. Edit this file to return to the workday greeting.
?
@if NOT "%ECHOSET%=="" echo %ECHOSET%
CLS
setrcpt /INSTANCE=0 /GREETING=D:\MESG\GREETING.RMS /WHATTODO=D:\MESG\WHATTODO.RMS
rem SETRCPT /INSTANCE=0 /DEFUSER=0
rem SETUDT /INSTANCE=0 /USER=0 /NODISTURB=N
rem SETUDT /INSTANCE=0 /USER=0 /UNAVAIL=1
echo.
echo.
echo. Normal operations have been restored
echo.
25
Perfect Voice
System Administration
To edit the WORKDAY.BAT file:
From the Main Menu in SCREENS, select UTILITIES, select TASK MANAGER
Edit Task 460
Remove the remark ("rem") from the following lines:
rem SETRCPT /INSTANCE=0 /DEFUSER=0
rem SETUDT /INSTANCE=0 /USER=0 /NODISTURB=N
rem SETUDT /INSTANCE=0 /USER=0 /UNAVAIL=1
Removing the "rem" from these three command lines in the batch file will set the default User to User ID
0, remove call blocking for User ID 0 and set the current personal greeting for User ID 0 to number 1.
SCHEDULE WHEN THE HOLIDAY GREETING ENDS
Schedule the event that places the system back in normal mode.
From the Main Menu in SCREENS, select UTILITIES, then select SCHEDULER
Copy (F6) the workday event to the queue, paying attention to the following fields. Leave the other fields
at their default value.
This event is normally only scheduled once.
Jobname.... ...... ..... WORKDAY
Description. ...... ..... Return to normal operations
Scheduled Date the date on which you want normal operations to resume
Scheduled Time ..... the time at which you want the holiday procedure to take effect (usually
one minute before the DAY.BAT scheduled time)
I&M
?
26
Perfect Voice
System Administration
ADMINISTERING THE NIGHTTIME DEFAULT MAILBOX
In day mode, if callers do not make a selection from the main greeting, the default action is to be transferred to the
default operator. Perfect Voice can be configured to select the nighttime default mailbox as the default path in night
mode. If this is the case, complete the following procedure.
COMPOSE NIGHTTIME DEFAULT MAILBOX SCRIPT
This greeting should prepare the caller to leave a message with several pieces of information, for example.
"You have reached the nighttime general delivery mailbox. Please leave your name, company name, phone
number, nature of your call and the person you wish your message to be forwarded to. Your call will be
returned the next business day."
RECORD GREETING FOR NIGHTTIME DEFAULT MAILBOX
Follow this procedure to record the greeting.
Call the system (from within the building).
Enter the system access code (the default is 999). *
Enter User ID 940.
Enter Password (the default is 940). *
Enter 1 to listen to the current greeting.
Enter 5 to record the greeting.
* System access code and Passwords may be changed for security purposes.
DETERMINE THE RECIPIENT OF GENERAL DELIVERY MESSAGES
Incoming messages that have been recorded in the Nighttime Default, or General Delivery, mailbox may be
forwarded directly from that mailbox to the designated Users. Or, the messages received in the General Delivery
I&M
mailbox may be "pooled" to another User ID. With message pooling, the message is not saved in the mailbox in
which it was recorded, but rather in the mailbox of the User ID that has been designated as the recipient of the
messages. The feature of message pooling enables a User to access only one mailbox, rather than multiple
mailboxes, for message retrieval and incoming messages may be forwarded directly from that mailbox.
?
FUNCTIONAL SUMMARY:
To message pool General Delivery mailbox to another User ID
TO ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS
Select RECEPTIONIST
Select USER DIRECTORY
Highlight User ID 940
27
Perfect Voice
System Administration
Press F4 and edit the following fields.
Screen 2 of 3
Mesg Pool UserID
This field indicates the User ID to receive all messages left in this mailbox.
Enter the User ID of the person responsible for forwarding general delivery messages.
Make certain the User selected understands their responsibilities and has been trained on how to forward messages.
EDIT THE NIGHT.BAT FILE
The following is the default NIGHT.BAT file. Use the Task Manager (Task 530) to edit the file and remove the
remark ("rem") from the lines as necessary. Removing the "rem" from these three command lines in the batch file
will set the default to User ID 940 in the night mode, set call blocking for User ID 0 and set the current personal
I&M
greeting for User ID 0 to number 2.
@if NOT "%ECHOSET%=="" echo %ECHOSET%
rem echo. Setup for Night time Default mailbox
?
rem SETRCPT /INSTANCE=0 /DEFUSER=940
rem SETUDT /INSTANCE=0 /USER=0 /NODISTURB=Y
rem SETUDT /INSTANCE=0 /USER=0 /UNAVAIL=2
echo.
echo. Replace the current GREETING and WHATTODO with the nighttime version
echo.
If exist D:\MESG\00000980.UV3 copy D:\MESG\00000980.UV3
D:\MESG\00000980.uv7
If exist D:\MESG\00000980.UV4 copy D:\MESG\00000980.UV4
D:\MESG\00000980.uv8
If exist D:\MESG\00000981.UV3 copy D:\MESG\00000981.UV3
D:\MESG\00000981.uv7
If exist D:\MESG\00000981.UV4 copy D:\MESG\00000981.UV4
D:\MESG\00000981.uv8
If exist D:\MESG\00000982.UV3 copy D:\MESG\00000982.UV3
D:\MESG\00000982.uv7
If exist D:\MESG\00000982.UV4 copy D:\MESG\00000982.UV4
D:\MESG\00000982.uv8
28
Perfect Voice
System Administration
If exist D:\MESG\00000983.UV3 copy D:\MESG\00000983.UV3
D:\MESG\00000983.uv7
If exist D:\MESG\00000983.UV4 copy D:\MESG\00000983.UV4
D:\MESG\00000983.uv8
If exist D:\MESG\00000984.UV3 copy D:\MESG\00000984.UV3
D:\MESG\00000984.uv7
If exist D:\MESG\00000984.UV4 copy D:\MESG\00000984.UV4
D:\MESG\00000984.uv8
If exist D:\MESG\00000985.UV3 copy D:\MESG\00000985.UV3
D:\MESG\00000985.uv7
If exist D:\MESG\00000985.UV4 copy D:\MESG\00000985.UV4
D:\MESG\00000985.uv8
If exist D:\MESG\00000986.UV3 copy D:\MESG\00000986.UV3
D:\MESG\00000986.uv7
If exist D:\MESG\00000986.UV4 copy D:\MESG\00000986.UV4
D:\MESG\00000986.uv8
If exist D:\MESG\00000987.UV3 copy D:\MESG\00000987.UV3
D:\MESG\00000987.uv7
If exist D:\MESG\00000987.UV4 copy D:\MESG\00000987.UV4
D:\MESG\00000987.uv8
If exist D:\MESG\00000988.UV3 copy D:\MESG\00000988.UV3
D:\MESG\00000988.uv7
If exist D:\MESG\00000988.UV4 copy D:\MESG\00000988.UV4
D:\MESG\00000988.uv8
If exist D:\MESG\00000989.UV3 copy D:\MESG\00000989.UV3
D:\MESG\00000989.uv7
If exist D:\MESG\00000989.UV4 copy D:\MESG\00000989.UV4
D:\MESG\00000989.uv8
echo. Nighttime greeting is now loaded
I&M
?
29
Perfect Voice
System Administration
EDIT THE DAY.BAT FILE
The following is the default DAY.BAT file. Use the Task Manager (Task 520) to edit the file and remove the
remark ("rem") from the lines as necessary. Removing the "rem" from these three command lines in the batch file
will set the default to User ID 0 in the day mode, remove call blocking for User ID 0 and set the current personal
greeting for User ID 0 to number 1.
@if NOT "%ECHOSET%=="" echo %ECHOSET%
rem echo. Re-set for NIGHT time Default mailbox
rem SETRCPT /INSTANCE=0 /DEFUSER=0
rem SETUDT /INSTANCE=0 /USER=0 /NODISTURB=N
rem SETUDT /INSTANCE=0 /USER=0 /UNAVAIL=1
echo.
echo. Replace the current GREETING and WHATTODO with the daytime version
echo.
If exist D:\MESG\00000980.UV1 copy D:\MESG\00000980.UV1
D:\MESG\00000980.uv7
If exist D:\MESG\00000980.UV2 copy D:\MESG\00000980.UV2
D:\MESG\00000980.uv8
If exist D:\MESG\00000981.UV1 copy D:\MESG\00000981.UV1
D:\MESG\00000981.uv7
If exist D:\MESG\00000981.UV2 copy D:\MESG\00000981.UV2
D:\MESG\00000981.uv8
If exist D:\MESG\00000982.UV1 copy D:\MESG\00000982.UV1
D:\MESG\00000982.uv7
If exist D:\MESG\00000982.UV2 copy D:\MESG\00000982.UV2
D:\MESG\00000982.uv8
If exist D:\MESG\00000983.UV1 copy D:\MESG\00000983.UV1
I&M
D:\MESG\00000983.uv7
If exist D:\MESG\00000983.UV2 copy D:\MESG\00000983.UV2
D:\MESG\00000983.uv8
If exist D:\MESG\00000984.UV1 copy D:\MESG\00000984.UV1
?
D:\MESG\00000984.uv7
If exist D:\MESG\00000984.UV2 copy D:\MESG\00000984.UV2
D:\MESG\00000984.uv8
If exist D:\MESG\00000985.UV1 copy D:\MESG\00000985.UV1
D:\MESG\00000985.uv7
If exist D:\MESG\00000985.UV2 copy D:\MESG\00000985.UV2
D:\MESG\00000985.uv8
If exist D:\MESG\00000986.UV1 copy D:\MESG\00000986.UV1
D:\MESG\00000986.uv7
If exist D:\MESG\00000986.UV2 copy D:\MESG\00000986.UV2
D:\MESG\00000986.uv8
If exist D:\MESG\00000987.UV1 copy D:\MESG\00000987.UV1
D:\MESG\00000987.uv7
If exist D:\MESG\00000987.UV2 copy D:\MESG\00000987.UV2
D:\MESG\00000987.uv7
If exist D:\MESG\00000988.UV1 copy D:\MESG\00000988.UV1
D:\MESG\00000988.uv7
30
Perfect Voice
System Administration
If exist D:\MESG\00000988.UV2 copy D:\MESG\00000988.UV2
D:\MESG\00000988.uv7
If exist D:\MESG\00000989.UV1 copy D:\MESG\00000989.UV1
D:\MESG\00000989.uv7
If exist D:\MESG\00000989.UV2 copy D:\MESG\00000989.UV2
D:\MESG\00000989.uv7
echo. Daytime greetings are now loaded!
I&M
?
31
Perfect Voice
System Administration
HOSPITALITY SETUP AND ADMINISTRATION
The Hospitality option allows the use of Perfect Voice in the Hotel environment. By limiting the options available
within a User IDs mailbox, each guest room may be given voice mail with little instruction needed for the individual
guest.
FUNCTIONAL SUMMARY:
Create Hospitality Users for each guest room
TO ACCESS:
Log in to SCREENS
Select RECEPTIONIST
Select USER DIRECTORY
Highlight User ID 955, the Hospitality User
Press F6 and copy 955 to all the guest rooms to have voice mail
You must also change several parameters in Instance Setup:
Set the field "Play UserID if No Name" to NO
Set the field "Play LEAVEUNV on record" to YES
Using the Task Manager, select Task 730. Select option number 1. This will change the speech to say "Guest
Room" instead of "User ID" when guests retrieve messages.
I&M
?
32
Perfect Voice
System Administration
MESSAGE STORAGE SPACE
Perfect Voice, like any other computer system has a finite amount of available storage space on the hard drive (in
this case, for recording messages). Like any other computer system, the amount of available storage space on an
unmanaged system can easily and needlessly disappear. It's up to the System Administrator to be aware of the
amount of available space for messages.
VIA THE TELEPHONE
A User given access to the Administration Menu from User Mode has the ability to check the amount of available
space.
Call the system
Enter the system access code (the default is 999).
Enter User ID xxx.
Enter Password xxx.
Select Option 8.
Select 7 for available space.
Between 1 and 23 hours of available disk space are indicated in one hour increments e.g.:
"There is 7 hours of recording space available"
Between 1 and 59 minutes of available disk space are indicated in one minute increments e.g.:
"There is 35 minutes of recording space available"
FREEING STORAGE SPACE
I&M
A common cause for a lack of available storage space on the system is Users who are lax about erasing their
messages. A report may be generated to determine if this is the situation on the system. Several reports are
available for monitoring the storage usage of the system.
?
Highlight Task 350 "Report User Message Summary by Message Count" and press ENTER.
Those Users with the greatest number of messages show up at the top of the report along with the number of
messages and total number of seconds used by the messages.
33
Perfect Voice
System Administration
One or more of the offending Users may not even be associated with a person. For example, some systems have a
User ID set up for the conference room to allow callers to reach that location. If, however, that User ID also has
messaging privileges, it is possible that messages are recorded for that User. If no one is directly responsible for
picking up messages for that User ID, or if the User is set up on various distribution lists, messages will accumulate
for that User. Report 360 will quickly identify mailboxes collecting unretrieved messages.
This example can be easily corrected by removing messaging privileges for the conference room User ID, and
removing the User from all distribution lists on the system (public and private). This example is just one where
proper system management is used to solve an everyday problem.
If the offending Users are associated with actual people within the company, inform them of the situation. If the
situation continues, messaging privileges for the User may have to be restricted. This is done by adjusting one or
both of the following parameters of the User ID.
MESSAGE RECORDING- Max Msg Length
maximum time for a caller to leave a message
MESSAGE RECORDING- Message Limit
maximum number of messages allowed
Be sure to obtain the full support of management before making any such changes.
ADDITIONAL DETAILED DRIVE USAGE INFORMATION
If none of the Users appear to be abusing their messaging privileges, a review of how space on the messaging drive
is used should be done. The problem may be that the current hard disk capabilities have been outgrown. If this is
the case, the hard drive may need to be upgraded to a larger size. Before upgrading the hard drive, however, free up
additional hard disk space by deleting unnecessary files.
There may be files on that drive that are not required for system operation. These files can be deleted, using the
Task Manager or standard DOS commands, ensuring that anything essential to the operation of the system is not
deleted.
If one MB of disk space is freed, only two minutes of messaging capacity is gained. This should be considered when
examining directories that use an insignificant amount of space. For example, deleting the files in D:\RINGTEST
frees up less than 30 seconds of messaging space, and removes the option of running CPM diagnostics.
I&M
Note the following directories and the contents of which should NOT be deleted.
D:\MESG*
(User messaging, i.e. MESG1, MESG236, etc.)
D:\SPCH*
(system prompts, i.e. SPCHENG, SPCHTDD, SPCHESP, etc.)
?
34
Perfect Voice
System Administration
CREATING REPORTS FROM TASK MANAGER
Several reports may be created from Task Manager. To generate a specific report, select the appropriate task from
Task Manager. After a report is generated, it is displayed on the screen and written to C:\RCPT. The file name of
the report is an acronym of the report description with an .LST extension. A hard copy of the report may be
created in one of two ways:
1. Copy the file from C:\RCPT to a floppy diskette and print from another PC.
2. If a printer is connected to the system, use the print command from the DOS prompt. If a printer is
connected to the parallel port with the hardware key still in place, the printer MUST remain on until
disconnected. A description of the fields in each report is available on the last page of each report.
Below is a listing of available reports.
Task Number
Report Description
Report File Name
250
Receptionist Setup
rsu.lst
260
Phone System Configuration
psd.lst
270
User Directory Manager Information by User ID
udi.lst
280
User Directory Manager Information by Department/Name
udm.lst
290
User Directory Usage by User ID
udu.lst
300
User Directory Usage by Department and Calls
udg.lst
310
User Directory Usage by Department and Calls (simple)
use.lst
320
User Directory Parameters and Privileges by User ID
udp.lst
330
User Directory Dialstring Usage by Dialstring
udd.lst
340
User Directory Unavailable Message Information
unv.lst
I&M
350
User Message Summary by Message Count
ums.lst
360
User Messages (Unheard) by User ID and Department
umn.lst
370
User Messages (Heard) by User ID and Department
umo.lst
?
380
User Message Detail by User ID
umd.lst
390
User Message Detail by Date and Time
umt.lst
400
User Message Events Cross Reference
ume.lst
410
User Message Record Completion Status
umr.lst
420
Distribution Lists by Owner User ID and List Number
dll.lst
430
Distribution Lists by Member User ID
dlm.lst
440
User Notification Events Summary for all Users
une.lst
450
Notification Event Record Summary by COS
ner.lst
35
Perfect Voice
System Administration
RECEPTIONIST SETUP: RSU.LST
This report provides instance setup parameter details for each instance, such as system access codes and maximum
record times.
04/15/97 RECEPTIONIST SETUP REPORT Page 1
(rsu 16ay96)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
**** Receptionist Instance 0, TELECO INC.
Trace=Yes to device E:\TRACE.LOG
System Access: 999 Direct Message: 997 Hangup: 998
Direct Assist: 411 Direct PersGrt: 996 PersAsst: 1
Default User ID: 0 (Longest UserID:4 )
GREETing file: D:\MESG\GREETING.RMS
WHATTODO file: D:\MESG\WHATTODO.RMS
SPeeCH path: D:\SPCHENG\
Default MESG path: D:\MESG\
End Who's Calling Silence Time: 2 Max Who's Calling Time: 10
End Personal Mesg Silence Time: 2 Default Max Personal Msg Time: 240
End Leave Message Silence Time: 4 Default Max Leave Msg Time: 120
Answer After Ring: Restart After Message: Yes
Timeouts - Interdigit timer: 3
Action - Default user: 4 Answer - Non Screening: 15
Action - Screening Resp: 2 Answer - Screening: 15
Action - Busy take mesg: 4 Busy Retry Wait: 20
Action - Unavl take msg: 0 Entry - Security Code: 10
Action - Still There: 1 Entry - UserMode Idle: 10
Linetype=0 TOSHIBA STRATA - 280
---- Dialstrings when SCREENING enabled ---- Dialstrings when No-SCREENING
*Trying Extension. SY@ *Trying Extension. SY!@
Hold,get Dialtone SX Hold,get Dialtone SX
Trying w/Dialtone @ Trying w/Dialtone !@
Trying noDialtone SX Trying noDialtone SX
No Answer Return. SX No Answer Return. SX
I&M
Busy Return...... SX Busy Return...... SX
Hung Up Return... SZZ Blind Xfer....... YH
Transfer......... H Transfer......... H
No Answer Timeout 15 seconds No Answer Timeout 15 seconds
---- Dialtone wait =4 secs (* = dialstring not used)
?
Thresholds: Grunt= 100 Hangup= 55 Tone= 95 Voice= 115
Chan 0 Linetype 0 0
Chan 1 Linetype 0 0
Chan 2 Linetype 0 0
Chan 3 Linetype 0 0
Chan 4 Linetype 0 0
Chan 5 Linetype 0 0
Chan 6 Linetype 0 0
Chan 7 Linetype 0 0
Chan 8 Linetype 0 0
Chan 9 Linetype 0 0
Chan10 Linetype 0 0
Chan11 Linetype 0 0
---- Total Channels allocated to instance = 12
36
Perfect Voice
System Administration
PHONE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION: PSD.LST
This report provides information on the phone system type and the associated dialstrings.
4/15/97 PHONE SYSTEM CONFIG REPORT Page 1
(psd 16ay96)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Linetype=0 TOSHIBA STRATA - 280
*Trying Extension. SY@ *Trying Extension. SY!@
Hold,get Dialtone SX Hold,get Dialtone SX
Trying w/Dialtone @ Trying w/Dialtone !@
Trying noDialtone SX Trying noDialtone SX
No Answer Return. SX No Answer Return. SX
Busy Return...... SX Busy Return...... SX
Hung Up Return... SZZ Blind Xfer....... YH
Transfer......... H Transfer......... H
Grunt= 100 Hangup= 55 Tone= 95 Voice= 115 Dialtone Wait=4
USER DIRECTORY MANAGER INFORMATION BY USER ID: UDI.LST
This report provides a listing of all Users on the system, including department, extension number, and User Type.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
04/15/97 USER DIRECTORY MANAGER REPORT Page 5
(udi 21ay96)
Userid Username Department Directory UserType Dialstring
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
**** Receptionist Instance 0 TELECO INC.
Userid:
User ID being reported (1-8 digits)
Username:
Name or description for this User ID
Department:
Department name
I&M
Directory:
Dial-By-Name
UserType:
User ID type
Dialstring:
Phone system dialstring or Alias User ID ("?" if no dialstring and user not locked
on Call Block)
?
37
Perfect Voice
System Administration
USER DIRECTORY MANAGER INFORMATION BY DEPARTMENT/NAME: UDM.LST
This report provides a listing of all Users on the system, including department, extension number, and User Type,
sorted by Department.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
04/15/97 USER DIRECTORY MANAGER REPORT Page 5
(udm 21ay96)
Userid Username Department Directory UserType Dialstring
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
**** Receptionist Instance 0 TELECO INC.
Userid:
User ID being reported (1-8 digits)
Username:
Name or description for this User ID
Department:
Department name
Directory:
Dial-By-Name
UserType:
User ID type
Dialstring:
Phone system dialstring or Alias User ID ("?" if no dialstring and user not locked
on Call Block)
USER DIRECTORY USAGE BY USER ID: UDU.LST
This report summarizes how a User is managing their mailbox. For example, it includes the total number of
messages in the mailbox and the call screening setting.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
04/15/97 USER DIRECTORY USAGE REPORT Page 5
(udu 21ay96)
Userid Username UserType Pooling CBK Scr Nam Unv Msgs
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
I&M
Userid:
User ID being reported (1-8 digits)
Username:
Name or description for this User ID
UserType:
User ID type (U=User, A=alias, D=directory, B=broadcast, I=IVR)
?
Pooling:
Pooling ID
CBK:
Call Block setting (.=not allowed, -=not enabled, D=enabled, L=locked)
Scr:
Call screening setting
Nam:
Name has been recorded
Unv:
Current unavailable message
Msgs:
Total messages in message box
38
Perfect Voice
System Administration
USER DIRECTORY USAGE BY DEPARTMENT AND CALLS: UDG.LST
This report gives statistics on how many calls and messages the User has received as well as how many times they
have logged in to their mailbox, sorted by department. Calls are also averaged based on a five day work week.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
04/15/97 USER DIRECTORY DEPT USAGE REPORT Page 6
(udg 21ay96) Receptionist Instance 0
Userid Username Type Alias/Pool Login msgs calls days wdays cb
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
******** Totals for All Receptionist instances
******** Users=180 Act=161 Msgs=599 Calls=350480 Cd=1040 Cb=1442
Userid:
User ID being reported (1-8 digits)
Username:
Name or description for this User ID
Type:
User ID type (U=user, A=alias, D=directory, B=broadcast, I=IVR)
Alias/Pool:
Alias-for User ID or pooled-to User ID
Login:
Total logins count
Msgs:
Total messages received count
Calls:
Total calls count
Days:
Days since total counts started
Wdays:
Business days since total counts started
CB:
Estimated calls per business day (Mon-Fri, 5 day weeks)
Summary Line
Users:
Total User IDs in group
Act:
Total User IDs in group with messages or calls (Active)
Msgs:
Total messages being kept by group
Calls:
Total calls divided by maximum days gives average calls per day
Cd:
Estimated total calls per day (Mon-Sun, 7 day weeks)
I&M
Cb:
Estimated total calls per business day (Mon-Fri, 5 day weeks)
USER DIRECTORY USAGE BY DEPARTMENT AND CALLS (SIMPLE): USE.LST
?
This report gives statistics on how many calls and messages the User has received as well as how many times they
have logged in to their mailbox.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
04/15/97 DEPARTMENT CALL SUMMARY Page 4
2
Userid Username cmsg umsg logins calls days wdays avg
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
******** Users=159 Total Inquiries=323716 Inquiries/day=966 /Sday=1338
Userid:
User ID being reported (1-8 digits)
Username:
Name or description for this User ID
cmsg:
Caller messages
umsg:
User messages
Logins:
Total Logins count
Calls:
Total calls count
Days:
Days since total counts started
Wdays:
Business days since total counts started
Avg:
Average per the seven day week
39
Perfect Voice
System Administration
USER DIRECTORY PARAMETERS AND PRIVILEGES BY USER ID: UDP.LST
This report provides a listing of the parameters and features the User is authorized to use.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
04/15/97 USER DIRECTORY PARAMETER REPORT Page 5
(udp 21ay96)
Userid Username UserType Ali/Pool CBK SCR RNA RES unvs sec msgs sec
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Userid:
User ID being reported (1-8 digits)
Username:
Name or description for this userid
UserType:
User ID type (U=User, A=alias, D=directory, B=broadcast, I=IVR)
Ali/Pool:
Alias or pooling User ID (1 to 8 digits)
CBK:
Call Block allowed (CBK=yes, -=no, LOK=locked)
Scr:
Screening allowed (SCR=yes, -=no )
RNA:
Hold on Ring-No-Answer (RNA=yes, -=no)
RES:
Restart After Message (RES=yes, END=no, -=default)
unvs:
Number of unavailable messages allowed
sec:
Maximum length of each unavailable message in seconds
msgs:
Number of messages allowed
sec:
Maximum length of each Message in seconds
I&M
?
40
Perfect Voice
System Administration
USER DIRECTORY DIALSTRING USAGE BY DIALSTRING: UDD.LST
This report provides the call blocking and call screening settings for each User.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
04/15/97 USER DIRECTORY DIALSTRING REPORT Page 5
(udd 21ay96)
Dialstring Userid Username Do-Not-Disturb Screening
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Dialstring:
Phone system dialstring (substituted for @ in system dialstrings)
Userid:
User ID being reported (1-8 digits)
Username:
Name or description for this User ID
Do-Not-Disturb:
CALL BLOCK setting (.=n/a, -=not enabled, CBK=enabled, LOK=Locked)
(If "CBK" or "LOK" then extension will not be called)
Screening:
SCREENING setting(.=n/a, -=not enabled, SCR=enabled, LSC=Always)
(If "SCR" or "LSC" then SCREENING dialstrings are used)
Dialstring Symbols:(maximum dialstring length is 33 characters)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 dial touchtone (DTMF) or Pulse
# * dial touchtone (DTMF) or Pulse
A B C D
dial touchtone (DTMF) or Pulse
T P
touchtone dialing (default) or pulse dialing
E F G
high-accuracy switchhook (flash) in pulse mode
@
replaced by the per user dialstring
S
perform switchhook (flash)
H
hangup (go on-hook)
H1
play "connecting" then hangup
H0
silently stay on line and watch for hangup pattern
I&M
X
wait for brief time ( 40 ms silence)
Y
wait for one half second ( 500 ms silence)
Z
wait for one full second (1000 ms silence)
?
41
Perfect Voice
System Administration
USER DIRECTORY UNAVAILABLE MESSAGE INFORMATION: UNV.LST
This report provides the number of allowed personal greetings and the currently selected personal greeting for each
User.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
04/15/97 USER DIRECTORY PERSONAL GREETING REPORT Page 5
(unv 20ay96) Receptionist Instance 0
Userid Description Type Num Sec Cur Flag Filespec
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
**** Receptionist Instance 0 TELECO INC. 240 D:\MESG\
Userid:
Userid being reported (1-8 digits)
Description:
Name or description for this User ID
Type:
User ID type (U=user, A=alias, D=directory, B=broadcast)
Num:
Number of personal greetings allowed (0 - 9, "." if not allowed)
Sec:
Maximum duration of each personal greeting in seconds
Cur:
Currently selected personal greeting (0 - 9)
Flag:
Flag (?=invalid ext, *=single ext, %=other User ID, #=other path)
Filespec:
File Specification. If no file applies then blank.
USER MESSAGE SUMMARY BY MESSAGE COUNT: UMS.LST
This report provides the total number of urgent, new, and saved messages for each User as well as the maximum
record time for the mailbox.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
04/15/97 USER MESSAGE SUMMARY REPORT Page 4
(ums 21ay96)
Userid Username UserType Urg+New+Sav Max Sec Cmsg Umsg Next
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
I&M
**** Instance 0 TELECO INC. 120
Userid:
User ID being reported (1-8 digits)
Username:
Name or description for this userid
?
UserType:
User ID type (U=user, I=Ivr)
Urg:
Total URGENT messages in message box
New:
Total NEW messages in message box
Sav:
Total SAVED messages in message box
Max:
Maximum messages allowed
Sec:
Maximum message length in seconds
Cmsg:
Total messages received from outside callers
Umsg:
Total messages received from other users
Next:
Next Message Number (mod 9999)
42
Perfect Voice
System Administration
USER MESSAGES (UNHEARD) BY USER ID AND DEPARTMENT: UMN.LST
This report provides information on new messages that have not been listened to.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
04/15/97 USER NEW MESSAGES REPORT Page 3
(umn 20ay96) Receptionist Instance 0
Userid MsgNm Sender MsgNm Seconds Date Day Time Wait
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Userid:
User ID being reported (1-8 digits)
MsgNm:
Message number of this message (000-999)
Sender:
If sent from user mode, this is userid of originator
MagNm:
If sent from user mode, this is original message number
Seconds:
Length of this message in seconds
Date\Day:
Creation date of this message (as year month day weekday)
Time:
Creation time of this message
Wait:
Days message has been waiting
USER MESSAGES (HEARD) BY USER ID AND DEPARTMENT: UMO.LST
This report provides information on saved messages that have been listened to but have not been deleted.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
04/15/97 USER SAVED MESSAGES REPORT Page 13
(umo 20ay96) Receptionist Instance 0
Userid MsgNm Sender MsgNm Seconds Date Day Time Wait
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Userid:
User ID being reported (1-8 digits)
MsgNm:
Message number of this message (000-999)
Sender:
If sent from user mode, this is User ID of originator
I&M
MagNm:
If sent from user mode, this is original message number
Seconds:
Length of this message in seconds
Date\Day:
Creation date of this message (as year month day weekday)
?
Time:
Creation time of this message
Wait:
Days message has been waiting
USER MESSAGE DETAIL BY USER ID: UMD.LST
This report provides a summary of messages, sorted by User ID.
43
Perfect Voice
System Administration
USER MESSAGE DETAIL BY DATE AND TIME: UMT.LST
This report provides a summary of messages, sorted by date and time.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
04/15/97 USER MESSAGE DETAIL BY TIME REPORT Page 22
(umt 20ay96) Receptionist Instance 0
Userid MsgNm TS Origid MsgNm Cpy Secs Time Message Filespec
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Userid:
User ID being reported (1-8 digits)
MsgNm:
Message number of this message (001-999)
T:
Message Type (.=leave mesg FROM non-user, R=mesg Received FROM user)
(S=mesg Sent TO user, F=prefix for mesg Forwarded TO user)
S:
Status of received mesg(-=deleted, H=heard not deleted, +=new msg not heard)
Origid:
If sent from user mode, this is User ID of originator
MsgNm:
If sent from user mode, this is original message number
Cpy:
Number of copies (User IDs accessing this message)
(number of "+" and "H" messages on this line and following)
Secs:
Length of this message in seconds
Time:
Creation time of this message (in hour:minute:second am/pm)
Message Filespec: If no file applies, then blank. If standard file name, then just path.
If non-standard file, then full file specification.
USER MESSAGE RECORD COMPLETION STATUS: UMR.LST
This report shows whether a message was forwarded to a mailbox, the originating User ID, and the terminating
information.
I&M
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
04/15/97 USER MESSAGE DETAIL BY RECORD STATUS Page 22
(umr 20ay96)
Inst Userid MsgNm TS Origid MsgNm Secs Time Flags Reason DTMF
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
?
Inst:
Instance number
Userid:
User ID being reported (1-8 digits)
MsgNm:
Message number of this message (001-999)
T:
Message Type (.=leave mesg FROM non-user, R=mesg Received FROM user)
(S=mesg Sent TO user, F=prefix for mesg Forwarded TO user)
S:
Status of received mesg(-=deleted, H=heard not deleted, +=new msg not heard)
Origid:
If sent from user mode, this is userid of originator
MsgNm:
If sent from user mode, this is original message number
Secs:
Length of this message in seconds
Time:
Creation date & time of this message (in hour:minute:second am/pm)
Flags:
Record Flags (Overrun, DTMF, Goodmsg, Appended)
Reason:
Reason (Silence, Dtmf, disk FULL, Max message length)
DTMF:
Terminating DTMF (or blank)
44
Perfect Voice
System Administration
DISTRIBUTION LISTS BY OWNER USER ID AND LIST NUMBER: DLL.LST
This report provides a breakdown of a User's distribution lists.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
04/15/97 DISTRIBUTION LIST By LIST REPORT Page 9
(dll 20ay96)
Userid Username Department UserType
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Userid:
User ID of owner (leading dots)
User ID of list members (indented)
Username:
Name for this User ID
Department
Department name for this User ID
UserType:
Usertype for this User ID + pooling flag (P= pooling enabled)
DISTRIBUTION LISTS BY MEMBER USER ID: DLM.LST
This report displays every distribution list a particular User is a member of.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
04/15/97 DISTRIBUTION LIST By MEMBER REPORT Page 12
(dlm 20ay96)
Userid Username Department UserType List
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Userid:
User ID of member
User ID of list owner (indented)
Username:
User ID name
Department:
User ID department name
UserType:
User ID type
List:
List number (0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9)
I&M
?
45
Perfect Voice
System Administration
USER NOTIFICATION EVENTS SUMMARY FOR ALL USERS: UNE.LST
This report provides information on the types of notification a User is allowed. A summary of the class of service,
schedule number, and information on pending notifications is also included.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
04/15/97 NOTIFICATION EVENT REPORT Page 5
(une 20ay96) Receptionist Instance 0
Userid Username UserType N Msgs COS S# PUC S# OL Tries LastTry Next
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Userid:
User ID being reported (1-8 digits)
Username:
Name or description for this User ID
UserType:
User ID type
N:
Notify status (.=Enab/not pend, n=Enab/new, *=Enab/pending, D=Disabled)
Msgs:
Number of NEW messages in message box
COS:
Class-Of-Service for NEW message left
S#:
Schedule number for NEW message COS
PUC:
Class-Of-Service for message pick-up
S#:
Schedule number for message pick-up COS
O:
Once only flags (O=once, .=many)
L:
Message Waiting Light (#=new mesg/notify/ON, .=pickup mesg/De-notify/OFF)
Tries:
Notification tries ("max" if at maximum)
LastTry:
Month day hour minute of last notification
Next:
Seconds until next notification attempt (if pending)
USER NOTIFICATION EVENT RECORD SUMMARY BY COS: NER.LST
This report displays the class of service and schedule number for a User's notification type.
I&M
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
04/15/97 NOTIFICATION EVENT REPORT Page 3
(ner 20ay96) Receptionist Instance 0
Userid Username Usertype COS Sched PUC Sched
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
?
Userid:
User ID being reported (1-8 digits)
Username:
Name or description for this User ID
UserType:
User ID type
COS:
Class-Of-Service for NEW message left
Sched:
Schedule number for NEW message COS
PUC:
Class-Of-Service for message pick-up
Sched:
Schedule number for message pick-up
46
Perfect Voice
System Administration
CREATING SINGLE DIGIT MENU OPTIONS
WHAT IS A T BOX?
T boxes (or Transaction boxes) may be used to make a single or multi-level menu tree, offering the caller the option
to navigate through the menu with single digit selections. Each level or decision box in a menu tree is represented
by a T Box.
HOW TO BUILD A MULTILEVEL MENU TREE
Design the tree: Don't even begin a menu tree without first graphically drawing out a flow chart.
Each level or decision box in a menu tree is represented by a T box, where the caller has the following choices:
Dial 0 - 9, *, or #
Make no selection (timeout)
These choices may link to the following:
Another T Box
A Normal User ID
An Access code defined in Instance Setup:
System Access
(999)
Hangup
(998)
Direct Message
(997)
I&M
Forced Modem Answer (995)
Directory Assistance
(411)
?
Number the boxes in the diagram with the corresponding T Box User ID.
47
Perfect Voice
System Administration
Add the T Boxes:
Log in to SCREENS
Select RECEPTIONIST
Select USER DIRECTORY
Press F2 to add the User ID, selecting "Single Digit Menu" as the User type. (You can also use F6 to copy the
T Box Template User ID 958 in the User Directory.)
Enter the Instance and User ID based on the Flow Chart you created in the previous step.
Enter the corresponding link (or go to) for each caller option on Screen 2 of 3.
For example:
I&M
The above example yields the following results:
Translation Table
?
Caller Response Value System Response
Caller Dials 0
0
Process User ID 0
Caller Dials 1
205
Process User ID 205
Caller Dials 2
#
Treat the 2 as the first digit of User ID and return to Whattodo
Caller Dials 3
411
Access directory assistance
Caller Dials 9
749
Process User ID 749 (which may go back to previous T Box)
Caller Dials *
998
Hang Up
Any other digit
blank
Flush digits and replay T Box greeting
No response
*
Go to Whattodo
Greetings in each T Box inform the caller of their options.
48
Perfect Voice
System Administration
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION VIA THE TELEPHONE
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR MENU OPTIONS
In addition to the keyboard and SCREENS interface, System Administration may be performed via the telephone.
Below are the available options from the System Administrator menu:
q
PLAY THE CURRENT DATE AND TIME
This option plays the current date and time of the system.
w
CHANGE SYSTEM TIME
This option allows the System Administrator to change the time on the system.
e
CHANGE SYSTEM DATE
This option allows the System Administrator to change the system date.
r
RESET A PASSWORD
This option allows the System Administrator to change a User's password.
y
RESET USER ID
This option enables the System Administrator to reset a User ID.
u
AVAILABLE RECORDING SPACE
This option tells the System Administrator how much recording space is available.
i
RECORD NETWORK SITE NAME
This option prompts the System Administrator to record names for AMIS network sites.
o
RETURN TO USER MENU
This option returns you to the User menu.
I&M
p
LOG OUT
This option logs you out and returns you to the main system greeting.
*
REPLAY MENU OPTIONS
?
TO ACCESS:
Call the Perfect Voice system
Log in to the User ID with System Administrator privileges
49
Perfect Voice
System Administration
CHANGE SYSTEM TIME OR DATE
If necessary, the date and time on the Perfect Voice system may be adjusted using the following procedure.
Call the Perfect Voice system.
Thank you for calling. If you have a
touch-tone phone . . .
Enter System Access Code.
Enter System Administrator User ID.
System Administrator Menu:
Enter the password.
For the Current Date and Time,
press 1. To Change the
System Time, press 2 ....
Press q
to review the current date and
time.
I&M
If satisfied
Press w
to
Press e
to
with the Date
change the
change the
and Time,
current Time.
current Date.
press p
to
?
return to the
Whattodo.
Enter in the
Enter in the
new Time.
new Date.
24 hour format
YYMMDD
When satisfied with the Time and Date, press p
to return to the Whattodo.
50
Advanced
Administration
I&M
?
I&M
?
CONTENTS
SYSTEM STARTUP FILES ............................................................................................................................................ 1
CONFIG.SYS (VP4E)................................................................................................................................................. 1
CONFIG.SYS (RHETOREX)......................................................................................................................................... 1
AUDIO.EXE COMMAND LINE PARAMETERS .............................................................................................................. 2
AUTOEXEC.BAT FOR VP4E AUDIOBOARD .............................................................................................................. 3
AUTOEXEC.BAT FOR RHETOREX AUDIOBOARD....................................................................................................... 5
CREATE A BATCH FILE............................................................................................................................................... 8
DETERMINE PURPOSE OF BATCH FILE .......................................................................................................................... 8
WRITE THE BATCH FILE ............................................................................................................................................... 8
TEST THE BATCH FILE .................................................................................................................................................. 8
INSERT THE BATCH FILE IN SCHEDULER....................................................................................................................... 8
DOS COMMAND LINE UTILITIES ............................................................................................................................. 9
COMMAND LIST............................................................................................................................................................ 9
BEEP ......................................................................................................................................................................... 10
CHECKMEM ............................................................................................................................................................ 10
CHKSUM .................................................................................................................................................................. 10
CHKXMS .................................................................................................................................................................. 10
CPMAGC .................................................................................................................................................................. 11
CPMLOAD................................................................................................................................................................ 11
CPMPLAY ................................................................................................................................................................ 11
DATETIME............................................................................................................................................................... 11
DELAY...................................................................................................................................................................... 12
DELTREE ................................................................................................................................................................. 12
DSKSPACE............................................................................................................................................................... 12
FILECPY................................................................................................................................................................... 12
GETCPU ................................................................................................................................................................... 13
GETOPT.................................................................................................................................................................... 13
GETYESNO .............................................................................................................................................................. 14
I&M
MAJORDOS.............................................................................................................................................................. 14
MAPMEM................................................................................................................................................................. 14
PREBACK................................................................................................................................................................. 14
REMOTE................................................................................................................................................................... 15
SCHED ...................................................................................................................................................................... 16
?
SENDMSG ................................................................................................................................................................ 17
SETBCAST ............................................................................................................................................................... 17
SETCHAN................................................................................................................................................................. 18
SETNTFY ................................................................................................................................................................. 18
SETRCPT.................................................................................................................................................................. 18
SETUDT.................................................................................................................................................................... 19
TRACECPY .............................................................................................................................................................. 19
TRCFILT................................................................................................................................................................... 20
WARMBOOT ........................................................................................................................................................... 20
BATCH FILE DESCRIPTIONS ................................................................................................................................... 21
TDD........................................................................................................................................................................... 21
QUICK COMMANDS .................................................................................................................................................... 21
DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS.................................................................................................................................................... 22
FAX UTILITIES ............................................................................................................................................................ 22
INSTALL UTILITIES...................................................................................................................................................... 22
BACKING UP THE SYSTEM ...................................................................................................................................... 23
INTRODUCTION........................................................................................................................................................... 23
DIRECT CALLS AWAY FROM THE SYSTEM.................................................................................................................. 23
BACKUP TO FLOPPY DISKS USING TASK MANAGER ....................................................................................................23
BACKUP TO FLOPPY DISKS USING MS-DOS 6.22, MSBACKUP COMMAND .............................................................23
TAPE DRIVE BACKUP ..................................................................................................................................................24
RESTORING BACKUPS ..................................................................................................................................................24
CREATING ON HOLD MESSAGES ...........................................................................................................................26
FILE NAMING AND PLAYBACK LOGIC..........................................................................................................................26
HOLD TIME CONSIDERATIONS.....................................................................................................................................26
CALLER OPTIONS DURING HOLD.................................................................................................................................26
ELIMINATING TALK-OFF PROBLEMS ..................................................................................................................27
HOW TALK-OFF OCCURS ............................................................................................................................................27
VERIFY THE CONDITION ..............................................................................................................................................27
ADDRESSING THE PROBLEM........................................................................................................................................27
ELIMINATING DTMF DETECTION PROBLEMS ..................................................................................................28
ELIMINATING PHANTOM CALLS TO THE DEFAULT USER............................................................................29
WHAT ARE PHANTOM CALLS? ....................................................................................................................................29
CHECK IBS PROGRAMMING ........................................................................................................................................29
CHECK THE AUDIO DRIVER CONFIGURATION FILE ........................................................................................................29
CONSIDER GRUNT DETECTION .....................................................................................................................................30
ENABLE GRUNT DETECTION.........................................................................................................................................30
USING AUTOMATIC VOLUME CONTROL ............................................................................................................31
WHY AGC_TDD.BAT IS NEEDED .............................................................................................................................31
DETERMINE DRIVE AND DIRECTORY FOR USER MESSAGES ..........................................................................................31
IF NECESSARY, EDIT AGC_TDD BATCH FILE..............................................................................................................31
TEST THE BATCH FILE..................................................................................................................................................31
ADD SCHEDULED EVENT .............................................................................................................................................31
WHY AGC_NMP.BAT IS NEEDED ............................................................................................................................32
HOW TO IMPLEMENT...................................................................................................................................................32
GENERATING SHORT TERM DIAGNOSTIC TRACE...........................................................................................33
WHAT IS TRACE? ......................................................................................................................................................33
I&M
CAUTION!.................................................................................................................................................................33
BEFORE BEGINNING ....................................................................................................................................................33
DELETE ANY EXISTING TRACE FILE.............................................................................................................................33
CONFIGURE TRACE OUTPUT PARAMETERS .................................................................................................................33
ENABLE TRACE............................................................................................................................................................33
?
REPRODUCE THE PROBLEM SITUATION .......................................................................................................................34
DISABLE TRACE ..........................................................................................................................................................34
READING THE TRACE FILE...........................................................................................................................................34
GENERATING LONG TERM DIAGNOSTIC TRACE .............................................................................................37
CAUTION!.................................................................................................................................................................37
CREATE THE RAM DRIVE...........................................................................................................................................37
CONFIGURE TRACE OUTPUT PARAMETERS .................................................................................................................37
EDIT THE BYE.BAT FILE..............................................................................................................................................38
SCHEDULE THE TRACE EVENT ....................................................................................................................................38
CREATE TRACE DIRECTORY........................................................................................................................................38
BEGIN TRACECOPY .....................................................................................................................................................39
DISABLE TRACE ..........................................................................................................................................................39
DTMF AND PULSE SPEECH FILES...........................................................................................................................40
GENERATING DTMF FILES .........................................................................................................................................40
GENERATING PULSE FILES ..........................................................................................................................................40
USER FILE NAMING CONVENTIONS......................................................................................................................41
MESSAGE FILES...........................................................................................................................................................41
NAME FILES ................................................................................................................................................................41
PERSONAL GREETING FILES........................................................................................................................................ 41
TEMPORARY FILES ..................................................................................................................................................... 41
MULTILINGUAL SETUP............................................................................................................................................. 42
INTRODUCTION........................................................................................................................................................... 42
BASIC APPROACH....................................................................................................................................................... 42
CREATE LANGUAGE INSTANCE RECORD..................................................................................................................... 42
CONFIGURE USERS ..................................................................................................................................................... 43
CONFIGURE THE TYPE L LANGUAGE USER................................................................................................................. 43
RECORD AUDIOTEXT .................................................................................................................................................. 43
SOLVING NOTIFICATION PROBLEMS.................................................................................................................. 44
CALL TRANSFER AND FORWARDING PROBLEMS........................................................................................... 45
I&M
?
I&M
?
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
SYSTEM STARTUP FILES
When the Perfect Voice system starts, DOS carries out commands that configure the hardware and reserve space in
memory for information processing. The file that contains these commands is named CONFIG.SYS. The
CONFIG.SYS may be edited to allow for the use of a VGA monitor or to create a RAM drive, but no other changes
should be made without the assistance of Teleco Technical Support. If the CONFIG.SYS file needs to be edited, use
Task 500 in the Task Manager option of the Utilities Menu of SCREENS.
CONFIG.SYS (VP4E)
rem This is the CONFIG.SYS to be used with a VGA Display
rem and VP4E audio cards!
Rem
device=C:\DOS\SETVER.EXE
device=C:\DOS\HIMEM.SYS
device=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE RAM I=A000-B7FF X=B800-BFFF X=CC00-CDFF I=CE00-EFFF
dos=HIGH,UMB
files=100
buffers=4
stacks=9,256
shell=C:\COMMAND.COM C:\ /E:2048 /P
rem
rem -----------------------------------------------------------------------
rem "Typical" Upper Memory Layout (use "X=", not "I=" for range indicated)
rem -----------------------------------------------------------------------
rem | VGA Video Memory A000-AFFF (graphics)
rem | MDA/VGA Video Memory B000-B7FF (VGA graphics)
rem | CGA/EGA/VGA Video Memory B800-BFFF (EGA/VGA text)
rem | SCSI/EGA/VGA Controller BIOS C000-CBFF
rem | Audioboard Memory CC00-CDFF (or CE00-CFFF)
rem | Normally available D000-EFFF
rem | System BIOS F000-FFFF
I&M
rem |----------------------------------------------------------------------
CONFIG.SYS (RHETOREX)
rem This is the CONFIG.SYS for 4.X With Rhetorex Boards
?
rem to be used with VGA Displays
rem
device=C:\DOS\SETVER.EXE
device=C:\DOS\HIMEM.SYS
device=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE RAM M9 I=A000-B7FF X=B800-BFFF X=CC00-CDFF I=CE00-EFFF
dos=HIGH,UMB
files=80
buffers=4
stacks=9,256
shell=C:\COMMAND.COM C:\ /E:2048 /P
rem
rem -----------------------------------------------------------------------
rem "Typical" Upper Memory Layout (use "X=", not "I=" for range indicated)
rem -----------------------------------------------------------------------
rem | VGA Video Memory A000-AFFF (graphics)
rem | MDA/VGA Video Memory B000-B7FF (VGA graphics)
rem | CGA/EGA/VGA Video Memory B800-BFFF (EGA/VGA text)
rem | SCSI/EGA/VGA Controller BIOS C000-CBFF
rem | Audioboard Memory CC00-CDFF (or CE00-CFFF)
rem | Normally available D000-EFFF
rem | System BIOS F000-FFFF
rem | --------------------------------------------------------------------
1
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
An explanation of the AUDIO.EXE command line, used to start up the audioboard device driver, follows. For
information on other parts of the AUTOEXEC.BAT startup file, refer to the DOS manual supplied with the Perfect
Voice system.
AUDIO.EXE COMMAND LINE PARAMETERS
The AUDIO.EXE device driver is loaded into memory at boot time by supplying a line in the AUTOEXEC.BAT
startup file with the following command along with its parameters.
C:\AUDIO\VP4E\AUDIO.EXE /P=<DTMFpath> /I=<irq> /D=<dparm> /CE
DTMFpath ...............This field specifies the path from which DTMF speech files will
be played. This is normally C:\AUDIO\. Refer below for the
DTMF speech file naming convention.
irq..............................This field specifies the IRQ number used by all audioboards in the
system. If this parameter is not present on the command line, the
audioboard uses IRQ 3. Since most systems are configured with
COM2 enabled (it also uses IRQ 3), this parameter is present,
specifying 2 as the IRQ number. If an IRQ number other than 2 is
specified, all audioboards must be jumpered appropriately.
dparm .......................This field specifies the `D' parameter which is used to tune the
detection of DTMF. For a more detailed explanation of DTMF
detection, refer to the Advanced Administration section of this
manual. This is not required for releases 3.1c or later.
/CE ............................By default, Perfect Voice uses the 8kb UMB window starting at
CC00. To utilize the only other available UMB window, specify
this parameter in the system, supplying CE00 as the starting
address argument. This parameter should not be used except under
the strict supervision of a Perfect Voice Technical Support
engineer.
I&M
?
2
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
Each time that the Perfect Voice system is started, DOS first carries out the commands in the CONFIG.SYS file, then it
carries out the commands in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file. The commands in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file set the
characteristics of the devices, customize the information that DOS displays, and start memory-resident programs,
Receptionist and other applications. When you perform Task 960 VP4E Audioboard Install in Task Manager, the
appropriate AUTOEXEC.BAT is automatically loaded. Task 950 loads the AUTOEXEC.BAT for Rhetorex boards. If
necessary, the AUTOEXEC.BAT file may be edited using Task 490 in the Task Manager option of the Utilities Menu of
SCREENS.
AUTOEXEC.BAT FOR VP4E AUDIOBOARD
@set ECHOSET=OFF
@echo %ECHOSET%
rem This is the new 4.3 AUTOEXEC.BAT for VP4E boards
@echo.
@echo Save previous boot info and record this boot
copy D:\LASTBOOT.LOG D:\PASTBOOT.LOG
@echo ******************** System Booted >> D:\BOOT.LOG
C:\UTIL\DATETIME.EXE >> D:\BOOT.LOG
C:\UTIL\DATETIME.EXE > D:\LASTBOOT.LOG
rem
@rem put network load instructions in c:\util\netload.bat
if not exist c:\util\netload.bat goto nonet
call c:\util\netload.bat
:NONET
rem
set path=C:\;C:\DOS;C:\UTIL;C:\AUDIO;C:\RCPT;C:\RCPT\UI4;C:\AFORMS
set prompt=To enter Advanced Menus type: SCREENS $_$p$g
rem
LH C:\AUDIO\KLINIC.EXE
@if ERRORLEVEL 1 goto KLNOTOK
C:\RCPT\UI4\REMOCNFG *
goto KLOK
:KLNOTOK
I&M
call C:\UTIL\ERRBEEP.BAT
@echo ERROR: Unable to run REMOTE.
@echo The KLINIC TSR may not be loaded.
goto ERROR
:KLOK
?
rem ----------------------------------------------------
rem - IF this system uses MONOCHROME, change next line to SET MONO=1
set MONO=0
set RBLD=YES
rem ------------------------------------------
@ECHO Setting up for VP4E boards
rem Load AUDIO driver now
C:\AUDIO\VP4E\AUDIO.EXE /P=C:\AUDIO\ /I=2
rem ------------------------------------------
call c:\util\faxload.bat
REM
rem Aforms Here since it Needs XMS and SMARTDRV gobbles it ALL!
rem
LH C:\AFORMS\AFORMS.EXE 0
rem
:NOAFORMS
rem
LH C:\DOS\SMARTDRV.EXE A- B- C D /E:2048 8192
rem
rem
LH C:\DOS\DOSKEY.COM /INSERT
rem Setting Hard drive pause program to stop after 3 minutes
3
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
rem of non-use.
STOPIDE +180
rem
rem
@echo.
@echo Press Control-C to interrupt startup.
C:\UTIL\DELAY.COM 2
rem
echo.
ECHO Rebuilding database index files, please wait.....
echo.
C:\RCPT\CTRBLD.EXE C:\RCPT\CTRBLD1.P4 <C:\RCPT\%RBLD%.DAT >>D:\LASTBOOT.LOG
C:\RCPT\CTRBLD.EXE C:\RCPT\CTRBLD2.P4 <C:\RCPT\%RBLD%.DAT >>D:\LASTBOOT.LOG
@echo.
Echo.
ECHO Checking database links, please wait ....
echo.
C:\RCPT\SETUMSG.EXE /INSTANCE=* /USER=* /INIT >>D:\LASTBOOT.LOG
C:\RCPT\SETUMDTL.EXE /INSTANCE=* /USER=* /INIT >>D:\LASTBOOT.LOG
:NOKEY
@echo.
@echo Configure audio device driver and initialize channels
@echo.
C:\AUDIO\CPMLOAD.EXE C:\RCPT\RCPT.CFG /W >> D:\LASTBOOT.LOG
if ERRORLEVEL 1 goto CPMNOTOK
goto CPMOK
:CPMNOTOK
@echo ERROR: The driver configuration file, RCPT.CFG, has a syntax error.
goto ERROR
:CPMOK
rem Setting up for SMDI, if SMDI is enabled on the key.
C:\RCPT\UI4\SMDICNFG #
C:\RCPT\UI4\SMDICNFG *
rem
@echo.
@echo Loading Receptionist software
I&M
C:\RCPT\RCPT.EXE
if ERRORLEVEL 2 goto RCPTNOTOK
goto RCPTOK
:RCPTNOTOK
?
@echo ERROR: Receptionist software did not load properly.
goto ERROR
:RCPTOK
C:\RCPT\NOTIFY.EXE
@if ERRORLEVEL 0 goto NTFYOK
@echo ERROR: The NOTIFY TSR will not load properly.
PAUSE
:NTFYOK
C:\AUDIO\SCHED.EXE /START /OUTPUT=nul
cls
@echo.
@echo.
@echo System Startup Complete
C:\UTIL\DATETIME.EXE
goto DONE
:ERROR
call C:\UTIL\ERRBEEP.BAT
:DONE
ECHO.
ECHO.
rem Boot with 1 minute password screen pop for Quick Config.
C:\RCPT\UI4\QWIKCNFG.EXE
4
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
AUTOEXEC.BAT FOR RHETOREX AUDIOBOARD
@set ECHOSET=OFF
@echo %ECHOSET%
rem This is the new 4.3 AUTOEXEC.BAT for Rhetorex
@Echo.
@echo Save previous boot info and record this boot
copy D:\LASTBOOT.LOG D:\PASTBOOT.LOG
@echo ******************** System Booted >> D:\BOOT.LOG
C:\UTIL\DATETIME.EXE >> D:\BOOT.LOG
C:\UTIL\DATETIME.EXE > D:\LASTBOOT.LOG
rem
@rem put network load instructions in c:\util\netload.bat
if not exist c:\util\netload.bat goto nonet
call c:\util\netload.bat
:NONET
rem
set path=C:\;C:\DOS;C:\UTIL;C:\AUDIO;C:\RCPT;C:\RCPT\UI4;C:\AFORMS
set prompt=To enter Advanced Menus type: SCREENS $_$p$g
rem
LH C:\AUDIO\KLINIC.EXE
@if ERRORLEVEL 1 goto KLNOTOK
C:\RCPT\UI4\REMOCNFG *
goto KLOK
:KLNOTOK
call C:\UTIL\ERRBEEP.BAT
@echo ERROR: Unable to run REMOTE.
@echo The KLINIC TSR may not be loaded.
goto ERROR
:KLOK
rem - IF this system uses MONOCHROME, change next line to SET MONO=1
set MONO=0
set RBLD=YES
I&M
rem ----------------------------------------------------
@ECHO Setting up for Rhetorex boards
SET RDSP=C:\AUDIO\RDSP
SET RHET=1
?
%RDSP%\RHETDRV
C:\AUDIO\RDSP\RUDIO.EXE /I=7
rem ----------------------------------------------------
call c:\util\faxload.bat
rem
rem Aforms Here since it Needs XMS and SMARTDRV gobbles it ALL!
rem ----------------------------------------------------
LH C:\AFORMS\AFORMS.EXE 0
rem
LH C:\DOS\SMARTDRV.EXE A- B- C D /E:2048 8192
rem
rem
LH C:\DOS\DOSKEY.COM /INSERT
rem Setting Hard drive program to stop after 3 minutes
rem of non-use.
STOPIDE +180
rem
rem
@echo.
@echo Press Control-C to interrupt startup.
C:\UTIL\DELAY.COM 2
rem
echo.
5
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
echo Rebuilding database index files, please wait .......
echo.
C:\RCPT\CTRBLD.EXE C:\RCPT\CTRBLD1.P4 <C:\RCPT\%RBLD%.DAT >>D:\LASTBOOT.LOG
C:\RCPT\CTRBLD.EXE C:\RCPT\CTRBLD2.P4 <C:\RCPT\%RBLD%.DAT >>D:\LASTBOOT.LOG
@echo.
echo.
echo Checking database links, please wait ........
echo.
C:\RCPT\SETUMSG.EXE /INSTANCE=* /USER=* /INIT >>D:\LASTBOOT.LOG
C:\RCPT\SETUMDTL.EXE /INSTANCE=* /USER=* /INIT >>D:\LASTBOOT.LOG
:NOKEY
@echo.
@echo Configure audio device driver and initialize channels
@echo.
@echo.
C:\AUDIO\CPMLOAD.EXE C:\RCPT\RCPT.CFG /W >> D:\LASTBOOT.LOG
if ERRORLEVEL 1 goto CPMNOTOK
goto CPMOK
:CPMNOTOK
@echo ERROR: The driver configuration file, RCPT.CFG, has a syntax error.
goto ERROR
:CPMOK
rem Setting up for SMDI, if SMDI is enabled on the key.
C:\RCPT\UI4\SMDICNFG #
C:\RCPT\UI4\SMDICNFG *
rem
@echo.
@echo Loading Receptionist software
C:\RCPT\RCPT.EXE
if ERRORLEVEL 2 goto RCPTNOTOK
goto RCPTOK
:RCPTNOTOK
@echo ERROR: Receptionist software did not load properly.
goto ERROR
:RCPTOK
C:\RCPT\NOTIFY.EXE
I&M
@if ERRORLEVEL 0 goto NTFYOK
@echo ERROR: The NOTIFY TSR will not load properly.
PAUSE
:NTFYOK
?
C:\AUDIO\SCHED.EXE /START /OUTPUT=nul
cls
@echo.
@echo.
@echo System Startup Complete
C:\UTIL\DATETIME.EXE
goto DONE
:ERROR
call C:\UTIL\ERRBEEP.BAT
:DONE
@echo.
@echo.
rem Boot with 1 minute password screen pop for Quick Config.
C:\RCPT\UI4\QWIKCNFG.EXE
6
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
Following is a brief explanation of some of the less standard parts of this file. Refer to the DOS manual supplied
with the Perfect Voice for information on other command lines. For more information on these commands, refer to
DOS Command Line Utilities later in this section of the manual.
ECHOSET ...........This variable is used in batch files throughout Perfect Voice to control whether the commands in
the batch files are echoed to the screen. By default, ECHOSET is OFF.
MONO ... ..............This variable should be set to `1' if the Perfect Voice system uses a monochrome display monitor.
If a color display monitor is used, remark out this line.
RBLD ... ..............This variable specifies whether the database index files are rebuilt from scratch when the system
restarts. For most sites, this adds only an extra few seconds to the startup time. If set to
anything other than "YES", the index files are not rebuilt.
AFORMS.EXE ....This command starts up the Perfect Voice Audioforms TSR.
KLINIC.EXE ....This command starts up the TSR program that controls remote access communications and
scheduled event execution and management.
REMOTE.EXE ....This program configures remote access communications.
DELAY.EXE.......This program delays execution of the next command by the number of seconds on the command
line. Press a key while the program is running to eliminate the wait. Or, press Control-C
to terminate system startup.
CPMLOAD.EXE..This command configures the audioboard driver.
CTRBLD.EXE ....This command rebuilds the database index files.
RCPT.EXE.........This command starts up the TSR that performs automated attendant and voice messaging
functions of Perfect Voice.
SMDISTRT.BATThis command starts up serial port integration, if it applies to this site.
NOTIFY.EXE ....This command starts up the TSR that controls new message notification.
I&M
SCHED.EXE.......This command configures the execution of scheduled events.
ERRBEEP.BAT..This command sounds an error tone.
D:\BOOT.LOG..This file logs the date and time for all system boots that used this startup file.
?
D:\LASTBOOT.LOG
This file logs information about the last system startup.
D:\PASTBOOT.LOG
This file logs information about the system startup previous to this one.
7
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
CREATE A BATCH FILE
A batch program is a text file that contains a series of commands that DOS carries out when you type its name at the
command prompt or add the batch program as an event in the Scheduler queue of Perfect Voice. DOS commands
and batch commands can be used in all batch programs. To create a batch file for a specific purpose, use Task 460
(Edit a text file). Enter the fully qualified filename of the file to edit.
If you are not comfortable with DOS, get some help from someone who is before performing this task.
DETERMINE PURPOSE OF BATCH FILE
After determining why the batch file is needed, determine what functions the batch file will perform. Plan out the
DOS commands to be used in the batch file. For more information on DOS command utilities that are used to
control Receptionist, refer to the following section on DOS Command Line Utilities. If using 6.22 version of MS-
DOS, on-line help is available on all MS-DOS commands by typing the following command from any command
prompt.
help
WRITE THE BATCH FILE
Using Task 460, write or make the changes to the batch file. It would be beneficial to someone who may be viewing
the file in the future to include comments in the batch file explaining the actions. For more information on editing
files, refer to the DOS manual supplied with the system.
TEST THE BATCH FILE
Any batch program that is created should be tested for correctness by manually executing the batch file. Execute
the batch program by typing the name of the file at any DOS command line then either access SCREENS or call the
Perfect Voice system to verify that the results of its execution are correct.
I&M
INSERT THE BATCH FILE IN SCHEDULER
The batch file may be inserted into the queue of the Scheduler if the purpose of the batch file is to change the
functions of the system or Users on a periodic basis. Refer to Scheduler in the System Configuration section of this
manual for more information on scheduling an event.
?
8
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
DOS COMMAND LINE UTILITIES
This section provides information about various utilities supplied with Perfect Voice. These utilities are used in
some of the batch files supplied with Perfect Voice. They can also be used to further enhance and customize a
system.
COMMAND LIST
C:\UTIL\BEEP.COM........... Make the PC speaker beep.
C:\UTIL\CHECKMEM.EXE . Check the availability of conventional RAM.
C:\UTIL\CHKSUM.EXE ...... Calculate a 16-bit CRC for file(s).
C:\UTIL\CHKXMS.EXE ...... Check the availability of XMS RAM.
C:\UTIL\DATETIME.EXE . Display the current date and time.
C:\UTIL\DELAY.COM ........ Pause foreground processing momentarily.
C:\UTIL\DELTREE.COM.... Delete files and directories from a path.
C:\UTIL\DSKSPACE.COM . Check on the availability of disk space.
C:\UTIL\FILECPY.EXE.... Copy a file with prompting.
C:\UTIL\GETCPU.EXE ...... Inquire CPU processor type.
C:\UTIL\GETOPT.COM ...... Inquire User options.
C:\UTIL\GETYESNO.COM . Inquire User response to Y/N question.
C:\UTIL\MAJORDOS.COM . Inquire major DOS version number.
C:\UTIL\MAPMEM.EXE ...... Display map of conventional memory usage.
C:\UTIL\PREBACK.EXE.... Calculate bytes required for a backup.
I&M
C:\UTIL\SHUTDOWN.BAT . Gracefully shuts down the system. Stops any new calls from being processed.
C:\UTIL\TRACECPY.EXE . Copy RAMdrive trace information to permanent file.
C:\UTIL\TRCFILT.EXE.... Filter single channel information from trace file.
?
C:\UTIL\WARMBOOT.COM . Perform a warmboot of the system.
C:\AUDIO\CPMAGC.EXE.... Adjust the volume level of a speech file.
C:\AUDIO\CPMLOAD.EXE . Load audioboard device driver parameters.
C:\AUDIO\CPMPLAY.EXE . Play a speech file to the PC speaker.
C:\AUDIO\REMOTE.EXE.... Configure remote communications parameters.
C:\AUDIO\SCHED.EXE ...... Configure scheduler parameters.
C:\RCPT\SENDMSG.EXE.... Send a speech file to a User as a message.
C:\RCPT\SETBCAST.EXE . Add all Users in an Instance to a distribution list.
C:\RCPT\SETCHAN.EXE.... Set Perfect Voice channel parameters.
C:\RCPT\SETNTFY.EXE.... Set Perfect Voice notification parameters.
C:\RCPT\SETRCPT.EXE.... Set Perfect Voice automated attendant parameters.
C:\RCPT\SETUDT.EXE ...... Set Perfect Voice User ID parameters.
9
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
BEEP
Usage: C:\UTIL\BEEP.COM <frequency> <beep_time> <silence_time> <repeat>
Description:...Make the PC speaker generate a tone, repeating if desired.
Parameters:...frequency ... the frequency of the tone to generate in Hertz.
beep_time..................the time duration of each tone component in ms.
silence_time ..............the time duration of each silence component in ms.
repeat ........................number of times to repeat tone/silence cycle
Exit error-levels: Exit error levels are defined as follows.
.......0 = no errors.
.......not 0 = syntax error on command line
CHECKMEM
Usage: C:\UTIL\CHECKMEM.EXE <kbytes>
Description:...Check to see if there are kbytes kilobytes of free contiguous conventional memory.
Parameters:...kbytes .. number of kilobytes to check for
Exit error-levels: Exit error levels are defined as follows.
.......0 = no errors.
.......not 0 = specified conventional memory is not available
CHKSUM
Usage: C:\UTIL\CHKSUM.EXE <file_spec> /S
Description:...Calculate and display the 16-bit CRC for the file or files specified by file_spec. If more than one
file matches the file specification (wildcard in spec or /S specified), a group CRC is also
I&M
calculated.
Parameters:...file_spec...... a file specification for a one or more files (wildcards allowed)
/S ..............................Search for matching files in subdirectories, too.
?
Exit error-levels: Exit error levels are defined as follows.
.......0 = no errors.
.......not 0 = syntax or other error
CHKXMS
Usage: C:\UTIL\CHKXMS.EXE <kbytes>
Description:...Check to see if there are kbytes kilobytes of free XMS memory.
Parameters:...kbytes .. number of kilobytes to check for
Exit error-levels: Exit error levels are defined as follows.
0 = no errors.
not 0 = specified XMS memory is not available
10
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
CPMAGC
Usage: C:\AUDIO\CPMAGC.EXE <infile> <outfile> <dB_level>
Description: ...Adjust the volume level of a speech file.
Parameters: ...infile The input speech file to adjust.
...... outfile The output, adjusted speech file.
...... dB_level The format of this parameter can be one of three types. If the parameter is preceded by a +, the
volume of the speech file is increased by dB_level dB. If the parameter is preceded by a
-, the volume of the speech file is decreased by dB_level dB. If neither appears, and this
parameter is specified, the volume level of the speech file is brought up (or down) to -
dB_level dB.
Exit error-levels: Exit error levels are defined as follows.
...... 0 = output file created with no errors.
...... not 0 = error encountered during processing
CPMLOAD
Usage: C:\AUDIO\CPMLOAD.EXE <infile>
Description: ...Configure the audioboard device driver with CPM patterns, default thresholds, IBS definitions,
etc. from a configuration file.
Parameters: ...infile The input configuration file to use (usually C:\RCPT\RCPT.CFG).
Exit error-levels: Exit error levels are defined as follows.
...... 0 = no errors.
...... not 0 = error encountered during processing
I&M
CPMPLAY
Usage: C:\AUDIO\CPMPLAY.EXE <infile>
Description: ...Plays the speech file, infile to the PC speaker.
?
Parameters: ...infile The input speech file to play.
Exit error-levels: Exit error levels are defined as follows.
...... 0 = no errors.
...... not 0 = error encountered during processing
DATETIME
Usage: C:\UTIL\DATETIME.EXE
Description: ...Display the current system date and time, including the weekday.
Parameters: ...none
Exit error-levels: not implemented
11
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
DELAY
Usage: C:\UTIL\DELAY.COM <delay_time>
Description:...Delay foreground processing for at least delay_time seconds. If a key is pressed during the delay
period, processing continues with the next line in the batch file.
Parameters:...delay_time.. the minimum delay time in seconds
Exit error-levels: not implemented
DELTREE
Usage: C:\UTIL\DELTREE.COM <path>
Description:...Delete all files in path along with all files and directories below path. When done, remote the
lowest level directory in path, too. If a read-only file is encountered, processing stops.
Previously deleted files are not recovered.
Parameters:...path ..... the path from which all files and directories are deleted.
Exit error-levels: Exit error levels are defined as follows.
0 = no errors.
1 = Not successful, path not found
2 = Not successful, read-only file encountered
3 = Not successful, syntax error or other failure
DSKSPACE
Usage: C:\UTIL\DSKSPACE.COM /parameter1=value1 /parameter2=value2, etc.
Description:...Check on how much disk space is available on a hard drive. Space can be specified in minutes of
messaging or kilobytes.
I&M
Parameters:.../DRIVE=<d>.....Specify drive number to check.
/MINUTES=<n>..................... Specify space to check for in minutes. /KBYTES not
allowed if this qualifier is used.
?
/KBYTES=<n> ....................... Specify space to check for in kilobytes. /MINUTES not
allowed if this qualifier is used.
Exit error-levels: Exit error levels are defined as follows.
0 = requested space is available on drive
1 = requested space is not available on drive
2 = syntax or other error
FILECPY
Usage: C:\UTIL\FILECPY.EXE
Description:...This program prompts the User for the two files required to perform a copy, the file being copied
and the file being copied to. If the output file already exists, the User is prompted to
confirm overwrite. If the output file is write-protected, or if the destination disk drive
does not have enough space, the program fails.
Parameters: ........................ none
Exit error-levels: not implemented
12
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
GETCPU
Usage: C:\UTIL\GETCPU.EXE
Description: ...This program determines the processor type and returns an error level based on it.
Parameters:...none
Exit error-levels: 86 = 8088/8086 processor
286 = 80286 processor
386 = 80386 processor
486 = 80486 processor
GETOPT
Usage: C:\UTIL\GETOPT.COM "prompt"
Description: ...This program prompts the User for an option and returns an error level based on the pressed key.
This allows batch programs to present a list of numbered options with the ECHO
command and prompt the User for a selection. The error return from this command is
then evaluated to determine the option selected.
Parameters:...prompt.the prompt string, enclosed in quotes
Exit error-levels: 0 = User pressed 0
1 = User pressed 1
2 = User pressed 2
3 = User pressed 3
4 = User pressed 4
5 = User pressed 5
6 = User pressed 6
7 = User pressed 7
I&M
8 = User pressed 8
9 = User pressed 9
11 = User pressed F1
?
12 = User pressed F2
13 = User pressed F3
14 = User pressed F4
15 = User pressed F5
16 = User pressed F6
17 = User pressed F7
18 = User pressed F8
19 = User pressed F9
20 = User pressed F10
21 = User pressed F11
22 = User pressed F12
23 = User pressed Esc
13
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
GETYESNO
Usage: C:\UTIL\GETYESNO.COM "prompt? Y/N"
Description:...This program prompts the User for a Yes/No answer and returns an error level based on the letter
pressed. This allows batch programs to present a Yes/No question prompt the User for
an answer. The error return from this command is then evaluated to determine the
answer.
Parameters:...prompt? ..... the prompt string, enclosed in quotes asking for Y or N response
Exit error-levels: 0 = User selected "No"
1 = User selected "Yes"
2 = User selected something other than "Yes" or "No"
MAJORDOS
Usage: C:\UTIL\MAJORDOS.COM
Description:...This program determines the major MS-DOS version and returns it in the error level.
Parameters:...none
Exit error-levels: the major MS-DOS version number
MAPMEM
Usage: C:\UTIL\MAPMEM.EXE
Description:...This program provides a brief summary of conventional memory usage.
Parameters:...none
Exit error-levels: not implemented
I&M
PREBACK
Usage: C:\UTIL\PREBACK.EXE
?
Description:...This program prompts for information necessary to determine how much space is required for a
backup. The User is prompted for the destination and target drives, the amount of "extra"
free space required along with one or more sets of the following.
directory to evaluate
file specification, including wildcards
include subdirectories?
When the program completes, the total number of bytes required along with the
approximate number of floppy disks required to perform the backup are displayed.
Parameters:...none
Exit error-levels: not implemented
14
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
REMOTE
Usage: C:\AUDIO\REMOTE.EXE /parameter1=value1 /parameter2=value2, etc.
Description: ...Configure Klinic's remote communications parameters.
Parameters: ...TSR Control
/INIT .......................Startup Remote Access capabilities.
/CONNECT ................Force LOGIN (override password) if in Password
/LGI..........................Same as /CONNECT.
/DISCONNECT.........Force Hang-up current remote session.
/LGO..........................Same as /DISCONNECT.
/WHAT .......................Just display the status of the REMOTE TSR
/VERBOSE ................Show details of transactions
To Suspend or resume all COMx port activity:
/STOP .......................suspends all remote activity until a /START is given.
/HOLD .......................Same as /STOP.
/START.....................resumes remote activity until a /HOLD is given.
/RESUME ..................Same as /START.
Communications Configuration
/PASSWORD=<pw>..Specify the password (1-8 characters) for remote access.
/TRY=<n>.................Specify maximum password fails until shutdown.
/HAYES.....................Use HAYES AT and modem signals. (Default)
/MDM..........................Use Only modem signals. (async network)
/LOCAL.....................Use Only DSR signal (null modem).
/ANSI=<n> ..............Specify ANSI driver compatibility mode 0 (Default) or 1.
Additional Communications Configuration Qualifiers for /HAYES
I&M
/RING=<n> ..............Specify rings to wait before answer. (Default=2)
/BELL .......................Answer with BELL 212A carrier (USA) (Default)
/B212A.....................Same as /BELL
/CCITT.....................Answer with CCITT V.22 carrier (International)
?
/V22..........................Same as /CCITT
COM port Configuration qualifiers
/D8N..........................byte size is 8 bits and NO parity bit. (Default)
/D7E..........................byte size is 7 bits and Even parity bit.
/D7O..........................byte size is 7 bits and Odd parity bit.
/D7S..........................byte size is 7 bits and Space (0) parity bit.
/D7M..........................byte size is 7 bits and Mark (1) parity bit.
/SB2..........................byte has 2 stop bits. (Default=1 stop bit)
/SPD..........................Specify baud rate (300,1200,2400) (Default 2400)
(3600,4800,7200,9600,12000,14400,19200)
/SPEED=<n>............Same as /SPD
/BAUD=<n> ..............Same as /SPD
/SET..........................Change/Reset COM using /COM and /IRQ
/COM=<n>.................Specify COM port to configure or check
(1=3F8,2=2F8,3=3E8,4=2E8)
15
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
/IRQ=<n> ................Specify IRQ for COM port (2-5) (default COM1/3=4 COM2/4=3)
Real Time Status Line
/SRW=<n> ................Specify row for pop-up status line. (0-24)
/SCL .........................Specify column for pop-up status line. (0-79)
/OFF .........................turn OFF pop-up status line.
/MONO.......................turn ON pop-up status in Black/White
/COLOR.....................turn ON pop-up status in Color (if color controller)
Exit error-levels: Exit error levels are defined as follows.
.......0 = no errors.
.......not 0 = error encountered during processing
SCHED
Usage: C:\AUDIO\SCHED.EXE /parameter1=value1 /parameter2=value2, etc.
Description:...Configure Klinic's scheduler parameters.
Parameters:...Scheduler Control
/HOLD.......................suspends execution of events until a /START is given.
/STOP.......................Same as /HOLD.
/START.....................restart execution of events until a /HOLD is given.
/UPDATE ..................Schedule the first (oldest) event in the queue.
/WHAT.......................Just display the status of the Scheduler.
/OUTPUT=<fn>........directs /LOG messages to <fn> file.
/MONO.......................display pop-up window in Black/White
/COLOR.....................display pop-up window in Color (if color controller)
QUEUE Control
I&M
/DELETE ..................deletes the event specified by /CMD or /NAME.
/INSERT ..................Insert event defined by time, /NAME and /CMD.
/RESCHEDULE.........Update first event in queue with /NAME and/or /CMD qualifiers.
?
/LIST.......................Display a listing of all events in the queue.
/QUEUE=<fn> ..........Explicit specification of queue name (testing only)
/LOG .........................Prints the top event in the queue file to the log
Event Action Control
/NAME=<text>..........specifies the name of this event.
/CMD="text" .............specifies the text of the command to execute at the event.
Event Scheduling Control
/STYLE=<x>............Re-scheduling type {ABCD}. Default=C.
/INCMIN=<n> .........If Style=D, reschedule every "n" minutes.
/DAYS=xxxxxxx.......Automatic reschedule days. Where x= Y/N, Mon-Sun.
/NOW .........................incremental date/times based on NOW instead of scheduled.
/ABS=<datetime>....specifies absolute date/time as MM/DD/YY;HH:MM for event.
/DATE=<date>.........specifies absolute date as MM/DD/YY for an event.
/TIME=<time>.........specifies absolute 24-hour time of day as HH:MM for an event.
/TIME=<time>.........specifies absolute 12-hour time of day as HH:MMx for an event.
16
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
/AFTER=<time>.......schedules event HH:MM from current time as HH:MM in event.
/TOMMORROW ...........schedules for scheduled date + 1 day.
/WEEK .......................schedules for scheduled date + 1 week.
/NEXT_MONTH.........schedules for scheduled date + 1 month.
/DAY..........................specifies reschedule on <day> at the same time. day may be
/MONDAY /TUESDAY ... /SUNDAY
/LAST .......................specifies a date of the last day of the month.
Exit error-levels: Exit error levels are defined as follows.
...... 0 = no errors.
...... not 0 = error encountered during processing
SENDMSG
Usage: C:\RCPT\SENDMSG.EXE /parameter1=value1 /parameter2=value2, etc.
Description: ....Send a speech file to a User as a message.
Parameters: .../INSTANCE=<n>.... Specify Instance of User to send message to.
/USER=<n> ..............Specify User ID to send message to.
/MESG=<fname> ......Specify complete message filename to send as a message.
/URGENT ..................Mark as urgent
/PRIVATE ................Mark as private
/CANCEL ..................Cancel notification of message.
/ARC..........................Send message file only if archive bit is set, then clear archive bit
/LASTMESG=<n> ....Force next message number value
Exit error-levels: Exit error levels are defined as follows.
...... 0 = no errors.
I&M
...... not 0 = error encountered during processing
SETBCAST
?
Usage: C:\RCPT\SETBCAST.EXE /parameter1=value1 /parameter2=value2, etc.
Description: ...Add all Users in an Instance to a distribution list. This can used to add all Users to a type B
User's list 0 (the public list) or to any one of the 10 private lists for a type U User. The
Users added to the distribution list can be restricted to only those whose User ID records
contain a specified department.
Parameters: .../INSTANCE=<n>.... Specify Instance of User to work with.
/USER=<n> ..............Specify User ID to work with.
/LIST=<n> ..............Specify the list number to change (default=0)
/DEPT=<name> .......only add Users whose DEPARTMENT field is name.
/CLEANUP ................Clean up distribution lists (older systems only)
Exit error-levels: Exit error levels are defined as follows.
...... 0 = no errors.
...... not 0 = error encountered during processing
17
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
SETCHAN
Usage: C:\RCPT\SETCHAN.EXE /parameter1=value1 /parameter2=value2, etc.
Description:...Change Channel Setup database parameters.
Parameters:.../CHANNEL=<n> Specify the channel number to work with.
/INSTANCE=<n> ....Specify the main Instance number for channel.
/LANGUAGE=<n> ....Specify the language Instance number for channel.
/RINGWAIT=<n> ....Specify the number of rings to wait before answering a call on
channel.
/TRACE=Y,N,D........Specify trace setting for channel.
Exit error-levels: Exit error levels are defined as follows.
.......0 = no errors.
.......not 0 = error encountered during processing
SETNTFY
Usage: C:\RCPT\SETNTFY.EXE /parameter1=value1 /parameter2=value2, etc.
Description:...Change Notify Setup Parameters
Parameters:.../TRACE=Y,N.....Specify trace flag
/LOGNAME=<fname>...... Specify log filename
/LOGFLAG=Y,N.............. Specify whether or not logging is performed.
/SPCHPATH=<path>...... Specify notification speech path
Exit error-levels: Exit error levels are defined as follows.
.......0 = no errors.
.......not 0 = error encountered during processing
I&M
SETRCPT
Usage: C:\RCPT\SETRCPT.EXE /parameter1=value1 /parameter2=value2, etc.
?
Description:...Change Instance Setup Parameters
Parameters:.../INSTANCE=<n>.....Specify Instance number to work with.
/DEFUSER=<n>.............. Specify default User ID
/GREETING=<fname> ... Specify GREETING filename
/WHATTODO=<fname> ... Specify WHATTODO filename
/STILTHER=Y,N ........... Specify STILTHER.RMS playback
/GRUNTSEC=<n> ........... Specify Still There Wait value
/RESTART=Y,N.............. Specify Endcall setting
/TRACE=Y,N................... Specify TRACE flag
/MEXP..................................... Set new/old/list message expiration to 0.
Exit error-levels: Exit error levels are defined as follows.
.......0 = no errors.
.......not 0 = error encountered during processing
18
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
SETUDT
Usage: C:\RCPT\SETUDT.EXE /parameter1=value1 /parameter2=value2, etc.
Description: ...Change User ID Parameters
Parameters: .../INSTANCE=<n>.... Specify Instance number of User to work with.
/USER=<n> ............................Specify User ID to work with.
/INIT .....................................Reset statistics for User (if call count is not 0).
/EXTENSION=<xxx>.............Specify extension dialstring for User.
/NODISTURB=Y,N ................Specify do not disturb setting for User.
/SCREENING=Y,N ................Specify call-screening setting for User.
/UNAVAIL=<n> .....................Specify current personal greeting number for User.
/MESSAGES=Y,N...................Specify Caller Messaging? flag for User.
/MAXMSGS=<n> .....................Specify message count quota for User.
/NAMEREC=Y,N .....................Specify personal name recorded flag for User.
/ALTID=n ..............................Change the Alternate User ID.
/ALTIN=n ..............................Change the Alternate instance.
/UPG41...................................Reset PAGING and COVERAGE fields.
/XFERTYPE=A,B,H,T,D....Set transfer type.
/MEXP .....................................Set new/old/list message expiration to 0.
/FAXMSGS=Y,N.....................Specify whether User may have fax messages in box.
/MSGPATH=PATH ..................Specify the message path of the User.
Exit error-levels: Exit error levels are defined as follows.
...... 0 = no errors.
I&M
...... not 0 = error encountered during processing
TRACECPY
?
Usage: C:\UTIL\TRACECPY.EXE <infile> <outpath> <min_bytes>
Description: ...This program copies trace log information from infile and places it in outpath, naming the output
file according to the next filename in the sequence. After copying the file, the original
trace log file is deleted. No copy is performed if less than min_bytes of space exists on
the target drive.
The output files are named according to the month and date of the month. If this
command is run more than once a day (usually this is the case), the file extension reflects
the sequence number. For example, the first file copied from December 16 is
TRACEK16.L01. The second file in the sequence is TRACEK16.L02 and so on.
Parameters:...none
Exit error-levels: 0 = no errors
1 = Source trace file not found.
2 = Rename doesn't work, couldn't open source trace file.
3 = Dest dir not found, can't get size of dest drive
4 = Not enough space on target drive
19
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
TRCFILT
Usage: C:\UTIL\TRCFILT.EXE /parameter1=value1 /parameter2=value2, etc.
Description:...This program extracts the trace information for a specific channel from a trace log file. It is useful
in decreasing the size of the trace log file to speed file transfers. It can also help in
making the trace easier to read.
Parameters:.../INPUT=<infile>......the input trace log file
/OUTPUT=<outfile>.the output trace log file
/CHANNEL=<n>.......the channel number for which trace messages are extracted
Exit error-levels: 0 = no errors
1 = no matching trace information found in input trace file
2 = syntax error on command line
WARMBOOT
Usage: C:\UTIL\WARMBOOT.COM
Description:...This program warmboots the system. Note that for some sites, this may hang the system without
restarting it. Never execute this program remotely without having someone on site whom
you can reach to boot the system manually.
Parameters:...none
Exit error-levels: not implemented
I&M
?
20
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
BATCH FILE DESCRIPTIONS
TDD
MAKEGRT ...........Converts a text file to the TDD GREETING
MAKEGRT ...........Converts a text file to the TDD GREETING
MAKETDD ...........Creates TDD personal greeting, Tbox greeting, or TDD audiotext message (1, 2, 3, or 4 digits)
MAKEWHAT.........Converts a text file to the TDD WHATTODO
MAKEDAY ...........Converts a text file into TDD format and adds it to the end of the daytime WHATTODO
MAKENITE.........Converts a text file into TDD format and adds it to the end of the nighttime WHATTODO
MAKE_ONE.........Converts a single text file to TDD format
MAKE1ALL.........Converts all text files in the TDD directory into TDD format
TDDAPPD ...........Appends TDD tones to the WHATTODO (for 980 series)
TDDAPPD0.........Appends TDD tones to the WHATTODO (for 900 series)
QUICK COMMANDS
DAY...... ..............Sets the system in day mode
NIGHT . ..............Sets the system in night mode.
HOLIDAY ...........Sets the system in Holiday mode
WORKDAY ...........Sets the system in workday mode
I&M
HOLD ... ..............Holds the scheduler
LIST ... ..............Lists the scheduler queue
ADJUST..............Volume Adjuster
?
VOLUME..............Normalizes the volume of a speech file
BACKITUP.........Backup batch job
RESTORIT.........Restores the floppy backup
IEDIT . ..............Used to edit any text file 64K or shorter
IVIEW . ..............Used to view a text file
IVIEWEND.........Used to view a text file from the end of the file.
NETSITE ...........Batch job to backup network sites
NEWSMDI ...........Copies the SMDI .ITF file
USERID..............Changes the word password to guest room
21
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS
MODEM.. ...... ......Initializes the modem using remote configuration defaults
MODEM1 ...... ......Initializes the modem to COM port 1
MODEM2 ...... ......Initializes the modem to COM port 2
NTFYTOFF.. ......Turns off notify trace
NTFYTON .... ......Turns on notify trace
TRACEOFF.. ......Turns receptionist trace off
TRACEON .... ......Turns receptionist trace on
TRCPY.. ...... ......Copies the trace information from ramdrive to harddisk
BYE....... ...... ......Logs out of remote mode
FILES.. ...... ......Displays the active files and applications
MAINTAIN.. ......Runs the maintenance batch job
SITE .... ...... ......Generates a site report of system information
STOPIDE +?....Generates hard drive and disk key information
FAX UTILITIES
CVT2FAX .... ......Converts TXT, PCX, DCX, or TIF files to APF files for faxing
PCX2DCX .... ......Converts PCX to DCX file formats
FXDOCTST.. ......Confirms if the fax file is a standard fax document file
IMPORT ...... ......Copies a fax document to another location
FAXLOAD.... ......Loads the fax drivers into memory
FC12LOAD.. ......Loads the class 2 fax driver
FC12MAKE.. ......Setup for class 2 fax driver
I&M
FI3LOAD .... ......Fax coprocessor loader
FI3MAKE1.. ......Setup for fax coprocessor, 1 port
FI3MAKE2.. ......Setup for fax coprocessor, 2 ports
?
INSTALL UTILITIES
BIRTHDAY.. ......Plays happy birthday song
CFGMOD ...... ......Modifies the CONFIG.SYS file
CHECKEY.... ......Checks the parallel port for the correct key or dongle
COMPARE .... ......Create a checksum and if necessary compares it against a checksum file
DISKBEEP.. ......Beeps after the disk is done
DISPTEST.. ......Checks the display for VGA or Monochrome monitor
ERRBEEP .... ......Makes an error beep
EXITLVL0.. ......Exits a batch files on errorlevel 0
MAKEDIR .... ......Creates new subdirectories for the install
RINGPATH.. ......Sets the path for ring tests
TELUPLD
Asks the user if the Terminal access is generic or Toshiba specific
22
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
BACKING UP THE SYSTEM
INTRODUCTION
The information on the Perfect Voice system should, like any computer system, be backed up periodically. The two
most frequently used methods of backing up a computer system are using a tape backup system or backing files onto
floppy disks. The decision as to what method to use should be based on a number of factors including cost,
convenience and reliability. Note that the system must be taken off-line (not processing calls) while the backup is in
progress.
If a parallel tape is used to backup the system, remove the security key after the system is off-line to prevent
damage to the security key.
DIRECT CALLS AWAY FROM THE SYSTEM
The backup must not be run on a system while it is processing calls. Direct calls to an alternate answering point and
shut down the system. To shut the system down, use the Task Manager `System Shutdown' function.
BACKUP TO FLOPPY DISKS USING TASK MANAGER
From the Main Menu in SCREENS, select Utilities and then Task Manager. Highlight the entry associated with the
desired backup type and press Enter. After examining the system, the backup utility will display an estimate of the
number of floppy disks required to perform the backup. The calculation is based on the assumption that blank,
formatted, high density, 3.5" floppy disks, each capable of holding 1.44 megabytes of information are being used.
It is wise to have a few extra disks on hand in case some turn out to be defective. New floppy disks should always
be used when performing any backup.
If the required numbers of floppy diskettes are available, answer "Y" to the question, "Are you prepared to begin
the backup? Y/N".
Note: The system may ask you more than once to "Insert Last Backup Diskette in Drive A:", leave the current
floppy in the floppy drive and press ENTER. If asked for diskette #2, #3, etc., then insert a new or newly formatted
diskette in Drive A: and press ENTER.
Label each diskette with at least the following information.
I&M
Backup type (ALL-C, SYSTEM, USRSPCH, etc.)
Today's date
Disk sequence number
?
Store the diskettes in a safe place. The best place is in a fireproof safe off-site.
BACKUP TO FLOPPY DISKS USING MS-DOS 6.22, MSBACKUP COMMAND
To start a backup by using Backup for MS-DOS, type the following at the command prompt.
msbackup
If a message about running the compatibility test appears when backup is started, refer to "Running the
Compatibility Test" in the MS-DOS manual. If the compatibility test is not run the first time Backup is
started, then this message will appear each time Backup is started until the test is run.
Select the Backup button and the Miscrosoft Backup screen will appear. Select the files to back up by
selecting one or more drives and indicating which files on those drives to include or exclude from a backup.
23
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
The following files may be backed up:
C: drive - software programs and the User database
D: drive - system speech files, User messages, personal greetings and name recordings
D:\MESG\0000090*.UV1 - custom greetings and whattodo files
C:\UTIL\*.BAT - all batch files
C:\RCPT\DB*.* - User database
C:\RCPT\RCPT.ITF - integration file
C:\RCPT\RCPT.CFG - telephone system configuration file
D:\MESG\*.UV* - User personal greetings
D:\MESG\*.NAM - User personal name recordings
D:\SPCHENG\*.GRT - all audiotext recordings
The screen will display how many floppy diskettes will be needed for the backup. The calculation is based on the
assumption that blank, formatted, high density, 3.5" floppy disks, each capable of holding 1.44 megabytes of
information are being used. It is wise to have a few extra disks on hand in case some turn out to be defective. New
floppy disks should always be used when performing any backup.
When the backup is complete, label each diskette with at least the following information.
Backup type (ALL-C, SYSTEM, USRSPCH, etc.)
Today's date
Disk sequence number
Store the diskettes in a safe place. The best place is in a fireproof safe off-site.
TAPE DRIVE BACKUP
I&M
Follow the manufacturer's instructions for connection of the internal or external tape drive. The hardware key
must be removed from the parallel port if a parallel tape drive is used to backup the system. Removal of the
security key prevents possible damage to the key.
?
RESTORING BACKUPS
Backups are done to minimize down time in the event of a system failure. Be certain that the system has reached a
non-recoverable state before restoring a backup. For this reason, Teleco Technical Support should be consulted to
determine the extent of the damage and exactly what, if anything, must be restored.
Any `post-backup' changes (changes made after a backup has been run) to the system are not reflected in the
backup. The following scenarios exist after restoring from a backup.
When a backup of C and D drive is restored;
Any post-backup adds, moves or changes in SCREENS are not restored.
Any post-backup changes via telephone to User IDs are not restored.
The message database accurately reflects messages from time of backup.
When a backup of only C drive is restored;
Any post-backup adds, moves or changes in SCREENS are not restored.
Any post-backup changes via telephone to User IDs are not restored.
24
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
If pre-backup messages were deleted (after the backup), the time stamps for the deleted messages will be in
the restored database but the actual messages do not exist. User hears "unable to locate message contents".
Any post-backup messages are not accessible until a re-link has been run.
Re-link messages using the following command.
SENDMSG /INSTANCE=aaa /USER=bbb /MESG=*.*
aaa is the Instance number.
bbb is the User ID.
This command may take several minutes based on the number of messages on the system. It is not possible
to completely restore post-backup messages to the User message database. The following results apply to
messages physically on D drive;
All caller messages are re-linked to their original destination.
All sent messages are linked to the sender's mailbox. The User must re-send the message.
All forwarded messages are linked to their original destination.
I&M
?
25
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
CREATING ON HOLD MESSAGES
While processing a call from a busy or queued extension, the voice system offers callers the option to hold and retry
later. If the caller selects to hold, the system may be configured to play a sequence of pre-recorded speech files. The
speech files may contain promotional messages, music or anything else that lends itself to being subdivided into
short segments.
FILE NAMING AND PLAYBACK LOGIC
Up to 100 audio segments may be created. The segments reside in the same directory as other system speech (i.e.
D:\SPCHENG). The files are named BUSYWT0.RMS, BUSYWT1.RMS, BUSYWT2.RMS, BUSYWT3.RMS, and so
on.
After system restart, a channel is set to play BUSYWT0.RMS when a caller selects to hold during the busy or
queuing menu. The second time a caller selects to hold, the file, BUSYWT1.RMS is played. Each time a caller
selects to hold, the next file in the sequence is played. This continues until the next file in the sequence cannot be
found, at which time BUSYWT0.RMS is again played and the sequence is restarted. The sequence is not restarted
when a new call is received. Instead, the sequence just picks up from where the last call left off. For information on
how to record custom speech files, see the System Administration section of this manual.
HOLD TIME CONSIDERATIONS
With on-hold messages, the hold time is a function of the time required to play back each message plus this field
(seconds). The value of Busy Hold Retry Time (under Instance Setup in SCREENS) should be set to 1. You
may want to keep the lengths of the on-hold recordings consistent to provide consistent hold periods.
CALLER OPTIONS DURING HOLD
You may want to provide verbal instructions to the caller as part of the on-hold message. The following are options
available to the caller during the hold period.
I&M
A caller may press # to skip past the hold period.
A caller may press 0 to reach the default User (operator) or the User's Personal Assistant.
The caller may press * to go back to the main greeting (to try another extension).
If the User for whom the caller is holding has messaging privileges, the caller may press 1 to leave a
?
message during the on-hold message
26
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
ELIMINATING TALK-OFF PROBLEMS
HOW TALK-OFF OCCURS
A DTMF tone is simply a combination of two tones of specific frequencies whose volume ratio is a specific value.
The range of frequencies for these tones is within that of the human voice. Talk-off occurs when a DTMF is falsely
detected because the caller's voice contains a pair of those tones. Because of the variation of voices in the
population, certain individuals may experience talk-off more than others.
VERIFY THE CONDITION
First, ensure that the problem exists. If a caller complained about getting cut off in a message, check the Message
Information record and determine how the message was terminated. If it was terminated with a DTMF digit,
especially one other than `#', talk-off probably occurred.
ADDRESSING THE PROBLEM
For systems with July, 1995 microcode, the minimum DTMF duration during silence, prompt playback,
message playback and recording are set from System, Telephone System in System Configuration.
The amount of time that the caller's voice sounds the pair of DTMF tones is normally very short. Therefore, by
increasing slightly Perfect Voice's minimum required DTMF duration, talk-off problems can be addressed. If the
system has VP4E audio board micro code that is earlier than July, 1995, this is done by modifying the `D'
parameter setting in AUTOEXEC.BAT. If increasing the `D' parameter beyond 19 does not solve the problem,
contact Perfect Voice Technical Support for assistance.
Edit the following line in AUTOEXEC.BAT, applying the `D' parameter from the table below.
C:\AUDIO\AUDIO.EXE /P=C:\AUDIO\ /D=16 /I=2
I&M
/D=nn
DTMF Duration
10
40
11
44
?
12
48
13
52
14
56
15
60
16
64
17
68
18
72
19
76
20
80
27
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
ELIMINATING DTMF DETECTION PROBLEMS
The ability of Perfect Voice to properly detect DTMF tones is controlled by many factors, some of which may or
may not be under the control of the Perfect Voice installer. Following is a list of these factors along with a suggested
way of correcting the problem.
Cause of DTMF detection problems
Action to correct
High volume level of outgoing speech (i.e.
Decrease volume level of system greeting and
greeting, etc.).
whattodo files, using the procedure supplied with the
Task Manager in SCREENS. If necessary, drop
volume levels to below standard values. This is the
most effective way to improve DTMF detection.
Signal loss through the originating telephone
Work with all parties to document and resolve signal
system, originating central office, long
loss for each leg of the circuit.
distance service, local central office, and
telephone system to which Perfect Voice is
connected.
DTMF quality from calling party.
This is usually indicated by an isolated complaint. If
so, suggest alternate equipment.
`D' parameter setting.
Decrease `D' parameter, but only as a last resort and
never below 14. This is the least effective way to
improve DTMF detection and runs the risk of
introducing or increasing reports talk-off problems.
DTMF duration settings in SCREENS.
The minimum expected DTMF during silence,
prompt and message playback or recording in
Telephone System Parameters may need to be
I&M
adjusted from the default settings. These settings
supersede the `D' parameter setting and
DTMF_ACTION qualifiers in the RCPT.CFG if the
microcode of the VP4E II board is 04JUL95 or later.
?
28
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
ELIMINATING PHANTOM CALLS TO THE DEFAULT USER
WHAT ARE PHANTOM CALLS?
If no DTMF tones are entered during the main greeting, Receptionist automatically transfers the call to the default
User. If, however, Receptionist detects a disconnect at anytime during a call, the call is terminated as quickly as
possible. A phantom call is defined as a trunk call transferred to the default User from Receptionist even though the
caller has already hung up. This results from information not being presented to Receptionist to indicate that the
caller has hung up. This information may come to Receptionist from the telephone system in the form of IBS digits
and/or CPM tones.
To signal a disconnect condition to Receptionist, the telephone system must receive information from the Central
Office. Ideally, the information is also received in a timely manner. The timing or even the existence of this signal
from the Central Office usually depends on the grade of service associated with the trunks and the type of switch at
the Central Office. For example, loop-start trunks from an older Central Office may not even signal the disconnect
at all, while ground start trunks will almost always signal the disconnect immediately.
After detecting the disconnect signal from the Central Office, the telephone system normally presents a wink, IBS
hang-up digits and/or CPM tones (i.e. reorder tone) to Receptionist. A wink and IBS hang-up digits can be detected
and acted upon by Receptionist at almost any time during the call process. CPM tones indicating hang-up may not
be acted upon immediately as outgoing speech can sometimes interfere with its detection. Even so, if the telephone
system presents a wink, IBS digits and/or CPM tones to indicate a disconnect condition soon after the caller hangs
up, it should be possible to virtually eliminate phantom calls.
If the Central Office is slow to signal the disconnect condition, the call may end up at the default User anyway. In
these situations, it is a matter of how much time elapses between the moment the caller hangs up and when
Receptionist sends the call to the default User. For example, a phantom call may or may not be generated if the
caller hangs up at the following times.
immediately after the system answers
sometime during the main greeting
just before the end of the main greeting
I&M
immediately after reaching a User's personal greeting
sometime during a User's personal greeting
just before the end of a User's personal greeting
Note that a phantom call is not generated if a User hangs up while logged into User Mode. Instead, Receptionist
?
simply times out, while waiting for a response and terminates the call.
CHECK IBS PROGRAMMING
If the telephone system is capable of sending IBS digits, ensure that Receptionist and other applications have been
configured appropriately. For Receptionist, check the IBS patterns to see that a "HXX" pattern exists to match the
digit string sent by the telephone system. For more information on IBS pattern definitions, refer to System Menu:
Integrations menu in the System Configuration section of this manual.
CHECK THE AUDIO DRIVER CONFIGURATION FILE
If the telephone system sends only CPM tones to indicate a disconnect condition, and the software has been
upgraded from an earlier version of Perfect Voice, verify the audio driver configuration file is the latest version. The
latest version of the configuration file for the telephone system may be obtained from Teleco Technical Support.
If the configuration file is the latest version, contact Teleco Technical Support for more assistance.
29
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
CONSIDER GRUNT DETECTION
If the telephone system is not capable of detecting the disconnect signaling from the central office or if the central
office does not present the disconnect signal at all or in a timely manner, configure the system to use grunt
detection. Grunt detection is not as effective as true disconnect signaling, but will reduce the number of phantom
calls.
A system using grunt detection does not unconditionally transfer a caller to the default User. Instead, the caller is
asked to confirm his presence by speaking. Before transferring a call to the default User, the system plays the
following prompt.
"To speak with the operator, please say `yes' after the tone."
If the caller responds by saying, "yes", the call is transferred to the default User. In reality, if the caller says
anything at all, including, "no", the call is transferred. In other words, the caller only needs to make a sound (thus
the term, grunt detection).
Before enabling grunt detection, check with the customer. Some customers are sensitive about this feature and do
not want it, even if it means a reduction in the number of phantom calls. Explain how grunt detection functions and
that it is easily enabled and disabled.
ENABLE GRUNT DETECTION
To enable grunt detection, access SCREENS. Select the Receptionist Menu, then Instance Setup. Using the edit
(F4) feature, set the following field values for each Instance.
Still There Wait
set to 4
Play STILTHER.RMS?
set to Y
Listen in with a line monitor and ensure that Receptionist handles the call appropriately. Check all of the timing
cases listed above for both a trunk and a station call.
I&M
?
30
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
USING AUTOMATIC VOLUME CONTROL
WHY AGC_TDD.BAT IS NEEDED
Many times Users may have difficulty hearing the messages left for them by callers due to low volume. Low
volume in messages may have many causes, some of which may be line conditions, the type of telephone the caller
is using and the number of carriers handling the call. The use of the AGC_TDD.BAT file will increase the volume
of these types of messages. In addition, any system using the AMIS Network option should use the
AGC_TDD.BAT prior to sending messages to remote sites. This will insure that the message volume level is high
enough to be received by the remote system for normal playback to the User.
DETERMINE DRIVE AND DIRECTORY FOR USER MESSAGES
In SCREENS, select Receptionist Menu, then Instance Setup. Highlight the main Instance record and press Enter to
browse the record. The Record Path field contains the drive and directory associated with User Messages. By
default, this is D:\MESG. If this is the case, skip to the step entitled, "Add scheduled event."
IF NECESSARY, EDIT AGC_TDD BATCH FILE
If the Record Path, determined in the step above is not D:\MESG, the AGC_TDD.BAT file must be edited for
the correct path. The batch file is located in C:\AUDIO and the default version contains only a single command.
The two command line parameters indicate the drive (by default, D:) and directory (by default, \MESG). Edit the
batch file, and make the appropriate modifications. If messages are stored in more than one location, insert
additional lines into the batch file, setting the drive and directory appropriately. Remember to leave off the trailing
backslash on the directory specification.
TEST THE BATCH FILE
Manually execute the batch file to ensure that the changes are valid. To execute the batch file manually, type the
command AGC_TDD.BAT from any DOS prompt. If the Automatic Volume Control procedure has never been run
on this system, or if it has been a long time since the procedure was run, it may take a long time to complete the first
I&M
pass. Consider this before running the procedure manually.
ADD SCHEDULED EVENT
?
After confirming the validity of the AGC procedure, schedule its periodic execution. In SCREENS, select Utilities
Menu, then Event Schedules. If the AGC event record is not already in the database, Add (F2) it and set the
following field values appropriately.
Job Name....................... AGC (or any short descriptive mnemonic)
Description................ Automatic Volume Control (or any other descriptive text)
Schedule Style ........ D
After +Minutes ........ 30 (or however often the procedure needs to run; less than 15 minutes not
recommended)
Repeat on Days ........ set all days to Y
Command ......................... C:\AUDIO\AGC_TDD.BAT
31
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
WHY AGC_NMP.BAT IS NEEDED
In addition, callers may have difficulty hearing the personal greetings or name files. The use of the
AGC_NMP.BAT file will increase the volume on personal greetings and name files.
HOW TO IMPLEMENT
After confirming the validity of the AGC procedure, schedule its periodic execution. In SCREENS, select Utilities
Menu, then Scheduler. If the AGC event record is not already in the database, Add (F2) it and set the following field
values appropriately.
Job Name.............................. AGCPERS (or any short descriptive mnemonic)
Description ...................... Adjust vol for greetings/name files (or any other descriptive text)
Scheduled Time ............... 10:00 AM
Schedule Style ............... D
After +Minutes ............... 30 (or however often the procedure needs to run; less than 15 minutes not
recommended)
Repeat on Days ............... set all days to Y
Command ................................ C:\UTIL\AGC_NMP.BAT
I&M
?
32
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
GENERATING SHORT TERM DIAGNOSTIC TRACE
WHAT IS TRACE?
At times, it may be necessary to gather diagnostic information to help troubleshoot a system. This diagnostics
information is referred to as a trace. This trace data provides information about system behavior during the course
of one or more calls. The information is in ASCII form, so it can be printed or viewed on the screen. Each of the
voice system's major software components can be configured to generate trace output.
Receptionist trace, for example, records the DTMF digits pressed by a caller, the channel number, the name of each
speech file being played back, the DTMF digits dialed by the system, and much more. Notify trace provides
information about why a notification failed or why it was not even attempted.
Trace output can be directed either to the screen or a file. Note the caution below regarding the configuration of
trace output.
CAUTION!
Enabling trace output may severely affect the performance of a system. In some situations, system failure could
result if proper procedures are not followed. To generate trace over a long period of time, refer to the next section
entitled Gathering Long Term Diagnostic Trace. This section describes the procedures for gathering short term
trace information.
BEFORE BEGINNING
This procedure assumes that the problem situation can be reproduced when necessary. The basic procedure is to
enable trace output, reproduce the problem situation and quickly disable trace output. The goal is to minimize trace
output, which, in turn, minimizes its effect on system performance.
DELETE ANY EXISTING TRACE FILE
From the DOS system prompt, key in the following command.
I&M
DEL D:\TRACE.LOG
CONFIGURE TRACE OUTPUT PARAMETERS
?
To gather Receptionist trace information, in SCREENS, select Receptionist Menu, then Instance Setup. To gather
Notify trace information, in SCREENS, select Notify, then Setup Parameters.
Edit (F4) the appropriate Instance, setting the following fields as specified.
Enable Trace? N
Trace Output Device D:\TRACE.LOG
ENABLE TRACE
Key in only ONE of the following commands from any DOS prompt if trace is going to the screen.
TRACEON (use this command to enable Receptionist trace)
NTFYTON (use this command to enable Notify trace)
33
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
REPRODUCE THE PROBLEM SITUATION
After enabling trace, reproduce the problem situation. Be as quick as possible without compromising the quality of
the test to minimize the impact of trace on system performance.
DISABLE TRACE
Key in the appropriate command from any DOS prompt.
TRACEOFF (use this command to disable Receptionist trace)
NTFYTOFF (use this command to disable Notify trace)
The file, D:\TRACE.LOG contains the trace information about the problem in question. This ASCII file can be
handled just as you would any other ASCII file. It can be viewed on the screen, copied to a floppy disk and printed,
or imported into a word processing document. To view the file on the monitor, in SCREENS, select Utilities Menu,
then Task Manager. Select Task 470 (view a text file) and type in the fully qualified filename of D:\TRACE.LOG,
or, from the DOS prompt, type IVIEW D:\TRACE.LOG.
READING THE TRACE FILE
The following text is an example of a test call captured with Receptionist trace in which the operator transferred a
caller into the system using the Direct Message code of "997" followed by the User ID (221). Each line of the
Receptionist trace file contains the time, the channel number C#XX, the Instance {X} followed by the state of the
channel and any incoming ring or tones.
(09:35:27.64) C#00 {0} IDLE + tmr_2<ffff> => <(3)>
CK_DB, CPMOFF OXFR, CTMR 0, CTMR 1, CTMR 2, STMR 2=240s, wait...
<-----96 04 22----->
(09:38:41.91) C#00 {0} IDLE + RING(425) => <(1)> <[WHATTODO]>
CK_DB, CTMR 2, GOIFRING, *OFFHOOK(1)* <(25)> CPMOFF CTMR 1, SYSTMR 1=18t,
I&M
wait...
(09:38:42.46) C#00 {0} WHATTODO + DTMF=====[9] => {1st-DID}
<(5)> <[GETUSRID]>
CANCO CPMOFF CTMR 2, CTMR 1, CTMR 0, STMR 0=3s, GDIG, <[GETDIGS]> wait...
?
(09:38:42.90) C#00 {0} GETDIGS + DTMF=====[9] => <(35)>
CANCO CTMR 0, GET2ND, STMR 0=3s, wait...
(09:38:43.23) C#00 {0} GETDIGS + DTMF=====[7] => <(35)>
CANCO CTMR 0, GET2ND, <[GETUSRID]> GOTXUSER <(56)> <[MSG_997]> PFILE
{Play D:\SPCHENG\entercli.RMS} {eof 0} pause(eof)...
(09:38:43.40) C#00 {0} MSG_997 + eof-play<3:0> ->
pause(eoo)...
(09:38:43.56) C#00 {0} MSG_997 + DTMF=====[2] => <(57)>
CANCO {Can 0:0} CPMOFF CTMR 0, STMR 0=3s, GDIG, <[GETDIGS]> wait...
(09:38:43.73) C#00 {0} GETDIGS + DTMF=====[2] => <(35)>
CANCO CTMR 0, GET2ND, STMR 0=3s, wait...
(09:38:43.89) C#00 {0} GETDIGS + DTMF=====[1] => <(35)>
34
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
CANCO CTMR 0, GET2ND, <[MSG_997]> GOTXUSER {udG! 221} {0,00000221,U} {umG! 5}
{msg ok} <(58)> <[NOTAVL]> CTMR 2, SYSTMR 2=0t, pause(tmr_2)...
(09:38:44.00) C#00 {0} NOTAVL + tmr_2<ffff> =>
PSELNM, <(254)> PFILE {Play D:\SPCHENG\selected.RMS} {eof 0} pause(eof)...
(09:38:44.11) C#00 {0} NOTAVL + eof-play<1:1> ->
S6IFPNAM {+Playf D:\MESG\00000221.NAM} pause(eof)...
(09:38:48.12) C#00 {0} NOTAVL + eof-play<10:0> =>
PFILE {+Play D:\SPCHENG\val_user.RMS} *FNF* pause(eof)...
(09:38:48.23) C#00 {0} NOTAVL + eof-play<0:0> ->
GOTORTRN <()> PFILE {+Play D:\SPCHENG\leave997.RMS} pause(eof)...
(09:38:50.21) C#00 {0} NOTAVL + eof-play<2:0> =>
NEWACTS <(198)> NEWSTATE <[BLOCKING]> PFILE {+Play D:\SPCHENG\recdbeep.RMS}
pause(eof)...
(09:38:51.20) C#00 {0} BLOCKING + eof-play<1:0> =>
CMSGREC {Create D:\MESG\MESG00.SPH} RECORD {M=3 Fh=5 Max=240 Sil=4 D:=43017}
CPMREC {55,119} pause(eoo)...
(09:38:59.33) C#00 {0} BLOCKING + eoo-play =>
NEWSTATE <[TAKE_MSG]> wait...
(09:39:02.40) C#00 {0} TAKE_MSG + eor=====[D]<2:8> => *HANGUP {D}
<(194)> <[ENDCALL]>
CPMOFF EOR_CMS, {DTrim} *CLOSE* {No-GD} GOIFRAPL, GOIFMESG, NEWACTS <(205)>
PFILE {Play D:\SPCHENG\nomsglft.RMS} {eof 0} pause(eof)...
I&M
(09:39:02.62) C#00 {0} ENDCALL + disconct -> *IGNORE*
(09:39:02.62) C#00 {0} ENDCALL + eof-play<1:5> ->
GOTOGBYE <(6)> FLSHDTMF PFILE {+Play D:\SPCHENG\goodbye.RMS} {eof 10800}
?
FLSHDTMF pause(eof)...
(09:39:02.73) C#00 {0} ENDCALL + disconct -> *IGNORE*
(09:39:02.73) C#00 {0} ENDCALL + eof-play<2:1> ->
FLSHDTMF pause(eoo)...
(09:39:02.73) C#00 {0} ENDCALL + disconct -> *IGNORE*
(09:39:06.52) C#00 {0} ENDCALL + eoo-play =>
ENDCALL *ONHOOK(0)* {25 secs} {umP} {udP! 221} {clear} <[IDLE]> CTMR 2,
SYSTMR 2=0t, wait...
(09:39:06.58) C#00 {0} IDLE + tmr_2<ffff> => <(3)>
CK_DB, CPMOFF OXFR, CTMR 0, CTMR 1, CTMR 2, STMR 2=240s, wait...
35
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
The following text is an example of Notify trace. The trace file will contain information on each cycle of
notification. The @idle_wait...:30 line indicates the idle wait timer set in the Setup Parameters. Between each
@idle_wait line is information as to the notification attempts to Users. Receptionist will advise Notify of any User
that has new messages whether or not Notify is enabled for the User. Such is the case in this example with regard to
User 405. Notify is not enabled for this User, so the report that no NER record was found is not a problem. Notify
for User 437 uses the SMDI classes of service for activating and deactivating message lamps.
(Apr 25 16:54:38) n-- @idle_wait...: 30
(Apr 25 16:55:09) n-- =UMSG (ack) NEWMSG: Instance 0 Userid 405
(Apr 25 16:55:09) n-- +USER NEW-MSG for: Instance 0 Userid 405
(Apr 25 16:55:09) n-- ?NER no records found (Err:101 Fil:11)
(Apr 25 16:55:09) n-- -USER No NERs! Set Userid idle
(Apr 25 16:55:09) n-- UMSG (clr) re-write ok
(Apr 25 16:55:10) n-- @idle_wait...: 30
(Apr 25 16:55:41) n-- =UMSG (ack) NEWMSG: Instance 0 Userid 437
(Apr 25 16:55:42) n-- +USER NEW-MSG for: Instance 0 Userid 437
(Apr 25 16:55:42) n-- COS 950 - Starting Try 1 (O)
(Apr 25 16:55:42) n-- >>SMDI: 1,1,$(UDT:EXTENSION)
(Apr 25 16:55:42) n-- *SMDI Sysid=1, MWI=ON, Station=0000282
(Apr 25 16:55:42) n-- *Send was succesful
(Apr 25 16:55:42) n-- COS 950 - Action Status = 0
(Apr 25 16:55:42) n-- NER re-write ok
(Apr 25 16:55:42) n-- @after_action_wait...: 5
(Apr 25 16:55:47) n-- -USER Some still waiting. Set Userid to RETRY
I&M
(Apr 25 16:55:50) n-- +USER new-msg for: Instance 0 Userid 437
(Apr 25 16:55:50) n-- COS 950 - Maximum Tries
(Apr 25 16:55:50) n-- -USER All Maxed. Set Userid idle
?
(Apr 25 16:55:50) n-- UMSG (clr) re-write ok
(Apr 25 16:55:52) n-- @idle_wait...: 30
NOTE: Trace can be viewed from the Notify -- Parameters screen.
For assistance on interpreting any trace file, contact Teleco Technical Support.
36
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
GENERATING LONG TERM DIAGNOSTIC TRACE
Many times a problem may be reported by a customer which is an intermittent problem and cannot be reproduced at
will. In order to "capture" the problem in a trace file, it is necessary to run trace for an indefinite period of time. To
facilitate gathering diagnostic trace for a long period, a RAM drive must be created on the Perfect Voice system to
which the trace information is sent. At specified time intervals, this file is then written to the D: drive with a unique
file name. When the customer again reports the problem, the appropriate trace file may be reviewed to observe
what occurred during the call. The information needed from the customer is the time and date of the occurrence and
what happened, or did not happen, during the call.
CAUTION!
Although the RAM drive allows for information to be gathered for a long period of time, the files written to the D:
drive must be maintained. Any files older than a few days should be deleted so as to maintain sufficient storage
space for messaging. Once the problem has been identified, all the trace files and directory should be deleted as
well as reversing all of the changes made to create the RAM drive and setup long term trace.
CREATE THE RAM DRIVE
To create the RAM drive, perform Task 970 (Add ramdrive.sys to config.sys) in the Task Manager. You are
prompted to enter the ramdrive size (1024, 2048, 3072). Enter the desired size and confirm it. A reboot of the
system is required to read the changes in the file. Use Task 121 to effect a graceful shutdown of the system. Once
all of the channels have been taken off-hook by Receptionist, press the reset button on the front of the PC to reboot
the system. When the system has restarted, verify that the RAM drive was created. From any DOS prompt, type the
command E: and press the Enter key. This command should change the DOS prompt to E:\>. If the E: drive was
not created, contact Teleco Technical Support.
CONFIGURE TRACE OUTPUT PARAMETERS
To gather Receptionist trace information, in SCREENS, select Receptionist, then Parameters. Set the following
fields as specified:
I&M
Path E:\
(Note: The trace information is written to a file named TRACE.LOG.)
Enable Trace? N
Trace to Screen? N
Trace to File? Y
?
If using RAM drive, blank out the Required Disk Mins field.
To gather Notify trace information, in SCREENS, select Notify, then Parameters. Set the following fields as
specified.
Enable Trace? N (This field will be changed to Y at a later step.)
Trace Output Device E:\TRACE.LOG
NOTE: Do not run Receptionist and Notify Trace at the same time.
37
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
EDIT THE BYE.BAT FILE
To insure that trace is not disabled by anyone logging off the system remotely, edit the C:\UTIL\BYE.BAT file
using Task 460 (Edit a text file) in the Task Manager option of the Utilities Menu. Remark the line "call
C:\UTIL\TRACEOFF.BAT" by inserting the characters "rem" at the beginning of the line. If gathering Notify trace
information, remark the line "call C:\UTIL\NTFYTOFF.BAT" instead. Save the changes (F10).
SCHEDULE THE TRACE EVENT
The information gathered on the RAM drive (E:\TRACE.LOG) must be copied to the D: drive periodically
throughout the day. To copy the information automatically, an event must be added to the Scheduler queue. In
SCREENS, select Utilities Menu, then Event Schedules. Press F2 to add an event and enter the following
information in the appropriate fields and save the changes (F10).
Name = TRACE
Description = COPY OF TRACE FROM RAM DRIVE
Time = (set this to an "odd" time that will not conflict with other scheduled events, i.e. 8:11 a.m.)
Style = D
After +Minutes = (set to 60, or to 30 if it is a very large, busy system)
Repeat on Days = (set every day to "Y")
Command = C:\UTIL\TRCPY.BAT
CREATE TRACE DIRECTORY
Create a directory on the D: drive to which the trace file from the E: drive will be copied. To make this directory,
type D: and press the Enter key. Type CD\ and press the Enter key. The DOS prompt should now be D:\>. To
create the directory, at the D:\> prompt, type the command MD TRACE.
I&M
?
38
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
BEGIN TRACECOPY
Key in only ONE of the following commands from any DOS prompt.
TRACEON (use this command to enable Receptionist trace)
NTFYTON (use this command to enable Notify trace)
DISABLE TRACE
Key in ONE of the following commands from any DOS prompt.
TRACEOFF (use this command to disable Receptionist trace)
NTFYTOFF (use this command to disable Notify trace)
Be certain to also reverse all of the changes that were made above and remove the RAM drive by performing Task
980.
The files are written to D:\TRACE with unique file names which denote the month and day the file was written.
The extension of the file denotes the order in which the files are written for a specific day with the extension
beginning with .L01 and on.
TRACEabb.Lcc
a is the month (A-L=Jan-Dec)
bb is the day of the month (01-31)
cc is the numeric order of the file for all those written that day
These ASCII files can be viewed on the screen, copied to a floppy disk and printed, or imported into a word
processing document. To view a specific trace file on the monitor, in SCREENS, select Utilities Menu, then Task
Manager. Select Task 470 (View a text file) and type in the fully qualified filename.
I&M
?
39
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
DTMF AND PULSE SPEECH FILES
Perfect Voice generates DTMF tones by playing speech files which contain exact DTMF tones. By default, these
files are located in C:\AUDIO. The path to DTMF speech files is specified on the AUDIO.EXE command line in
the startup file, CONFIG.SYS. Following is a list of the DTMF speech files supplied with Perfect Voice.
$DTMF$0.SPH
$DTMF$8.SPH
$DTMF$1.SPH
$DTMF$9.SPH
$DTMF$2.SPH
$DTMF$A.SPH
$DTMF$3.SPH
$DTMF$B.SPH
$DTMF$4.SPH
$DTMF$C.SPH
$DTMF$5.SPH
$DTMF$D.SPH
$DTMF$6.SPH
$DTMF$P.SPH
$DTMF$7.SPH
$DTMF$S.SPH
The filenames indicate the DTMF tone stored. For example, $DTMF$3.SPH stores the DTMF 3 tone.
$DTMF$P.SPH and $DTMF$S.SPH represent the pound and star tones respectively.
GENERATING DTMF FILES
The DTMF files supplied with Perfect Voice should be adequate for any application. The resulting DTMF output
signals are industry-standard. However, if the need arises, Perfect Voice comes with a utility that allows you to
generate a new set of DTMF files. The program is located in C:\AUDIO and is named DTMF.EXE. Following is a
description of the command line parameters for this program.
DTMF <attenuation> <tone_duration> <silence_duration> <filepath>
attenuation ...............attenuation in dB of output files relative to maximum volume
(default is 0 dB)
tone_duration...........duration in ms of DTMF tones portion of file (default is 125 ms)
silence_duration.......duration in ms of DTMF silent portion of file (default is 131 ms)
I&M
filepath .....................path to which (default is current path)
GENERATING PULSE FILES
?
Perfect Voice also supports pulse dialing (completely different from pulse detection). The speech files used to
perform pulse dialing must be located in the same directory as the DTMF speech files (normally C:\AUDIO). Pulse
dialing files are not supplied with Perfect Voice. To obtain pulse-dialing files, run the PLSE program.
PLSE <mb_ratio> <pulse_speed> <interdigit_time> <hook_time> <flash_guard_time>
mb_ratio ...................make/break ratio percentage (default is 60%) For US systems, use
60, for non-US systems, use 67.
pulse_speed...............pulse speed in pulses per second (default is 10 pps)
interdigit_time..........inter-digit time in ms (default is 700 ms)
hook_time .................on-hook time in ms (default is 1000 ms)
flash_guard_time ....flash guard time in ms (default is same as interdigit)
40
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
USER FILE NAMING CONVENTIONS
MESSAGE FILES
Message files can be classified into the following categories.
a message left when the User is not available.
a forwarding prefix to a forwarded message or new message sent to another User or group of Users.
a message left for a User by another application.
The path in which a message file is normally stored is specified by the Messaging Path, defined in the User ID
record (usually D:\MESG).
The file name is based on the User ID. It is 8 characters, front-padded with zeros. If the message is left by a caller,
the naming convention is based on the target User ID. If the message is recorded by a User from Message
Management, the naming convention is based on the sending (or forwarding) User ID. For example, a message left
for User ID 123 by a caller has the name 00000123. A message sent by User ID 123 to another User or group of
Users also has the name 00000123, as would the prefix to a message forwarded by User ID 123. The file
extension is a 3 character alpha numeric value representing the message number.
NAME FILES
The path in which a User's name file is stored is specified by the Record Path, defined in the Instance Setup
database (usually D:\MESG). The file name is based on the User ID. It is 8 characters, front-padded with zeros. For
example, the name file for User ID 123 is 00000123. The file extension is .NAM.
PERSONAL GREETING FILES
The path in which a User's personal greeting files are stored is normally specified by the Record Path, defined
in the Instance Setup database (usually D:\MESG). However, if the PERSONAL GREETING - File Path
field in the User ID record is non-blank, that path is used.
I&M
The file name is normally based on the User ID. It is 8 characters, front-padded with zeros. For example, the file
name for User ID 123 is 00000123. However, if the PERSONAL GREETING - File Name field in the User
ID record is non-blank, that name is used.
The file extension is normally .UVX, where `X' represents the personal greeting number. For example, the file
?
containing personal greeting number 1 has a file extension of .UV1. However, if the PERSONAL GREETING -
File Name field contains an extension expression, that extension is used. Note that if this is the case, the User
does not have the option of recording more than one personal greeting.
TEMPORARY FILES
Applications do not record directly to a target file, but to a temporary file instead. If the recording is successful, the
application then renames the file appropriately. If the named file already exists, the old version is deleted first. The
temporary file name is based on the channel number and resides in the messaging directory for the Instance, usually
D:\MESG.
Perfect Voice records the spoken name of the caller in call-screening to a temporary file named SUBJxx.SPH,
where "xx" represents the channel number. For example, the recording for a caller's name on channel 3 would be
named SUBJ03.SPH. This file is deleted at the end of a call.
In a similar naming convention, Perfect Voice records a caller or User's message (including a User's personal
greeting and name recording) to a temporary file named MESGxx.SPH. This file also resides in the message path
specified in Instance Setup.
41
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
MULTILINGUAL SETUP
INTRODUCTION
Perfect Voice provides powerful multi-lingual features which allow the system to easily be configured for use with
multiple languages. Except for verifying speech recordings, it is not necessary to speak a foreign language to set up
Perfect Voice with multi-lingual capabilities.
Check with the manufacturer about the availability of foreign language system prompts.
BASIC APPROACH
The basic approach to creating the language Instance record is to use the main Instance as a template, modifying
only those parameters which are unique to the language. For example, in addition to changing the speech library,
you may wish to set the Default User to be the User ID of someone who speaks the foreign language.
Almost all of the language Instance's parameters go into effect when an alternate language or a User associated with
an alternate language is selected. The following Instance parameters do NOT go into effect after selecting an
alternate language or a User associated with an alternate language. These are all parameters from Screen 2 in the
Instance Setup database.
System Access
Hangup/Endcall
Direct Message
Direct Pers.Greet
Directory Assist
Personal Assistant
Enable Trace?
Trace Output Device
I&M
Record Path
These parameters remain the same as those in the main Instance. All other Instance parameters go into effect after
selecting an alternate language or a User associated with an alternate language. At a minimum, the Speech Path field
of the Instance Setup database should be modified to reflect the path to system prompts in that language.
?
CREATE LANGUAGE INSTANCE RECORD
Create a new Instance Setup record, using the main Instance as a template. Copy the main Instance record to the
language Instance record, using the Copy function (F6). Edit the new Instance records and consider changing at
least the following fields.
Default UserID ........ ............................Consider setting this to a User who speaks the language.
Greeting Filename . ............................Record this, using the translated script for the main system
greeting.
WhatToDo Filename . ............................Record this, using the translated script for the main system
whattodo.
Speech Prompt Path............................Set this to the path containing the foreign language versions of the
system prompt files.
Play Date Time Fmt............................Consult someone fluent with the language about the proper date
and time format.
42
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
CONFIGURE USERS
For those Users configured for a foreign language, simply set the Alternate Instance field (not the
Instance field) to the foreign language Instance number. Do not add new Users to the language Instance. Users
who speak the foreign language are still placed in the main Instance.
Note that for multi-lingual Users, it's best to set up more than one User ID, one for each language. This greatly
reduces confusion on the part of callers. Configure all the User IDs to transfer calls to the same telephone extension
number. You may also want to turn on Call Announce for the User IDs to inform the User of the caller's
language. If necessary, message from all User IDs may be pooled to a single User ID.
When a User defined for a foreign language is selected, the foreign language versions of the system prompts take
effect. This happens in the following contexts.
Context
Result
main greeting or
If the User is set up for call transfer, the caller hears "Please hold" or "Transferring to..."
whattodo
in the foreign language.
997+User ID
The prompt, "Enter the User's extension..." after selecting 997 is played in the main
Instance language. After selecting the User ID, the language switches and the caller hears
"You have selected..." in the foreign language.
999+User ID
The prompt, "Enter your User ID..." after selecting 999 is played in the main Instance
language. After selecting the User ID, the language switches and the User hears "Enter
your password..." in the foreign language. All User mode prompts remain in the foreign
language. This can be helpful when picking up messages left by speakers of the foreign
language.
Integrated Call
If the User ID indicated by the integration information is a foreign language User, the
language is automatically switched.
If the foreign language User is selected by a non-foreign language User (who is in User mode) as a member of a
I&M
distribution list or as the destination of a message, etc., the language does not switch.
CONFIGURE THE TYPE L LANGUAGE USER
This User exists in the main Instance solely to provide a mechanism for callers to switch languages without having
?
to select a User who is associated with another language. Add the language User to the main Instance as a type L
User with the Alternate Instance field set to the language Instance.
RECORD AUDIOTEXT
If the audiotext User is set up as type D, recording audiotext is very simple. Call the system and select the
appropriate type L language User ID. This changes the system speech library. Log in as the audiotext User and
record the audiotext message. Since the message is stored in the system prompt library path, the original version of
the audiotext message is not overwritten. Instead a new version is placed in the foreign language speech path.
43
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
SOLVING NOTIFICATION PROBLEMS
Many of the calls to Teleco Technical Support involve problems with notification. Listed below are some of the
more commonly reported symptoms and their possible solutions. Following the suggested solutions may expose
the problem and a call to Technical Support may not be necessary.
Symptom: Message waiting lamps will not light if User receives a new message.
Solutions:
Verify that there is a NER (Notification Event Record) for the User. If no NER exists for the User, create
a NER with the correct COS (Class of Service) to light the message lamp on the User's telephone.
Verify that the MWI on and the MWI off codes in the Telephone System parameters (screen 3 of 3) are
correct for the telephone system in use. If the codes are not correct, edit the fields and enter the correct the
codes.
Verify that Notify is enabled in the User record in Receptionist/User Directory.
Symptom: Pagers are not activated for new messages received.
Solutions:
Verify that there is a NER (Notification Event Record) for the User. If no NER exists for the User, create
a NER with the correct COS (Class of Service) to outdial to the User's pager.
Verify that there are no hyphens in the telephone number or PIN for the pager.
Verify that the COS assigned to the User is the correct type of pager COS (i.e., LOCAL for a local pager
number, LONG for a long distance pager number, etc.)
Verify that the notify port on the telephone system has access to CO lines.
Verify that the trunk access codes in the Telephone System parameters are correct for the telephone system
programming.
I&M
Dial the pager manually to verify the timing parameters in the COS action string are correct (i.e., pauses
needed after dialing the number and before entering the callback number).
While watching notify trace or the channel monitor, listen to the notify port on a test set or a digit grabber
to hear and or see exactly what is happening.
?
Verify that Notify is enabled in the User record in Receptionist/User Directory.
44
Perfect Voice
Advanced Administration
CALL TRANSFER AND FORWARDING PROBLEMS
If it appears that supervised calls are not transferred properly, or calls are not forwarded properly to the Perfect
Voice system, refer to the following paragraphs for possible solutions to the problem.
Symptom: Callers do not hear the User's personal greeting if the User does not answer.
Solutions:
If the transfer is supervised and the caller only hears ringing, then Perfect Voice detected a false answer for
some reason. Check the RCPT.CFG file in C:\RCPT to be certain it is for the correct telephone system.
An incorrect telephone configuration file may be "listening" for a ring cadence that is different from the
ring cadence on the telephone system.
If the transfer is supervised and the caller only hears ringing, check the trying dialstring in Telephone
System parameters. Many telephone systems require that an additional digit be dialed after the extension
number, "@", to toggle between voice first and tone first calls. The Perfect Voice system needs to hear
ring, busy tone on transfers. If the telephone system is programmed for voice first calls, then Perfect Voice
will not hear ring or a busy and will assume the called party answered.
If the transfer is blind and the caller only hears ringing, then the telephone is not forwarded to the Perfect
Voice system.
Symptom: Callers hear the main company greeting, not the User's personal greeting, if the User does not answer.
Solutions:
If the transfer is supervised, and the caller hears ringing before the main company greeting, then Perfect
Voice detected a false answer and the transfer recall timer on the system sent the caller back to the
originating port. Follow the steps above to clear the problem.
If the transfer is blind, and integration is used, then the phone is not forwarded or is not forwarded
properly. Verify that the call forward "steering digit" (called voice mail ID code on most telephone
I&M
systems) is programmed properly on the telephone system for that extension. If SMDI integration is being
used, check the SMDI setup parameters in SMDI Services to verify that the logical terminal number
programming and the extension length programming is correct.
?
Symptom: Callers hear the speech prompt "All circuits are busy" after an attempted transfer.
Solutions:
The Perfect Voice port does not have dialtone. Use a test set or a single line phone in the jack to verify
that there is no internal dialtone when the port goes off-hook. If there is no dialtone, the port on the single
line card is bad or the DTMF receiver card is missing or is bad. Replace the appropriate card in the
telephone system.
The Perfect Voice system is not matching the expected dialtone in the RCPT.CFG file. Verify that the
"Xfer Dialtone" field in System/Telephone System is set to 5 seconds. If it is set to 5 seconds and
continues to fail, set the field to 0. Note: This field should only be set to 0 if the telephone system will
consistently give the voice ports internal dialtone immediately following a switch hook to initiate a
transfer.
45
Appendix
I&M
?
I&M
?
CONTENTS
APPENDIX 1 - PRE-INSTALLATION WORKSHEETS ..........................................................................................1
CHANNEL SETUP ........................................................................................................................................................... 1
TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP........................................................................................................................................... 1
RECEPTIONIST AND NOTIFY SETUP................................................................................................................................ 2
"TYPICAL USER" TEMPLATE ......................................................................................................................................... 2
EVENT SCHEDULES........................................................................................................................................................ 3
STANDARD GREETING SCRIPTS ..................................................................................................................................... 3
AUDIOTEXT SCRIPTS ..................................................................................................................................................... 4
USER DIRECTORY.......................................................................................................................................................... 5
SMDI WORKSHEET.......................................................................................................................................................6
APPENDIX 2 QUICK SETUP CODES FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEMS ..............................................................7
APPENDIX 3 - VP4E II AUDIOBOARD INFORMATION ....................................................................................10
NOTICE OF FCC REGISTRATION ..................................................................................................................................10
NOTICE OF EMISSION...................................................................................................................................................10
SAFETY NOTICE...........................................................................................................................................................10
VP4E II AUDIOBOARD SPECIFICATIONS .....................................................................................................................11
SERVICING THE AUDIOBOARD .....................................................................................................................................12
APPENDIX 4 - RHETOREX BOARD INFORMATION.........................................................................................13
NOTICE OF FCC REGISTRATION ..................................................................................................................................13
NOTICE OF EMISSION...................................................................................................................................................13
SAFETY NOTICE...........................................................................................................................................................13
RHETOREX BOARD SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................................................................14
SERVICING THE AUDIOBOARD .....................................................................................................................................15
APPENDIX 5 - DIALOGIC BOARD INFORMATION ...........................................................................................16
D
I&M
IALOGIC AUDIO BOARDS ..........................................................................................................................................16
CONFIGURING DIALOGIC BOARDS...............................................................................................................................20
IF TELEPHONE SYSTEM IS NOT DEFINED IN SOFTWARE: PERFORM CALL ANALYSIS...................................................23
PBXPERT ....................................................................................................................................................................24
?
APPENDIX 6 - COMPUTER PLATFORM REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................29
OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE .................................................................................................................................29
HARD DISK REQUIREMENTS........................................................................................................................................29
MEMORY CONSIDERATIONS ........................................................................................................................................29
CONVENTIONAL MEMORY...........................................................................................................................................29
EXTENDED MEMORY (XMS).......................................................................................................................................30
EXPANDED MEMORY (EMS) .......................................................................................................................................30
GRAPHICS....................................................................................................................................................................30
PRINTER ......................................................................................................................................................................30
APPENDIX 7: WORKING REMOTELY.................................................................................................................31
FILE TRANSFERS..........................................................................................................................................................32
DISCONNECT ...............................................................................................................................................................32
REMOTE COMMUNICATION IN LINE CONNECTION........................................................................................................33
BASIC PREMISE............................................................................................................................................................33
WHEN TO USE AN IN LINE REMOTE CONNECTION ........................................................................................................33
HOW TO IMPLEMENT (SOFTWARE SETTINGS) ..............................................................................................................33
HOW TO IMPLEMENT (HARDWARE CONNECTIONS)......................................................................................................34
MAKING A REMOTE CONNECTION ................................................................................................................................34
LIMITATIONS ...............................................................................................................................................................34
APPENDIX 8: TERMINAL MODE PROGRAMMING ..........................................................................................35
SCREENS CONNECTION............................................................................................................................................... 35
SCREENS LOCAL CONNECTION ................................................................................................................................... 36
SCREENS REMOTE CONNECTION................................................................................................................................. 36
SCREENS ACCESS ....................................................................................................................................................... 37
INITIALIZE THE PORT .................................................................................................................................................. 38
INSTALLING HYPERTERMINAL PRIVATE EDITION 4.0.................................................................................................. 39
SETTING UP HYPERTERMINAL PRIVATE EDITION 4.0 ................................................................................................. 43
CREATING A REMOTE CONNECTION TEMPLATE.......................................................................................................... 43
CREATE NEW SESSION BASED ON THE REMOTE CONNECTION TEMPLATE.................................................................. 47
CREATING THE DIRECT CONNECTION TEMPLATE ....................................................................................................... 48
APPENDIX 9: RECORDING MAIN GREETINGS (UPGRADES FROM RELEASE 4.2B OR EARLIER) .. 49
COMPOSE OPEN AND CLOSE SCRIPTS........................................................................................................................... 50
RECORD GREETINGS................................................................................................................................................... 50
ADJUST VOLUME OF GREETINGS ................................................................................................................................ 50
ACTIVATE GREETINGS................................................................................................................................................ 50
EMERGENCY GREETING AND WHATTODO (UPGRADES ONLY) ................................................................................... 51
SECURITY ................................................................................................................................................................... 51
COMPOSE SCRIPTS ...................................................................................................................................................... 51
RECORD GREETINGS................................................................................................................................................... 51
TEST OPERATION........................................................................................................................................................ 51
RETURN TO NORMAL OPERATION............................................................................................................................... 51
I&M
?
I&M
?
Perfect Voice
Appendix
APPENDIX 1 - PRE-INSTALLATION WORKSHEETS
CHANNEL SETUP
Channel
Extension
Auto
Network
Outdial
Default
Language
Ring to
Number
Number
Attendant?
Channel?
Notification?
Instance
Instance
Answer on
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
I&M
TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP
Most common call transfer type for automated attendant calls.
Blind
Supervise
Supervise
Supervise
?
(indicate one)
Transfer (H)
Busy (B)
All (A)
DTMF (T)
Default number of seconds to wait during supervised transfer.
Default number of seconds to wait when notifying User by
calling at desk.
1
Perfect Voice
Appendix
RECEPTIONIST AND NOTIFY SETUP
Maximum number of messages for most Users.
Maximum message length for most Users.
Default Notify COS number for most Users.
Call-at-Desk Notify COS number for most Users.
Message lamp Notify COS number for most Users.
Pager Notify COS number for most Users.
"TYPICAL USER" TEMPLATE
Transfer type
verify type D
Call Blocking enabled? (Hold all calls)
Call-Screening enabled? (Screen all calls)
Default number of seconds to wait during supervised transfer.
Enable Call Queuing?
End call after caller leaves message?
I&M
Maximum time (in seconds) for a caller to leave a message.
Maximum number of messages allowed.
?
Allow New mailboxes to receive messages before New User Setup complete?
Enable notification?
Allow Users to list themselves on Directory Assistance?
Allow User to change Call Blocking setting?
Allow User to change Call-Screening?
2
Perfect Voice
Appendix
EVENT SCHEDULES
Open (daytime) hours of operation
Closed (nighttime) hours of operation
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
STANDARD GREETING SCRIPTS
Description Written
Script
(be sure to get all scripts approved before recording)
Daytime
greeting
Daytime
whattodo
I&M
?
Nighttime
greeting
Nighttime
whattodo
3
Perfect Voice
Appendix
AUDIOTEXT SCRIPTS
Instance User
ID Description
Script
Instance User
ID Description
Script
I&M
Instance User
ID Description
Script
?
4
Perfect Voice
Appendix
USER DIRECTORY
Inst. User
Name Department
Ext.
Call
At
Msg.
Pager Tel. #
ID
Desk?
Lamp?
I&M
?
5
Perfect Voice
Appendix
SMDI WORKSHEET
Before beginning an SMDI installation, use the table below to define the relationship. List all the Perfect Voice
integrated channel numbers in the right column and fill in the associated telephone system extension number in the
left column and assign an LTN to each channel accordingly. Note that LTN 0 is not valid; the numbering begins
with 1. Since Perfect Voice channels begin at 0, it is likely that a Perfect Voice channel number will not match its
associated LTN.
Finally, when programming the telephone system, protocol converter, or set emulator use the information from the
first two columns. The LTN and extension number relationship must match that on the worksheet.
Telephone System Extension
Logical Terminal Number (LTN)
Perfect Voice Channel Number
Number of Channel
I&M
?
6
Perfect Voice
Appendix
APPENDIX 2 QUICK SETUP CODES FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEMS
Following is a list of telephone systems that work with Perfect Voice. When specifying a new telephone system
from Quick Setup, you will need the information from the Quick Setup Code column. A current, detailed
telephone interface guide is available from Teleco's website at www.teleco.com.
Manufacturer
Model
Quick Setup Code
CENTREX Centranet
STD-CTRX
CENTREX Centrex
STD-CTRX
CENTREX Centron
STD-CTRX
CENTREX Essex
STD-CTRX
COMDIAL Comdial
1432
CMD-1410
COMDIAL Comdial
2232
CMD-2232
COMDIAL Comdial
2264
CMD-2264
COMDIAL Comdial
2296
CMD-2264
COMDIAL Comdial
2000
STD-1855*
COMDIAL
Comdial ExecuTech XE/XL
CMD-ETXE
COMDIAL
Impact (or DigiTech, or DXP)
CMD-DXP
COMDIAL
Comdial DSU
CMD-DSU
CORTELCO
ITT ECS-56, ECS-136
ITT-ECS
CORTELCO
ITT System 3100
ITT-3100
CORTELCO
Millennium (and Compact)
ITT-3100
CORTELCO SR1000
SSS-SR10
EAGLE Eagle
One
EGL-ONE
ERICSSON MD110
ERC-MD11
ERICSSON Prodigy
ERC-PROD
EXECUTONE Encore
CX-408/816
CON-EXC1
EXECUTONE Encore
CX-1832/3672 CON-EXC1
EXECUTONE Encore
CX-36/112
CON-EXC1
EXECUTONE Isoetec
18,24,36,66,96,120
ISO-EZ96
EXECUTONE
Isoetec IDS 108,228,432,648
IS0-228
I&M
GTE/FUJITSU
F9600S,VS,ES, MS/M, XL
FUJ-9600
GTE/FUJITSU
Focus 960E, Focus 960S
FUJ-F960
GTE/FUJITSU Focus100
FUJ-F100
GTE/FUJITSU SCBS
FUJ-STAR
GTE/FUJITSU
Starlog I, II
FUJ-STAR
?
GTE/FIJITSU
Focus 1, 11 & 111
FUJ-I123
*The integration file is not available for this selection.
7
Perfect Voice
Appendix
Manufacturer
Model
Quick Setup Code
HARRIS
20-20 MAP,M,L/LH, LX
HAR-2020
INTECOM IBX
S/80
ICM-S80
IWATSU ZT-D
816,824/1632,2464
IWA-ZTD
IWATSU
Omega IV/EX 616,824/1648,
IWA-2464
1232/2464
IWATSU ADIX,
ADIX-M
IWA-ADIX
KANDA EKN-616,
2464
KAN-2464
LUCENT
Definity 1
LUC-SY75
LUCENT
Definity 2
LUC-SY85
LUCENT
Definity 3
LUC-SY85
LUCENT
Dimension
LUC-2000
LUCENT
Merlin 1030 & 3070
LUC-MLII
LUCENT
Merlin II
LUC-MLII
LUCENT
Merlin Legend
LUC-LEGD
LUCENT
Partner
LUC-PTNR
LUCENT
Partner II
LUC-PTNR
LUCENT
System 25
LUC-SY25
LUCENT
System 75
LUC-SY75
LUCENT
System 85
LUC-SY85
MACROTEL MT-80D
MAC-MD80
MACROTEL MTX-32x128
MAC-MTX
MITEL
Panther II 820,1032/1632, 2064
MTL-PTHR
MITEL SX5,10
MTL-SX1
MITEL SX50
MTL-SX50
MITEL SX100,200
MTL-SX2
MITEL SX200D
ONS
MTL-SX1D
MITEL SX200D
MTL-SX1D
MITEL
SX200 Light ONS
MTL-SX1D
MITEL SX200
Light
MTL-SX1D
MITEL SX2000
MTL-SX2
NAKAYO
DKX 32, 38
NAK-DKX
I&M
NEC Electra
1648 NEC-1648
NEC
Electra Mark II
NEC-MKII
NEC
Electra Professional I
NEC-EPRO
NEC
Electra Professional II
NEC-EPRO
NEC Neax
1400
NEC-NX14
?
NEC 2000
IVS
NEC-NX14
NEC
2000 IVS
NEC-NX24
NEC Neax
2400
NEC-NX24
NITSUKO (TIE)
Onyx VS, III, IV
TIE-ONYX
NITSUKO 124I/384I
NTK-124I
NORTEL Norstar
NOR-NORS
NORTEL Meridian
1
NOR-SL1
NORTEL Meridian
SL-1
NOR-SL1
NORTEL Meridian
SL-1
NOR-SL1
NORTEL SL-100
NOR-S100
PANASONIC KX-T30810,
KX-T61610 PAN-KXT
PANASONIC KX-T123211D
PAN-KXT
PANASONIC KX-TD1232
PAN-DGTL
PANASONIC DBS
PAN-DBS
SAMSUNG 56ex/120mx
PRO-STAR
SAMSUNG Prostar
DCS
PRO-STAR
SIEMENS BCS
ROLM 8000 Series CBX
RLM-CBX
SIEMENS BCS
ROLM 9000/9751 Series CBX
RLM-CBX or RLM-9751
8
Perfect Voice
Appendix
Manufacturer
Model
Quick Setup Code
SIEMENS BCS
ROLM 9751 Release 9006I
RLM-9751
SIEMENS BCS
ROLM 9200 BCS (210 & 230)
RLM-9200
SIEMENS BCS
ROLM 9720 (Redwood)
RLM-9200
SIEMENS BCS
SD 192
SIE-S192
SIEMENS BCS
SD 80
SIE-SD80
SIEMENS BCS
EMS 601
SIE-601
SPRINT Answer
ITT-3100
SPRINT
Premier ESP 612/1224/2460
PRM-ESP
SRX System
One
SRX-V43
SUN MOON STAR
DKTS 12/32/64, mini and Plus
SMS-DKTS
TADIRAN Coral
I/II/III
TAD-CORL
TELRAD
Key bx 816/2464
TEL-KYBX
TEL-KYBC
TELRAD Digital
KeyBx
TEL-DKBX
TELRAD Digital
400/9600
TEL-DGTL
TOSHIBA
Strata S, VI, XII and XX
TOS-STII
TOSHIBA
Strata Se, Vie, XIIe and Xxe
TOS-STII
TOSHIBA
Strata DK 24, 56, 96
TOS-STDK
TOSHIBA
Strata DK8, DK16
TOS-STDK
TOSHIBA
Strata DK280, DK16e
TOS-STDK
TOSHIBA Strata
DK280
TOS-STDK
TOSHIBA
Perception I, II
TOS-PIIV or TOS-PIIE
TOSHIBA
Perception e, ex
TOS-PIIV or TOS-PIIE
VODAVI Starplus
VOD-STAR
WALKER
Poets, Poets Plus
WKR-POET
WIN 24D
WIN-124D
WIN 36D
WIN-124D
WIN 100D
WIN-100D
I&M
?
9
Perfect Voice
Appendix
APPENDIX 3 - VP4E II AUDIOBOARD INFORMATION
NOTICE OF FCC REGISTRATION
The Perfect Voice Audioboard is registered with the Federal Communications Commission (FCC Part 68) which
places the following restrictions on its use:
1. The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has established rules that permit this device to be directly
connected to the telephone network. Standardized jacks are used for these connections. This equipment should
not be used on party lines or coin lines.
2. If this device is malfunctioning, it may also be causing harm to the telephone network; this device should be
disconnected until the source of the problem can be determined and until repair has been made. If this is not
done, the telephone company may temporarily disconnect service.
3. The telephone company may make changes in its technical operations and procedures; if such changes affect
the compatibility or use of this device, the telephone company is required to give adequate notice of the
changes. You will be advised of your rights to file a complaint with the FCC.
4. If the telephone company requests information on what equipment is connected to their lines, inform them of:
a. The telephone number this unit is connected to
b. The ringer equivalence number
c. The .FCC Registration number
Items 'b' and 'c' are indicated on the label.
The ringer equivalence (REN) is used to determine how many devices can be connected to your telephone
line. In most areas, the sum of the RENs of all devices on any single line should not exceed five (5.0). If
too many devices are attached, they may not ring properly.
5. In the event of equipment malfunction, all repairs should be performed by our Company or an authorized
agent. It is the responsibility of users requiring service to report the need for service to our Company or to one
of our authorized agents.
NOTICE OF EMISSION
I&M
FCC Part 15: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
?
Warning: Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause
harmful interference and the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
SAFETY NOTICE
Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations.
Never touch un-insulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at
the network interface.
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
10
Perfect Voice
Appendix
VP4E II AUDIOBOARD SPECIFICATIONS
Hardware Compatibility
IBM PC/AT or 100% compatible hard disk system.
Software Compatibility
Requires device driver supplied with all Perfect Voice software products.
Connectors
Four RJ11C jacks for direct connection to telephone network.
On-Board Memory
256 kB of dual ported RAM, addressable through fixed 8K byte window.
Upper Memory Address
CC00-CDFF or CE00-CFFF
Range
Disk Usage
Approximately two minutes of speech per megabyte.
I/O Address (Hex)
0x35n
Hardware Interrupts
Configurable as IRQ2, IRQ3, IRQ5, or IRQ7
Power
1.5 amps @ +5 volts
Bus Loading
2
Bus Interface
8 bit
Digitizing Technique
64K bit law PCM encoding/decoding, no compression.
Physical
Single, full sized printed circuit board compatible with IBM standards.
Environmental
Temperature and humidity compatible with IBM standards.
Telephone Lines
4 independent and simultaneous channels per board, expandable to 40 per bus.
Telephone Interface
2-wire loop start.
I&M
Output Level
-9 dBm maximum.
Insertion Loss
0.75 dB
?
Fidelity
-35dBMO intermodulation distortion @ 72 dB SNR.
Load Number
6
Dialing
DTMF
DTMF Tone Output
125 milliseconds.
Length
DTMF Pause Output
125 milliseconds.
Length
DTMF Tone Receive
50 milliseconds minimum (driver configurable)
Length
DTMF Tone Receive
50 milliseconds minimum.
Spacing
DTMF Tone Receiving
-45 dBm (may vary with some telephone systems)
Level
11
Perfect Voice
Appendix
SERVICING THE AUDIOBOARD
If you think the audioboard requires servicing, call Technical Support. If it is determined that there is a problem
with the audioboard, you will receive a Return Materials Authorization (RMA) Number. This number authorizes
the return of product for warranty and repair service. Boards returned without an RMA Number will not be
accepted.
To receive an RMA number, determine the board Serial Number and Version Number. These numbers are located
on a label on the audioboard as shown in the diagram below. When you receive a replacement board, verify the
jumper settings based on the following table:
VP4E II Board Address Jumper Configuration
Board Absolute I/O
1-8 2-7 3-6 4-5 5-6
Channels
Address
(null)
0 0-3
0x35F
X
1 4-7
0x35E
X
2 8-11
0x35D
X
3 12-15
0x35C
X X
4 16-19
0x35B
X
5 20-23
0x35A
X X
VP4E11-A Audioboard
5
6
7
8
4
3
2
1
I&M
T O P VIEW
?
KV04JUL95
Channel 03
Channel 02
Serial/Version
Num ber S ticker
Channel 01
Serial Num ber
7 8 9
M ODEL:VP 4E
OS28EB 1193
Channel 00
V ersion Num ber
CV 11M A R94
SIDE VIEW
IRQ
Jumper 7 = IRQ 7
Jumper 8 = IRQ 5
Jumper 9 = IRQ 2 or 3
12
Perfect Voice
Appendix
APPENDIX 4 - RHETOREX BOARD INFORMATION
NOTICE OF FCC REGISTRATION
The Rhetorex board is registered with the Federal Communications Commission (FCC Part 68) which places the
following restrictions on its use:
1. The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has established rules that permit this device to be
directly connected to the telephone network. Standardized jacks are used for these connections. This
equipment should not be used on party lines or coin lines.
2. If this device is malfunctioning, it may also be causing harm to the telephone network; this device should
be disconnected until the source of the problem can be determined and until repair has been made. If this
is not done, the telephone company may temporarily disconnect service.
3. The telephone company may make changes in its technical operations and procedures; if such changes
affect the compatibility or use of this device, the telephone company is required to give adequate notice of
the changes. You will be advised of your rights to file a complaint with the FCC.
4. If the telephone company requests information on what equipment is connected to their lines, inform them
of:
a. The telephone number this unit is connected to
b. The ringer equivalence number
c. The FCC Registration number
Items 'b' and 'c' are indicated on the label.
The ringer equivalence (REN) is used to determine how many devices can be connected to your telephone
line. In most areas, the sum of the RENs of all devices on any single line should not exceed five (5.0). If
too many devices are attached, they may not ring properly.
5. In the event of equipment malfunction, all repairs should be performed by our Company or an authorized
agent. It is the responsibility of users requiring service to report the need for service to our Company or to
one of our authorized agents.
I&M
NOTICE OF EMISSION
FCC Part 15: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
?
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Warning: Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause
harmful interference and the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
SAFETY NOTICE
Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations.
Never touch un-insulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at
the network interface.
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
13
Perfect Voice
Appendix
RHETOREX BOARD SPECIFICATIONS
Hardware Compatibility
IBM PC/AT or 100% compatible hard disk system.
Software Compatibility
Requires device driver supplied with all Perfect Voice software products.
Connectors
Two RJ14 jacks for direct connection to telephone network.
Upper Memory Address
Default is CC00-CCFF; Varies by board type, addressable through fixed 4kb
Range
window.
Disk Usage
Approximately two minutes of speech per megabyte.
I/O Address (Hex)
0x30n
Hardware Interrupts
Configurable as IRQ2, IRQ3, IRQ5, or IRQ7
Power
+12V 30mA, 12V 30mA, +5V 900mA, and 5V 0A
Bus Loading
2
Bus Interface
8 bit ISA
Digitizing Technique
64K bit law PCM encoding/decoding, no compression.
Physical
Single, half sized printed circuit board compatible with IBM standards.
Environmental
Temperature and humidity compatible with IBM standards.
Telephone Lines
2 or 4 independent and simultaneous channels per board, expandable to 40 per bus.
Telephone Interface
2-wire loop start.
Output Level
-9 dBm maximum.
I&M
Insertion Loss
0.75 dB
Impedance
600 ohm nominal
?
Fidelity
-35dBMO intermodulation distortion @ 72 dB SNR.
Load Number
6
Dialing
DTMF
DTMF Tone Output
125 milliseconds.
Length
DTMF Pause Output
125 milliseconds.
Length
DTMF Tone Receive
50 milliseconds minimum (driver configurable)
Length
DTMF Tone Receive
50 milliseconds minimum.
Spacing
DTMF Tone Receiving
-45 dBm (may vary with some telephone systems)
Level
14
Perfect Voice
Appendix
SERVICING THE AUDIOBOARD
If you think the audioboard requires servicing, call Technical Support. If it is determined that there is a problem
with the audioboard, you will receive a Return Materials Authorization (RMA) Number. This number authorizes
the return of product for warranty and repair service. Boards returned without an RMA Number will not be
accepted.
To receive an RMA number, determine the board Serial Number and Version Number. These numbers are located
on a label on the audioboard as shown in the diagram below. When you receive a replacement board, verify the
jumper settings based on the following table:
Rhetorex Board Address Jumper Configuration
Board Absolute I/O
Row
Row
Row
Row
Channels
Address
1
2
4
8
0 0-3 300
X X X X
1 4-7 301
X
X
X
2 8-11 302
X
X X
3 12-15 303
X
X
4 16-19 304
X X
X
5 20-23 305
X
X
The above open and closed jumper settings are for the 432 and 464 Rhetorex boards only. The X represents a
jumper that should be closed within the first four rows. Rows 16 through 128 must always be closed. Rows 256
and 512 must always be open.
Rhetorex Board
I&M
Line 1
Line 0
?
EJ1
Line 1
Line 3
1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512
Line 2
OPEN
Line 3
CLOSED
ADDRESS ALWAYS ALWAYS
CLOSED OPEN
SIDE VIEW
15
Perfect Voice
Appendix
APPENDIX 5 - DIALOGIC BOARD INFORMATION
The Dialogic boards discussed in this section include the following models: D/41D, D/42-SX, D/42-SL, and D/42-
NS. All boards have the same basic features described in the D/41D Board Description. The other three boards
have special features that are unique to each board. These features are outlined in the description for each
individual board.
DIALOGIC AUDIO BOARDS
D/4xD Board Description
D/4xD board includes the following capabilities on up to 4 channels:
Record, digitize, and compress audio in real time.
Play back previously recorded files.
Generate and detect DTMF tones.
Initiate and receive calls through the loop start telephone interface.
Perform Call Progress Analysis for outbound dialing.
On the D/4xD board, the factory defaults are as follows:
Board Component
Function
Default
JP5,JP6
Base
Memory
Address
Segment D000H
SW1 Offset
Address
0000H
I&M
JP1
Interrupt Level
IRQ 3
JP7
Multiple
Audio
Board
Installation
Single
?
NOTE: For information regarding configuration of jumpers and switches, please see the detailed description of
each function later in this chapter. All Dialogic boards contain the same Board Components.
P2
P3
JP8
DIALOGIC
JP6 JP5
Address switch
SW1
D/4xD
JP1
JP7
Dialogic D/4xD Audio Board
16
Perfect Voice
Appendix
D/42-SX Board Description
D/42-SX is specifically designed to connect directly to a MITEL SUPERSET Line Circuit Card in a MITEL PBX.
The D42-SX board has all the capabilities as the D/4xD board, plus additional capabilities to access enhanced PBX
features:
Call transfer / conference.
Turn on, off, or toggle telephone message waiting indicators.
Call back request.
Calling number identification (Calling Number ID).
On the D/42-SX board, the factory defaults are as follows:
Board Component
Function
Default
JP5,JP6
Base
Memory
Address
Segment D000H
SW1 Offset
Address
0000H
JP1
Interrupt Level
IRQ 2
JP7
Multiple
Audio
Board
Installation
Single
NOTE: For information regarding configuration of jumpers and switches, please see detailed description of each
Function later in this chapter. All Dialogic boards contain the same Board Components.
DIALOGIC
I&M
D/42-SX
Address switch
JP6 JP5
SW1
?
JP1
JP7
Dialogic D/42-SX Audio Board
17
Perfect Voice
Appendix
D/42-SL Board Description
D/42-SL is specifically designed to connect directly to a NORTHERN TELECOM PBX through a line circuit card.
The D42-SL board has all the capabilities as the D/4xD board, plus additional capabilities to access enhanced PBX
features:
Call transfer.
Turn telephone message waiting indicators on or off.
Calling number identification (Calling Number ID).
On the D/42-SL board, the factory defaults are as follows:
Board Component
Function
Default
JP5,JP6
Base
Memory
Address
Segment D000H
SW1 Offset
Address
0000H
JP1
Interrupt Level
IRQ 2
JP7
Multiple
Audio
Board
Installation
Single
NOTE: For information regarding configuration of jumpers and switches, please see detailed description of each
Function later in this chapter. All Dialogic boards contain the same Board Components.
DIALOGIC
D/42-SL
Address switch
I&M
JP6 JP5
SW1
JP1
JP7
?
Dialogic D/42-SL Audio Board
18
Perfect Voice
Appendix
D/42-NS Board Description
D/42-NS is specifically designed to connect directly to a NORTHERN TELECOM NORSTAR KSU Software
release DR5. The D42-SL board has all the capabilities as the D/4xD board, plus additional capabilities to access
enhanced PBX features:
Call transfer.
Turn telephone message waiting indicators on or off.
Receive called party identification.
Receive positive disconnect supervision
On the D/42-NS board, the factory defaults are as follows:
Board Component
Function
Default
JP5,JP6
Base
Memory
Address
Segment D000H
SW1 Offset
Address
0000H
JP1
Interrupt Level
IRQ 3
JP7
Multiple
Audio
Board
Installation
Single
NOTE: For information regarding configuration of jumpers and switches, please see detailed description of each
Function later in this chapter. All Dialogic boards contain the same Board Components.
Address switch
SW1
I&M
DIALOGIC
D/42-NS
JP1, JP2, JP3, JP4
?
Dialogic D/42-NS Audio Board
19
Perfect Voice
Appendix
CONFIGURING DIALOGIC BOARDS
The jumpers JP1, JP5, JP6, JP7 and SW1 dip switch must be configured before the Dialogic board(s) is installed.
See relative positions of the switches and jumpers below.
Setting the Interrupt Level (JP1)
Find the JP1 jumper block from the Board Diagrams above. To configure the jumper block, choose from interrupt
levels 2 through 7. Recommended levels are 3, 5, and 7. JP1 should be set to IRQ5. Typically, the interrupt levels
for a PC are set as follows:
IRQ - 3 = COM1
IRQ - 4 = COM2
IRQ - 5 = LPT2
IRQ - 6 = FLOPPY DISK DRIVE
IRQ - 7 = LPT1
NOTE: Make note of the IRQ settings selected because this information is needed during the installation of
Perfect Voice software.
The IRQ settings are positioned from left to right, 2 being the left-most position. Here is an example of an
interrupt level 7 setting:
I&M
2
3
4
5
6
7
Interrupt Setting on Jumper JP1
?
20
Perfect Voice
Appendix
Setting the Base Memory Address (JP5 and JP6)
Select the base memory address segment by installing (Closed) or removing (Open) jumpers JP5 and JP6. All
Dialogic audio boards have a factory default setting of D000H. The other choices of address segments include the
A000H segment, which is typically used for VGA, and the C000H segment. Refer to the table below for
appropriate base memory jumper settings.
NOTE: Do not change the Default factory setting of D000H unless one of the following conditions apply:
More than eight (8) D/4xD boards are installed in the PC.
Other device drivers are already using the D000H segment.
Jumper
JP5
Jumper
JP6
Base
Memory
Address
Open Open D000H
(Default)
Closed
Open A000H
Open Closed
C000H
Base Memory Address Jumper Settings
Multiple Audio Board Installation (JP7)
Use the following guidelines to determine whether the Interrupt Termination jumper, JP7, should be installed
(closed) or removed (open):
If ONLY one (1) Dialogic audio board will be installed in the PC, jumper JP7 MUST be closed.
If more than one (1) Dialogic audio board will be installed in the PC, jumper JP7 MUST be open on
all boards except the first board. This means that only one (1) board will have jumper JP7 installed.
I&M
?
21
Perfect Voice
Appendix
Setting the Offset Address (SW1)
The Dialogic board and the PC communicate with each other through a shared memory block that sits in the
memory address of the PC. Altering the first three dip switches of SW1 may modify the physical address offset
where the memory block is located. The SW1 switch on the Dialogic board has four dip switches. Refer to the
specific board diagram earlier in this section to locate the SW1 dip switch.
Switch Position
Board# Offset Address-SW1 BASE(Hex)
1 0000 (Factory
Setting)
2 2000
3 4000
4 6000
5 8000
6 A000
7
C000 (Perfect Voice setting)
8 E000
First three positions of SW1 dip switch
I&M
The fourth position of the SW1 dip switch must always be configured "off-hook" as shown below.
tion Line State
?
"on-hook" (no
answer)
"off-hook" (busy)
Fourth position of SW1 dip switch
22
Perfect Voice
Appendix
IF TELEPHONE SYSTEM IS NOT DEFINED IN SOFTWARE: PERFORM CALL ANALYSIS
Skip this section and the PBXpert section if the telephone system was defined in the Perfect Voice software.
The following procedure is a `Quick-Start' procedure that loads the diagnostic software and runs all tests on the
Dialogic audio boards installed in the PC. For a more in-depth explanation of the D40CHK diagnostic software,
please refer to the Dialogic Manuals.
Be sure that the following has been completed before running D40CHK:
All audio boards have been configured properly and installed in the PC.
Perfect Voice software has been installed.
1. From the C:\WINVM> prompt, load the Dialogic driver by typing D40DRV and press <Enter>.
2. Load the diagnostic software by typing D40CHK and press <Enter>.
3. Chose the boards, test selections, and the test options. Use the arrow keys on the numeric keypad to move
the cursor and use the spacebar to enable or disable menu items (Enabled items have a "" next to them).
4. Move the cursor to START DIAGNOSTICS and press <Enter>.
NOTE: Do NOT select Loopback Test from the test selection menu unless you have a solid understanding of the
hardware required for this test. For more information on the Loopback Test, refer to the Dialogic Manual.
I&M
?
23
Perfect Voice
Appendix
PBXPERT
PBXpert is a learning tool that enables a Dialogic audio board to "listen" to call progress tones, measure their
frequency and cadence (called tone definitions), and store these measured values in a tone set. A tone set is a group
of five tone definitions for dial, ringback, busy, reorder, and disconnect with a specified name. After a tone set is
learned, it can be saved by itself in a tone set file (TSF), or included with other existing tone set from another TSF.
PBXpert by Dialogic, uses two extensions on the telephone system for testing. Be sure that the extensions are
straight connections to the telephone system with absolutely no features. These features include: Hunt (or
Rollover) Groups, which means if the extension is busy the switch will hunt (or rollover) for the next available
extension; Call Forwarding, which is a feature offered by telephone companies, where a call can be transferred to
another telephone number; Call Waiting, another feature offered by the telephone company, which does not
produce a busy signal for the caller and produces a new tone for the called party; or any Auto Answer features
including answering machines or other answering services. The telephone lines should not be in use by any other
calls for the duration of the call analysis.
Load the Audio Drivers with a G150 Switch:
In order to use PBXpert to learn the telephone systems progress tones, a Dialogic audio board must be installed and
the drivers loaded. Please note that in order to run the PBXpert, the audio drivers must be loaded with a -G150
switch. To do this:
Edit the d40loadr.bat file located in the WINVM directory. Set the D40DRV line to:
d40drv -i66 -h5 -sd000/d1ff -g150
where:
d40drv is the driver for the Dialogic audio board
-i66 specifies the entry point
-h5 specifies the interrupt level of the audio board
-sd000/d1ff specifies the memory segment that the audio board uses for its TSR programs
I&M
NOTE: One 4-Port board requires 1FFh of memory to load the TSRs; hence, the address shown
above {d000/d1ff) is enough memory to load one 4-Port board and the -g150 must be added in order
to run PBXpert.
?
24
Perfect Voice
Appendix
Start PBXpert:
Once the audio board drivers have been loaded, start PBXpert.
Type PBXPERT at the WINVM prompt and press <Enter>. A screen appears similar to the one shown
below.
PBXpert Main Screen
From the Config menu, select Setup. Verify IRQ setting is 5.
From the File menu, select "New".
From the Learn menu, select "Learn New".
Enter the Make and Model of the telephone system tones to learn. In this example, it is the Mitel SX2000
telephone system.
I&M
?
Tone Set Name
Now it is required to enter information that the PBXpert needs to learn the telephone system call progress tones.
PBXpert Learn Screen
25
Perfect Voice
Appendix
The definitions of the PBXpert Learn Screen fields are listed below. The default values for PBXpert, shown above,
should be adequate for most telephone systems. The only information that you should need to enter is the Dialing
Prefix/Extension and Phone Number fields. If dialing internally, only the Dialing Prefix/Extension should need
to be entered. Enter the extension number connected to port-2.
Dialing Prefix/Extension
This field contains any characters that must precede a telephone number, such as a long distance dialing prefix
(e.g., "1"). You may also use this field to enter an extension to dial when learning PBX tones. The dialed
extension is connected to the Inbound Channel. If a PBX extension is entered in this field, do not enter a
Phone Number.
Phone Number
This field contains the telephone number to dial when learning network tones. The dialed number is the
telephone number of the line connected to the Inbound Channel.
Outbound Channel (learning channel)
This field contains the channel number of the audio board performing the learning. This channel calls the
Inbound Channel.
Inbound Channel (controlling channel)
This field contains the channel number of the audio board used to set up the required tone scenarios on the
PBX or network. This channel is called by the Outbound Channel.
Reorder Dial String
This field contains characters that cause the PBX or network to generate a reorder tone. If a reorder dial string
is not included, do not select Learn Reorder Tone.
Merge Current Definitions
This parameter is only valid during RE-LEARN. If YES is selected, the current tone definitions will be
combined with the re-learned tone definitions. If NO is selected, the current tone definitions will be
overwritten with the re-learned tone definitions.
I&M
Learn Discnct on Inbound/Outbound Channel
This parameter is only valid if the disconnect tone was selected. The extension that receives the disconnect
differs among PBX's.
Select OUTBOUND if the calling extension (outbound channel) receives a disconnect when the
?
called extension (inbound channel) hangs up.
Select INBOUND if the called extension (inbound channel) receives the disconnect when the calling
extension (outbound channel) hangs up.
NOTE: For the fast busy, the system may have to dial 9 for an outside line, and then dial an invalid code to
generate the fast busy. The default invalid code is **.
Be sure that the telephone extensions that are connected to the Dialogic audio board Ports 1 and 2 do not have any
features programmed. Turn off any call forwarding features for these extensions during the learning process.
26
Perfect Voice
Appendix
Once all of the required information has been entered, select START from the PBXpert Learn screen.
When the learning is complete, save the settings and return to the previous menu, shown below. The
newly learned call progress tones appear in the Tone Set window.
Tone Set for the Newly Learned Call Progress Tones.
From the Tone Set menu, select VIEW to see the values of the call progress tones that were just learned.
Selecting MODIFY from the Tone Set menu allows you to change any of the values that you see on the
screen. Both screens look similar to the one shown below.
I&M
?
Tone Set View Screen
27
Perfect Voice
Appendix
From the main menu, highlight the Mitel SX2000 (the name given in the Make and Model line in the Tone
Set window) and press <Enter>. You should now see the telephone system name in the Consolidated Sets
window.
Non-consolidated Tone Set
Notice that the "Consolidated Sets" window says Not Consolidated at the bottom of the window.
Select "Consolidate" from the Tone Set menu and press <Enter>. The program may ask you to overwrite.
Select LOCAL table to be overwritten and give the file a name. (your_file_name.tsf). You notice that the
word Consolidated now appears at the bottom of the Consolidated Set window.
From the File menu, select SAVE to save changes and then exit.
NOTE: If your telephone system produces multiple fast busy tones, you can create multiple Tone Sets that can be
consolidated into one TSF.
I&M
Edit the Autoexec.bat file:
You must edit the D40LOADR.BAT file and change the TSF filename that is added.
?
Fix the following line in D40LOADR.BAT:
TONEDNLD -fyour_file_name.tsf -h5
TONEDNLD is the downloading utility file name, -f specifies the tone file to download to the audio board, and -
h5 specifies the interrupt that the audio board is using.
Once the file has been edited and saved, you should shutdown your computer and restart Perfect Voice.
28
Perfect Voice
Appendix
APPENDIX 6 - COMPUTER PLATFORM REQUIREMENTS
The Perfect Voice product is adaptable to a number of computer configurations. A proper configuration is one
which meets a set of strict requirements, determined by the manufacturer. In addition to meeting the requirements
"on paper", the Perfect Voice platform must go through extended testing to ensure the compatibility with the
audioboard, device driver, and application software. Finally, reliability of the platform, a sometimes difficult
requirement to meet, must be ensured.
At best, attempts to save money by ignoring these requirements usually results in a system that does not provide
adequate performance for the customer. Purchasing a turnkey solution eliminates any platform compatibility issues
and ensures that you receive the most performance for the money.
OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE
Perfect Voice requires MS-DOS Version 6.22 or higher. The operating system must be on the hard disk in
subdirectory C:\DOS.
HARD DISK REQUIREMENTS
The hard disk is the heart of any Perfect Voice system and is can be the limiting factor in the performance of the
system. For systems with more channels, faster seek time and transfer rate are recommended. For systems that
require a lot of message storage, a larger storage capacity is required. Most state-of-the-art drives available today
provide more than adequate performance for most systems. Note that processor speed also can significantly affect
hard disk performance.
The drive must be partitioned with no less than 40 Megabytes on the C: partition. The rest of the space should be
allocated to the D: partition. The C: partition is used to store the operating system, application software, database
files, and other utilities. The D: partition is used to store system speech files, User messages, personal messages,
audiotext speech, and other site-specific speech files. Perfect Voice speech requires 8000 bytes per second of
speech. This translates roughly to 2 minutes of speech storage for each Megabyte of messaging disk space. Note
the amount of available message time is limited both by disk size and key configuration. Increasing hard drive size
does not automatically increase available message time. Additional message allocation space must be configured.
I&M
MEMORY CONSIDERATIONS
Perfect Voice requires a minimum of 4 MB of total random access memory (RAM). New systems ship with 1MB
of memory per port, up to 16 MB. For example, a 12 port system will include 12 MB of RAM. The 4 MB
?
requirement includes 640 kB of conventional memory with the remainder being used for extended memory (XMS).
Increasing the total RAM on a system results in more XMS being available for disk caching, which, in turn, can
result in increased performance.
CONVENTIONAL MEMORY
Conventional memory refers to the actual memory available to DOS for programs. The amount of physical memory
of most personal computers far exceeds the 640 kilobyte (kB) limit inherent to DOS. Problems with conventional
memory are related more to the number of applications competing for that 640 kB space. If Perfect Voice is run on
a platform with no other applications, this memory constraint should not be a problem. Running Perfect Voice with
other applications is not recommended, unless you are fully aware of and able to deal with possible system
resource conflicts and contentions. Loading peripheral software without the consent of Technical Support can
result in warranty restrictions.
29
Perfect Voice
Appendix
EXTENDED MEMORY (XMS)
At least 3 MB of extended memory is required for use by the disk caching and Audioforms software. Some
applications may require less, although performance may suffer.
EXPANDED MEMORY (EMS)
Perfect Voice does not utilize EMS in its operation. Disabling EMS on any Perfect Voice system may free up RAM
for use as XMS, potentially increasing system performance.
GRAPHICS
Perfect Voice software does not utilize graphics display beyond text mode, so nothing more than a monochrome or
CGA monitor and controller are required. An EGA, VGA, or SVGA monitor and controller may be used as long
as there are no interrupt or upper memory conflicts with Perfect Voice or any other peripherals installed on the
system. Refer to the comments in the CONFIG.SYS file for more information on using EGA, VGA or SVGA
monitors.
PRINTER
Perfect Voice does not require a printer, although many customers like to have one for printing reports.
IMPORTANT: If the system has a hardware key and a printer is going to be used, it must remain online at all
times. Problems may arise if the printer runs out of paper or is powered off while printing from the Perfect Voice
system. The Perfect Voice computer may halt all operations, including call processing until the problem is
corrected.
I&M
?
30
Perfect Voice
Appendix
APPENDIX 7: WORKING REMOTELY
Connecting to a remote site running the Klinic software allows for total emulation of the host keyboard.
To emulate the Function key strokes on the host computer, extended keys must be setup on the remote PC. All
extended keystrokes, including the Control and Alt and Shifted versions of most keys can be executed on the
remote system by entering special sequences of standard ASCII characters. This sequence always begins with an
opening curly brace "{" and ends with a closing curly brace "}". For example, to enter a PageDown on the remote
system, enter {PGDN}. Upon receipt of the closing curly brace, Klinic "presses" the appropriate key on the
remote system.
The Control version of keys is created by simply adding a "C" at the beginning of the command. Therefore,
Control-PageDown would be entered as {CPGDN}. Likewise the Alt and Shift versions can be created by adding
an A or S to the command.
The following table lists the key codes available through Klinic. As mentioned above, adding a C, A or S to the
beginning of these codes causes the Control-ed, Alt-ed, and Shifted versions of these keys to be pressed. The codes
are not case-sensitive.
If you key in
Klinic "presses" this
If you key in
Klinic "presses" this
this locally...
key on the remote
this locally...
key on the remote
system.
system.
{F1}
F1
{F11}
F11
{F2}
F2
{F12}
F12
{F3}
F3
{PGUP}
PageUp
{F4}
F4
{PGDN}
PageDown
{F5}
F5
{HOME}
Home
{F6}
F6
{END}
End
I&M
{F7}
F7
{INS}
Insert
{F8}
F8
{DEL}
Delete
{F9}
F9
{BREAK}
Break
?
{F10}
F10
Sometimes the remote system appears to stop accepting keystrokes. This could be due to a high system load or a
noisy line. For the latter case, noise that looked like an opening brace character was received. To get around this,
press the closing brace character a few times until you see it echoed on the local screen. This terminates whatever
accidental extended key sequence was in progress. If the problem persists, try calling back into the system on
another line or at a lower baud rate.
31
Perfect Voice
Appendix
FILE TRANSFERS
The FTRANS.EXE program supplied with Perfect Voice enables the transfer of files between the local PC and
remote Perfect Voice system. These commands send and receive files using the XMODEM or ZMODEM file
transfer protocol. The first character of the command specifics if you are using Xmodem or Zmodem transfer
protocol. Following are the batch files that use the FTRANS.EXE program.
XSEND Initiate an XMODEM file transfer to send a file from the Perfect Voice system to the local PC.
XRCV ..Initiate an XMODEM file transfer to receive a file from the local PC to the Perfect Voice system.
ZSEND.Initiate a ZMODEM file transfer to send a file from the Perfect Voice system to the local PC.
ZRCV...Initiate a ZMODEM file transfer to receive a file from the local PC to the Perfect Voice system.
Alternately, instead of using the above batch jobs, you may use the following direct commands:
FTRANS /S filename ...... Initiate a ZMODEM file transfer to send a file from the Perfect Voice system to the local
PC.
FTRANS /R. ...... ...... ...... Initiate a ZMODEM file transfer to receive a file from the local PC to the Perfect Voice
system.
To transfer a file, run the appropriate program by keying in the command from the Perfect Voice system DOS
system prompt, supplying the name of the file to send/receive as the only command line argument. After keying in
the "X..." command on the Perfect Voice system, initiate the download/upload procedure in the communications
software on the local PC. Configure the download parameters on the local PC to use XMODEM file transfer
protocol.
DISCONNECT
I&M
To disconnect from the remote system, key in the BYE command from any DOS prompt on the remote system.
?
32
Perfect Voice
Appendix
REMOTE COMMUNICATION IN LINE CONNECTION
BASIC PREMISE
All Perfect Voice systems are shipped with a modem.
The modem requires use of a single line port on the phone system.
Previously either a dedicated single line port was required or someone would manually switch a port
from some other piece of equipment (eg; fax machine).
WHEN TO USE AN IN LINE REMOTE CONNECTION
A dedicated single line port is not available for the modem.
No equipment is available to share the single line port with the modem.
HOW TO IMPLEMENT (SOFTWARE SETTINGS)
Select RECEPTIONIST
Select INSTANCE SETUP
Go to Screen 2 of 4 and edit Force Modem Answer:
Screen 2 of 4
Force Modem
Enter the code to be dialed when attempting remote access (usually 995).
Answer
I&M
Select SYSTEM
Select CHANNEL
?
Highlight the Channel to share the modem line. Typically the first voicemail port is the remote port.
Go to Screen 1 and set Channel Usage to Rcpt+Remote. Only one channel may be set for
Rcpt+Remote
Screen 1
Channel Usage
Set to Rcpt+Remote. Only one channel may be set for Rcpt+Remote.
Select UTILITIES
Select REMOTE ACCESS
Go to Screen 1 and set Ring Wait Time to 4
Screen 1
Ring Wait Count Set to at least 4. This sets how many rings to wait before the modem answers.
Setting it to a higher number allows Receptionist time to answer the call before
the modem picks it up.
33
Perfect Voice
Appendix
HOW TO IMPLEMENT (HARDWARE CONNECTIONS)
You should use Channel 0 for remote support. A primary auto-attendant with a linear hunt group is
the best possible scenario for the in line modem.
Given the above condition:
Remove the line plugged into Channel 0 and plug it into the internal modem jack marked "LINE"
Run a line cord from the internal modem jack marked "PHONE" to Channel 0.
Incoming Extensions
COM1 COM2 MODEM
Ch0-Ch3
Ch4-Ch7
MAKING A REMOTE CONNECTION
I&M
Start a remote log in from your VT100 terminal emulation package.
When Channel 0 answers, dial the Force Modem Answer code: 995
You will hear the modem carrier, followed by a connection at the correct baud rate.
?
Enter password when prompted.
LIMITATIONS
During the entire remote session, calls will not be processed on the channel used for In Line support.
If there are problems with the channel used for In Line support, a technician will have to visit the site
to move the modem line to a dedicated port. This can defeat the purpose of remote support.
The TDD faxback feature may not be used in conjunction with In Line remote communications.
34
Perfect Voice
Appendix
APPENDIX 8: TERMINAL MODE PROGRAMMING
If the system does not have a monitor or keyboard, the SCREENS interface may be accessed through a local
connection or a remote connection.
SCREENS CONNECTION
The system is equipped with a serial port to act as the programming port when the SCREENS programming
interface is required. When the system is booted-up, the serial port will be configured for a modem connection at
9600bps/None/8/1. In order to connect a device such as a laptop or equivalent communication software with the
settings of 9600bps/None/8/1 is required with a null modem cable to serve as the link between the two machines.
A straight through cable with a null modem adapter can serve as a substitute if a null modem cable cannot be
obtained.
The serial port is a standard 9 pin male RS232 connection therefore requires the null modem cable to be a 9pin
female. The other end of the cable depends on the serial port of the programming terminal (most serial ports
equipped on personal computers are 9 pin males). If a custom cable is required or cross connections must be used
please refer to the following diagram for assembly instructions.
Null Modem Pinout DB9 to DB9 (female to female)
1
7 and 8
2
3
3
2
I&M
4
6
5
5
?
6
4
7
1
8
1
9
9
35
Perfect Voice
Appendix
For local or remote connection, the port should automatically initialize when you make the
connection. If the connection is not successful, first check all connections. Unplug and re-
plug the cable on the voice mail side if possible. If you need to manually initialize the port,
refer to the "Initialize the Port" section later in this appendix.
SCREENS LOCAL CONNECTION
Local programming and maintenance can be accomplished by connecting a laptop/PC to COM 1 of the voice mail
system. The basic materials required for the remote connection are a laptop/PC and a standard 9 to 9 null modem
cable.
Local Connection Diagram
Serial port with
Voice
communications
Null modem cable
Mail
software
(COM 1)
SCREENS REMOTE CONNECTION
Remote programming and maintenance can be accomplished by connecting an external modem to the serial port
and initializing the serial port. The basic materials required for the remote connection are an external modem with
a standard 25 to 9 pin serial cable, a reliable dial-in connection and telephone access to the voice mail.
I&M
Remote Connection Diagram
Internal or external
?
modem with
Voice
Serial cable
communications
Phone line
Mail
Modem
software
(COM 1)
36
Perfect Voice
Appendix
SCREENS ACCESS
Once a connection has been established to the system a password prompt will be displayed on the screen; at this
point the password "CALLHELP" should be entered. If the password prompt is not displayed then the serial port
initialization procedure should be repeated. See "Initialize the Port".
<--- K L I N I C --->
Password>
Upon successful entry of the password then system will default to the DOS prompt with the instructions "To enter
Advanced Menus type: SCREENS". Typing SCREENS will allow entry into the SCREENS programming interface
(for further details on the SCREENS interface please refer to the System Configuration section of this manual). If
DOS programming is required, proceed without typing SCREENS (please refer to the Advanced Administration
section of this manual for further details). See diagram below.
I&M
To enter Advanced Menus type: SCREENS.
C:\>
?
37
Perfect Voice
Appendix
INITIALIZE THE PORT
After the modem has been connected to the serial port and a reliable dial-in connection has been established the
port should automatically initialize. If it does not, you will need to initialize it. To initialize the port, call the
system. When the system answers, use the list below and dial the appropriate code, followed by the confirmation
code (the codes are the same). You will hear "Please wait.... beep..beep..beep" followed by the whattodo. The
port should now be initialized.
Connection
Modem connection
Confirmation
Code
Code
971
19200 bps local connection
971
972
Hayes 2400 bps modem connection
972
973
Hayes 2400 bps auto-detect modem connection
973
974
Hayes 9600 bps modem connection
974
975
Hayes 9600 bps auto-detect modem connection
975
976
Hayes 19200 bps modem connection
976
977*
Hayes 19200 bps auto-detect modem connection
977
978
-- Disable Klinic, start SMDI
978
979
-- Disable SMDI, restart Klinic
979
*Use connection code 977 for modems faster than 19200 bps.
I&M
?
38
Perfect Voice
Appendix
INSTALLING HYPERTERMINAL PRIVATE EDITION 4.0
Hyperterminal Private Edition 4.0 is available in the Technician's Tool Kit. Perform the following steps to install
Hyperterminal.
1. Turn on the computer and start Windows.
2. Insert the diskette into the appropriate disk drive.
3. Click the Start button and select Run. A dialog box appears. Click Browse.
4. From the appropriate disk drive, select Htpe4.exe and click Open.
5. The initial installation screen appears.
I&M
?
6. Select HyperTerminal Private Edition 4.0 and click Next. The next screen describes this edition.
39
Perfect Voice
Appendix
7. Click Next. The License Agreement screen is displayed.
I&M
8. Select I accept the terms of the license agreement and click Next. You will be asked if you personally own the
?
computer where HyperTerminal is being installed.
40
Perfect Voice
Appendix
9. Answer appropriately and click Next.
10. Specify where to install HyperTerminal Private Edition and click Next.
I&M
?
11. Click Proceed.
41
Perfect Voice
Appendix
12. Click Finish.
I&M
?
42
Perfect Voice
Appendix
SETTING UP HYPERTERMINAL PRIVATE EDITION 4.0
It is recommended that you create 2 template files:
1. For Remote Connections.
2. For Direct Connections.
The template file(s) will allow you to map the keys and modify properties one time. Then you may easily create
specific customer files by saving the template file under another name and editing the telephone number.
To start HyperTerminal:
Click the Windows Start button select Programs.
Select Accessories HyperTerminal.
Double-click the HyperTerminal icon.
I&M
?
CREATING A REMOTE CONNECTION TEMPLATE
1. Access HyperTerminal as described above. After
the "splash" screen, this screen appears.
2. Enter Remote Connection Template for the Name
and click OK.
43
Perfect Voice
Appendix
3. Enter a telephone number (no dashes) and click OK.
4. Click Modify.
I&M
5. On the Connect To tab, click Configure.
?
44
Perfect Voice
Appendix
6. Select the maximum speed your system will support and click
OK.
7. On the Settings tab, set Emulation to VT100 and click
OK.
I&M
?
8. Click
Cancel.
45
Perfect Voice
Appendix
9. Now you need to map the keys for the Remote Connection Template.
From the top-line menu, select View--Key Macros
Click New to map a new key.
In the Key field, you press <Insert> on your
keyboard, then press the key you wish to
map (for example press <Insert> <F1>).
Then in the Action box, enter the
appropriate action, specifying keys with
braces ({ }). For example, press <{> <F>
<1> <}> on the keyboard.
Below is a list of the keys you need to map. For more information on how key-mapping works, see "Working
I&M
Remotely" earlier in this appendix. When complete, click OK.
If you key in
Klinic "presses" this
If you key in
Klinic "presses" this
this locally...
key on the remote
this locally...
key on the remote
?
system.
system.
{F1}
F1
{F11}
F11
{F2}
F2
{F12}
F12
{F3}
F3
{PGUP}
PageUp
{F4}
F4
{PGDN}
PageDown
{F5}
F5
{HOME}
Home
{F6}
F6
{END}
End
{F7}
F7
{INS}
Insert
{F8}
F8
{DEL}
Delete
{F9}
F9
{BREAK}
Break
{F10}
F10
46
Perfect Voice
Appendix
10. When the keys are mapped you need to save
this session. From the top-line menu, select
File Save. The next time you access
HyperTerminal the new session will be
displayed.
CREATE NEW SESSION BASED ON THE REMOTE CONNECTION TEMPLATE
Now that you have created a template for remote connections, you can use the template to create new files. There
are two ways to do this. You may copy and paste the template to a new session or Save as the template to a new
session.
To copy:
I&M
From the HyperTerminal window (above), right-click the Remote Connection Template icon and select
Copy. Then right-click in the window and select Paste. A copy will appear in the window. You may rename
the copy (perhaps to a customer name) by right-clicking the copy and selecting Rename. Then you need to
open the new file and modify the telephone number. The key-mapping and other modifications will be copied
?
from the template.
To Save As:
Open the template file. From the top-line menu, select File-Save As. Save the file to a different name. Again,
edit the telephone number and save.
NOTE: To edit the telephone number, select File-Properties.
47
Perfect Voice
Appendix
CREATING THE DIRECT CONNECTION TEMPLATE
1. Access HyperTerminal. After the "splash" screen,
this screen appears.
2. Enter Direct Connection for the Name and click OK.
3. From the drop-down list, select the comport you will be
using and click OK.
I&M
?
48
Perfect Voice
Appendix
APPENDIX 9: RECORDING MAIN GREETINGS (UPGRADES FROM
RELEASE 4.2B OR EARLIER)
Perfect Voice is configured to play different greetings in day and night mode. These greetings are usually set up
during installation; however they may be re-recorded at any time. If you are upgrading from 4.2B or earlier,
Perfect Voice is configured with special User IDs 901-908 for recording greetings.
901 (daytime greeting) ..... ...... ...... This User exists solely to provide an easy and secured way of recording the
system's daytime greeting message. Because it is a type B User, callers are not
allowed to select this User.
902 (daytime whattodo) ... ...... ...... This User exists solely to provide an easy and secured way of recording the
system's daytime whattodo message. Because it is a type B User, callers are not
allowed to select this User.
903 (nighttime greeting) .. ...... ...... This User exists solely to provide an easy and secured way of recording the
system's nighttime greeting message. Because it is a type B User, callers are
not allowed to select this User.
904 (nighttime whattodo) ...... ...... This User exists solely to provide an easy and secured way of recording the
system's nighttime whattodo message. Because it is a type B User, callers are
not allowed to select this User.
905 (holiday greeting) ..... ...... ...... This User exists solely to provide an easy and secured way of recording the
system's greeting message for those days when the company is closed due to a
holiday. Because it is a type B User, callers are not allowed to select this User.
I&M
906 (holiday whattodo) ... ...... ...... This User exists solely to provide an easy and secured way of recording the
system's whattodo message for those days when the company is closed due to a
holiday. Because it is a type B User, callers are not allowed to select this User.
?
907 (emergency greeting). ...... ...... This User exists solely to provide an easy and secured way of recording over
the system's current greeting message. The change is immediate and remains
in effect until another emergency greeting is recorded or until the next
scheduled greeting change.
908 (emergency whattodo)
This User exists solely to provide an easy and secured way of recording over
the system's current whattodo message. The change is immediate and remains
in effect until another emergency whattodo is recorded or until the next
scheduled whattodo change.
49
Perfect Voice
Appendix
The steps for recording main greetings are listed below.
COMPOSE OPEN AND CLOSE SCRIPTS
The main greeting for both day and night mode is broken into two sections known as the `Greeting' and
`Whattodo'. The Greeting is only heard once during a call, followed immediately by the Whattodo (the Whattodo
is a list of options available to the caller). The Whattodo may be heard at several points throughout the call.
A typical greeting may be "Thank you for calling Atlanta Promotional Products...."
The Whattodo is a list of options available to the caller such as, "If you know the extension of the person you are
calling you may enter it at any time", " for a directory of individuals press 411", or " hold for assistance."
Compose the scripts for daytime and nighttime Greetings and Whattodos before recording. Use the Standard
Greeting Scripts worksheets found in Appendix 4 of the Installation section of this manual.
RECORD GREETINGS
Follow this procedure to record the daytime greeting.
Call the system (from within the building).
Enter the system access code ( the default is 999).*
Enter User ID 901.
Enter Password (the default is 9010).*
Enter 1 to listen to the current daytime greeting.
Enter 5 to record the daytime greeting.
Repeat these steps for the following User IDs
Daytime Whattodo User ID 902
Password 9020
Nighttime Greeting User ID 903
Password 9030
Nighttime Whattodo User ID 904
Password 9040
* System access code and Passwords may be changed for security purposes.
I&M
ADJUST VOLUME OF GREETINGS
Log in to SCREENS, Select Utilities, Select Task Manager
?
Perform Task 160 to "Adjust volume of daytime greeting"
Perform tasks to adjust volume for daytime whattodo (170), nighttime greeting (180), and nighttime
whattodo (190)
NOTE: Adjust the volume of greetings only one time.
ACTIVATE GREETINGS
Once the recordings are completed, they must be activated by placing the system into day and night mode.
Log into SCREENS, Select Utilities, Select Task Manager
Perform Task 100 or 110 to place the system into day or night mode, or
Call the system and dial 970
Follow directions and select open or closed mode.
50
Perfect Voice
Appendix
EMERGENCY GREETING AND WHATTODO (UPGRADES ONLY)
During bad weather or any other circumstance that forces a site to be closed without warning, you may record the
system greeting without having to actually be on-site. This is a very powerful feature and should be used with
caution. Unlike a normal system greeting, there may not be time to approve the greeting script (unless it is done in
advance). And unlike a normal system greeting, the change is immediate. The moment you finish the recording, it
goes into effect.
The emergency greeting is recorded as a personal greeting for a pre-defined User ID. Recording this User's
greeting replaces the standard system greeting. The pre-defined User IDs for emergency greeting and whattodo are
summarized below.
907 emergency greeting
908 emergency whattodo
SECURITY
By default, the password for an emergency User is the same as the User ID plus a zero (i.e. 907's password is
9070). Note that unwanted access to the system greeting could cause major problems. If necessary, change the
password for the emergency Users and keep that information secure.
COMPOSE SCRIPTS
Normally it is sufficient to re-record only the greeting. However, the mechanism to re-record the whattodo is also
provided. Take a few moments to compose the script before recording the file.
RECORD GREETINGS
Follow this procedure to record the daytime greeting.
Call the system.
Enter the system access code 999*.
Enter User ID 907.
I&M
Enter Password 9070*.
Enter 1 to listen to the current daytime greeting.
Enter 5 to record the daytime greeting.
?
Repeat these steps for the following User ID
Emergency Whattodo User ID 908
Password 9080*
* System access code and Passwords may be changed for security purposes.
TEST OPERATION
Call the system after completing the procedure and verify that the appropriate speech plays.
RETURN TO NORMAL OPERATION
The next time a normal system greeting change is scheduled to occur, the Emergency Greeting/Whattodo will be
erased and the normal Day/Night Greeting will start playing automatically. If you wish to continue with an
emergency greeting, you must re-record that greeting just after the time of the next scheduled normal greeting
change.
51
I&M
?
430 Woodruff Road
Suite 300
Greenville, SC USA
29607
1-(864) 297-4401
PVIM
www.teleco.com
Release 4.4
Revision 1.1
Document Outline
- Cover
- Introduction
- CONTENTS
- INTRODUCTION TO PERFECT VOICE
- Installation
- CONTENTS
- BEFORE YOU BEGIN
- PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
- INSTALLER REQUIREMENTS
- REQUIRED EQUIPMENT
- EQUIPMENT FOR REMOTE ACCESS
- COMPLETE THE PRE-INSTALLATION WORKSHEETS
- SITE PREPARATION
- INSTALLATION OF A NEW SYSTEM
- UNPACK AND INSPECT THE SYSTEM
- ASSEMBLE THE SYSTEM
- PERFORM QUICK SETUP
- TO ENTER QUICK SETUP:
- STEPS OF QUICK SETUP
- SOFTWARE UPGRADES/INSTALLATION ON EXISTING PLATFORM
- INTRODUCTION
- * VERIFY CURRENT RELEASE FOR UPGRADE
- PLATFORM ASSUMPTIONS
- BEFORE YOU BEGIN
- PRE-UPGRADE NOTES
- INFORM THE CUSTOMER OF THE SCHEDULE
- DIRECT CALLS AWAY FROM THE SYSTEM.
- BACK UP OF THE CURRENT SYSTEM
- LOAD THE SOFTWARE FROM THE PRODUCT DISKETTES
- LOAD PRODUCT UPDATES
- POST UPGRADE CHANGES
- PROGRAM THE TELEPHONE SYSTEM
- TRAINING
- FINAL CUTOVER
- TELECO TECHNICAL SUPPORT
- System Configuration
- CONTENTS
- SCREENS INTERFACE
- ACCESSING SCREENS
- SCREENS MENU BASICS
- MAIN MENU OPTIONS
- RECEPTIONIST MENU OPTIONS
- BROWSE SCREEN BASICS
- BROWSE SCREEN FUNCTION KEYS
- VIEW MODE BASICS
- EDIT MODE BASICS
- POP-UP MENUS
- ADD MODE BASICS
- COPY MODE BASICS
- RECEPTIONIST
- USER DIRECTORY
- INSTANCE SETUP
- MESSAGE INFORMATION
- NETWORK SITES
- LIST MANAGEMENT
- PARAMETERS
- ACTIVITY INFORMATION
- NOTIFY
- NOTIFICATION
- CLASS OF SERVICE
- SCHEDULES
- PARAMETERS
- AUDIO
- MONITOR
- AUDIOCHANNEL SUMMARY DISPLAY
- AUDIOCHANNEL SINGLE CHANNEL TRACE
- CALLER SIMULATION MODE
- AUDIOBOARD
- SPEECH EDIT
- BOARD TEST
- SYSTEM
- CHANNELS
- TELEPHONE SYSTEM
- IMPORTING AND EXPORTING TELEPHONE SYSTEMS
- INTEGRATION
- FIELD DESCRIPTIONS (IBS INTEGRATION)
- FIELD DESCRIPTIONS (SMDI INTEGRATION)
- SERIAL SERVICES
- FAX SERVICES
- OUTBOUND CALLING
- HARDWARE KEY
- UTILITIES
- TASK MANAGER
- SCHEDULER
- REMOTE ACCESS
- TERMINAL ACCESS
- SET PASSWORD
- DATE TIME
- TEXT FILE EDIT
- TEXT FILE BROWSE
- QUICK!
- Optional Applications
- ENABLING AMIS NETWORKING
- DESIGN THE NETWORK
- CHANNEL SETUP
- TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP
- BUILDING THE NETWORK SITE DATABASE
- EDIT EACH SITE ACCORDING TO YOUR NETWORK DESIGN WORKSHEET.
- RECORDING SITE NAMES
- EXPORT THE NETWORK SITE DATABASE AND SITE NAME RECORDINGS
- IMPORT
- PROGRAMMING OTHER SITES
- EDIT ACCESS CODES
- ENABLE AMIS FEATURES ON PER USER BASIS
- ADD A NEW SITE
- PREFERRED METHOD: ADD THE SITE TO EACH LOCATION
- EDIT THE NEW SITE
- ALTERNATIVE METHOD: UPDATE ONE SITE AND COPY TO OTHER SITES
- SENDING AN AMIS NETWORK MESSAGE
- TROUBLESHOOTING AMIS
- AMIS NETWORK SITES WORKSHEET (FOR PRIMARY SITE)
- FAX-ON-DEMAND
- CALLER AND FAX MACHINE INTERFACE
- SAME CALL DELIVERY
- CALLBACK DELIVERY
- FAX COPROCESSOR BOARD LIMITATIONS
- INSTALLING THE FAX COPROCESSOR BOARD ON AN EXISTING SYSTEM
- SET UP FAX-ON-DEMAND USER ID
- CONVERTING FILE FORMATS
- UPLOADING THE FAX FROM A FAX MACHINE OR DISKETTE
- RECORDING THE NAME FILE
- FAX MAIL
- ENABLE FAX MAIL ON A PER USER BASIS
- SENDING FAX MESSAGES
- SENDING A FAX MAIL MESSAGE USING THE DIRECT FAX MESSAGE CODE
- SENDING A FAX MAIL MESSAGE USING THE ALIAS FAX ID
- RETRIEVING FAX MESSAGES
- CALL ACCOUNTING SETUP AND ADMINISTRATION
- HOW DOES PERFECT VOICE WORK WITH CALL ACCOUNTING?
- SET UP THE PERFECT VOICE SERIAL PORT
- SET UP AUTOMATIC DELETION OF OLD CALL DATA
- SET UP CALL ACCOUNTING TRANSFER METHOD ON PERFECT VOICE SYSTEM
- L. A. P. LOCAL AREA PAGING
- COMPLETE THE LICENSING AGREEMENT
- INSTALL THE PAGING TRANSMITTER
- HOW TO IMPLEMENT L. A. P. ON A TELECO UST 1280 PHONE SYSTEM
- SET UP COM PORT FOR L. A. P.
- SET UP TELEPHONE SYSTEM PARAMETERS FOR L. A. P.
- SET UP USERS FOR L. A. P.
- ENABLE L. A. P. ON A PER USER BASIS
- SET UP ALTERNATE ID
- ASSIGN PHANTOM DN TO THE USERS EXTENSION
- TROUBLESHOOTING L. A. P.
- IMPLEMENTING TDD
- WHAT IS TDD?
- OVERVIEW
- NEW INSTALLATION: SYSTEM LEVEL SET UP System level programming is performed one time. System level
- DESIGNING A TDD SOLUTION
- CALL ROUTING CONSIDERATIONS
- TDD USER SETUP: NEW INSTALLATION
- UPGRADING TO TDD
- SYSTEM LEVEL SET UP: UPGRADES
- TDD LANGUAGE INSTANCE SETUP: UPGRADES
- TDD USER SETUP: UPGRADES
- HOW TDD FAXBACK WORKS
- SET UP NOTIFICATION CLASS OF SERVICE 600: TDD TO FAX MACHINE FOR TDD MESSAGE
- ADD NOTIFICATION EVENT RECORD FOR EACH TDD USER
- TDD FAXBACK LIMITATIONS
- TDD TEXT FILE CONSIDERATIONS
- IMPLEMENTATION NOTES
- ADDITIONAL TDD UTILITIES
- TELECO CALLER ID
- CREATING AUDIOFORMS APPLICATIONS
- System Administration
- CONTENTS
- INTRODUCTION TO ADMINISTRATION
- DUTIES OF A SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR
- COMMON USER TYPES
- PRE-DEFINED USERS
- CHANGE A USER'S PASSWORD
- LIMITING USER OPTIONS
- DESIGNATING ADMINISTRATIVE AUTHORITY
- CREATE AN ALTERNATE LISTING FOR DIRECTORY ASSISTANCE
- ADD PAGER NOTIFICATION FOR A USER
- DISTRIBUTION LISTS
- RECORDING SYSTEM GREETINGS AND WHATTODOS
- EMERGENCY GREETING AND WHATTODO
- AUDIOTEXT MESSAGES
- ADDING OR CHANGING SCHEDULER QUEUE EVENTS
- HOLIDAY OPERATION
- ADMINISTERING THE NIGHTTIME DEFAULT MAILBOX
- HOSPITALITY SETUP AND ADMINISTRATION
- MESSAGE STORAGE SPACE
- CREATING REPORTS FROM TASK MANAGER
- CREATING SINGLE DIGIT MENU OPTIONS
- SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION VIA THE TELEPHONE
- CHANGE SYSTEM TIME OR DATE
- Advanced Administration
- SYSTEM STARTUP FILES
- CONFIG.SYS (VP4E)
- CONFIG.SYS (RHETOREX)
- AUTOEXEC.BAT FOR VP4E AUDIOBOARD
- AUTOEXEC.BAT FOR RHETOREX AUDIOBOARD
- CREATE A BATCH FILE
- DOS COMMAND LINE UTILITIES
- BATCH FILE DESCRIPTIONS
- BACKING UP THE SYSTEM
- CREATING ON HOLD MESSAGES
- ELIMINATING TALK-OFF PROBLEMS
- ELIMINATING DTMF DETECTION PROBLEMS
- ELIMINATING PHANTOM CALLS TO THE DEFAULT USER
- USING AUTOMATIC VOLUME CONTROL
- GENERATING SHORT TERM DIAGNOSTIC TRACE
- GENERATING LONG TERM DIAGNOSTIC TRACE
- DTMF AND PULSE SPEECH FILES
- USER FILE NAMING CONVENTIONS
- MULTILINGUAL SETUP
- SOLVING NOTIFICATION PROBLEMS
- CALL TRANSFER AND FORWARDING PROBLEMS
- Appendix
- Back Cover